EECOMMES"DATIO]SrS.
The publishers, in issuing a new and enlarged edition of this work, would
remark that they are gratified to know, as stated in the translator's adver-
tisement, that it has been adopted as a text-book in many of the highest in-
stitutions of learning in this country and Great Britain, and would express
their hearty thanks to the press, and to several distinguished philologists,
from whom they have received commendatory notices of the book. The fol-
lowing, among numerous recommendations of the work, and statements in
respect to the Syriac language, are respectfully submitted to the public, hoping
that other seminaries, and especially theological schools, may be induced to
form classes for the study of a language which was essentially the vernacular
tongue of our Saviour, and which has furnished the earliest and best version
of the Sacred Writings ever made :
From the North American Review.
" To one already versed in the Hebrew, the character presents the only
(and that not a serious) obstacle to the study of the Syriac. The anomalies
of the former, as compared with Occidental languages, almost all reappear in
the latter, and the two have hardly a less close mutual kindred than the Ger-
man and the Low Dutch. The book before us contains not only a complete ap-
paratus for the study of the Syriac, but a method which would entirely super-
sede the need of an instructor. We have never seen materials of the kind
so skillfully arranged, or so large an amount of help in the acquisition of a
language brought within so brief a space. The Chrestomathy is composed
of extracts from the Peshito, followed by a minute verbal analysis ; and these
extracts are sufficiently varied to furnish specimens of every variety of style
to be found in the entire version."
From the New-Englander.
"The chief fault of the original is the obscurity of its statements. Too
much matter is heaped together in single sentences, which are of course long,
complicated, and abounding in parentheses, abbreviations, and departures
from the natural order of thought to all but Germans. Mr. Hutchinson, more
judicious, has faithfully given us all the matter of his author, without copy-
mg his faults. Many of the long sentences of the original he has broken into
two, three, or more, by differently arranging the matter of them, and then
separately clothing each thought in perspicuous English. . . . We hail the
appearance of this meritorious work, as supplying a real desideratum to
American and English students."
From the Methodist Quarterly Review.
" According to the testimony of the most competent teachers and schol-
ars, * Uhlemann's Grammar of the Syriac Language ' is the best extant. Mr.
Hutchinson has not only translated it well, but has added a course of exer-
cises in Syriac grammar, with a Chrestomathy, and brief lexicon. With the
aid of this book any one tolerably versed in Hebrew can acquire Syriac wilh
great rapidity."
1
RECOMMENDATIONS.
From the Bibliotheca Sacra.
" We have here a complete, and we had almost said perfect, apparatus for
the study of the ancient Syriac. It would be difficult to find a better gram-
mar of any language than Uhlemann's of the Syriac ; it is here accurately
and clearly translated, and the addition by the translator of a good Chres-
tomathy, and lexicon and exercises, leaves the learner nothing to desire, so
far as the rudiments of the language are concerned. Let him go carefully
through with the study of this neat and compact volume, and he can begin
to read with ease the Syriac translations of the Bible, and derive from them
all the necessary illustrations of the text. Every theological student who
purchases this work, and thoroughly studies it, will find that he has made a
most profitable investment, both of his money and his time."
Ffom J. G. Palfrey, D. D., formerly of the Theological School connected with
Harvard University.
" The Syriac version, curious in the highest degree from its antiquity, is
also, I presume, the best version of the evangelical writings that exists in any
language. There is a peculiar interest in reading the discourses of the
Saviour in a dialect closely resembling that in which they were originally
dictated. And, to a person with a fair knowledge of the Hebrew language,
the Syriac is a very easy acquisition. I hope that the Grammar may come
into extensive use among Biblical students."
From the late B. B. Edwards, D. D., formerly Professor in the Theological
Seminary at Andover.
" I have been much pleased with ' Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar.' It is
the best for purposes of instruction of any with which I am acquainted."
From C. E. Stowe, D. D., Professor in the Theological Seminary at Andover.
" It is highly desirable that all theological students should make them-
selves acquainted with the Syriac tongue ; for it is not only (next to the
Chaldee, perhaps) the eldest sister of the Hebrew, and the sacred dialect of
that interesting people, the Nestorians, but it gives us the very best trans-
lation of the Bible (especially of the New Testament) that has ever been
made in any language."
From T. J. Conant, D.D., late Professor in Rochester Theological Seminary.
" The excellence of ' Uhlemann's Syriac Grammar,' as the best manual for
school use, is universally acknowledged. The exercises added by the Ameri-
can translator furnish such abundant facilities for the grammatical study of
the language, that a knowledge of it may be readily acquired, by one who is
acquainted with the structure of the Hebrew, without the aid of a teacher.
The volume contains also Syriac reading-lessons, and a lexicon, making the
apparatus for the elementary study of the language complete, without the
purchase of any other book."
From Professor D. T. Smith, of Bangor Theological Institution.
" I have been acquainted with the Grammar for many years, and I regard
it as better adapted for translation in this country than any other Grammar
that I know of. ... I am much pleased with the translation, . . . and it
strikes me that the Chrestoniathy appended must be a most welcome addition
to those who are entering upon the study of the Syriac."
SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
A COURSE OF EXERCISES, A CHRESTOMATHY, AID A BRIEF
LEXICOI^.
7 ' , 'I -^i.ttOJ^'
UHLEMANl^'S
SYRIAC GRAMMAR
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN,
By ENOCH HUTCHINSON
WITH A COURSE OV
EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR, A CHRESTOMATHY,
AND BRIEF LEXICON,
PREPARED BY THE TRANSLATOR.
SECOND edition; WITH ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 549 & 551 BROADWAY
1875.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855,
By E. HUTCHINSON,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District
of New York.
.pr^ ^^Nu.oA^\^LT-
TRANSLATOR'S ADVERTISEMENT
TO THE SECOND EDITION.
The first American edition of this work having be-
come exhausted, and considerable orders for more copies
received by the publishers, it becomes necessary to supply
the demand. It is a source of gratification that the work
has been adopted as a text-book, to an encouraging ex-
tent, in theological seminaries, universities, and other
institutions of learning in this country and Great Britain,
and has been instrumental, we trust, in arousing more
interest than has heretofore existed in the study of Ori-
ental philology.
In 1858, an abridgment of Hoffman's excellent " Syr-
iac Grammar," prepared by B. H. Cowper, was pub-
lished in English dress, in London. The author seems
to have ably performed his task, though we have not had
time to thoroughly examine the book. "We should rather
see the translation of the entire work, or a more extended
abridgment of it. However, it will, no doubt, prove to
be a valuable contribution to Syriac literature in our own
language.
.^ FT
040S
11 TEANSLATOR'S ADVERTISEMENT TO SECOND EDITION.
Uhlemanii, in his second edition, lias made extensive
additions and some corrections. The translator, in pre-
paring this second American edition, has carefully com-
pared the two German editions, and inserted at the end
of the volume a translation of all the important additions
made by the German author, with explanations (vide p.
371), showing where they belong in the body of the work.
It should be remarked that the German author has added
a large number of examples, especially in the Syntax^
and, where they have seemed to the translator to be
more numerous than was absolutely necessary to illus-
trate the principle stated, he has omitted some of them,
in order to avoid swelling the volume too much. In
those cases where Uhlemann has merely changed the
phraseology of sentences, expressing them with more
perspicuity than in the previous edition, the translator has
made no change. He has corrected many typographi-
cal errors found in the second German edition, as well
as some found in the first American edition, and trusts
that the work, thus improved, may, in a still greater
degree than heretofore, subserve the interests of Semitic
philology.
The translator is happy to express his obligations for
the valuable assistance which he has received from the
Astor Library (an institution established by the Astor
family, and filled with a rare and extensive collection
of books in almost every department of science).
E. HUTCHINSON.
New York City, Jvlyy 1874.
EXTRACTS FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE
TO THE SECOND EDITION
" In the revision of a manual like this, whose first ap-
pearance has had a favorable reception, whose usefulness,
for a series of years, has established it as a standard work
for academical instruction and private study, I thought it
better to retain essentially the order and arrangement of
the first edition, so far as its simple, gradual unfolding
seemed to be really adapted to aid the learner by mak-
ing his task lighter than it otherwise would have been.
Hence, on account of the extensive use of the original
work (first edition), in reading the Syriac language, I
came to the conclusion that some parts, though imperfect
to a small extent, had better not be changed, and that
other parts might with propriety be enlarged ; therefore,
I felt it to be my duty to insert the improvements and
additions which appear in the new edition. In accord-
ance with this plan, additions are made to section 5, and
the attentive reader will perceive where similar improve-
ments and additions are introduced into the sections upon
Etymology. The Syntax has been somewhat extensively
IV EXTEACT FEOM THE GERMAN AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
enlarged by sucli additions as seemed adapted to the scope
and design of the work. For this purpose the elaborate
works of Agrell (' Supplementa Syntaxeos Syriaca,' Gry
phiswaldiae, 1834 ; ' Appendicula ad Supplementa sua Syn-
taxeos Syriacse,' ibid., 1836, and ' Appendicula posterior,'
1838), which extend over the writings of the Oriental
scholars Asseman and Barhebrseus, have often been con-
sulted, while the careful study of the classical Ephrem,
and the 'Acta Martyrum Orientalium,' by Maruthas,
have furnished such important contributions appropriate
to this Grammar, that the new edition could not well
be longer delayed. So, also, it seemed proper in a manual
like this to present a brief view of the grounds of Syriac
metre, which I have compressed into section 88. I felt
myself particularly called upon to do so from the fact that
the poetic part of the annexed Chrestomathy has been
favorably received," *
^ The remaining portions of the Preface relate to the author's Chrestom-
athy, which is not inserted in this work. [Tr.
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION.
The following translation was undertaken in accordance with
the suggestion of several literary friends, and in view of an
increasing desire among American students to become acquainted
with a language in which the earliest and best version of the New
Testament is generally admitted to have been made, and which
is essentially the language spoken by our Saviour.
Uhlemann's Grammar is acknowledged by all to be a manual
of rare excellence ; and it is hoped that, in an English dress, it
will be found tx) be well adapted to promote the progress of ori-
ental philology in this country. Some of our helps of this kind,
in the study of the Syriac, are too brief, and others are too volu-
minous. Uhlemann has aimed to present, within moderate lim-
its, a work sufficiently extensive for ordinary purposes of instruc-
tion. The translator has endeavored to give as Rteral a transla-
tion a,s is compatible with perspicuity. He has added, where it
seemed to be necessary, occasional explanatory notes. After
having prepared an abridgment of the paradigms of verbs and
nouns, following Winer's arrangement in his Chaldee Grammar,
he, on the whole, concluded to insert the full paradigms as they
stand in the original work, and not to make the attempt to im
prove a grammar so nearly faultless.
Vi TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE.
The translation is followed by a course of Exercises in Syriac
grammar, which, if carefully studied, will, it is believed, mate-
rially facilitate the progress of the learner in an accurate know-
ledge of the elements of the language. After having read, with
care, the introduction, and cursorily examined other parts of the
grammar, the pupil may, at once, commence upon the Exercises,
and merely consult the grammar (as directed in the introductory
remarks to the Exercises) as a book of reference, in order to
enable him to solve the difficulties with which he may meet in
analyzing the first page of the Chrestomathy. The translator
trusts that he shall not be considered as obtrusive in calling
special attention to a method of analysis which he has found to
be of great advantage in teaching classes in Hebrew. Some in-
structors have probably adopted a similar onCj and others may
have devised still better methods. This is submitted to the con-
sideration of those teachers who have not already adopted a
satisfactory one.
A brief Chrestomathy and Lexicon, prepared by the transla-
tor, follow the Exercises. The former is composed of selections
from that beautiful edition of the Peshito Bible published by the
British and Foreign Bible Society in London, in 1816, and
reprinted in smaller type in 1826. It was executed for the use
of the Syrian Christians in India. It was corrected for the press,
as far as the Acts of the Apostles, by Dr. Buchanan, and com-
pleted by Rev. S. Lee, Professor of Arabic in the University of
Cambridge. Several manuscripts were consulted, and the text
is considered as very correct, though we have discovered in it
some typographical errors.
In the Exercises, an extended analysis will be found of the first
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. YU
page of the Chrestpmathy, and merely brief explanatory remarks
on the remaining pages.
The basis of the Lexicon is that inserted by Uhlemann in his
grammar, to which the translator has made many additions, having
consulted the Syriac Lexicons of M. Trost, E. Castell, ^Egidius
Gutbier, and ^milius Rodiger. The Lexicon is intended merely
to include those words which occur in the Chrestomathy.
Some errors, in the author's numerous references to the Old
and New Testaments, have been discovered and corrected.
There are, probably, others which were not observed.
The translator trusts that this effort will be received with
indulgence by the literary public. Errors will doubtless be
found by teachers who may use the Manual, and he will be very
thankful to receive suggestions from any quarter, by which a
future edition, should it ever be called for, may be improved.
The publication of the work has been unexpectedly delayed,
most of the stereotype plates, when nearly completed, having been
destroyed by a disastrous fire.
The translator avails himself of this opportunity to express his
obligations to Mr. W. W. Turner, late of the Union Thelogical
Seminary of this city, T. J. Con ant, D. D., of Rochester Univer-
sity, and J. G. Palfrey, D. D., formerly of the Theological School
connected with Harvard University, for valuable suggestions;
also to Mr. A. H. Guernsey, of this city, for important aid in
the examination of the manuscript before going to press.
New yoRK, Jan. 1855.
EXTRACTS FROM PREFACE TO FIRST GERMAN EDITION.
The earlier sheets of this Text book, designed, principally,
for academical instruction, had been printed, and that part of
the Manuscript which contains the elementary principles and
paradigms had been for a considerable time out of my hands,
when the more comprehensive work of Professor Hoffmann
made its appearance. In the preparation of this work my
plan had especially led me to present, with as much brevity
as was consistent with clearness, what is most essential for
understanding the language in its grammatical forms. 1
was of the opinion that the more extended treatment of
separate phenomena of the language might be dispensed
with, since the greater portion of the Syriac forms may be
explained from those of the Hebrew language ; and in fact,
a knowledge of the Hebrew implies an acquaintance with
the principles of the Syriac. Upon a close examination of the
above-mentioned work, I was convinced, that I had proceeded
upon almost the same principles, had made a similar use
of the older grammarians, such as Amira, Ludov. de Dieu,
Buxtorf, Michaelis, and others, and had deviated only in the
collocation of separate rules. Although I might have approxi-
mated more nearly to the work of Hoffmann, by isolated
alterations, yet I deemed it advisable, where deviations
existed, to follow my own views ; as for example, in the ta-
bular arrangement of derivative nouns. Following the older
grammarians, I have introduced a separate paradigm of the
nouns placed under Declension HI.,* instead of classing them
with the Segholate forms ; this was done because the vowel
entering into the inflection of these nouns is not an original
one, as in the case of the Segholate forms, but is introduced
un account of the difiiculty of pronunciation. Real Segholate
* g 48, Decl. III.
forms, monosyllabic nouns, namely, those derived from verbs
3 rad. Olaph quiescent, belong rather, according to their
principal inflection, to the substantive-stems of Declension Y.,
and, in only a few instances, coincide with the Segholate
forms. In preparing the Syntax, I have, like Professor Hoff-
mann, followed the Lehrgebdude of Gesenius ; and like him,
alsOy I have made use only of those passages of the Old Tes-
tament collected by Gesenius, in which the translator, unfet-
tered by the Hebrew text, seems to have wrought more in
accordance with the genius of his own language. In addition
to this, I have frequently consulted the translation of the
Xew Testament, as the oldest Syriac writing known to us ;*
Ephraemi Opera Syr., Romae, 1743, tom. III., fol. ; Barhebrsei
Chronicon Syr., ed. Kirsch. Lips. 1789 ; and Assemani Bib-
liotheca Orient. Clementino-Yaticana, Eomge, 1719, tom. HI.,
fol. ; so that a close and impartial examination will easily
determine what has been added from my own not inconsider-
able collections, f -^ -J*- * * * -^e-
Berlin, March, 1829.
* In point of time the Feshito version of the Old Testament is the most ancient
document extant in the Syriac iiinguage, though the New Testament was trans-
lated into Syriac from the original Greek about the same time. Michaelis su]^-
poses, that the Syriac version of both Testaments was made near the close of the
first, or in the early part of the second century. Tr.
t The remainder of the Author's Preface relates mainly to his Reading Lv.'ssons,
which we have not inserted, they being, in our opinion, too difficult for beg-baers.
Tr.
CONTENTS
PACT
I.VTRODucTiON. Brief Historical Yiew of the Syriac Lang'.i%'e
and Literature 17
PART FIRST.
ELEMENTS OF THE liAIVGUAGE.
CHAPTER I.
WKITTEN CHARACTERS AND THEIR USE.
1. Consonants 28
2. Yowels in general (Yowel Letters and Yowel Signs) . , 30
3. Yowel Signs . . . . . . . . .30
4. Diacritical Points which supply the place of Yowels . . 31
g 5. Kushoi and Rukok 32
6. Ribui 33
I 7. Mehagyono and Marhetono 34
8. Linea Occultans ?6
I 9. Tone . 3r)
^10. Marks of Punctuation i^6
CHAPTER n.
PECUI.IARITIES AND CHANGES OF LETTERS,
? 11. General Yiew , . . ?>
1 12. Changes of the Consonants . . . . , . , 3(>
2
jii CONTENTS.
13. Quiescent Letters ,39
g 14. Yowel Letters which are not sounded (Otiant) ... 40
g 15. Changes in the Towels 41
PART SECOND.
ETYMOLOGF, OR PARTS OF liPEECII.
CHAPTER L
PRONOUNS.
I (J. Personal and Possessive Pronouns 44
Table of Pronouns and Suffixes 4.5
3 17. Uther Pronouns 48
CHAPTER IL
THE VERB.
g 18. General View 49
I. Regular Verbs.
^19. The Inflection of Regular Yerbs in General ... 50
L Table of Personal Inflection 52
II. Table of the Temporal Inflection of Regular Yerbs . . 53
A. Personal Inflections 54
B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods 55
^ 20. A. The Ground-form Peal its formation and signification . 5G
B. Derivative Conjugations.
21. Ethpeel 58
I 22. Pael and Ethpaal . 59
^ 23. Aphel and Ethtaphal 60
24 Shaphel and Eshtaphal 61
g 25. Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Yerbs 2
26. Yerbs with Gutturals 63
II. Irregular Verbs.
4 27. General Yiew 63
Table of Irresrular Yerbs ... ... 65
CONTENTS.
A. QuiesceiU Verbs.
I 28. Verbs 1 Rad. Olapli Quiescent .
29. Yerbs 1 Rad. Yud Quiescent
I 30. Yerbs Med. Olapli Quiescent
I 31. Yerbs Med. Rad. Yau and Yud Quiescent .
g 32. Yerbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent .
B. Defective Verbs.
I 33. Yerbs 1 Rad. Nun
I 34. Yerbs Med. Rad. doubled ....
35. Doubly Irregular and Defective Yerbs
Paradigms of the Regular and Irregular Yerbs
36. Regular Yerb witli Suffixes
Table of the Same
1 37. Suffixes to Yerbs 3 Rad. Olaph Quiescent .
Table of the Same
2 38. Auxiliary or Substantive Yerbs .
xm
PAGH
C7
G8
70
70
72
75
r5
7G
SO
37
102
103
108
110
g39.
HO.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
3 47.
CHAPTER III.
THE NOUN.
Derivation of Nouns . . . . , . . .111
Nouns derived from Yerbs 112
Tabular Yiew of Nouns derived from Regular and Irregular
Yerbs 113
Denominative Nouns 122
Composite and Exotic Nouns 123
Gender of Nouns 124
Number of Nouns 126
Different Relations (states) of the Noun . . . .129
Table of the Same 132
Nouns with Suffixes 136
Declension of Nouns in general .... .139
XIV CONTENTS.
PACK
g 48. Exhibition of Xouds according to Declension . . . 139
g 49. Anomalous Nouns 145
Paradigms of Nouns with Suffixes 148
g 50. Adjectives and Numerals . 150
CHAPTER lY.
PARTICLES.
g 51. Adverbs 152
52. Prepositions .153
Table of Prepositions with Suffixes . . . .155
53. Conjunctions and Interjections 156
PART THIRD,
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER I.
THE PHONOUN.
g 54. Use of Separable Personal Pronouns and Suffixes
A. Separable Personal Pronouns
B. Suffixes
g 55. Pleonastic use of Pronouns
A. Separable Personal Pronouns
B. Suffixes
General Remarks on Personal Pronouns
5G. Use of the Relative Pronoun
57. Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns
g 58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms
A. Reflexive Pronouns
B. Other Pronouns
15:
157
159
160
ICO
161
163
164
166
166
166
167
CONTENTS. XV
I'AOX
CHAPTER II.
THE VERB.
1 59. General View . . . . . . . . . 172
60. Use of the Preterit . .172
61. Use of the Future 175
62. Use of the Imperative 178
63. Use of the Infinitive 179
A. Infinitive Absohite 179
B. Infinitive with >i or the Construct form . . . 180
64. Use of the Participle 182
65. General Yiew of the Manner of Designating all the different
Moods and Tenses, and particularly the Imperfect, Pluper-
fect, and Optative 1S8
66. The Persons of the Yerb 190
67. Construction of Yerbs with the different Cases and with
Prepositions 193
I. Yerbs with the Accusative 193
IT. Yerbs with Prepositions 196
III. Passive Yerbs and their Construction . . . .201
Mode of expressing Greek Composites .... 203
g 68. The Substantive Yerb and some other peculiarities chiefly-
relating to the Construction of Yerbs in General . 204
A. Useof"|oai A-a] and Ail 204
B. Indirect Discourse 205
C. Ellipsis Zeugma Paronomasia and Puns . . .206
CHAPTER III.
THE NOUN.
I 69. Use of the Noun in General ' . 207
70. Gender of Nouns 210
? 71. Number of the Noun 212
XVI
CONTENTS
^2.
74.
75.
76.
I 77.
78.
79.
^80.
Apposition and Duplication of No-irs
The Emphatic State
The Construct State and the Genitive
Designation and Use of the other Cases
The Case Absolute .
Comparison of Adjectives
A. The Comparative .
B. The Superlative .
Construction of Numerals
A. Cardinal Numbers
B. Ordinal Numbers .
C. Other Eelations of Numbers
Union of the Noun with Adjectives
Union of the Noun with the Verb
A. In Respect to Number .
B. In respect to Gender
C. In respect to both Gender and Number
D. Construction of Sentences in which there
or more than one Subject .
Peculiarities relating to Nouns .
A. Ellipsis of the Noun
B. Zeugma and Ilendiadys
The rendering of Composite Greek Nouns
Compound
PAGE
212
214
215
218
220
222
222
223
224
224
224
22G
227
229
229
232
234
234
237
237
238
23S
CHAPTER lY.
PARTICLES.
1 82. Construction and Union of Adverbs 240
83. Use of the Particles of interrogation, affirmation and negation 242
04. Prepositions 244
2 85. Conjunctions 240
I 86. Interjections . . .240
Peculiarities in respect to the Position of Words . . . 2.)U
CONTENTS. xvii
PART IV.
Exercises 253
Ohrestomathy 313
Lexicon 841
Corrections and Additions ....... 369
IISITEODUOTION,
BRIKF HISTORICAL VIEW
OF THE
^YKIAC LANGUAGE A:^D LITERATUEE.
1. The Syriac language (sometimes called the Western
Aramaean, to distinguish it from the Chaldeean or Eastern
Aramaean, with which it constitutes the Aramaean dialect of
the Semitic family of languages), formerly extended over the
whole northern part of Aram, from the borders of Palestine
to E'atolia, and from the Mediterranean to and beyond the
Euphrates.* It degenerated at an early period, and, during
the continual changes of government, particularly by the re-
ception of Persian and Greek words, lost much of its original
purity. Of its pure state, no written monuments have come
down to our times. But at the beginning of the fourth cen-
tury after Christ, the language enjoyed a flourishing period,
and kept its place for a long time at Edessa as a written lan-
guage. As from the earliest period the Palmyrene dialect
was recognized as the principal one, so this period has been
designated by the name of the Edessene Period. Moreover,
at various times, mention is made of the Damascene, the
Chalnic or Ctesiphontic, the Acharic or N"esibene, and the
Maronite dialects. The essential difference between these con-
sisted very likely in the pronunciation ; this may be asserted
with still more confidence in respect to the JS'abataean
dialect. The ancient written language of Antioch or Com-
magene is still used by various Christian sects, in particular
* E. Rodiger says of the Aramaean language: "It was called Syriac in the
form in which it appeared in the Christian Aramaean literature, and Chaldee
kvhen it appeared in the Jewish Aramaean writings." See Gesenius' Heb.
Gramm , 15th edit, by RoJiger, Leipz. 18-18 ; Eiuleitung, 1. 2. b. Tr.
18 IXTKODCCTIOX.
by the Mai'onites, Kestorians, and Thomas-Christians of India,
JI.-5 their ecclesiastical language. So also the Zabians, or so-
called St. John's Disciples, are said to make use of it, in
their religious ceremonies. But as the language, as early as
the eighth and ninth centuries, was greatly corrupted by the
frequent use of the Arabic, and was driven by the Arabs
from the cities in the tenth and eleventh, and from the
villages in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, it may be
safely assumed that it is no longer in use as a vernacular Ian
guage. Although several modern travelers of note, as
Kiebuhr and Brown, maintain that it is still spoken in some
parts of Mesopotamia, about Raka, Edessa, and Damascus, as
well as upon Lebanon, they are opposed by Ferrieres
Sauvebceuf and Yolney, wliile Chateaubriand, Seetzen,
Clarke, Joliffe, and Buckingham pass the matter over in
silence; and Burckhardt only remarks, that the Maronites
in the convent of Kashia use the Syriac, at the present day,
as we do the Latin.'-^
Rem. The LXX, even, use Syria, (2u^ta, 2vpoj, Su^itfTt) in ..he
wider sense, for the Old Testament &^5)5 (^'] comp. the "Apifxoi
in Horn. II. ii. 783 ; Hesiod Theog. 304 ; Strabo Geog. i. 2, xi. 14 ;
Stephanus Bjzant. under "Apijxa, and Bochart Geogr. S. ii. 5, 6 ) ; and
the Greek and Roman Authors often confound Syria with Assyria (comp.
Diod. Sic. ii. 13; Herodot. vii. 63; Strabo xvi. 2 ; Xenoph. Cyrop.
vii. 5, 31 ; Lucian de Dea Syr. 1 ; Oppian, Kuvrj/ III. 402 ; Horat.
Od. II. 11, 16; HI. 4, 32. Justin, i. 2; Aramian Marcell. xxiii. 6.
The Arabs call it f^^t, as it lay at the left, when their faces were
turned towards the east (comp. Abulfeda Tab. Syr. p. 5 ; Assemani
Bibl. Orient. T. III. P. ii. p. 782.) In the earhest times this country
was divided into several small nations, ruled by kings (comp. Jahn Bibl.
Archaol. Thl. i. Bd. i. p. 51 seq.; Mannert Geogr. Bd. vi. p. 1 seq.;
Vater Commentar iiber den Pentat. Bd. I. p. 152 ; Winer Bibl. Real-
worterbuch, Bd. i. p. 51 seq.); of these, subsequently to the time of
David, Zobah and Damascus are mentioned in the Scriptures, as the
most powerful ; David conquered them both (2 Sam. viii. 3 sq.; x. 6 ;
1 Chron. xix, [xviii ] 3, 4. sq ), and Solomon kept possession of them
* Since Uhlemann prepared his grammar, it has been ascertained that the Nes-
torians use the Syriac language at the present day. Mr. Layard, in liis admirable
work on the ruins of Nineveh, says of the Nestorians (or Chaldaians as he incor
rectly denominates them) : " Most of their church books are written in Syriac,
which, like the l^tin in tlie "West, became the sacred language in the greater part
of the East." See Layard's Nineveh, chap. viii. Missionaries who are laboring
among the Nestorians, bear testimony to the same fact. Ta.
INTRODUCTION 19
until Reson Ben-Eliada, who had been ^enersil of the king of Zoba
(1 Kings xi. 23 sq.), re-established at Damascus a government inde-
pendent of that of the Hebrews. Subsequently the Syrians were incor-
porated with the monarchies of the Assyrians (^38 b. c), the Persians
(539 B. c), and the Macedonians (331 b. c). Though after the death
of Alexander the Great, they arose again for a time under the Seleucida3
(301 B. c), yet they again lost their independence by means of Pora-
pey (64 b. c), and their kings reigned only at Edessa, till the third
century after Christ, when this kingdom came also under the Roman
sway. At the division of the Empire, mider Theodosius (395), Syria fell
to the Byzantine Empire, after Jovianus had (a. d. 363) already surren-
dered Nesibis* to Sapores II, king of Persia. Afterwards it was taken
possession of by the Arabs (636), and was subjected (660) to the
Ommiades and several other Arabic royal famiUes, whose dytiasties
were, in 1086, brought to a close by the Seljooks.f At the time of the
Crusades, the Christians could maintain themselves there against the
Seljooks but a short time (1097 and subsequently) ; and in lltl, Sala-
din wrested the country from them. In 1369, Syria became a prey to
the marauding inroads of the Mongols under Timur ; and it has now,
for three centuries, sighed under the Turkish yoke(cf. Gatterer, Hand-
buch der Universalhist, Bd. I. p. 248 sq. ; Beck, Weltgeschichte, Bd.
I. p. 213 sq. ; Heeren, Ideen iiber die Politik, u. s. w. Thl. I. p.
213 sq. ; Riihs, Handbuch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 152,
sq,). The transition into broadness of pronunciation ('TrXaruo'TOfj.ov)
seems not to have extended much beyond the time of the Babylonish
captivity ; and the Palmyrene Dialect, which is known to us by some
inscriptions found among the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and decipher-
ed by Barthelemy and Swinton, may have grown up soon after Solo-
mon, the founder of that city. In the Edessene Period, during which
flourished Ephraem (died 318), Jacob Yon Sarug, Isaac the Syrian,
and Xenaias of Mabug, all of whom Jacob of Edessa, at the middle of
the seventh centuiy, recognizes as classical writers, theological learning
was zealously cultivated (cf. Assem. T. III. P. II. p. 994). The Maronites
on the Orontes and upon Lebanon, originally disciples and followers
of St. Maro (cf. Assem. I. 496 sq. ; Pfeififer, in his Auszuge, p. 166 sq. ;
Gieseler, Lehrbuch der Kirchengeschichte, Bd. I. p. 6T5 ; Riihs, Hand-
buch der Geschichte des Mittelalters, p. 37) approximate to the an-
cient Syriac dialect ; still more closely do the Nestorians (cf. Assem. T.
III. P. II. p. 379), and the Thomas-Christians of India, who diifer from
the Xestorians only in name and place of residence (cf. Assem. a. a. 0. pp.
413, 435. sq. ; Pfeiffer, pp. 285, 484 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. pp. 417, 638),
all of whom make use of it only as an ecclesiastical language ; the two
former speaking Arabic in common life, and the latter, the language
* A celebrated city and military post inMesopotamia, generally written Nisibis.TR,
+ Called, also, Seljiiks, Seljouks, or Seljoukian Turks. Tk.
20 INTRODUCTION.
of Malabar. Dififerent from this is the dialect of the so-called Johannes-
Christians, Mandaeans, or Zabians (who are not to be confounded with
a Mohammedan sect of the same name, in Maraccii Goran. Sur. II. p. 33
sq. ; Assem. T. III. P. II. pp. 509-515 ; Pfeiffer, p.510 sq.; cf. Gieseler, Bd.
I. p. 66 ; Neander, Allgemeine Geschichte der christlichen. Religion und
Kirche, Bd. I. Abth. II. p. 427), whose religious books are written in
a corrupted Syriac, and which appears, from the numerous Ghebric
expressions which occur in them, to have been drawn up in the Persian
Irak. By the Nabatoean, according to Barhebrseus (in Assem. T. I. p.
476) is to be understood the former language of the Syrian country-
people. On the question, whether the Syrian is still a vernacular
language, compare Niebuhr, Reisebeschr. von Arabien, Bd. II. p. 352 ;
Brown, Biblioth. der neuesten Reisebeschr. Thl. I. p. 489 ; Ferrieres
Sauveteoeuf, Memoires historiques, etc., T, II. p. 169 ; Yolney, Voyage
en Syrie, etc., T. I. p. 331 ; and Burckhardt, Travels in Syria, etc., pp.
22, 186.
2. Syriac literature, which extends over almost all branches
of knowledge, and in a special manner over the department of
Theology, and possesses valuable works upon Oriental and Eccle-
siastical History, flourished principally in the period between the
fourth and tenth centuries of the Christian era. The language
itself, which gave proof of its versatility of expression by the
translations of Aristotle and other Greek authors, and by its
accurate representation of mathematical subjects, had found, at
an earlier period, in its own country, zealous cultivators in the
departments of Grammar and Lexicography.
As the most ancient grammarians, whose works have been lost,
history records the names of Achudemen (died 575), Joseph Hu-
zita(died 580), Jacob of Edessa(died698),who labored to restore
the purity of the ancient language, Jesudenah (at the beginning
of the eighth century), John Stylita (about 830), John, son of Cha-
mis. Bishop of Themanum (850), and Honain, the physician (died
876). The first accurate grammar, however, was written by John
Bar Zugbi, a Nestorian monk, at the beginning of the thirteenth
century ; about which time, also, Joseph Bar Malcon seems to
have composed his Rete Pundorum^ and Barhebrseus (died 1286)
to have made known his grammatical works. At the beginning
of the sixteenth century, the study of the Syriac language was
transplanted to Europe. Theseus Ambrosius learned the Syriac
language from Syrians at Rome, in 1514, and became, in 1529,
teacher to Albert Widmansiadt, who subsequently pursued
the study under Simeon, Bishop of the Syrians upon Lebanon.
Through the labors of these men, and of Moses von Merdin, whom
INTRODUCTION. 21
Ignatius, Patriarch of Antioch, had sent, in 1552, to Julius III.
at Rome, and whose instructions were enjoyed by Andreas Dumas
(Masius), the publication of the New Testament was effected in
1555. At the close of the sixteenth century, the grammatical
study of the Syriac language was much promoted at Rome itself,
by the Maronites Amira and Abraham Ecchellensis, whose
copious grammatical works had already been preceded by the
attempts of Theseus Ambrosius,Widmanstadt, Tremellius, Dumas,
and Waser. They were followed, about the middle of the seven-
teenth century, by Isaac Sciadrensis and Joshua Accurensis.
From this period onwards, the Syriac language has been gram-
matically pursued in Germany; partly independently of other
languages, most copiously by the two Michaelises and Hoffmann ;
partly in connection with the Chaldee, as by Ludov. de Dieu and
Jahn ; or with the other Semitic languages, as by Buxtorf, Hot-
tinger, Schaaf, Vater, and others.
The earliest attempts at Syriac lexicography were also made
in the ninth and tenth centuries, in Syria, by Honain Isa or
Joshua of Maruz, and Gabriel, the son of Bochtiesu. More im-
portant, however, are the contemporary works of Isa Bar-Ali
(about 885), of Ananiesu Bar-Saru (about 900), and the most
serviceable Avork of this kind by Abulhasan, Isa Bar-Bahlul (about
963,) which is still extant. The lexicons of Dumas, de la Boderie,
Schindler, Crines, Buxtorf, Trost, Hottinger, Gutbir, Nicolai,
Schaaf, and Zanolini, which have appeared smce the sixteenth
century, are confined to the New Testament, with which the
Syriac literature in 1555 made its appearance in Europe. Fer-
rarius, and Edm. Castell, on the other hand, availed themselves
of the above-mentioned Syriac works relating to the same subject,
and John David Michaelis enriched the labors of the latter by
valuable remarks and additions. The valuable work of Lorsbach,
who compared all the Syriac works which had then been printed,
besides a number of manuscripts, and collected the words and
significations wanting in Syriac lexicons, still remains uncom-
pleted. More recently, copious works have been promised by
Bernstein and Quatremere, philologists of great merit in the
department of Oriental literature. Glossaries are contained in
the Chrestomathies of Michaelis, Kirsch, Tychsen', Grimm, Hahn,
and Sieffert.
Rem. Eusebius (Hist. Eccl. I. 13) cites the letter of Abgarus to
Jesus, and the answer to it, as among the most ancient Syriac writings
(cf Assem. I. 554 ; III. P. II. p. 8 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 74) ; and.
22 IXTRODUCTION.
in like manner, John is said to have written his Gospel in the Syriac
language. But the most ancient Syriac work of undoubted authenti-
city, is perhaps the translation of the New Testament,* which musi
have existed as early as the second century (cf. Hug, Einleitung
in die Schriften des N. T., Thl. I. p. 348 ; Gieseler, Bd. I. p. 123).
That the Syrians considered their language to be richer than the Ara-
bic is attested by Asseman (III. P. I. p. 326 sq.) ; and its capacity for
rendering Greek authors may be judged from Barhebrseus (Chron. p.
231. ed. Bruns), compared with Aristotle (Top. I. cap. 4). Abulphara-
gius, in his Historia Dynast., ed. Pocock, p. 147, mentions Theophilus
of Edessa as the author of a successful translation of two books of the
Iliad (cf. Assem. I. p. 521). In addition to the larger work of
Asseman (Assemani Bibliotheca Orien talis Clementino-Yaticana,
Romaj, 1729, ) 3 vols, fol., and the abridgment of it by Pfeiflfer, Erlangen,
1776, we possess a brief history of Syriac literature by Hoffmann, in
Bertholdt's kritischem Journal der neuesten theologischen Literatur,
Thl. XIV., pp. 225-291.
I. Gil AM MA US.
Thesd Amhrosii, Introductio in Chald. linguam, Syriacam, etc., Papise,
1539.
Aug. Caninii, Institutiones linguae Syriacag, Parisiis, 1554.
Widmanstadii, Syriacae linguae prima eltmenta, Yiennae, 1555, 4to. ed.
II. Antwerp, 1572.
loh. Merceri, Tabulae in grammaticen linguae Chald., quag et Syriaca
dicitur, Paris. 1560. 4to. Eiusd. grammatica Chald. et Syr. Yite-
bergae, 1579, 8vo.
Imman. Tremdlii, Grammatica Chald. et Syr. Genevae, 1569, 4to. Ap-
pended also to his edition of the New Testament.
Andr. Masii, Grammatica linguaB Syriacae (im Tom. YI. der Antweqi.
Polygl.) 1573, fol.
Casp. Waseri, Institutio linguae Syr^e ex optimis quibusque apud Syros
scriptoribus collecta. Lugd. Bat. 1594. 4to. Ed. II. Leidae, 1619,
4 to.
Georg. Amirce, Grammatica Syr. sive Chald. etc. Romae, 1596, 4to.
Chrisioph. Cri'Msii, Gymnasium Syr. h. e. linguae lesu Christo verna-
culae perfecta institutio, etc. Yitebergae, 1611.
lo. Buxlorfii, Grammaticae Chald. et Syr. libri III. Basil. 1615. Ed.
II. 1650, 8vo.
* Hug, in his Introduction to the New Testament, says that the Translation of the
New Testament was appended to that of the Old Testament, and that both weni
uicluded under the same name, Pcshito. Tk.
INTRODUCTION. 23
[o. Casjp. Myriad, Grammatica Syro-Chaldaea. Genev. 1619, 4to.
Herm. Nicolai, Idea linguarr. Aramsearum per comparationem etc^
Copenh. 162t, 8vo.
Ahrah. Ecchellensis, Linguae Syr. s. Chald. perbrevis institutio. Romae,
1628, 16mo.
Ludov. de Dieu, Grammatica linguarr. orientt. Hebraeorum, Chald. et
Syr, inter se coUaturum Lugd. Bat. 1628, ex recens. Clodii. Francof,
ad M. 1683, 4to.
Isaac Sdadrensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 1636, 8vo.
loh. Michad. Dilherri, Rudimenta grammaticae Syr. Halis, 163t. Ed.
XL, 1646, 12rao.
Tosephi Acurensis, Grammatica linguae Syr. Romae, 164*7, 8vo.
lo. Ernst. Gerhardi, ixiaypoup/a, linguae Syro-Chald. Hal. Sax. 1649.
Andr. Senrwrti, Ebraimus, Chaldaismus, Syriasmus, Arabismus nee non
Rabbinismus, etc. Yiteb. 1666* 4to. Eiusd. Chaldaismus et Syrias-
mus, etc., 1666.
loh. Henr. Hottingeri, Grammatica Chald. Syr. et Rabbinica Turic.
1652, 8vo. Eiusd. Grammatica quatuor linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr.
et Arab, harmonica Turici, 1659, 4to (the Syriac also printed
separately).
Briani Waltoni, Introductio ad lectionem linguarr. orientt. Hebr.
Chald. Samarit. Syr. Arab. Pers. Armen. Copt. Loud. 1653, 12mo.
lo.Leusdeni, Scholae Syriacae lib. III. etc. Ultraiect. 1658, 8vo.
Giiil. Beveridgii, Grammatica Syr. tribus libris tradita. Lond. 1658,
8vo.
Edm. Castelli, Brevis et harmonica quantum fieri potuit grammaticae
linguarr. Hebr. Chald. Syr. ^thiop. Arab, et Pers. delineatio.
Lond. 1669 (preceding his Lex. Heptagl.)
Dav. Grafunderi, Grammatica Syriaca cum Syntaxi, etc. Yiteb. 1665.
lo. Nicolai, Grammatica linguarr. Ebf. Chald. Syr. Arab. Jj]thiop.
Pers.orientalium secundum prima prasceptadelineata harmonica. lenae,
1670. 4to. Ed. IL Critica Sacra Francof. et Hamb. 1686.
lo. AlHngi, Synopsis institutionum Chald. et Syr. Francof. ad M. 1616.
Ed. Yl. a Georg. Othone adornata, 1701, 8vo.
Christ. Cellarii, Porta Syriaca. Cizae, 1677, 8 vo. Eiusd. Porta Syriae
patentior, etc., 1682.
Henr. Opitii, Syriasmus facilitati et integritati suae restitutus, etc. Lips.
et Francof. 1678. 4 to. in compendium redactus a Chnst. Ludovicl
Yiteb. 1669, 4to.
Car. Schafii, Opus Aramaeum complectens grammaticam Chaldaico-
Syriacam, Lugd. Bat. 1686, 8vo.
lo. Aug. Danzii, Aditus Syriae reclusus, etc. lenae, 1689. Ed. HI.
1715, 8vo.
In. Ern. Gerhardi, Harmonia linguae Chald. Syr. et JEthiop. lenae,
1693. 4to,
24 INTRODUCTION.
Herm, von der Hardt Syriacae linguae fundamenta. Helmst. 1694.
8vo. (Only Paradigms.)
Ge. Othonis Palaestra linguarr. orientt. Chald. Syr. Arab, -^th Pers
etc. Francof. 1702. 4to.
lo. Phil. Hartmanni Hebraicae, Chald. Syr. et Samarit. linguarum
institutio harmonica. Francof. ad M. 1*707. 4to.
Sam. Frid. Bucheri Thesaurus orientalis s. compendiosa et facilis
methodus linguarr. orientt. etc. Francof. et Lips. 1725. 4to.
Christ. JBened. Michaelis Syriasmus i. e. grammatica Hnguae Svr.
Halis, 1741. 4 to.
lo. David Michaelis Grammatica Syr. Halis, 1784. 4to.
/. G. Kals Grammatica Hebraeo-harmonica cum Arab, et Aram.
Amstelod. 1758. 8vo.
lac, Ge. Christ. Adleri Brevis linguae Syr. institutio etc. Altonte,
1784.
W. Hezel, Syrische Sprachlehre. Lemgo, 1788. 4to.
loh. Gottfr. Hasse Practlsches Handbuch der Araraiiischen o.ler
Syrisch-Chaldaisch-Samaritanischen Sprache. lena, 1791 ^ Svo.
Innoc. Fessleri Institutiones hnguarr. orientt. Hebr. Chald. Syr. et
Arab. Vratisl. Halis et lenae, 1787 et 1789.
01. Gerh. Tychseni Elementale Syr. Rostochi, 1793. 8vo. (Ap-
pended to his Chrestomathy.)
lo. lahn. Aramaische oder Chaldaische und Syrische Sprachlehre
fiir Anfanger. Wien 1793. 8vo. neu herausgegeben von Oberleit-
ner Elementa Aramaicae s. Chaldaeo-Syriacae linguae etc. Viennae,
1820. Svo.
loh. Sev. Vater Handbuch der Hebr. Syr. Chald. und Arab. Gram-
matik. Leipzig, 1802 u. 1817. Svo.
Thomas Yeates'' Syriac Grammar, principally adapted to the New
Testament in that Language. Lond. 1819. Svo.
Hampus Tullherg Elementale Syr. P. I. et IL Lond. 1824. Svo.
Paul Fwald Lehrbuch der syr. Sprache. Erlangen, 1826. Svo.
Andr. Theoph. Hoffmanni Grammaticie Syriacae hbri III. Hil.-e,
1827. 4to.
II. LEXICONS.
Andr. Masii Syrorum peculium. Antwerp, 1521. folio
Fahr. Boderiani Dictionarium Syro-Chald. Antw. 1572. (i'om. VI.
of the Antw. Polygl.)
Val. Schindleri Lexicon pentagl. Hanovioo, 1612. 1649. Lond.
1635 Francof. 1653. 1695. fol.
Christoph. Crinesii Lexicon Syriacum. Viteb. 1612. 4to.
loh. Bapt. Ferrarii Nomenclator Syriacus. Romae, 1622. 4to.
loh. Buxtorfii iun. Lexicon Chald. et Syr. Basil. 1622. 4to.
Martini Trostii Lexicon Syr. etc. Cothenis Anhalt. 1623. 4to.
SYRIAC ClIRKSTOMATIIIES. 25
Thomas a Novaria Nomenclator Syr. Roma2, 1636. 8vo.
Andr. Sennerti Lexici Chald. et Syr. compendium. Viteb. 1666. 4to.
loh. Henr. Hottingeri Etymologicum orientt. s. Lexicon harmonicum
heptagl. etc. Francof. 1661. Turici, 1664. 4to.
Dav. Grafunderi Compendium Lexici, Syr. (Appended to his Syriac
Grammar.)
Aegid. Gutbirii Lexicon Syr. Hamb. 1667. 8vo. (Appended to his
New Testament.)
Jdm. Castelli Lexicon heptagl. Lond. 1669. From this has been
specially edited the Syriac, by J. D. Michaelis, under the title,
Edmundi Castelli Lexicon Syr. Gotting. 1788. Tom. 11. 4to.
lo. Ft. Nkolai Hodogeticum orientale harmonicum etc. lenae,
1670. 4to.
Christoph. Cellarii Glossarium Syro-Latinum. Cizae, 1683. 4to.
Car. Schajii Lexicon Syr. concordantiale. Lugd. Bat. 1708. (Ap-
pended to the New Testament )
xiut. Zanolini Lexicon Syriacum. Patav. 1742. 8vo. (Appended
to the New Testament.)
HL CHEESTOJVLiTHIES.
loh. Dav. Michaelis Syrische Chrestomathie Thl. 1. Gottingen,
1768. 8vo. Die II. Ausg. 1783. mit einem Glossar. u. Anm.
vervollstandigt unter dem Titel : loh. Dav. Michaelis Chrestoma-
thia Syr. Ed. III. glossario adnotationibusque instructa a /. Ch.
Dcepke. 1829.
/. C. G. Adleri Chrestomathia Syr. Hafn, 1784.
loh. Gottfr. Hasse Lectiones Syro-Arabioo-Samaritano-^thiopicae
Regiom. et Lipsiae, 1788. 8vo.
Georg. Guil. Kirschii Chrestomathia Syr. Hofae, 1789. 8yo. (Newly
edited by Bernstein.)
Glai Gerh. Tychsen Elementale Syriacum etc. Rostochi, 1793. Svo.
Henr. Ad. Grimm Neue Syrische Chrestomathie mit einem Glossarium
u. 8. w. Lemgo, 1795. 8vo.
Gust. Knoes Chrestomathia Syr. maximam pai'tem e Codd. MSS.
collecta. Gotting. 1807. Svo.
Aug. Hahn et Sieffert Chrestomathia Syr. s. S. Ephraemi carmina
seleeta. Lips, 1825. Svo. (With a Lex. Syr.)
a
SYRIAC GRAMMAR
PART FIRST.
ELEMENTS OP THE LANGUAGE
TABLE OF CONSONANTS.
i
p
i' umi.
c
3
5
?
?
3
NAME.
1
1
1
1
SOUND.
1
1
Olaph
,W\K
1
^! ^
1
Spiritus lenis
1
2
Beth
Zuo
O
r^
.n
CI
B, Bh, V.
2
3
4
Gomal
Dolath
?
r
r
>
D,Dh(<Amthis).
3
4
5
He
loj
CTi
01
CTI
Ol
H.
5
6
Vau
olo
Q
Q
W or V.
6
1
Zain
r
^l
1
V
\
1
Z, ?Gr,cFr.
T
8
Cheth
A^
j^
Mh
kAK
%A*
Ch, or Hh.'
8
9
Teth
A4
4
4
4
4
T.
9
10
Jud
iol
a
^
iJL
^
Y.
10
11
12
Coph
Lomad
1
a
1
>
^
K, Ch.
L.
20
30
13
Mim
^S
5:D
So
Ul
^
M.
40
14
15
Nun
Semcatb.
, "H
J
CO
1
m
N.
S.
50
60
16
Ee
]i
L
L
\i
Vi
2? Hebrew.
70
17
Phe
\
Si
Si.
^
^
P, Pb, F.
80
18
19
Tsode
Koph
.2100
S
n
^
^
Ts.
K guttural,Q.
90
100
20
Rish
^?
J
r
r
>
R.
200
21
Shin
M
A
..A .
..
Sh.
300
22 Thau
o2
I
A A Z Th. T. Greek.'
400
2S CONSONANTS.
CHAPTER I.
Weitten Characters anb their Use.
1. Consonants.
The Syriac, or West Aramsean Language, lias an alphabet
(3onsisting, like that of the Hebrew and Chaldee, of twentj-
two consonants. In common with the Arabic, it connects
together the several letters of a word by horizontal lines
at the bottom ; from which arises a fourfold form, though
essentially the same, according as a letter is initial, medial,
or final, or is connected or unconnected with the preceding
letter, as exhibited in the table on the preceding page.
Rem. 1. The character exhibited in the preceding alphabet, is
called Feshito, i. e. the simple. It is employed by the Maronites and
Jacobites, and is said to have been invented by Jacob of Edessa in
the seventh century. Besides this, Amira mentions the Estrangelo^
not from c'^po/'^uXoj, round, (see Asseman Biblioth, Orient. T. IH.
P. 11. p. 378.) which, according to M'cbaelis Gram. Syr., p. 15,
means the Gospel character (scriptura evangelii). It was the basis
of the Nestorian smaller character, to wnich the so-called double
alphabet, used for inscriptions and titles of books, bears a strong
resemblance. There is also the Palmyrene alphabet, found in inscrip-
tions on the ruins of Palmyra or Tadmor, and the Mandcean or
Nahatcean alphabet. The latter, in consequence of the amalgamation
of the gutturals f with 1 , and Ol with ^ , consists of only twenty con-
sonants. It is written in a continuous line, with four different forms of
each letter, viz., the simple consonant, and the consonant with the
vowels a, ^, or u.
Rem. 2. The letters I, p 01, Q, ]., ^, J, A, connect only
with the preceding letter. After one of these letters, therefore, J , # ,
J , 2 , stand unconnected ; and also, with the exception of ^ , always
at the beginning of a word. The final letters are ^ , ^ , -^ , . , VX .
y before ^ is written S^ ; and after it U or }^ . Double L , at the end
of a word takes the form of m. The letter G, in words adopted from
CONSONANTS. 29
Other languages, is written \^ . Several consonants, where they ter-
minate a word, are slightly inflected upward ; e.g. S, wD, *a, etc.
Rem. 3. The gutturals express the several gradations of guttural
sounds from the weakest to the strongest, f and 01 may be compared
with the Spiritus lenis and Spiritus asper of the Greek language
( 12. 5. b). Deeper guttural sounds are .j.* ( = the German ch )
and ^ which the Greeks express, sometimes by the Spiritus asper,
and sometimes by /. The sound of JD is formed in the fore-part of
the mouth ; that of vO farther back towards the throat. %* = "^J
sometimes stands for g at the end of Greek words, and is pronounced,
according to Amira, p. 9, sc before e and i. The aspirated conson-
ants A2iS,.||jQ are, in some MSS., marked as such with a red
point placed over them ; the removal of the aspiration is indicated
by the same sign beneath them ( 5).
Rem. 4. The division of consonants, with reference to the
organs of speech, is the same as in Hebrew. But the gutturals
^ImOiI occasion less difficulty than in Hebrew, as the Sheva and
Daghesh forte are vi^ an ting in Syriac. Of the gutturals, in connection
with a. and Q, it is to be remarked ; a) that | between two vowels has
the sound of y ; e.g. Vo|o Jco-yem ; h) that O quiesces in and
(= and w), and after and (= a and e), forms the dipthongs
au and eu ; c) that initial a with == z, and even when | is pre-
fixed, it is pronounced i ; e. g. |>00U| Ihudlio ; d) that initial 1
17 IS
; e. g. JGIL ehadh.
Rem. 5. The letters of the Alphabet suffice for designating the
numerals as far as 400 (Vid. Table of Consonants, Amira, p.l2. sq).
In compound numbers, the larger stand first ; e. g. p^oZ 441. From
500 900, the tens of 50 90 are denoted by a dot over the letter ;
e.g. vCD 600, *2) 800. Thousands are designated by placed under
the units, ten thousand by ~^, ten thousand thousand by 7\ The
numbers 20 and 50 are also expressed by double yD and ^, Uiv
final letters falling away where units are added. Fractional numbers
are designated by a small line drawn obliquely downward, from left
to right, over the letter which expresses the denominator of tho
fraction ; e.g. iD =^, . . == s ^C"
80 VOWEL LETTERS AND VOWEL SIGNS.
2. Vowels in General {Vowel Letters and Vowd Signs).
InSyriac, the vowel-letters |, o, and a originally served to
designate the vowels, and, at the time of Mohammed, the
Syrians were acquainted with only three vowel-signs, which
sufficed for their language, and which the Arabs appear to
have borrowed from them. Afterwards the Monophysites
sought to express the Greek vowels, and increased their
number to seven (v. Asseman T. I. pp. 477, 478 ; Gesenius
Lehrgeb. p. 84), and since the time of Theophilus of Edessa,
in the eighth century, the Greek vowels appear to have been
in common use. The Nestorians, on the other hand, make
use of diacritical points (Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 878).
The Monophysites or Maronites commonly use them only in
doubtful cases.
Rem. Even in the last century, the Maronite Gabriel Heva era-
ployed the vowel-letters to designate the vowels, making *\ = a,
f == 0, I = c, wi = i, and O = u (v. Michael is. p. 29).
3. Voivel Signs.
The Syrians denote the vowels by diacritical points, or by
characters formed from and in imitation of the Greek vowels,
the latter mode being that now generally used. In ancient
manuscripts both modes occur together.
FORM.
NAME.
SOUND.
Syriac. Greek.
7
7
Pethocho
(]1*'A2)) a.
It
or or
Revotzo
(r^i)3.
I
or
Chevotzo
(V^^) i-
or
Zekofo
(laoi) 0.
, Q Q Q
Etzotzo
(lii^) "
DIACRITICAL POINTS WHICH SUPPLY THE PLACE OF VOWELS. 81
Rem. 1. The names are derived from the form of the organ used in
pronouncing the vowel. The Greek forms from which they are derived
are easily recognized. also occurs without Q = w in vJD and
Vy.^VD (For lA^^fiD, Luke xvii, 29, stands more correctly |A^;.OD
Psalm xi. 6). The first three vowel-signs may also be written beneath
the consonants.
Rem. 2. As*to pronunciation, seems to have denoted a and ae^
though was sometimes sounded by the Nestorians like a (V.
Asseman T. III. P. II. p. 379). In foreign words it quiesces in Q.
In are contained both the German 6 and u.
Rem. 3. As to quantity it may be assumed with some certainty
that is always long, and always short ; according to others,
P 9^ 7
with ^, and with Q are long ; is short, except in foreign words.
7 P
Amira, on the other hand, maintains that = a, = o, and the
others, even with Q, are common. Some grammarians also denote
the quantity of the vowels by diflferent signs, thus ;
Revotzo.
/r
;- Ciievotzo.
O "O O Etzotzo.
Rem. 4. The dipthongs are formed with Q and ^. With Vau ; a)
r
with preceding at the beginning or middle of a word, au ; e. g.
(Zq5^ ; b) with .* preceding, oi nearly ( the German eu ) ; e. g.
wiOIOaA*! ; c ) in the middle of a word, after -i, lu ; e. g.
- I 7 *.
jiOlQuj^QJ; c?) Vau doubled, the first with ^ ou (according
to Amira u). With Yud (besides the combinations b and c above);
a) with a preceding , ai ; e. g. p-^; b) with m the
middle and at the end of a word, oi ; e. g. (AAiOpO.
4. Diacritical Points which, siijpply the ptace of Vowels.
These were employed earlier than were the vowels, and
82 KUSHOI AND RUKOK.
were used even after the invention of the vowels, by the
Nestorians. The point which designates the suffix 3 sing,
fern, cn seems to have originated from that system.
^ 7
Rem. According to Amira p. 51, 001=001; while 001=001;
jO1=wa01 ; *aOl=u01 . Ludov. de Dieu has treated this subject
more definitely in his Grammar, p. 35 seq. ; according to him the
point when above the consonant denotes a, o, and w, under it e, un-
der -a and I i, .and under Q u. The principal use of this point in
the verb, is to denote the diflferent persons and tenses (v. Amira,
p. 51 ; Lud. de Dieu, p. 37). Throughout the preterite, with the
exception of the 1 sing., it stands under the radicals. In the parti-
ciple, it denotes, over the first radical, in Peal, _!., in Aphel, _i., or
in Verbs med. Vau, _f_. In the imperative and infinitive it may be
omitted or written underneath. The future takes it onlv under the
radicals, not under the preformatives, with the exception of the 1
sing., where it stands above it (comp. Isenbiehl, Beobachtungen
von dem Gebrauche des Syrischen Puncti diacritic! bei den Verbis,
Gottingen, 1773).
5. Kuslioi and Rukoh (wfc-QO yl^oi)*
1. According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the Syrians
have in fact the Sheva, and pronounce a vowelless consonant
with a short half-sound of e ; e.g. ^QOJ pronounced ^ hum.
Some Grammarians, as Amira, p. 42, and the Zabians, use J!L*
So too, according to Asseman, the doubling of consonants in
pronunciation (Daghesh forte) occurs among the Oriental
Syrians, and, according to the analogy of the Hebrew, in Pael
andEthpaalofVerbs^andMl** But as the doubly written
consonant falls away where analogy would require it to be
retained ( 8), this grammatical usage is still very doubtful.
This duplication is retained only in foreign words.
2. Analogous withDaghesh lene is Kushoi^{i.G. hardening),
a red point inserted over the aspirates, in manuscripts, which
removes the aspiration. The retention of the aspiration is
indicated by a point placed underneath, called Rukok (i. c.
softeninfr).
* It should be borne in mind that Sheva and Daghesh are not, in
Syriac, denoted by any written characters, and appear only in pronunciation.
Tr.
EIBUI. 33
Rem. Some consider Kusboi to be Daghesh forte, which is
denied by Amira and Gabriel Sionita. Lud. de Dieu, p. 25 sq., places
it; a) at the beginning of words, except where ^0^2 precede, or where
the preceding word ends in - , O , | , in wllich case Rukok is
retained; e.g. f, iViNZ, fp.fci2^A^; 6) in the middle, after a
quiescent letter ; e. g. 01 '^.\V) ; c) after dipthongs ; e. g. Aa-^ ; (ZqId,
with the exception of ^ | as. Rukok, on the contrary, occurs, besides
the cases noted under a above ; a) when one of the aspirates ends a
syllable, but is in the same case hardened by a preceding vacant
consonant ; e. g. ^V^M ; b) when, according to Hebrew analogy, they
follow a movable Sheva ; e. g. |A3)QO ; c) after an open syllable ; e. g.
Hij. So too these consonants are not pronounced as aspirates in Pa.
and Ethpa. of Verbs ^, when the J preceding them has fallen away ;
e. g. . qXoZ from ^^ij ; and in verbs with the middle radical doubled,
where, in Hebrew, Daghesh forte stands. Furthermore, here belong
the letters in which one having fallen away before them, is to be com-
pensated for, in the future and infinitive of verbs *.^2), or in general
where Daghesh forte euphonic stands in Hebrew. These points do
not occur in printed works.
6. Bibui (^QOj).
1. To distinguish the plural of nouns and verbs from
the singular written with the same consonants, the Sjriac
makes use of Bihui^ i. e. two points placed horizontally over
the word. This sign is still retained, like the vowels, in
printed books. Thus, bj means of these points ]^\V> is read
\h \So the Icings^ and distinguished from |n\V>, the Jcing.
This sign is also used in the 3 plur. fem. pret. of Verbs 3 rad.
Olaph in all the conjugations except Peal ( 32), to distin-
guish it from 3 sing. masc. ; e. g. i\ ..iZ] they have praised
themselves ,from * > \ . . Z | he ha^ praised himself. In like
manner Kibui strengthens the distinction between the 3 plur.
pret. masc. and fem., where the formatives Q and t^ at the
end sometimes fall away from the 3 sing, masc; e. g. \^.^ =
qL4o, i \t^ * The plurals, which are easily recognized, re-
34- MEHAGYONO AND MAEHETONO.
;nain without this designation, though it is not omitted in
plural forms with suffixes. In numerals the usage is arbitrary.
Some mark with this sign only the feminines, and the forms
with suffixes ; e. g. ^7jl2, .QIUjIZ.
Rem. Amira, p. 48, omits Ribui, when the plural form ^ ( 44)
lias the signification #QJ| or tOGLkAal, i. e. they are^ but adopts nie
above-mentioned use m numerals, and uses it also with prepositions
joined with plural suffixes ( 16. c).
2. Ribui also serves to denote collectives ; e. g. I'rOb a heeve^
];ao a herd of heems.
Rem. When Ribui stands over > (with the exception of the 1 sing,
pret. and fut., and the participles Act. Pe., according to 4. Rem!),
7
or coincides with a diacritical point representing , one of the points
is omitted. When three points come together, one of them represents
Kushoi.
7. Mehagijono and Marhetono.
^0 7 . ^0 0, ,7
(tll^Olk) - WOl-r^).
When an accumulation of consonants without vowels
occurs, and the Syrians wish to indicate that a monosyllabic
word is to be pronounced as a dissyllable, or a dissyllabic
word as a trisyllable, and so on, they place a line under the
consonant to which a vowel (usually more rarely ) is to
be supplied ; e. g. lAi^j. This line is called Mehagyono^ and
denotes a removal of this accumulation in utterance
(Diaeresis). If, on the contrary, the voice is to hurry over
these same consonants, a line is drawn above them, which is
called Marhetono \ e. g. lAojl.
Rem. 1. Some Grammarians place Mehagyono only before
viVr>\ and before ai^ in (A*jJD>. Amira, p. 41. sq., compares the
two with Diceresis and Synceresis, which may have been transferred
from prosody into prose. (Vd. Chrestom. Syr. ed. Hahn et SiefFert,
Lips. 1825. p. 11).
Rem. 2. Sometimes a line is found over consonants ; a) in numerals ;
e. g. i^ 12 ; 6) in abbreviations ; e. g. pO for \A^r^ ', c) over the particlo
of exclamation 0|, to distinguish it from 0|.
LINEA CCCULTANS. .S5
8. Lima Occultans.
This line placed under consonants denotes ; a) that the
letter under which it stands is not pronounced ; e. g.
Z;i ( 12. 1); h) that 1 at the beginning of a word, followed
by Ol is to be pronounced weaker, and like f ; e.g. jcni (vid.
1. Eem.4) ; c) that the letter quiesces,viz., in the impera. of
the pass. Ethpeel and Ethpaal ; e. g. ^^-^2*1, pronounced
etlikatl^ and imp. from %4^' 5 which with the transposition
of the first two radicals is w^^Ol (comp. 12. 1).
Rem. Some have extended this also to the imperatives Ethtaphal
and Eshtaphal ; but in the latter especially, it appears to be merely
a diacritical designation of the imperat. As such it may in general
be regarded as coming under h and c above.
9. Tone.
1. The tone stands regularly upon the penultimate sylla-
ble, when the ultimate does not terminate in a movable
consonant ; e. g. ln\V >, Mdlco.
Rem. In an accumulation of consonants, where by Mehagyono
( V) the penultimate syllable becomes the antepenultimate, the tone
remains upon the stem-syllable.
It is more difficult to determine whether words, which, according
to Amira, p. 462, have Q in the penultimate, follow the same rule ;
e. g. PQjaj, and should be pronounced achuno or achuno.
2. The tone is on the ultimate, when it ends in a movable
consonant ; e. g. t^A* ; so too with. Q and t^ final, if they
have arisen from 2q and Ax ; e. g. on\V) from ZonSV).
vid. Amira, pp. 467 i69.
10. Signs of Inter punctio7i.
The Syrians, who do not possess the Hebrew system of
accents, divide their periods, according to Amira, p. 475, into
36 GENERAL VIEW.
protasis and apodosis, which again are subdivided into
smaller parts, and include the more precise designation of
subject and predicate. In this respect they designate ; a)
the separate members of the protasis with () ; h) the close
of the protasis with (.), which is also the sign of interroga-
tion; c) the separate members of the apodosis with (*),
which also marks longer interrogations ; and d) the close
of a period is marked by a point, which as it also occurs in
the middle of a period, some consider to be the smallest
mark of interpunction, and () or (::) the largest point.
Rem. Amira, p. 479, mentions a point standing over a word
which indicates a question, address, admiration, praise, command, and
the like.
CHAPTER II.
PECULIARmES AXD ChANGES OF THE LeTTEES.
11. General View.
As the changes in the different parts of speech are effected
partly by consonants and partly by vowels, this chapter is
naturally divided into two parts. In the first place, those
changes which take place uniformly, in accordance with
fixed laws, in pronouns, verbs, and nouns, must be accurately
distinguished from those which occur only in individual forms.
Tliough the former class of changes will be here principally
treated, yet in order to afford a proper connection between
them, that which occurs universally will be first treated of,
and that which takes place in special and individual cases
will be appended, either independently or in remarks.
12. Changes of the Consonants,
Of those changes in the radical consonants which Hebrew
grammarians classify as Assimilation, Transposition, Falling
CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 87
awaj, Exchange, and Addition, the first only is wanting in
Syriac. And this want is only in form, for in point of fact
this feature exists in those cases where a letter is dropped
in pronunciation by the occurrence of Linea occultans ( 8.
comp. Gesenius, Lehrgebaude, p. 162). Here should be no-
ticed the following
1. Consonants are dropped in pronunciation, by the
occurrence of Linea occultans, as follows : A) In General ;
a) in nouns whose middle radical is doubled ; e. g. ]ilSo
mano ; h) j without a vowel before Z; e. g \l^j^ ; c) 01 in
suf&xes of the 3 masc. sing. *aOi . .jcno , aau., %^oiQ^ of
the verb, and *^01Q of the noun plural (v. Table to 16); or
when Linea occultans has arisen from theGreek Spiriius asper ;
e.g. wi^ooij cpw^y] ; J) o in derivatives of verbs w^aand |2),
as IlijOQ* from 1^* : B) In particular is this the case ; a)
with 1 initial in ^.i il , ^tjs*l , .Jiol , and in the pronoun
m1 in connection with the participle, Ij") Ivm ; h) with Oi,
particularly in the following cases ; a) in the pronouns OOI
and *j01 , with the throwing back of the vowel upon the
preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. ool AaA ; or with the
falling away of the letter with the preceding vowel ; e. g.
001 )mD pronounced h^ slieu ; in which case, however, before
001 , passes into ; e. g. OOI p( for p( ; /3) in fOOl
(v. 38) when it is an auxiliary verb ; e. g. fOOi ^^4^
he had hilled ; 7) in *O0U for QOU to give ; c) with ^
in ^ll to gb away^ when it should have a vowel which falls
back upon the 1 ; e. g. ALll'^for ASlf (v. 28) ; d) with J in
the pronouns Aj( masc. and ^bS\ fem., and their plurals
.oAj| masc. ^Z\J| fem., and in some other words ; e.g. fAls ;
and finally ; e) with > in b^ daughter ; (v. 8).
Rem. Linea occultans is retained under f in nouns derived from
those adduced under a ; e.g. '\Lci\ > ! , lZ;-si| , fZoju] , and many
38 CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS.
others. It also occurs in p| , 001, and -*01 when they are used
for the logical copula or substantive verb (comp. 16. 1., 54. A. 3.
a and c). In these pronouns, even when thoy stand pleonastically
( 55. A), the logical copula is fundamentally involved, as is con-
19
001 ( 68. A), which verb loses
Linea occultans only when it is used absolutely in the sense of
to he^ to become^ to come to pass; As to further inflection of
^OLi compare 29. 1. Rem.
2. Transposed is L before sibilants in Eihpe.^ Ethpa.^ and
Eshta.; e. g. .-^ikAcol from IJcD , ^j6A1 from ^}Qm.
2 7 7^
is changed into %4 ^^^^^' V '^^^^ ? ^^^^^ ^ *' ^' S' ^^^4 ll
7 7 J*!* 7 7 ^-^ 7 '*J"" . . .
for okSaD*Z(, ^?ll for ^Kl* There is no transposition when
Z is doubled in Ethpe. of Verbs aJ^ and Ql ; e. g. ^Q^L^dLL]
(v. 31. 2). I as middle radical is sometimes transposed; e. or.
%aS|Z1 from (j^fO* Also J in the imperat. from *.^(JlJ (v. 8).
3. Dropped are ; a) f with. Linea occultans ; e. g. ..aj;^
for j1 jo and as first radical in the 1 sing. fut. Pe.
infin. and part. Pa. of Verbs ]si ( 28. 1) ; e. g. ^Qsf for
VkOoll ; and in ^] for ^1 *al ; b) w> and J as first radical,
and Q as middle radical in Verbs ^x ( 29. 2), ^ ( 38. 1),
and Qi ( 31. 1) ; e. g. -oak) from^QSJ. Here belong snch
nouns as JlQ^Lo for tJomV) The same is true also in
respect to the middle radical of Verbs Ml ( 34. 1), and the
nouns derived therefrom ; c) one of two Z without a vowel
standing between them ; e. g. ]ZpA* for 1ZZ,-m. Also when
three Z stand together in the fut. pass. ; e. g. \L^IL for
^^ioZZZ. Finally Z falls away at the end of the fern, end-
ings Zq and Ajl ; e. g. o^\V) for Zoo^V).
4. Exchanged are ; a) the gutturals 1 and 1 before Ol;
e. g. r0l1 for hOU; b) in transferring Hebrew words into
Syriac, 7 passes into j , ^ into ^ , into Z , sometimes
-| into -^ and J ; also ^ of verbs "13? into Ol ; e. g
QUIESCENT LETTERS. 39
r TT ^ . - :
Zoio = vjj'-^^ ; c) Z, when transposed with sibilants, in the
passive, goes over into > and v^, according to Eem. 2. above;
d) 1 with Z in the construct state fem., and before suffixes
( 45, 46); and in the Mhj)e. and Ethpa. of verbs ]a ( 28.
1 Eem. ; e. g. r^ZZ*| for h^IZ]*
Rem. This last has been also applied to nouns derived from \zi
Verbs ; e.g. \**JiL from J4J| In many cases this usage is doubt-
jy.Z which may be derived from JytZ or J.. I Hence
\\%\L is found. The derivatives from Aphel do not belong
here; e. g. (AajoZ from -*J0|
5. Added are ; a) sometimes ] at the beginning, before a
vacant consonant ; e. g. Lqd\ for Zoo ; ^Lm\ for taZ^ ;
also in Greek words beginning with 2 ; e. g. ^0*^420! =
ra<J'ov ; 6) 01 to denote the Spiritus asper in Greek* words ;
e. g. V^Sdooij Twfxaioff ( 12. 1. A. c); even in compound
words in the later Syriac ; e. g. .iDOjaiJQCD duvo^og ; and in
cases where 01 does not represent Spiritus asper ; e. g.
jro;-4^*2) nsrpoj ; c) J is added where it supplies the place
of Daghesh forte withLinea occultans ; e. g. Ir^^yi = 1*"l!S!\5
13. Quiescent Letters.
The vowel-letters %a, O, 1, and, according to some,
01 also, quiesce in the preceding vowel.
Rem. Here belongs only 01 ; for oi of the suf. 3 sing. fem.
= ^ of the Hebrew.
The following letters quiesce :
1. 1 final in and ; e.g. P'^.,]]^"; 1 medial in
and ; e.g. ^i^fco, ;Sd1!sD ; and*if it have a vowel, this
falls back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g.
^)aJ for ^)mj. And so in words transferred from the
Hebrew; e. g. *q'Is = ^^3
4:U VOWEL-LETTERS WHICH ARE NOT SOUNDED.
Rem. 1 quiesces in in po^' f--^ lit ^"^ ll^^M* Ii Greek
words and ai are represented by | , ai sometimes by wi| ; e.g.
"JZqQ^D xifBc^rog ; JCD)^ xaipog. In the later Syriac ] stands
for a and s.
2. quiesces in ; e.g. ^OO , and sometimes OQ ; e.g.
lliooi (3. Kem. 4).
Kem. In Greek words O quiesces m , in the termination
%CDQ = oj ; e. g. *J0O'^>\>*=^ == ^iXi'T-ttoj. J3DQ is also used
for a j e. g. .C0QO)| = ol^X"-*' ^^ ^^^ later language we find
also *CDQJLiZ| = 'A&r]vaij ; .CDQOj| = app^aj.
8. -!., medial and final, quiesces, in and ; e. g.
^A^, w.Ji^..ZV .^ initial usually quiesces in ; e. g. ^^,
and fiills back upon the preceding vowelless prefix ; e. g.
7 1 r I
QlraO for Qlr^O* Also between two consonants ^ quiesces
in ; e. g. lAjJjf for iLjl.
14. Vowel- Letters which are not sounded {Otiant).
In the following cases *j, o, 1, are not sounded ;
1. ] in the pronouns 2 plar.masc. and fern. ^oAj] , ^Aj")
conjoined with the participle to denote the present tense,
e. g. toAjl ^-ib^4^ pronounced hotelitun^ in which case th^
^ of the participle is not sounded.
2. O and wt at the end of words ; a) in verbal endings
without any vowel preceding (2 pret. sing. fem. ; 8 plur.
masc. and fem.; imperat. sing. fem. and plur. masc. ; and 2
flit. sing, fem.) ; e. g. uiA^^^O , Cl^O ; h) in the sufiixes
7 7
w, ^jlQ, t>ni , *aOlQ, where *a is sounded only when fol-
lowed by Ooi ; e. g. OOl . i^n pronounced hehiju ; c ) in
> > \V)Z I yesterday^ %^^ rest^ and the like, which form J> in
the emphatic state ( 46. 1).
CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. 41
15. Changes in the Yovjels.
Although to a less extent than in Hebrew, the rowels in
Sjriac, undergo various changes and modifications in res-
pect to formation and derivation, still they are exchanged^
transposed^ dropped or added,
1. They are exchanged partly in accordance with the
genius of the language, and partly in transferring Hebrew
and Chaldee words. The genius of the language requires
the following exchanges of vowels ; a) in the preformatives
of the fut. and infin, Pe. in simple syllables, in Verbs \zi ,
vA^ , (]-i-M 32), passes over into ; e. g. ^Iso'p, r^lSD ;
but before gutturals and 5 at the end of words, inta ; e.g.
>,. for jp ; h) in the feminine with \ , , in the con-
struct state, passes over into ; e. g. (n^ construct state
An^ ( 45. 2). In transferring words from the Hebrew and
Chaldee, the following vowel changes may be noted ; a) for
the Syriac prefers ; e. g. Byi == Hbt^ ; 5>0jY= ^^^^^^ ;
T _ _ \^ "^ "T IT-:
b) nr is exchanged in proper names mostly with ; e. g.
QCQ^l = yQ^^ ; with ; e. g. *>*A2L = n?l3^ ; c) 1 with
Q- ; e. g. V?<^ = tlJlp ; ^^ with Q- ; e. g. "ISDoi = (Chald.
2. Vowels are transposed ; A) in general ; a) q in the im-
perat. plur. masc. Pe. when a suffix is added ; e. g. 0^040,
with sufSx ^olQ-i.^^^ ; ^) concerning the falling back of the
vowel over 1, a, or oil*, upon prefixes, compare 13. 1. 3;
52. 1; 53.1. Eem. ; B) in Particular ; ff)in^l), vrhen-
ever 1 is vacant, the vowel of the ^ falls back upon it ; e.g.
t^\\ for ASi] (12.1) ; Z>) in some nouns of the form ^O^^,
when a syllable is appended and in the emphatic state
li?Q> ( 45. 8 ; 48. A. Decl. IV) ; of the form 1^^,
emphatic state fZrOa ; c) in ^^QjD and iOjOD with 1
prefixed, Q is placed before Q when a and j retain theii
; e. g. ^.SqqqV .,SDoal> In r^ when it enters into
4:2 CHANGES IN THE VOWELS.
composition, moves forward upon j ; e. g. Vu^^l, ]Sd^
8. The vowel of a final mixed syllable is dr opined ^ when
an entire syllable is added at the end, especially when
the last radical begins the new syllable ; e. g. in the verb
^i^6JD masc. AX4^ fem.; in the nouns j^SLo, ]^Sd
Rem. This vowel remains unchanged ; a) when merely a formative
letter, without a vowel, is added ; e.g. Q^4^ ixova ^^^6^ ; ^) when
a syllable is added, if the stem-syllable remain a mixed one ; e. g.
xOl^^O from ^o^^ ; and moreover ; c) when the stem-syllable
becomes a simple one, in the following cases ; a) in the second form
of the 3 fem.plur.pret.and 2 fem. plur. imperat.; /3) where inHebrew
Daghesh forte stands ; e. g. ^<11 emphatic state (SOik (q^, 1723?) ;
7)in words ofDeclension I.piasc. (comp. 48.A). In ^o^ emphatic
State \\ iS; ^Qji emphatic state pOQa, the original vowel only
reappears (comp. 48. A. Decl. IV).
4. Yowels are added ; a) with 1, *j, and 2^, at the begin-
nmg of words ; | and i^ usually take and ; e.g. ^QO |
(imp.), joii ; but u usually takes ; e.g. JOLk ; b) of two
vacant consonants at the beginning of a word, the first takes
; e. g. (iV)n for [>Vrf*^ ; go also when two vacant
consonants m the middle of a word follow ; e. g. ji^j^'r^
for 1A>**^ ; or when in Hebrew, the first has Daghesh
forte ; e. g. U^J^for l^'ryiV from ^in^i^ ; or finally when
three vacant consonants would come together in the middle
of a word ; e. g. Al^Z] for t^al]. This assumed vowel
is sometimes ; e.g. AS^O (pret. Pe.) from xs.^^ ; or
before ^ (v. 13.3), excepting in the emphatic state of
the participle fem. pass, of Verbs ]] in Pa., Aph., and
Eshta., where is added to distinguish it from the.^active
participle (comp. 48. B. Decl.IV. Eem.). Finally Q is as-
sumed in the emphatic stats sing, of some words ; e. g.
VAloaSD from 13aSD for lAlsiSo ; c) a vowel is assumed
with Q between two vacant consonants : this vowel is _!.
when it stands at the beginning of a mixed syllable ; e. g.
CHANGES IN THE VOWELS. 43
.qdZo,-m ; but when it stands in a simple syllable ; e. g.
UOpM . d) The assumption of a vowel is arbitrary, when
there are two vacant consonants, of which the first can be
attached to the preceding, and the second to the following
syllable ; e. g. "^wwOjib and ]A>.Q,iD; if the second consonant
be ], must be assumed, for a., Q and ] cannot stand
without a vowel between two consonants.
PAET SECOND.
ETYMOLOGY, OR, PARTS OF SPEECH.
CHAPTER i.
PRONOUNS.
16. Personal and Possessive Pronount.
The Personal Pronouns are divided into two classes :
Separate Pronouns^ which stand as separate words, and
mark the nominative case ; and Svjjixes^ consisting of
syllables formed from the separate pronouns, which are
appended to other parts of speech ; appended to Yerbs, they
mark the accusative ; appended to nouns, the possessive
pronoun, or the relation of the genitive ; and, with preposi-
tions, they form the remaining cases.
TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES.
45
TABLE OF PRONOUNS AND SUFFIXES.
SEPARATE.
SUFFIXED TO VERBS.
SUFFIXED TO NOUNS.
6.
c.
In Sing.
In Plural.
Sing.
1. 2
1
1 c.
m
7 7 !
1
A .1
^
^'
2 m.
LA'
*
P
>*-
7
2 f .
^AjT
.jSI^ j *u^
^
7
3 m.
f OCT
Ol-
r . !
^01CLb. t^Ol
p
-kOLki
01-
7
^01Q
^ OOI
uOIQiA.
^01Q
3 f.
waGI
I
01
r . I
OU
OU.^
di
*
. p
01
OVi.
Plur.
1 c.
^
. ^ u
p
V
^
^
7
2 m.
^oi\jT
^a^ *
v^'
^on
.QOjI
2 f.
3 m.
^a J *
-1* p
-ft
X 7
OOIa.
SEPARATE FROM THE V
ERB.
3 f.
^r
^(Jl
i
-" 7
&Ota.
J
46 KEMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS CONCEKInING THE TABLE.
Remarks and Explanations concerning the Table
I. T/!.e Personal Pronoun.
The second and third persons have two genders, while the
first person is of the common gender. The fem. of the 2
sing,, is denoted by ^^ appended to the masc. In the 3
sing. 001 masc. and wai fem., are used rather in a demon-
strati ve sense, while 001 masc. and *a01 fem., are used in
connection with adjectives and participles rather to designate
the present tense. And so in the plur., the first forms given
above are used rather substantively as nominatives, and the
second as accusatives (comp. 36). Concerning Linea oc-
cultans under ] and 01 of the 1 and 3 sing., see 12.1.
II. Suffix Pronouns.
A. Suffixes of the Verb.
In the sufiixes, or abbreviated forms of the separate pro-
nouns, an ancient obsolete form whose characteristic was
not L but O, lies at the basis of the 2 sing, and plur. (comp.
Gesen. Lehrgeb. 203).
Of the suffixes to verbs, given in the Table, those marked
, fall into two classes ; the first of which are attached to con-
sonants (with the exception of ^ ) in the forms of the regular
verb ; and the second mainly to the same forms of Yerbs ]3,
and in part to the imperat. and fat. of the regular verb.
The forms placed between 1 and 2, are common to both.
The suffixes marked h are appended to forms with Q and
.x, which then quiesce in _1 and _i. Where this form is
wanting under h it is comprehended under a. Finally the
suffixes under c are attached to the forms with ^, and also to
the t> sing. masc. and 3 plur. fem. pret. The forms wanting
under c are comprised under a. On their mode of union,
comp. 36, and 37, and the accompanying Tables.
B. Suffixes of Nouns or Possessive Pronouns.
The suffixes of the noun (possessive pronouns) are attached,
to the emphatic state ( 45,) with the
SUFFIXES TO PAETICLES. 47
falling away, of V- ; e.g. *A^ , empliatic state 1raS > ^ ,
with suff. i n\V)> In the plural they coalesce with the end
ing of the construct state wi., so that they may be considered
as attached to the final consonant of the noun ; e.g. construct
state I n\V^, with suff. y i n Vo Only in the 3 sing. masc.
does *A pass into Q, and in the 3 sing. fern. _L is the union
vowel. In the noun fern, the suffix with a union vowel is
attached to the emphatic state, with the falling away of
V , e. g. CfiALoAo from emphatic state IALoAo* In
the remaining persons (1 sing. 2 and 3 plur.) suffixes sing,
are attached to the construct state (v. 46. 2); e. g.
^Al^oAii from the construct state Z^oAo, plur. ^j^ALoAid
from construct state A^oAo*
Kem. For the complete union of nouns and suffixes, compare
4648, and the accompanying Tables.
Besides, the possessive pronoun may be expressed in a
separate form jfrom the noun, by means of some form of ^iui?
(from J = -I'jjJi^ chald. i^ and ^ ) with a suffix, thus ;
Plural. Singular.
1. ^~^? ^^^**
I HiN i> ^Q^\i> your.
X
. >Ni> my.
.3. ^Oll^> ^OOI^J their. \ GlSa) her. OlK*> his.
Rem. This form, which corresponds with the German der meinige
(mine)etc. occurrinjr after a suffix to the noun, indicates an emphasis ;
e. g. jA^J yii,>V)\2o, hut thy scholars. Sometimes it signifies
relating to; e. g. ^0^\i> to us.
C. Suffixes to Particles.
The Prepositions^ which were in part originally nouns,
*ake suffixes sing, and plur. Singular suffixes are attached
4:3 OTHER PRONOUNS.
to JOa in, ^ the sign of the dative, io^ to, ^io from^
>Ams and hta after, ^o^ricQ^ towards, against, comp. 15.
2. Plural suffixes are attached to >Q\n aside, only ,
iS\o without, ipM or ^Sr^ about, JZiLj^for, ^^ over, jK
or p*. towards^ /^<?^, ^r^ before, Lqj^L (Aa-iaZ before
nouns) wno?er. The suffix plural fern, occurs with ^i^i
on account of ; e. g. ^^A-lu^^ i with both plural suffixes
and ALa^ between.
Rem. For the complete union with suffixes, compare the Tabic
belonging to 52.
17. Other Pronouns.
1. The Demonstrative Pronoun is declined as follows :
Plural. Singular.
F. C. M. F. M.
^01^ Uhese. (V,(31) P^'* iGoi ['^'''
IPC
>01 is united with the
X X 7
personal pronoun 3 sing. masc. 001 and fern. *ji01, forming QJOl and
JOI* Sometimes OOl and ^0\ precede ; e.g. pOl OCl just this,
(jOl adjust this. The Chaldee ,^iN| is only used in compari-
sons ; e. g. ^^iNi] ^i5', or ^^iNoi ^\} such.
2. The Relative for all numbers and genders is j, who,
which, that, and with the pronouns ^-So c. Ji-1 m. |r*l / ^ i ^O
pi. com. preceding, it becomes interrogative.
Rem. p-il having a relative signification with > following it, is
an exception to the general rule.
3. The Interrogative ; a) for persons of both genders and
numbers is ^iD ivho. It unites with 001 following, and
niE VERB GENERAL VIEW. 49
forms Ql2iO and M-i| masc. whof \rA fern, whof V) (io and
^Syb wliat^ refer to things ( U^D, tOLo ) ; c) yjk\%\ refers to
both persons and things.
4. The Beoiprocal and Reflexive Pronouns are formed
partly by passives ( 21. 2. 22. 2. 24. 2), or by the noims
\m2i^ soul^ and ] SD Qir> person^ with suffixes appended
(comp. the Syntax).
CHAPTER II.
THE VERB.
18. General View.
1. The Yerb is, as in Hebrew, the most important of the
parts of speech, since it lies at the basis of the formation of
the others. Yerbs may be divided into the three following
classes, in so far as new verbal forms are derived from them
in accordance with definite laws, or as a noun is to be
considered as their stem: a) Primitives \ e. g. J^to to
write^ ^J>4^ to hill ; h) Verbal Derivatives {Conjugations) ;
e. g. *Djl to justify^ from *jDj1 ; c) Denominatives^ subsequent
formations from nouns ; e. g. ;jcai to tithe^ from ;flll ten ;
7 k7 '^
%ja.^f to celebrate Easter^ from f^.^ Easter.
2. The Stem-form in the 3 sing. masc. pret. consists
usually of three radicals (verbum triliterum), and is pronoun-
ced as a monosyllable, by the help of placed over the
middle radical in transitive, and in intransitive verbs.
3. From this are formed the Derivatives or Conjugations,
which agree closely with the ground-form in the inflection
of persons, and the principal characteristics of mood and
tense. Modern grammarians have added a third conjugation,
Shaphel, to the two originally derived from the ground-form.
The passive is formed by prefixing 2^, and has not only a
passive but also a reciprocal and reflexive signification.
50 THE REGULAR VERB.
The Conjugations are as follows ;
Active. Passive.
1. Peal ^O to kill ;* Ethpeel ^^s^Zf.
2. Pael ^^4^ to murder ; Ethpaal Vy^^Z]^
3. Aphel ^4^1 to cause to kill ; Ethtaphal ^\4^^^f
4 Shaphel ^\^l to cause to kill (mr^) Eshtaplial ^4^Aa1.
Rem. x\ll verbs do not have the whole of the conjugations ; and
wherePael and Aphel are found together, there is usually a difference
7 7 ^ l'
in their signification ; e. g. ^^^ to honor, JO0( to be burdensome.
4. The Syriac, like the other Semitic dialects, has a Pre-
terit and Future. It has, moreover, an Imperative in the
passive, and two Participles, an active and a passive, in the
active. The Hebrew Infinitive absolute and Infinitive con-
struct are in Sjriac united in one form (v. 19. B. 8).
RexM, The other relations of time are supplied in the following
manner ; the Present is expressed by the participle with the personal
pronoun following; the Imperfect and Pluperfect by (OCTI ( J^^in)'
T T
the former joined with the participle, the latter with the preterite.
The Optative and Subjunctive^ are contained in the future, to de-
note which more explicitly, | OCT is also frequently used (v.Syntax).
5. Verbs, finally, are divided into two principal classes.
Regular and Irregular. In regular verbs the radical letters
remain unchanged, while in irregular verbs, one of the rad-
icals either falls away {Defective Verbs), or quiesces {Quies-
cent Verbs) V. 27.
1. EEGULAR VERBS.
19. The Inflection of Regular Verbs in General,
The formation of Verbs, in respect to person, tense, and
mood is effected, in general, by uniform laws. The irre-
gular verbs are formed in a different manner, in particular
Literally, he killed, etc. The infinitive being considered in English the
ground-form of the verb, and for the sake of brevity, is uniformly used to
represent the Syriac ground form 3 masc. sing. Tr.
KEGULAR VERBS. 51
cases only, according to their special laws. It will therefore
be most convenient to treat, under the regular verb, of what-
ever belongs to the universal analogy of the verb.
In the following Tables of the Inflection of Regular and
Irregular Yein^s, the following signs are used : The radical
letters are denoted by *. The vowels which stand imme-
diately over the *, belong to the inflection of transitive
verbs ; and those vowels which are separated from the
* by belong to intransitive or guttural verbs, or denote
other forms in equal use. Radical letters which have fallen
away, are denoted in the Table of Irregular Yerbs, 27 by
. Those which take their place, stand over this sign.
52
TABLE OF PERSONAL INFLECTIONS.
O
S
Ph
o
O
H
1
1
1
Singular.
s
CO
5f
5t
CO
*
f }
X-
1
*
^ * : f
*
* *
*
*
*
*
* :
*
H *
*
4 '
*
1
T 1
*
*
CO
I* i u T a I.
*
CI
1
*
*
.0^
CO
1
*
*
2
*
^d *
*
*
*
*
TH * ^
'1.
^ o
TABLE OF THE TEMPORAL INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 53
O
o
o
H
Q
O
H
O
^
1
ti,
i
1
i
Particip.
Pass.
1
*
*
*
* :
<d :
*
,51
f * .
* ^1
S ^
1
f *
*
*
'1
f #
o
51
^d
51
1^
ft. #
*
'1
*
^d
'1
i
*
*
*
*3
^51
c *
*
^d
^51
*
* :
^51
* :
}
H-
5<-
'3
2
*
*
^d
<
^
X-
x-
1
c
l-H
^d
f -X-
>
X-
^ -x-
X- ^ :
i
x-
5f
2
'1
^d
54: PERSONAL INFLECTIONS.
A. Personal Inflections (comp. Table 1).
The inflection of persons is found in its most simple form
in the preterit and imperative, where formative syllables
are appended only to the stem {Afformatives). In the future
the form is more complex, additions being received at the
beginning {Preformatlves)^ and at the end. The inflection
is as follows ;
In the 3 sing. pret. the simple verbal stem suffices for the
masc; but in the fem., 2, preceded by JL (== X]~t)i is appen-
ded and considered as a sign of that gender. The 3 plur.,
which has a two-fold gender, is distinguished in the masc.
by the addition of the plural-sign Q, from which the fem.
in its simple form is distinguished only by a silent ^ instead
of Q* In the same person of the fat. the inquiry into the
origin of the preformative J in the sing. masc. and the plur.
masc. and fem., is a difficult one. The opinion that the J
had its origin in tji is opposed by the fact that among the
Zabians this preformative exists, while there is no similarity
between those two letters. More consideration is probably
due to the derivation from poi and ^QJOl (comp. 17). In
the plur., the masc, in addition to the preformative J, is
distinguished as in the pret., by the plural-sign Q with ^ pa-
ragogic, which causes the vowel of the last radical syllable
to fall away. And thus the ^^ in the fem. reminds one of
the paragogic final syllable }-l!D ii^ Hebrew. The abbreviated
form of the personal pronoun evidently appears in the 2
sing, and plur. Thus in the pret. sing., 2 masc. and ^Z
fem. are related to Ai1 masc. and *^Li\ fem., as fOZ masc.
and ^Z fem. are to tOAj | masc. and ^Aj] fem. in the plur.
The same is true of the preformative Z in the same person
of the fut. sing, and plur. where the fem. sing., in order to
designate the gender, takes .^ final and ^ paragogic, with a
like influence upon the vowel of the preceding radical
syllable. In the plur. the 2 pers. shares with the 3 pers.,
this same character at the end. In the 1 sing. pret. the ori-
ginal form of the Z with _1 = i^ preceding, has not been
shown. But in the plur. ^ and ^J, as well as f before the
INFLECTION OF THE TENSES AND MOODS. 55
1 sing, and J before the 1 plur. fut. refer us the more defi-
nitely back to \A and ^j^* Here too it should be noticed
that the 1 plur. fut. is distinguished from the 3 sing. masc.
which has the same form, by Ribui.
The preformatives of the fut. uniformly take except m
Pael and Shaphel, where (with the exception of the 1. sing.)
they are vacant, and in Aphel, where they take
The imperative coincides with the future in respect to
formatives at the end, except that the paragogic ^ in the 2
sing. fem. and 2 plur. masc. falls away, the former person
ending in the feminine sign ^, and the latter in the plural
sign Q . In both cases in Peal, Q is retained as the vowel
of the radical syllable. Finally the fem. plur. ends with ^
and the vowel of the final syllable is retained.
B. Inflection of the Tenses and Moods {pomp. Table 11).
1. With the preterit (the characteristics of which are
more specifically given in Table 11. and the section following),
the imperative most nearly coincides. The imperat. Peal
receives, in Yerbs Med. A, between the second and third
radicals, Q quiescing in ; but in Yerbs Med. E. and 3
y
Gutt. the middle radical takes All the remaining
imperatives are like preterits, except that in Ethpe. and
Ethpa., Linea occultans stands under the middle radical
7
with preceding.
Rem. The same holds good in respect to the imperatives Ethta.
and Eshta., if Linea occultans be admitted in them
2. The future is formed from the imperative by prefixing
J In Aphel the characteristic falls away, and in passives
1 of the formative syllable 2] . In Ethpe. and Ethpa. after
the rejection of Linea occultans, the vowels of the preterite
re-appear.
3. The infinitives (of which the simple form denotes the
gerund in do or the absolute state, but with L prefixed de-
notes the construct state) are formed from the preterites by
prefixing So* They end (excepting in the Peal, where they
coincide precisely with the preterit) in Q, and in the apoco-
66 THE GROUND FORM PEAL.
pate feminine form, in La , changing the vowel of the last
syllable of the preterit into
4. The participles are formed from the preterit as fol-
lows ; in peal, active form, the first radical takes -^, and
the second JL ; in the passive form jl_I_ is inserted between
the last two radicals. In the other conjugations Id is pre-
fixed, and JL, in the second syllable of the active form, is
changed, in passives, into JL* But this distinction appears
only in the absolute state of the masc, and even here is lost
in verbs 3 Gutt., j, and 01, the active form of which like-
wise takes _L*
5. The preformatives of the fut., infin., and part., mostly
take JL ; but in Aphel they take _L, rejecting the 1 accor-
ding to No. 2 ; and in Pael and Shaphel they are without
a vowel.
Rem. For the reciprocal use of these twoTahles, which suffice for
the complete formation of the regular verb, it is to be remarked ;
that Table I. contains the personal inflection of Peal. The forms in
Table II. in the inflection according to Table L, retain their charac-
teristic vowels, and merely take from Table I. the affbrmatives with
the vowels thereto belonging. Where, in pret. Peal, the vowel of the
stem falls away, the remaining preterits also lose the vowel of the
last radical syllable ; but Ethpe. takes _!. over the first radical, where
this has _L in Peal.* In the fut. the vowel of the last radical
syllable is uniformly lost where Q falls away in Peal, except that in
this case also in Ethpe.the first radical takes _!_ In imperatives the
* .
vowel of the last radical syllable is retained, as Q is retained in the
imperat. Peal.
20.
A. The ground form Peal its Formation and
Signification.
1. The usual form of Peal is ^^4^ {transitive verb med. A),
Besides this the form with Ji {med. E) is always used
*The inflection of the different persons iu the {)reterit should be noticed
in order to perceive the verification of this remark. Tu.
ITS FORMATION AND SIGNIFICATION. 57
for intransitives ; e. g. oAa to sit, JD'fO to be near. To this
class also belong Verbs ]l, which, throw back upon the
_ i
first radical ; e. g. jOt\o to feel pain^ or derivatives of Hebrew
Verbs ^^ ; Ci^g. *o]^ = ^-jt:- ^ne form Med. O. still ap-
pears in the Verb joao to shudder.
Rem. With the inflection of Verbs Med. A. agree those with 3 rad.
01 ; e. g. 01SQ to name, OlliZ to admire. Verbs Med. E. retain
, when in Verbs Med. A. stands in the radical syllable. In
respect to the forms of the 3 plur. fern. pret. iNf)^, ^ ' ^^*^ and
^X^O adduced bj Buxtorf, the first is found only in Verbs |J and
the second seems to have originated from crasis with the affix ^01*
There are instances to be found, though rare, in which is placed
over the third radical in the 1 plur. ^^4^* The apocopate form of
the infinitive with Q is also sometimes found in Peal ; e.g. Luke ix.
X 7 *
33. a^iSQ^* In the imperat.plur.masc. with ^ paragogic, Q final
quiesces in _ ; e.g. tO^Q^^* Besides the 2 plur.fem.with x, Amira
(p. 300) adduces another form, viz : t j> \q^ The imperat.ofVerbs
Med. E.takes instead of Q ; though the transitive form with Q is
also found ; e.g. QJ^O'^Q from iD;iD^ Sometimes another form with
occurs ; e. g. Rom. xiii. 3. r^^* More rarely the vowel of the
imperat. differs from that of the fut. as in the Verb ^ll, fut. ^1 p,
imperat.^1* Not only the imperat. but the fut. of Verbs Med.E. and
7 7 >
of those having the third rad. a guttural, take ; e.g. ;Km* In the
fut. 3 sing. fem. the form with t-i attached is more frequent. Also
a form of the fut. with ; e. g. -^*^^' together with n\n
Instead of the part. act. ^^v^jO, the participial noun of the form^\4^,
emphatic state ij-4^) is often used. In the part. act. the emphatic
state masc. and the absol. fem. are alike ; e. g. 1J-4^ The active
form ^9,ikM (Mark xiv. 67), in immediate connection with ^^^
(verse 54), is perhaps to be regarded as an error iii transcribing. The
passive form is always fully written ; in intransitive verbs, the first
radical sometimes takes Passsive intransitives occasionally occur in
58 DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS.
an active sense, sometimes derived from transitives ; e. g. ^ >r^^
hearing^ f^.j>*\ holding.
To the inflection of the participle belongs also the idiom
by which the present tense is expressed by a'^reviated per-
sonal pronouns, appended, like afformatives^ to the partici-
ple. But this formation occurs only in the 2 sing, and the
1 and 2. plur. masc. and fem., and is as follows :
Participle Passive. Participle Active.
COMM.
MASC.
wiZ2^' Al4^ 2 Sing.
^ixX4^ 1 Plur.
^b!L^ ^oAjlS^ 2 Plur
2. From the preceding remarks it appears that the signifi
cation of Peal may be transitive or intransitive. Sometimes
we find both forms in the same verb. In some cases there
is no difference of signification ; e. g. fns\ and fft\\ to
chew ; and in other cases there is a difference in signification;
e.g. ^v-^ to divide^ *\V^^ ^^ ^^ divided.
B. Derivative Conjugations.
21. Ethpeel.
1. The characteristic of this conjugation, as in the other
passives, is the formative syllable L\ and the vowel or in
Verbs 8 Ead. Gutt. _L, in the last syllable (vid. Amira,
p. 278). The passive conjugations are distinguished from
each other generally by the vowels over the radical letters,
or by the addition of 2 {Eihta.) or by the insertion of
{Eshta.).
Rem. Upon the transposition of the sibilants with Z see 12. 2.
The first radical takes _L in the 3 sing. fem. and 1 sing, pret., in all
of the imperat., in the 2 sing. fem. and 2 and 3 plur. masc. and fem.
DERIVATIVE CONJUGATIONS. 59
of the future, and finally in the part, excepting the absolute state
masc. According to others is used, but only in Verbs t^ even
when 1 falls away ; e. g. Acts. xx. 27. A^lV; tSlmf* This
usage however is confirmed neither by examples nor by Amira. The
3 sing. fem. and 1 sing. pret. the imperatives, 2 sing. fern, and 2 and
3 plur. masc. and fem. of the fut. and the part, excepting the absolute
masc. cannot be distinguished, according to Lud. de Dieu p. 2lY,
from the same persons of Ethpa. excepting when the first radical is
AH aspirate, which, in Ethpa. becomes hardened. The passive form
^"i^^Z*! is not mentioned by Amira. In the Verb m^^, in Ethpe.,
w>.- is inserted between the two final radical letters. The infinitive
however is excepted ; e.g. pret. jn^Sl^^l j infinit. Offi^^ ASb*
2. The signification of Ethpe. is ; o) passive of Peal ; e.g.
^\4^2f ; h) reflexive ; e. g. JQlmZ1 to reflect hy or upon
ones self; c) = Peal in intransitive verbs ; e. g. \iSi and
wxiaZl to return; d) sometimes Ethpe, is passive oi Aph. ;
e.g. 5<l-..As| to be embarrassed, from yi--w(.
22. Pael and Ethpaal
1. Both of these conjugations are characterized by _L in
the penultimate, and _;;;_, in Pa., in the ultimate syllable.
The vowel is changed into _1 , in Yerbs 3 Ead. Gutt. or j,
as it is in the passive. The preformative 1 of the 1 sing.fut.
Pa. alone takes JL (comp. 19. A. and B. 5). The imperat.
Ethpa. with Linea. occultans and the part. fem. Ethpa. are
like the same forms in *Ethpe.
Rem. The passive form ^i^4^Z| does not occur in Amira. It is
rejected also by Buxtorf. Amira remarks, p. 339, that in ^Q^t^,
y
the second radical takes only in the imperat. (vid. Matt. ix. 2*7).
Concerning the part. act. and pass, in Pa. vid. 19. B.4. The form
yj^'r^ (Mark. x. 16 ) in pret. Pa. must be considered as an mcorrect
mode of writing, since ^>n.,f) (verse 32) is a participial noun.
60 APHEL AND ETHTAPIIAL.
2. The signification of Pa. is ; a) causative ; e. g.
^js*j to cause to he afraid^ from ^xj to fear ; h) intensive ;
e.g. Mli^ to overwhelm from M^4 ^ press; c) = Pe.; e.g. .jQmJ
and *lm^ to kiss ; d) to hold forth^ to declare ; e. g. *i^?i
to pronounce just. The signification of Ethpa. is ; a) passive
of Pael ; e. g. ^^4^21 to he murdered ; h) reciprocal; e. g.
i^yl] to wonder within one's self; c) = Peal ; e. g. ^ZiDjL]
to he made to hlush^ i. e. to hlush = *mJ
23. Aphel and Ethtaphal,
1. Aphel is characterized by 1 placed before the stem,
which quiesces in _L After the preformatives of the fut.,
infinit. and part., ] falls away, and its vowel falls back upon
the preformative. JL occurs in the second syllable, and, only
in Yerbs 8 Pad. Gutt. and S , is -L found in that syllable.
In the passive, to compensate for the loss of the characteris-
tic 1 of Aph., L mit JL is inserted between the stem and the
formative syllable of the passive I^* The final radical syll-
able takes ; e.g. ^\4^ZZ1*
Rem. The characteristic | of Aph. is retained after the prefor-
mative, in verbs, which lose a radical letter ; e.g. ^.^j^pD from ^.ja*
Under the same rule should be placed Verbs \L\ e. g. A!2 p or
^t^J* But the Verbs *m>iT| to he able, and ^L\ to drink, do
not belong here, since _2^ already re-appears over ( They are rather
forms of Pe. with ( prosthetic, as is also shown by their further for-
mation ; e.g. fut. t^jJUAJ, infinit. QuMJQmSD (comp. 20.Rem.), part.
P. '^^ ''^*, and the passive ^**oL\* In respect to the participles of
Aphel the same rule holds good as in 22.1. Rem. compared with
19. B. 4. Buxtorf RTid others do not recognize the passive. Lud.
de Dieu p. 238, approves of the abridged imperat. with Lin. occult.
SHAPHEL AND ESHTAPHAL. 61
^iw4o^2) Later Grammarians however doubt the correctness of
this form (Comp. 8. Rem.).
2. The signification of Aphel is ; a) causative as in Pael ;
e. g. ^Ljk\ to bring forward ; and then it frequently takes
two accusatives ; e. g. ..ao!^ to cause to put on (something
upon some one) ; h) imperative or permissive ; e. g. ^OOj*!
to suffer to mount a horse ; c) intransitive ; e. g. ^^oaIoI to he
weak ; d) = Pael ; e. g. ^^>* j and ^^I* jl to frighten. The
passive has either the passive signification of Aphel or co-
incides with Pe.; e.g. *oAji to dwell, *qZoZZ| to keep house.
% 24. Shaphel and Eshlaphal,
1. Shaphel is one of the conjugations, admitted into the
paradigm at a later period ( 18. 8). Its characteristic is m
with JL prefixed to the stem, and Jl in the last syllable. In
inflection it coincides with Aphel. In the passive (Eshta-
phal) occurs the transposition of m and L and L appears
in the last syllable. The preformative of Shaphel, like that
of Pael, takes JL only in the 1 sing. fut.
Rem. In verbs which lose a radical letter, this conjugation some-
times furnishes a new stem ; e. g. *>OmA to he black, from ^OmA,
Shaph. of ^V>i The same is true in Eshtaphal. Thus JajOAs*!
furnishes the new quadriliteral u;.kA{
2. The signification of these two conjugations is similar to
that of Aph. and Ethtaphal. Sliapliel is, in the examples
still extant; a) cav^sative ; e.g. ^yir* to let fall-, h) intert,-
sive ; e. g. <^N to exchange, from ^ZlLj^ to change, Eshta-
phal has sometimes a passive and sometimes a reciprocal
signification ; or it forms intransitives ; e.g. ^..jAsI to err^
ijo sin.
62 OTHER CONJUGATIONS AND QUADRILITERALS.
25. Conjugations occasionally used and Quadriliteral Verbs.
The occasional conjugations (vid. Agrell in Otiolis Sjr. p.
28 sq.) are similar to Pa. and Aph. and take, for the most
part, their signification. They are also to be considered as
quadriliterals. To verbs, which take the initial, prosthetic
letters So , CD , Z, and are.
Is 7
A. similar to Apliel, belong ; a) Maphel, ,^nfnV) to make
poor, pass. ^!MQSdZ( to become poor ; b) Saphel, *sai;flD to
permit to hapten and to hasten === iiOlj] , pass. ^\^^AfiD] to
persecute ; c) Thaphel, r^^O^Z to teach.
Rem. For ^LGuCTI (jiA| vid. 23. Rem.) no special form can
be assumed, as similai*examples do not occur.
B. Similar to Pael are those conjugations which insert
JL, Sq, ;, Q, after the first radical viz.; a) Pauel = Poel,
usually transitive ; e. g. '>^y io chew the cud, pass. jyQoL]
to become divided ; b) Paiel, transitive ; e. g. f*^>fy> to suffer ;
c) Pamel ; e.g. ^^fflV^.i to remain : d) Parel ; ^yi^ to dance,
pass. ^j;..Z] to be cut off.
C. Kot very diiferent from the last are also the quadril-
iteral verbs with prosthetic - and final ^, viz. ; a) Pali =
Pael ; e. g. ^LmJ^ to domesticate, pass. vaAjJDZ] to converse
with one ; b) Palen, ^^y to be master, pass, ^a^)^ ( to make
one a master.
D. Here belong quadriliterals with a radical doubled =
f y
Pilel and Pilpel ; a) Palel = Pael ; e. g. ?r^^ to reduce to
slavery ; b) Pealel with its pass. ^\V>\mZ1 to dream, and
finally; c) Palpel (in Yerbs Ml); e. g. ^ocoSqcd to heal, pass.
l^;ljZ1 to be broken.
I^EM. Those verbs, which are compounded of two ground forms,
7 7..^ 7 7
also belong here ; e. g. ;SSnfc| to blush, from ^^ t and ;l # In
quadriliterals formed from the Greek (e.g. Q^Ao to elect a Bishop),
VERBS WITH GUTTURALS. 68
a letter of the ground form frequently falls n way; e.g.
yt'rti^ ^^ appoint as Patriarch.
26. Verbs with Gutturals.
Since tlie peculiarities of Guttural Yerbs, are not marked
in Syriac, as in Hebrew, eitber by Dagbesh forte or Sbeva,
the irregularities in verbs of which the first and second rad-
icals are gutturals are entirely wanting ; and those only, of
which the third radical is a guttural or >, deviate, and those
in but very few cases from the regular verb, in connection
with which these deviations have already been cited. (Con-
cerning Yerbs ], K, and ]]" compare g 28, 80, 82). For
more convenient reference, these cases of deviation are here
brought together. These verbs take ; 1) inthefut. and im-
perat.Peal, instead of Q ; e. g., fut. jfMJ ; imperat. Jf] 2)
in like manner in the other conjugations, and in the part,
act. Peal, they exchange the _2_ of the last syllable for _L ;
e. g. part. act. Peal, '^U pret. Ethpe. ;Lo|Z|, fut. jSojAj;
77,77, ^77 ,"'
Pa. pret. j,^, fut. j^aJ, imperat. >,, part. act. & pass. Jr*^;
Aph. Pret. ^>1, fut. ^is'^J, imperat. M>|, part. act. and
7 7
pass. ^;Sd
Rem. In the same manner in Pa. and Ethpa. are formed the
following ; ^lo to console, JiQ.^ ^^ ^^^h 11 1 ^^ de/ile, and 1 fSM
to be adorned (comp. 13. 1. Rem).
II. Irregular Yerbs.
27. General View.
1. Under Irregular Verbs, are to be comprehended, those
in which there is a change in respect to one of the three letters
of the ground form. Such letter either quiesces or/alb avjay
(Quiescent aiid Defective Verbs). A verb in which two let-
64 IRREGULAR VERBS.
ters of the ground form are changed is said to be doubly an-
omalous ( Verbum dupliciter imperfectum).
2. The Quiescent Verbs are the following ; verbs with 1.
rad. Olaph (la), ^oJDf; 1. rad. Jud (^^.a), y^; med.rad. Olaph
(ll), ^|i; med. rad. Vau and Jud (Ol,^ ^o (2>0QO), A^;
and 3 rad. Olaph (]]) U^
To defective verbs belong those with 1. rad. Nun
(-2)); e.g. *Q2LJ, and med. rad. doubled (Ml); e.g. *aDj
Rem. Here, and frequently in subsequent sections, the designa-
tions of classes of verbs are taken from the position of the radicals,
of the Verb ^*iA2) (= ^5?S), by which the variations affecting the
radical letters of irregular verbs are kept in view.
TABLE OF lEREG
Verbs 11 ; IJ^- 32.
Yerbs |1 ;
Part. Pe.
1 Imperat. Pa. | Fut. Pe.
Pret. Pe.
p
***
Pret. Aph. | Imp. Pe. j
-n p
***
7
***
]
1.
***i
7
***
Part. P. Pa. | Imperat. Pe. | Intia. Aph.
Pret. Ethpe.
Part. Pass.
Imperat.
^7 7
*^x U-*-. 7
**:zi
3Pl.f.Fu.Pe. 1 2Pl.f.Imp.Pe. | 3f.S.Pr.Pa. |
3 f. S. Pr. Pe.
2.A.
a.
b.
Fut.Ethpa. |Pr. Ethpa.|
^-0 .7-^ 7
7 7 *
"Ji
'JL*
2S.f.Pr.Pa. 1
2Pl.f.Pr.Pe. |2m.S.Pr.Pe.
1 S. Pr. Pe.
Yerbs Qland tuJL;
,-7 -7
ZoHc*
Par.Act.Pe. 1 Pret. Pa.
.1.
* o*
T>--7
3Pl.m.Fu.Pe 1 2S. f. Fut. Pa. | 8 m.Pl.Pr.Pe.
1 Sf.S.Pr.Pe.
2.B.
^o:;zi
7
o * *
S. A. a.
1
1
1
!
Pr. Ethta. | 2 S.m.Fut.
*o*ZZ] 1 ^o^LL
Part. Pass. | Infinit.
*o^2i)
Yerbs ^ ;
Par.Act.Pe. | Pr. Ethta.
^1,
* o *
^th]
i
1
Pr.Ethpa. | Pret. Pa. |
1
1'
*;:2j
T> 7
***
ULAR VERBS . Vid. pp. 51, 63.
^io*
30. 1 Verbs ]si
; ^1- 28. i
Fut. Pe.
1 Pret. Pe. | | Pret. Ethpe. | Fut. Pa. |
Imperat. Pe. | Pret. Pe. |
y *
* * * J
***
1.
* ** Z|
7
. 7
7 -n
* **
i.
Future.
1 Pr. Ethpe. | | Infin. Pa. | Fut. Pa. | (2m.Fu.Pe.) | l.S.Fut.Pe. I |
1 ^ " r
2. Q**oLO
i> 7
(*Q*oZ)
7 I
*Q*ol
7 X
2.
Fut. Pa.
1 Pret. Pa. | | Pret. Esht. | Pret.Shaph. |
Pret. Ethtap. | Pret.Aph. | |
7
A.
* 7
** *
3.
**0 A*(
7
:.*oZZl
^0
* * I
-1
3.
:^,5a
^. 31.
Verbs .jlQ ;
riLT* ^ 29.
Part. P.Pe.
1 Pret. Pe. | 3f. S. Pr. Pe. | Pret. Ethpe. | Imperat. Pe. | Pret. Pe. | \
1 I-^
7 X
* **
* * *
7
1.
Future.
Pr. Ethpe. | | Imperat. Pe. | 1 S. Fut. Pe.
Infin. Pe. | Fut. Pe.
L
2.
*o*ZAj
*o*2Zl
2.
S. I.
* * ol
7I.
Fut. Aph.
Pret. Aph.
Pret. Esht.
Pret.Shaph.
i Pret. Ethta. | Pret.Aph.
* O * J
3.
**oAl
7O 7 -
**oZZ1
.0,
a
jncon
34.
Verbs ^ ; *
aaj* 33.
Pret. Aph.
Pret. Pe. | " | Fut. Aph. | Pret. Aph.
1 Infin. Pe. | Fut. Pe. |
(*),.7
* * 1
* *
1.
ft 7
* * O J
. .7
* * o I
7 "R
7
Pr.Ethpe. |
Part. P.Pe. |
***zi
* A H H
2.
VERBS. 67
A. Quiescent Verbs.
28. Verbs 1 rad. Olaph quiescent (]2)) ^^io] to eat.
The following are the irregularities of these verbs.
1. In the Pret. Peal, where, in the regular verb, the fii'st
radical has no vowel, I takes _L , but in the imperat. and
part, pass., it takes ; e. g. ^Qol , ^i^^1 If the preform-
ative or characteristic. consonant of the conjugation be with-
out a vowel, the vowel of 1 falls back upon it ; e. g. fut.
Pa. ^|j; pret. Ethpe. ^W*
Rem. In the fut. and infinit.Pe. the preforraative takes Jl, in the
verbs y^i; V5^T, Ui;^, V^XMl r*T-rvOIe.g. ^Qb^^to^
But is used in the verbs ^X ^ll" ^^SlL", ^X, '^X yT^X
e. g. ^1j, ;SDl!k)* Both of these forms are found in 1Z1 It
should further be remarked that the first class of verbs mentioned
above, form the fut. and imperat. Pe. like transitives with Q , excep-
ting Verbs 3 rad. Gutt. or >, and the second class form them like
inti-ansitives with _L Lud. de Dieu (p. 26 ), rightly doubts the
correctness of the double form of the infinit. and fut. Pe. with JL
and _f., although the form ^i|SD-^ is found in I Cor. x. 27 ; but
the fut. of it is not found with Q Also the correctness of ^Q-ialZ
in 1 Cor. x. 28, is suspected. The forms of the 3 plur. fem. pret.
i\o| and ,^iN^| are not approved. The vowel is sometimes
found in the part. pass. Pe. of the regular verb (20.1.Rem.). In
the passives Ethpe. and Ethpa. of the Verb fjaf, ] is assimilated to
the preceding 2; e. g. ,jaZZ|* This formation is also found in some
other verbs varying little from regular verbs ; e. g. ^^ZZf and
"^XiX
2. The radical 1 usually falls away in the 1 sing. fut. Pe.;
e. g. \qd\ I will eat^ '^Xl^^iH speak. 1 does not so often
fall away in the other persons. The same peculiarity ex-
ists in the infinit. fut. and part. Pa., and the vowel is thrown
back upon the preformative ; e. g. *2LiJ and 2iL^*
68 QUIESCENT VERBS.
Rem. The Verbs ^1( to go away and jZl to come^ lose | in the
imperat., and form ;
^f, oil, ^f, ^f
^]2, oZ, -2, XL
3. In Aphel and Shaphel with their passives, 1 is chang-
ed into O, and, with the preceding _L , forms au ; e. g.
Rem. In two verbs | is changed into i^, viz : 1Z1 , Aph. -Aa1,
imperat. iLif, fut. liJuJ , infiait. Oi^xSO , part. IAaSd* {^) ,
Aph. ^kIC71 = p)2J5n ) For this reason *Sl^\ and Ubk to
learM, are sometimes found together.
General Remarks,
The Verb ^'ij (according, to 12.1 ; 15.2) should be no-
ticed in the following persons ; pret. 3 fern, and 1 sing.
AllX ^if ; ftit. 2 f em.sing. and 2 and 3 plur. ^-AlH^oLilT,
etc.; part m. emph. Bl] and plur.masc. and fern. ^^lV, ^^t*
In the signification, to he of ttse^ to profit^ it is formed regu-
larly. Verbs which commence with oil, like Verbs |2), as-
sume the vowel and throw it back upon 1 , but do not, like
those, reject or change it, although this latter occurs in
the Galilean dialect, which had but a single character for
the two gutturals (comp. ]. Eem. 1),
29. Yerhs with 1 Bad. Yud (^2)) j.^ to bring forth.
In respect to these verbs it should be observed :
1. That in the pret. Pe. even when transitive, they take
JL in the ultimate syllable (excepting Verbs 3 Bad. Gutt.) ;
VERBS 1 RAD. JUD, ETC. 69
e. g. j^Lk (^r)* If a, the first radical, be without a vowel,
as is usually the case (in pret., imperat., part. pass. Pe.), it
quiesces in ^* In the fut. and infinit. Pe. the vowel JL falls
back upon the vowelless preformative ; e. g.. ^^^J , r^lSo*
So too in Ethpe., falls back upon 2 ; e. g. r^-*^!* But
where, in the regular verb, the first radical takes a vowel,
these verbs are regularly inflected ; e.g. 2^^*
Rem. In the part. pass. Pe., besides the regular form, one with
7 x 7 7 7
appears ; e. g. 2LiA^* Only ^Gl* takes ; but where the
regular verb takes over the first radical, , with Linea oocultans
under Ol, falls away ; e.g. AaOU Lin. occultans with appears
in the 3 fern, and 1 sing. pret. with a suffix attached ; e.g. GlA^OLi
. 7 14
she has given him (LdGLk)* In 3 plur. masc. and fern, under sim-
9v 7
ilar circumstances, Lin. occult, falls away ; e. g. wtCTIQOOla thei/
v 7 "
have given him (QQOLi)*
2. In the fut.and imperat.Pe.the second syllable takes _!_
In the fut. and infinit. Pe. this class of verbs is similar to
Verbs la, and changes a into f which quiesces in (vid. 1.
above). But in the 1 sing. fat. ^ falls away ; e. g. ^SV
The imperat. on the contrary retains ^ ; e.g. ^*
UKU.^fl and *Oi\I follow the inflection of Verbs ^ ( 33) ;
e. g. imperat. ^> and ^lOL, fut. ^,J and ^qAj, infinit. Kif%0 and
7. -n V * 7
*oALd* In like manner *^01 imperat. from *QCJU follows the
same rule.
3. In Aph. and Shaph. with their passives a is changed
into o (vid. Yerbs ]a, 28. 3) ; e.g. jSoV, ^?cii
Rem. ^ is retained in ^oSul and Alal ; still it should scarcely
* 7
be considered as an irregularity, since from f^La appear Pa. ,^10,
Ethpa. fLolX*
70 VERBS MED. RAD. VAU AND YCJD QUIESCENT.
30. Verbs Med. Olaph quiescent (]l) ^]i to ask.
The irregularities of these verbs occur only in Pe.,Ethpe.,
and Pa. with its passive.
1. Peal. In the pret. 1 quiesces in Ji and the latter falls back
from 1 upon the first radical ; e. g. ^]i ; but when u is the
third radical, it quiesces in standing before T ; e. g. w]]
The vowel appears in Aph. ; e.g. ^1*1 In the imperat.
and fut. Pe. 1 quiesces in ; e.g. ^1* , ^]ij
2. In Ethpe., besides the regular form *))2l , is some
times inserted after Z ; e. g. jiloZ]*
Rem. In both cases metathesis of f takes place ; also a duplication
of it ; e.g. ^X ^V^ ^"^ l^l^V^ 5 Ethpc^AOllf and ^12d12]*
3. In Pa. and Ethpa. 1 is generally changed into a. ; e.g.,
n*.^ and *^^^ZV The other verbs retain 1 ; e. g. ^lAslI
Rem. Both forms are found from \\ (l],.^ ] and y^ . 1)
31. Verbs Med. Bad. Van and Yud quiescent
{oL and -1^) ^QD (iOQO) to stand up^ A.Vn to die.
The verbs whose middle radical letter is Q or a., and whose
grammatical structure generally agrees with that of the reg-
ular verb, differ from the same in the following cases :
1. In the pret.and infinit.Pe. of Yerbs Ql, the vowel ap-
pears in place of Q, which is dropped ; e. g. 5>ao, S^qSo In
the part. pass. Pe., and in the other conjugations generally,
Q is changed into jl, and quiesces in . in the part. P., Pe ,
Ethpe., Aph. an i Ethtaph.; e.g. 3>cu^, ^CLX)ZZ1, ^ f>>o ]'
VEEBS MED. RAD. VAU AND YUD QUIESCENT. 71
On the contrary, a. is movable in Pa. and Ethpa ; e. g.
^alo, ^OjldZV In the part.act. masc. of Pe.,1 (=y, vid. 1.|
Eem. 4), which has arisen from Q, goes over in the other
inflections into a; e. g. U){o masc, |V)> n fem. Only in
the imperat. and f ut. Pe.^ Q remains and qniesces in JL ; e.g.
ioooj, in which cases, as well as in the pret. (in Yerbs
-iA), A appears and quiesces in ; e. g. A.kLo , y) i mn
Finally the preformatives of the fut. Pe. have no vowel, ex-
cept the 1 sing., which takes over 1 ; e. g. ^ool*
Rem. In Pe., Ethpe., Aph., and Eshta., verbs of this class, which
are at the same time U ( 32), as (QA and some others which can be
V 7
referred to no particular species, as t-f^Or, \QO, retain Q movable.
Some are inflected in both ways, but with a different signification ;
e. g. 30^ to take a handful, Aph. >1 ( to deviate from the way.
TheVerb i>aco, contrary to the rule, takes j. in the fut. and imperat.
But LtlD follows the inflection of Ql' Verbs ; e.g. fut. ZqSQJ* The
imperat. of %DQja to spare, takes (rf>>), with the signification,
far be it. In some manuscripts _2_ is found in the preformatives of the
fut. and in the infinit. Pe., which manner of writing was received by
the ancient grammarians, and which, as is testified by Amira, p. 311,
the Mandseans used on account of metre (vid. Lud.de Dieu p. 292).
2. In Ethpe. 2 of the formative syllable 2] is doubled ;
e. g. JtO-i^ZZI^ By this, the transposition of the sibilants
does not occur ; e.g. MalZZl* When three Z come together
in the 3 sing. fem. and 2 sing, and plur. masc. and fem. fut.,
one Z is omitted ; e. g. ^>0.x^ll.* The occurrence of three Z
together is unavoidable only when the verb itself begins
with Z, in which case four Z would properly come in succes-
sion ; e. g. ^o\nZZ2 Ps. Ixii. 10, from ^^L Elhtaph.
differs from Ethpe. merely in signification ; e. g. \>QjSLL\
Ethpe. to raise one^s self Ethtaph. to he token away.
Rem. ^mi^ZZy to he convinced, Ethtaph.. from m i <^ l , is
usually written ^ma^^ZV
72 VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.
8. In Aph. the preformatives of the fat.,infinit.,and pan.,
lose the characteristic _L , excepting the 1 sing. fut. ; e. g.
^Q-iJDf The part, pass., contrary to the analogy of other
part, passives, changes ^ into ; e.g. 5>aQk>, to distinguish
it from the active form y)iOV>
Rem. No example is found of Shaphel.
32. Verhs 3 rad. Olaph Quiescent ((J) |J-.. to disclose.
These verbs, which include the Hebrew jj^i and j^^ Verbs,
are different from the regular verbs in the following cases.
1. The third radical 1 either quiesces or is changed into
%^ Here it should be remarked that the pret. Pe. ends in |-;
e. g. B-i , the other preterits in ^; e.g. Ethpe. .aI^uiZ]*
The futures of all the conjugations end in |- ; e. g. re.
|J..^j , the imperat. Pe. in .jb- ; e.g. *"yi , imperat. Ethpe.
ill .ji. ; e.g. -h^..Z( ; the other conjugations in | ; e.g. Pa.
lJ-..> The termination of the infinit. Pe. is the same ; e.g
-^i^Ld The other conjugations in the infinit. end with Oi^;
e. g.' Aph. cu^.|^2^, the participles generally with |- ;
e. g. Pe. Ij-yf Only the part. pass, of Pa., Aph., and Shaph.,
7 ^7
ends with *jl-; e. g. Pa. ^A.^^.-So*
Rem. Some verbs with .a* (-^) in the pret. Pe. are inflected
like the other preterits. Here belong mostly intransitives, or Verbs
Med. E. ; e. g. ^^.^^.-fiD to be great. Both forms are found in the
Verbs pOa and "^> to swear. The imperatives of this kind of
Terbs, take wi at the end. Some verbs with 3 rad. He., seem to
belong here ; e.g. OlSD to name, Pa. .jlSQs* Some grammarians,
VERBS 3 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT. 78
without proof, derive from the imperat. Ethpe. the forms |jyiZ( and
IJ-..Z| The Verb |001 has two forms of the future; e. g. (OCJIJ
and (OOU^ In the formation of the present tense in connection with
the pronoun, the part, takes wk quiescent, instead of f. ; e. g.
A^lOjliD for Aj"! 1lO>liD From p-CO ^o hate appears a double
form of the part. pass. ; e. g. [ISO and |>1CD The former refers
more particularly to things, and the latter to persons.
2. "When a letter or syllable is added, 1 is either changed
into a. or falls entirely away.
A. In the first case, a. is a) movable in the pret. 3 sing,
fem. of all the conjugations excepting Pe. of verbs ending in
]L ; e.g. Ethpe. AlLy.21 ( Pe. AS.. ) ; in the second form of
3 plur.fem. ; e. g. Pa. ^a-IS.. ; in the 2 plur. fem. of all the
imperatives ; e. g. Pe. ^jloJ^.. ; in the 2 and 8 plur. fem. of
all the futures ; e. g. Ethpe. ^j-^y. Aj ; in the fem. sing,
and plur. of all the participles ; e. g. Pe. M-^yi ; and finally
in all the infinitives except that of Pe. ; e. g. Aph. cub^.^lo
(Pe. IJ w_Ld) ; J) A is quiescent in tbe 1 and 2 masc. and fem.
of both numbers of all the preterits, and in such, a manner
that .*. in Pe. (excepting tbe 1 sing. A.*^.. ) quiesces in ;
e.g. AaS.. , .oA-i-iy. In other cases a quiesces in ; e.g.
Ethpe. AjiJ^..ZT, ^oA^..Z11
B. 1 falls away in the 3 sing. fem. pret. Pe. of Verbs
ending in ]1 with retained ; e. g. ASyi ; in the 3 plur.
masc. and fem. pret. Pe., and in the 3 plur. fem. (in the
3 plur. masc. Pe. of Verbs -..iii and of other preterits, a-
remains) of all tbe preterits ; e.g. Pe. ^vX' i^^tliefut.
throughout in the 2 sing, fem., while the regular form
^ is changed into ^', e. g. Pa. r^Vj/' ^^^ ^^ *^^ ^
74 VERBS 8 RAD. OLAPH QUIESCENT.
and 3 plur. masc. ; e.g. Pe. .a^.--J ; also in the 2 sing. fern,
imperat., where ^ quiesces m ; e.g. Pa.. --^vi ; also in the
2 plur. masc. imperat., where Q quiesces in ; e. g. Aph.
Q!i..1 ; finally in the plur. masc. of the part., where the reg-
ular form ^a. is exchanged with ^a ; e. g. Pe. ^-^ ^ .
Rem. Instead of Pa. and Ethpa.,sometimes the quadriliteral form
-Q^.. appears. The 3 plur. masc. pret. Q^ii (with paragog. Nun
^OQ^..) occurs, sometimes with | retained ; e. g. Acts xxviii. 2.
^00|^ But the form CL^t* which Buxtorf adduces, is neither
confirmed by examples nor found in Amira. In all the conjugations
excepting Pe., the 3 plur. fem. pret. differs from the 3 sing. masc.
only by taking Ribui (vid. 6), for which Amira (p. 266) in verbs
ending with ^-, and in Pa. of verbs ending with (-, writes a
double a ; e. g. > ^v<* ^^ ^he imperat. Ethpe., besides the form
given in the paradigm, occurs the 2 plur. fem. ^^i i A.iZ.|
General Remark. Verbs |J orjL^, which are at the same time
]^ (comp. 30. 1), are inflected like Verbs ]j ; e. g. pret. Pe. wi|j.
Zuj], L\i, ^Zutf, plur. a1], etc., infinit. lllSo, imperat. J\i, ^a]],
etc., fut. ll]j, plur. ^ol]j, etc., part. act. \\i, pass. 1|J, Apn. pret.
JiH] and *A1, infinit. a|Jk), imperat. J\i], fut. *.*lJj, part. ^U^.
APPENDIX TO 32.
Inflection of the Verb XLa* to live.
In the Verb ]a** with a movable, a. is rejected when the
first radical and the preformative are without a vowel ; e. g.
infinit. Pe. 1*iD for 'U.mwLo* Sometimes this verb takes 1
between the preformatives and the first rndical ; e. g.
DEFECTIVE VEKBS. 75
\jS^ (better perhaps V^V^), fut. "liiJ for )1mJ and with ]
inserted iCLmM, Apli. pret. -k^, infinit. 0>rV) or Qa-j^lSo ,
fut. |mJ and |js*p , imperat. ]>11, part. ^wkSD and "U*!^*
JL also falls away when no preformative precedes, and its
vowel falls back upon the first vacant radical ; e.g. imperat.
Pe. ti *i for > I. ig, part. fern, p-m for |aii>i The form ^(j^
(Matt. XV. 27) is found in the part. plur. masc.
B. Defective Verbs.
33. Verbs luith the first radical Nun (^) *n2LJ to go out.
The irregularities of these verbs are the following :
In the fut., imperat., and infinit. Pe., and in all forms of
Aph., the first rad. J falls away ; e. g. jDoaj, *OQ2), -^<^Vr>
*Q2) ! The fat. and imperat. Pe. sometimes take and ;
e. g. *iaj, \>LJ
Rem. The exceptions to this rule are ; a) Verbs Med. Rad.
doubled ( 34) ; e. g. ^ ; h) Verbs Med. Rad. Quiescent ; e. g. *2LI ;
c) Verbs Med. Rad. Ol ; e. g. JOU, fut. JOUJ* Those verbs whose
third radical is ^ or Z, are not changed by assimilation, as in Hebrew;
e.g. ^iLCLftOI we have believed^ .oZAjjJ ye have descended. TheVerb
* nmi to mount up, takes its pret. and part. Pe. from toKtr) (vid.
35.2). Upon retaining the characteristic 1 in Aph.; e.g. \d\L for pj.
Comp., 23. 1. Rem.
34. Verbs with Med. Rad. doubled (ML) *CDflD> to sprinkle.
In respect to these verbs it should be remarked :
1. That the middle radical falls away in the pret., infinit.,
70 DOUBLY IKKEGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.
imperat., and fut. (having over the preformative) Pe. ;
e. g. pret. CD> , infinit. CD*^ , fut. %flDO;J , imperat., %CDOn
Also Aph. and Shaph. with their passives; e. g. *flDJ|,
%flD)221^ The part. act. Pe. takes 1 in place of the
middle radical, which has fallen away ; e. g. *Ci]j ; but 1
falls away again when a syllable is added ; e. g. plur.
Rem. Those verbs whose 2 and 3 rad. is ( , are exceptions, and
are inflected according to the rules for quiescent verbs ( 35. 1. d).
r *
In the fut. and imperat. Pe. forms with (not ) appear ; e. g.
< 1 , ^ The part. act. Pe. has ^*^R in the plur. from the
Verb ^\l to go in. In the part. Aph. sometimes the middle radical
appears again, but it is marked by Linea occultans ; e. g. Heb. ix. 5,
^^ i N\t)V> In Aph. the characteristic f sometimes remains after the
preformative ; e. g. QlO^^IoA from '^*^-- (Comp. 23. 1. Rem.).
2. The part. pass. Pe. *Q-i^) , Ethpe., Pa. and Ethpa. ; e. g.
*CQCDjZ| , JCQCDj , are regularly inflected, with the retention
of the middle radical. Instead of the last two forms, how-
ever, Palpel. and Ethpalp. ( 25. D) are more in use; e. g.
Rem. The last remark holds good also of Shaphel, which occui*s
more rarely (Comp. 1. above).
35. Doubly Irregular and Defective Yerhs.
1. By Doubly Irregular Yerbs are understood those in
which occur two of those letters which usually give rise to
irregularities. In the inflection of these verbs, either one
or both of those letters may retain their peculiarities. This
class of verbs consists of (vid. Lud. de Dieu, p. 340, sq.); a)
Yerbs ^ and 13 ; e. g. Imj , Aph. %jJDd1 to ajpjprom ; b)
Yerbs ^S) and ]]"; e. g. \1I\ to come^ Aph. jiZu] , Iflol to heal.,
Pa. aXo1 , ]2)1 to boil, Ethpe. ^^iilZl ; c) Yerbs J!a and ]] ',
DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 77
e. g. ISnl to swear ^ imperat. i V) i, fut. Ik5]j , infinit. 'jlo'lLo ,
Aph. ^AJk)! ; |:l ^(? sprout^ imperat. .klu, Aph. %^ol
and -A.l^l ; d) Yerbs li and B ; e. g. 1 p to chide^ imperat.
^"lo , infinit. ]^k? ; ^1] ^6> 5^ displeased^ Aph. J^*
2. To Defective verbs (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 344:) belong
the following, in so far as they occur in the language, either
in individual forms only, or have borrowed their defective
forms from synonymous verbs, or, finally, vary from the
regular verb in inflection and interpunction. a) Impersonal
Verbs. From JDjl to he hit^ occurs only the part. act.
^j1 it hefits. From tfLo appear the 3 sing. fern. pret.
Aj|Lo it is disagreeable^ the part. act. fem. \i^ and the 3
sing. fem. fut. ttolZ ; and from Uo and 1V appear the act.
o and It* it is suitable.
b) The following defective verbs are completed from
others which are synonymous : * nNno to mount up^ part,
act. nOXm ; the other tenses of this verb are formed from
.ncoj , imperat. jQcd , fut. -Qcaa , infinit. nrnV> , Aph. cQcdI ,
-n 7 7 7 IN
part, .ooft^o ^ Ethpa. .oVAnn]. A similar complement is
7 ^7
found in t^Ol-a to give (see 29. 1. Rem.), imperat. *scn ,
infinit. \^] fut. \ES from \L , Ethpe. .oouZl'l
c) Those which differ in form and inflection are t-^O"?
to run^ imperat. ^JOl ; ^l] to go away and 12] to come
(see 28. 2. 3. Rem.); also looi to be (see 32. 1. Rem.
and 38), fut. |oou and joau ; also from looi is found a
fut. apocopate ]oiJ , loiZ , plur. tOOU , etc., having the signi-
fication of the conjunctive as well as of the usual future
(comp. Agrell. Otiola Syr. p. 46) ; lAs to drink^ with ]
prosthet. ^L\ , imperat. ^As"| , part. lA , fut. IAaj , infinit.
IAaSd ; ^1 , Aph. ^iOkCTi to believe ; 11** (see App. to 32),
to live. Finally, in four verbs 3 rad. Olaph. ; e. g. "U^ ,
Uq^ , 11 1 ? 1^)2] (1>2), which merely occur in Pa. and its
V8 DOUBLY IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.
passive, the second syllable qiiiesces in L, as in Verbs 8
Gutt. (see 13. 1. Eem.), and 1 is retained in all of the
tenses and moods, while its vowel falls back upon the
preceding vacant consonant ; e. g. 3 sing. fern. pret. I] > o ,
The formation is as follows ; pret. Pa. |ajq , part. V-n^
infinit. oUik) , indperat. "Uo. fut. laldj, Ethpa. Ui^l"
part. U^Ai , infmit. ojloAi , fut. "llr^Aj.
80
PARADIGM I.
like EthtaphaX.
C^H
like Aphel.
'vj -^ -vl "^ -v|
J^^ r^ r^ j^ ^^
q '^ '^
d) <3) i.<:i) ^^ h^
f '4 -^ i -^
v
4 4
U
a
|
# 3 1
\'V
^
'1'^
J^ ^ "^ -vl
Q
'vl tvj 'vl
'i
'^ v ^%
4
^Q ->^Q -^q ..(
I ! I :l "-I I r^ '4
f f f f
^ CJ J^ f^
-v4 Vj -^ >>J -vj -nI
ri
1/
<o
V ^nu
1
J d j ^-^ ^-^ -J i ;d y ^.
.^-3) ^ ^<4) >^ ^-^ ^^ .^*9) ^-^ ^^ r.-^)
i
4
J CI CI
Regular Verb.
81
I
:l4
t
'^ '?i ';:! ci '^ '^ '-3 ;:J
;;--
^ '^ ^
"3 "3 ^ '"^ ^^ q "^ '
.-t
'I 'I
q
^vj tTvi .TM 'T;-
Q
^ I
'3 c^ a '::} 'CT '-3 '^ a '^1 '^
1
n
^1 ^1
'9 :g
^ .q .g -d -g -q ^q :'
1/ :^ ^
1
q Q
Q Q
b^Q t-Q
" n t-Q
f-^ .<:i)
'^^ -^
^ |=L
^ fj.
'^ '^ '^ CI '::j '^^l '^ '^ '^ ^ cj '^
'I 'I
J--
^4
W ^^ r^ r^ '*T'
c
f'^J f*^
* n ^ ^ /*n| ^e^ *^
*a ^o ^ */\ 4.0
-^ ^ t:P \ zP
1 ^
J T
.1
1^ CO CO
44_: o
(M 1-1
-^ CO CO
1 ^
82
PARADIGM II.
1
;|
? 1
'
d
*6
'3
00
[ f, f,^ =, ^t^ =, \ =,^ ^,^ =* \
. tTvJ ^^ ^*v4 ^-vj (Tvl .rvj .TvJ .TvJ .J^ ,r^
^o ooooooooo
% 1 .\"'-' V-i
o
o ^
%
'o^ 'oT o o o o c
r^ -^ -^a '^a ^ '-^ K
<
r 'o' *" 'oT
1
^d
1
" f f ( V * * ''* - **" ^' ^'
ivT ^ t?^ tT^ t!^^ t?^ ^"^ rT^ ^ "^"^ ^'^
31
f- (^ (^
^ ^ r^
i '^ 1 1 1 1 '1 ';^
3 :l '4.
'^ '3'
C7 C7 ^c^ {::][ sq" ^jqp c^ c^ cj jq- c:^
^d <^o
n^.:^^^
^ '^'
i '^ 1 1 1 1 '1 If S ;l H
"a
^1 \
1
^ 1
C^CO CO (M (M 1-tQ^COCO C^ (N i-i
}
1^ CM C-.
Verbs First Rad.Olaph.
83
o
o
'^
"-I tr^ W !H :5i 5i rvi -vj <
cT-i 6 o 6 --^ -^ --^ o o ^-^
I
a -a
o o
o o
^3 ^-^ -^ ^"^ 'o ^3 ^3 -^ "^ ^3
^1 ^%
/TT/Tf ^^%2 ^:<L r .- ;-- -^ V2. ?i ^;:i';^
-~1 ^
o
ej^
:^'^^ '7^ '^ U '; a '^ :^a
t
*~- "^vl ^O
'1:1
"^ h;:! h;^ h;:! .^ ""^ ""^ ""-^ ^'^
1
'fl
V3. f;:^ ri ^^ "77 '^ t^ r-i r^ f n
J -J J 5 -J 4 4 ,-3 -^il
1
^e?(Nf^co CO c^ oi rH^cocc oi ^'^cJl ^Ci^*
84
PARADIGM III.
1
i
}
1
o
5'T
I
H..i
<o i
f *v ^ *< %- ^, ^< *,^^ <=* <=<
^ ^^ ^^ i-*^ tT^ .r>v| ^vi ,rv| tT-l ^
^oooooooooo
^^. .-4. n. n. ?4. n. ^-4. n. H. H.
-ni ^ "^si -vi o : 1 -^ ri r
4:0
n. '4..
i
'4. /I. '-4. '-1. .-4. '-4. H. '-4. '-4. '-4.
1
'0" '0'
n. 4
p = f f f f. f f ^<^_ f,_
.-^ r^ r^ .-^ .-^ ^-^ .-^ r:i ri :^
vt A "A 'A A A A A., n. A..
1/
'5
11
* 1
1
4
<'0
0- <i t <
1
.rj "S fS iT-i
4. j4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4
*v| vl 'vl ^g
1
n.
o 1 "^
-v| -v|
i-l'H-'
->4 -^
Cl^ CO 00
I S
.. y- 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4.
1 ^ =1 -^ r^ rr
3
^.4
' ^ rH^COCO <M <N -i
}
Sl
Verbs First Bad. Jud.
85
i
AA.\
44
t
4.4.
1
o V
m%mm-
33
^
^3 '^ -^ -^ ^-o ^3 ^3 ^-^ -^ ^3
4. '-4. H. -^. H. ^, 4, ^. .^.n.
Ail:
'^ "^ c^ ':3
f 1
.. H. A. A. A. XA.
74X
I '1
^1 .-^ ^-^ -r^
'4. H. H. <
1
1
'^ -::i -::i y. H "^ '^3. H^i .^"^
4. VI. VI. /I. -4. !. ,^ ^, ^ VI.
2 m.
2 f.
3 in.
3 f.
2 m.
2 f.
1 c.
Plur.
3 m.
3 f.
2 m.
2 f.
1 c.
il ',
m
PARADIGM IV.
^- r^ "-"^ .J^ N*^ r^ ^"^ ^"^ ^-^ r^ -^
1 ^iL % a : 'S ^ii ^ii ;a : -^
1 ^ ^^ ^ 1 '^ -3 :1 J <^ t
'1
^3
T
^1
|-^
o
CO
4 .:i .ti .-ri .^ :^ ^ H .^ ^
J <i <l <d d d ; 1 <.<i .<a . t-
'1
d
fcr tar
CCK>
5 ^s 's ^s ^^ '^ ^s ^^ ^.a ^4 ^4
'1
'3
0=
s
.51
d
ri
1
' fa ^Q :]a ^^ :; ^s 'S >s -^ii -ii
1 ^^ 4 :| '^ 3 =^ ^ .^, 1
3
.3
^^^i
"r % * ^* f f f f f %_
i 's '^ ^ 'ii 'ii a '4L '^ '^ ii
S- 1 -^^ ^ ^ '^ 3 =1 4 ^ T
'1
^3
ft
<
. '4 '41 '^ '^ 'iL 'il '^ 'il % S
1 .|^-^ vs
1
1
^1
4. ss,^' -'
Verbs Mid. Rad. OlajjJi Quiescent.
87
'I
^ fn ^n "^ -"^ ^'^ -^"^ ^^ ^n "^
1
n ^ n r^ -^"^ "^"^ ^n ^n "^
^ :a ^^ ^^ ^^ ^ -l^ci
'I 'I
"3 r^ t?^
'i '^ '^
111
'^ ? '4
'^ '^ c:j
"{ 1 1 1
Qi 'vi <
a
1
"^p r^ r^
^M. :il :^
r
1
i
^q ,!^ ^-^ ;3
3 a a
I ' -i
'^ ':::! ':::J'^
: .^ :il^^
'1 .3 '1 '
'I 'I
|:|
-vi -^ "^ *- n 1 'vi ^
1 i 1
v
<h t.-sj) ^-sp
ii4
a
'^A
SI
d
! *V|
Vil '^ ^
1 1 1
^
:a S 'i
1 ' 'I
1^3 '11
i>a
51 a
31
1
'S
1
':::! ^^ '-3
'^ 'il 'il
"I ' 4
'^ c:| cj'^
% a a'il
a ^3 -1'
i^ !^ S 'ia ^3 'i :| ia S'i
1 p -^ ' ^^^3^-u1
^^g
f.
1
Part.
P. m.
f.
88
PARADIGM V.
^
^
%- *# <=< ** **
Vl '^ "^ "^ "^
^ "^ -^ -VJ
Q
. 1 o.
V -T/
i
^
11
l
I
vj
,51
a
CO
"3"
CO
~ "^ ~ n rt n r '^ O "^ U
"3 3 "
^ v.-i,
.Q .n .g .Q .g .(j .^ .n ;a ^Q
^ ^1 I I ^1 ^ :^ I J 4.
1 ./o^v^a
f f f _ f ( f , f f f-,
vT Vj "Vj "^ P^J -"xj "^nJ >J >s| *^
Q hQ hQ hQ hq ^n hC
1/ -^ 1/ 1/
rv4 V|
M
.q .q
M
a "8 a ^
^ 1/
1
I
1 ;i ;i ^
jft^ CO CO
<M (M i-l
CO CO C^ <M rH
Verbs Mid. Bad. Van and Jud.
89
it
'^ '^ '^ '^^ '^ '^ '-3 '^ Ci '^
rn\mm
"i :^ r?7
q .^ "Q "q "0 h3 ,-^ ,-g.ci
1^1 ^C 4,1 4^
^
V--V ^n fv| ^-^ "vj *=*-- f-i fn -vj "^sa fn
lfr-r-|:(l|;i;i;41
llflfl-llllW
hQ hQ
ri r^ f^ ^#^
-^ ^-vl *^ -v|
^ '^ <X
y\nmvn
^ vji -^-j
H
-f-O
\
^3 ^g '3 '9 ^i ^^ '3 ^3-3
^^
r^ "^
1-1
:4
I
1
I s -^ 1^- s
CO CO <M CM I I
If^Q-i
90
PARADIGM VI.
V
1
V
1
CM
CO
r yi Hvl u>i H>1 uyl H>| H >1 Kyi u yl
1 -1 J -1 =3 1 A =3 a "1.
"> '^ v^-i
i
V
1
Id '1 "1 "1 "1 "1 "1 a %
1 'i^- v^^
"1 1 "1 "i "1 1 =1 "1 .1 1.
'I
i
> 5^"" ^^ ^^ ^>- '5^'' t^^ t;^'' ^^ ^" -5^
i --i 'n '-^ '-i --2 n '-^ n %
1 i,'-'i'-i
51 r *"'" ^
^!^
'I
I
^
& I
;=!.
<4J S Uh
w S *j 3 <*j
ja^COCO t^ N r-H^COCO <N <M
S !S
C^ <N
Verbs Third Bad. Olaph.
91
53.
'3 '-2
:V
il
a ^-d'
'^ n
^51 '5i
J .;i
1
i a *-
92
PARADIGM VII.
.4
q
1-61
!'8
6]
Q
CO
CO
"^ "^ -n| 'vl
^^ tTvl ^.^^ ^
61 r- ^
^^
^ ""vl 'vl -v| "^
tTvi jM rv| .Tvi r::4
-61 .61 .61 -q -6^
-61
^
%
>.
^
1 ^1 1 1 i 1 ; 1 :i t
.3
0.1
6 f
C
= 4
40
1/ .^
^1
-V4 r>g
a :
-6
C
'vl "^^ "^ >vj ."vl ^ "^ "-^4 --nJ "^
t
^'1/'i
'I
'' 'f^-vs
~v4 >s4
9
s ^
Verbs First Bad. Nun.
93
'I
\
1 \ 1 '\ 1 1 \ J \\
'9 '*
rTvj tfxl .r-4
^
ii
^v| ^'^ "^n
11
'fil
q
^
a.
f :
^ c:J '2J ':^ =7 '^ '^ '::j -i:^:^
f
":5 rs ^s ^a ^^ ^-^ "
I i .14 .| 4
<=t| =(
q d
r^ "^ ^ ^ !3 ^^ ''^ !3 1 Q Q
^ ^a '3 ^i a ^3 -^'a ^-a.^
a .a q d-d ^ .3 q '3 ^
11
.3.3
r-J .'vi
^ '^ '^ CJ C^^^
f
' 1/
9 q
1
r^ r^ r-J tt <=!3 ''^^ r^i r^ ^ri
'% ^% -a ^1 I ^ a .^1
q 9 j, q 'Oy ^ >\ I'q
d"fil
Q^ <M c^ ,!^ ^ w
^ I S '- s
94
PARADIGM VIII.
^
>,^
q
CO
093
^
-^
rO
'i
f ". ^j *t^^ =, . ''4 ^ ** ' ^,
tr-4 .T^ r^ r^ -^ ^^ tTvl K^ fvj ,j^
g ^1 1 1 'I ' =1 1 :i H.
-
^ 1
'I
*V4 >vj
^..^ tK.rs l.^ "^.rs t-.e. t-.rs ^ q '^'J t-^ -'^
1'-^ V^T
'-r^ >>-^ b,^ t>-^
.a ^a .a ^a ^a
-*o
^
'I
P < Q i
' 1
^ , f_ f ^ f f f P f^ P f
"Vl Vj ^ -^ J^ ^y -s^ "^ ^J* J^
'1
I '9 '9 'i
'I
>*s f.^
^ ^1 I I 'I =^ J 'I ^
^o ^o
g ^
Verhs Middle Bad. Doubled.
95
n
'^ t^ ^i::! ^:^ '^ '^ '^ f^ :^ '^
.vj ^.7; "^T;* %^ ^-^ r-i .r-j ^r^ ^rs r-i
1
i-i
9 -J
-'1 r4 tTvi r^ /^ ^n "^TL -"^ '^'^ ^TL
'^ 1 '1 "1 ^ ^ ^% : '1'^
a 1/ - -
3 '::j ci ':::i ^^ '^ '^ c{ ':::i '-3
;'S ^'S -s "^'s s ^"S "'S vs -^ -'S
i i ^ . i I 'i i ii
^ a a
-n. ,7;! .*:;; .7;; &;: o. .Tu -^ ^
'9 "I ' a 'i 9 ^ '"^ ""^
f
H 9 a ,a a -i a
'^ '^ '^ '^ *=^ '^ '-5 <:^ c:i'^
^9 ^a a ^a a 9 ^a ""^
i
^1^1
:n. c;! r;j r;| ':;: ^n ^n. r^i r;! ^n.
(^ CO CO C^ (M 1-f
CO CO (M (M it
^*-
PARADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL POINTS.
PAKADIGM OF THE VERB WITH DIACRITICAL
POmTS.
( Compare 4. Rem. ).
3 m. 3 /. 2 m. 1 c. j
Preter. Sing. ^\4^ 1 A!^ Al^O
^54ol ' Al4o
aU^
Al4o
AI40
J Plur. q14^ 0^4^ i
*
Fut. Sing. ^Q^nj 1 ^Q^oZ
^a4)Z
^ofcoZ
^C4)Z
Plur. ^q14^ ^q^4^ !
^ 1 =
Imper.Sing. m. ^Q^JQ ^Q^O IPlur. m. qIq^O qIq^^ |
Infill. Vi^a^ VV^ciSo \\^n^ VNj^nLD nl^n^ etc. |
Part. Act. ^54^ m. U^^' f.
^54nSD
Passive ^^u4^ ^J)u4^ ^4^
^4oAk) ^\4)ALd ^^4iAk5
Rem. The forms of the verb which are omitted in the foregoini^
Table, are not marked with diacritical pcints, since they may easily
De recoofnized from their formation.
VERBS WITH SUFFIXES. 97
36. Verbs with /Suffixes.
The union of verbal forms with suffixes is much more
simple in Syriac than in Hebrew. It should be remarked
in general that the vowel of the first or second syllable
either falls away ; e. g. in the 3 fern, and 1 sing. pret.
and Q in the fut. ; or the vowel of the second syllable falls
back upon the preceding consonant ; e. g. in the same per-
It
sons of pret. Pe. in w^hich of the first syllable falls away.
The verbal endings ^ and o quiesce in . and Verbal
forms, unless they terminate with *jl- and Q- , remain
unchanged before the suffixes tQS , ^-^^ Also the character-
istic vowel of the first syllable of Pa. and Aph. remains
unchanged, and the suffixes of the 3 plur. are attached to
verbs in the form of separate pronouns. In respect to the
particular persons the following should be remarked (see
Table of the pronouns, 16. and table of the verbs, with
suffixes, 36).
A. Preterit with Suffixes.
3 sing. masc. ^\^ before the suffixes #00 , ^-lo in the
2 plur. masc. and fem. The other persons ^^-4^ with
suft'. a. 1.
3 sing. fem. AS^^ before ^QD , ^^* The others Al^
with sutf. a. 1.
2 sing. masc. AL^^ unchanged, and by way of exception
with sulf. c.
2 sing. fem. ^A^4^ is changed into ^AL^ with suff. b.
. sing. com. AK^ forms A^fr^ with suff. a. 1.
3 plm\ masc. Q^J^ becomes Q^^ with suff. b. or w^ith .
parag., excepting before tOO , ^.aO*
3 plur. fem. o^fex) either \>4o with suff. c. or with ,
parag. ,^ i S(} n*
98 FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES .
2 plur. masc. and fern, and 1 com. retain the forms
.oAl4^, ^i^^^4^ , ^^4^ with suff. c.
Rem. The 3 fern. 2 masc. and 1 com. sing, in some forms with
suffixes are only distinguished from each other by the diacritical
point, which, in the first person, stands over the consonant (vid.
4). Verbs Med. E. with suff. follow the form of Verbs Med. A.,
and retain where the latter retain ; e. g. 3 sing. fem. Al^S
with suff. OlAl4^ Yet the form OlAV)> occurs in Ps. cxviii.
167, instead of which, since no similar example occurs, the punctua-
tion should perhaps be . The same is the case even in Verbs
Med. Olaph. Quies. So the vowel -.-. belonging to ^|* is changed
into i over Ol^js ; but in the 1 sing., remains; e. g. ^Aj^|a*
In respect to verbs 1 rad, f and a quiescent, it should be remarked,
that where, in the regular verb, the first radical is without a vowel, (
retains its and ji its ; e. g. OlA^^Of* But where, in the regular
verb, - stands over the fii*st radical, this class of verbs retains it in
the same manner; e. g. '^\ with suff. Oi;iO( , ^^.^ with suff.
t|\ i Defective verbs, or those with Med. Rad. doubled, retain
in the pret. unchanged, like the form ^\4^ The 3 fem. and 1
sihg. change into ; e. g. Aqj with sufi". OlAoj ; but they remain
unchanged before tOO and ^.a^ ; e. g. tQDMK Pa. and Aph. retain
the vowel of the first syllable unchanged. In respect to of the
second syllable, it should be observed that where Pe. retains , Pa.
1i 7
retains _ ; but where - falls away or falls back upon the first sylla-
ble , is lost. The 3 sing. masc. and 3 plur. masc. and fem. in Pe.
and Pa. with suft'., are hence all similar, and can only be distinguished
from each other by their signification in the context ; e. g. OlX^^
(from ^^4^ ^^ \i*^i)* But these forms are exceptions to this rulQ
when standing before tOD and ^--^*
B. Future with Suffixes.
Throughout the sing, and in the 1 plm\, Q , which has been
inserted, remains unchanged before the suffixes tOO and
IMPERATIVE WITH SUFFIXES. 99
^^* Before the other suffixes it falls away, and the form
v^^OJ takes the sufF. a. 1. ; but if the suff. is in the 3
person, only the suffix, a. 2. is used. The other persons
are treated according to the rule laid down. In the plur.
the 2 and 3 niasc. and fem. remain unchanged with sulf. c.
Rem. aji parag. of the 3 sing. fern, falls away, and is connected
with the sufF. after the form \)*^JDL* What is true of Q in Pe. is
also true in Pa. in respect to the falling away of the vowel of the last
syllable, excepting before ^OO and ^^^^ In the 3 sing. masc. with
suff. of 3 person masc. ; e. g. ^uOlOiN^ni , _ appears sometimes
over Q But this form is neither mentioned by Amira nor
by Sionita. The 2 sing, sometimes takes ju before the suff. of the 1
sing, and plur. The same is true in respect to the imperat. ; e. g.
iZoioZ Jj put me not to shame. In Verbs Med. E. the middle
radical retains , and in Verbs 3 Gutt., _ This peculiarity, Amira,
p. 3 89, refers exclusively to quadriliterals , i. e. to Aph. ; but examples
are also found in Pe. ; .e. g. Ps. Ixxi. 9. ed. Erpen. il iOn*^Z |J ,
ed. Paris. iinnZ , and in Pa. Ps. cxviii. 172, 1 1 1 'n\L* Amira
adds that this form is found particularly in prohibitory negations,
which remark is likewise confirmed by the examples given. The
persons of the fut. with ^ remain unchanged. But it shotild be
remarked that if the form ^Qa4qJ takes the suff. of the 3 per. sing.
masc; e* g. ^CTIaJoN/^OI, sometimes falls away; e. g. Matt. viii.
25, ^010*rJuLJ)
C. Imperative with Suffixes.
The 2 sing. masc. ^q4^ remains unchanged with suff. a.
2. of the 1 per. sing, and plur., and of the 3 sing. fem.
When the suff. is in the 3 sing. masc. the form of suff. c.
is used.
In the 2 sing. fem. of the form ^Ao^o with sail', b. .^
quiesces in
In the 2 plur. masc. oikO^O passes into Q^^Q-^ with
buff. b.
100 LNTINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.
The ^ plur. fern, is rare, and omits t before the suffix.
Rem. The imperative with and in Pe. and in the other
7 7
conjugations, retains its vowel unchanged ; e. g. i1 iSSn hear me,
>,*01i\no receive him. Tlie forms of the imperat. pass., with an
active signification, also remain unchanged ; e. g. V^>M ^^ reminded,
with sufif. jkX^'fDyLl* In respect to the transposition of Q in the
plur. it should be remarked that | of Verbs |2) ( 28. 1) loses its
vowel But in those [i Verbs whose imperat. does not take
*. 7 ;
Q , this vowel is inserted after the first radical ; e. g. 0;Ld( with suff.
^010;SdO( Yet this transposition of Q does not always take place,
as the form tjiJoNofc^ sometimes occurs. In Pa. and Aph. _, in
7 -X 7 ^ *. 7
Verbs 3 Gutt., , falls away; e. g. Ok > *^ with sufF. %jk(J\Q^*Sl
praise him, oikOOj with suflf. -OlQ-iQO( lead him hither. Verbs
\l are an exception, as they retain ; e. g. wjJQo|^ | do me good.
Also a form with parag. sometimes occurs ; e. g. tONo^ with sufF.
. m. inV^r>o In the fern, plur, the paragogic form is the more
usual ; but in Pa. and Aph. both forms occur together.
D. Infinitive with Suffixes.
7 *
The infinitive Pe. \.4^^ with suff. a. 1. remains un-
changed before the suff. of the 2 per. plur. The suffixes of
the other persons are attached to the form ^4^k3 But
the infinitives of the remaining conjugations with a are
treated as feminine substantives, the feminine suffixes of
which (those of the 3 plur. excepted, which are attached
separately to the form with Q) they take, attached to the
termination Zol (Compare 45. 2. and 48. B. feminines,
declension 1).
Rem. In Pe., where of the second syllable falls away, some
grammarians insert, in its place, ; e. g. Ol St^nV^V Buxtorf adds
yet two other forms with Q oc Q inserted after the third radical ; e. g.
PARTICIPLES WITH SUFFIXES. 101
wiOlQ-^Q^D and wtOloN^nV)* If the vowel be , as in Verbs
Ql , it remains unchanged ; e. g. GlSOOlQ^*
E. Participle with Suffixes.
Participles, which are considered as nouns, take their
suffixes. This occurs, however, more rarely in the part, act.,
where either prepositions are used ; e. g. 5^^ , ^^iSn who
seek thee^ or a noun formed from the participle is joined with
the suffix; e. g. jA supporting^ OljO^l his helper. On the
contrary participles with separate pronouns (vid. 18. 4.
Rem.), or with afformatives ( 20) form the present tense.
102
KEGULAE VERBS WITH SUFFIXES.
Proper Form.
Sing. ] c.
2 m.
Pret. Pe. ) y^
Sing. 3 m.) ^
. >iV^o
2 f.
y^
inV^Q
3f.
2 m.
tS46
i&^
;av^
- ^AV^<^
AV^
J^l^
2f.
1 c.
iAl4)
Ai4o
Ai:^
^'Al4>
^t^^
Plur. 3 m. oii^
3f.
2 m.
V
o"A}^k^
wiJuoAL^
2f.
:ai^
^Al^D
1 c.
.^,
J^i^^
. >^lV^O
Infinit.
^5^^^
.^1X4^1:1^0
I imp. sing.) VJ^Q^^
' 2 m.) '
^.4J^^q4^
^K4qSd
2 f.
wAci43
>i iXq4q
Plur. 2 m. qLq4^
iqI^qo
2f.
^1q'4o
^'ut.sing.) V^^J
3 m. ) ^^*b' '-
.Ai^fe>n,3
5^^^4^
.AnS^oi
Plur. 3 m. .o\f^,n.i
oV^rM
^jq14^
nfoSt)n.i
Pret. Pa.
"^6
.ilNfcjD
>^^
^i^Kf)^
Infin.Pa. oL^nLo
>^2o\f)nV)
^Zol^'nk)
xD^ZoSf^nV) I
REGULA.R VERBS WITH SUFFIXES.
103
] S m.
1-
3f.
Plur. 1 c.
2 m.
2 f .
cnS^
^S^
^dai^
Ol2\l4i3
oi^^^^
(tHo
.qdAS^o
^Ail^o
; ^CTU^^I^
oiAL^D
(tHo
5f
*
^aiaki\l|^
GuAl^
^'Al^D
*
1
1 cnWla
ci2^^^
1 *
.qoAL^
^Al^
^moLAr)
9 -x. r
P -X. . 7
X P >t . 7
1 "^ "^v * ''
1 i'^Q^{)0
.k^QJO^AjO
^Gu!L^
.. .T, 7
v P ..i 7
1 .^va';;
1 ........
. , Ai ^KAo
waOujoAL^
ouoAL^o
^o"a1^
?(
*
^oia-LiM^^
^'Al^
*
*
1
oiiL^
*
X P. 7
i'^iVAo
! n^^Q^
oi!i4ci^
^S4^
^anL^'ciV)
.AV^'^oVrt
; ,jcna^a4o
01.1.^04^
^
X-
.^aicu.S(i4)
x-
1
1 ^oial^Qo
oioL^Qo
^
4f
^au.i^XQ4o
rrii >Ko^p
1
*
oixl^^^j
t:^^
^oaLa^oj
.-01jJq14qj
oijol^xnj
^jq14^
.aaiaL^^j
P 9. . -
oiIIAo
oill^D
.^
fOa\/\o
. n\^o
oi7Ql4'nV>
cfi'Zal^'o^
^'Zal^Qk)
.qdZqI^JqLd,
^oZoi^^OSO
104 SUFFIXES TO VERBS WITH THIRD RADICAL OLAPH QUIESCENT
37. Suffixes to Verbs with third Radical Olajph
Quiescent (]])
Yerbs ]] ( 32) differ so widely in their mode of connection
with suffixes, from regular verbs, as to demand a separate
treatment. It may be remarked in general :
1. That the termination iL either loses 1 , as in the 3 sing,
masc. pret. Pe., or in the sing. masc. of the imperat. Pa.,
Aph., Shaph. with suff. c ; or ] is changed into a. movable,
as in the infinit. Pe. with suff. a. 1, excepting before .QO ,
^jJd , where the ^ which has arisen from | also falls away,
according to some. So the termination of the fut. V- is
changed into a- with suff. b.
2. Forms which end in a. either omit entirely, and
connect the suff. a. 1, with a. movable, as 3 sing. masc. pret.
Pa. and Aph. (and sometimes Pe. with wk final), or
remains with suff. b, as 2 sing. masc. imperat. Pe., and,
without exception , remains also in the first case before
X f>
oa , ^^^ The terminations of the imperat. fem. .-k_ ,
^^i.> are changed into -^ (or ujL) with suff. b, and into
l-- with suff. c.
3. The forms which end with Q otiant,, take for Q the
forms OQ (and o].-) ; and for Q.^- the form Qa unchanged in
all the preceding cases with suff. b ; e. g. 3 plur. masc.
pret. of all the conjugations excepting Peal.
In respect to individual persons of this class of verbs with
suffixes, the following should be remarked :
A. Preter. with Suffixes.
(Comp. Table of Verbs JJ with Suffixes.
Tlie 3 sing. masc. P.t loses 1 and appends suff b, and
suff. ^OU of the 3 sing. masc. to the form -L^^^
FUTURE WITH SUFFIXES. 105
The 3 sing. fern. A!L.. takes, unchanged, suff. a. 1. The
same is true of the 1 sing. Aj-^.i*
2 sing. masc. A^yi takes, unchanged, suff. c.
2 sing. fern. .uAjlL.. attaches suff. b. to the form ^A^.t*
3 plur. masc. Q^yt is changed into OQ^ , (and o|^ai)with
suffb. ^ \. \.
3 plur. fem. ^^yt remains unchanged with suff. c.
2 masc. and fem. and 1 plur. take, unchanged, suff. c.
Hem. Yerbs 3 rad. ^ , as they are mostly intransitives,
take no suffixes in Peal. But Pa. and Aph. of these verbs
with a transitive signification, as well as of Yerbs U with the
same ending, take suff. a. 1, with the falling away of ,
excepting before ^a:3 , iQS , where remains. The 3 sing.
fem. remains unchanged in Pa. Aa\.. and Aph. AlL.."!* The
same is true also of the 1 sing, in both conjugations. The
3 plur. masc. occurs mostly before the suff., with O doubled
{see Amira^ p. 372); e.g. Ps. liv. 3, ed. MJrpen.^ oiOQlii
they have sought them. Sometimes the original 1 appears
4v 7
before both 00; e. g. Ps. Ixxvii. 16, ^oo(p^ they have seen
thee. In Pa. Q^yi and Aph. Q^ytl? falls away before
the suff., and jl becomes movable ; but Q quiesces in ; e. g.
O*^ with suff. >-cLjjL ; oAiVwith suff. ^QDoi/ul* The 3
plur. fem. in Pa. and Aph. in the simple form, takes the suff.
given in the tab. with the falling away of over *j ; e. g.
waOIi Vytl* The paragogic form of these two conjugations
takes suff. c. given in the table, without change.
B. Future with Suffixes,
The 3 sing. masc. floJ and All the persons which terminate
with \L , affix to the form ^^SyJ suff. b. The 2 and 3 plur
masc. and fem. remain unchanged, and are connected, as in
the regular verb, with suff. c.
106 IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH SUFFIXES.
Rem. This mode of formation also occurs in Pa. and
Apli. Sometimes also takes the place of in the suif.
3 sing. fern. ; e. g. Matt. i. 19, oujju that he should dismiss
her^ or in Pa. ; e. g. Luke xiii. 18, 20, OUlDjj I shall liken
it. And with the falling away of -; e. g. tOSOja] / will
show you^ the correctness of which Lud. de Dieu^ p. 398,
doubts.
C. Imperative with Suffixes.
2 sing. masc. *^yi is unchanged with suif. h.
2 sing. fern. J^yr is changed into j-^y with suff. b.
2 plur. masc. Q^.. is changed into OQ^.t (and op..) with
suff. b. ^ ^ ^
2 plur. fein. ^^i i\.. affixes suff. c. to the form J-^y**
Hem. The imperat. Pa. (Jyt and Aph. Jj..| take the suf-
fixes of the pret. in connection with the 3 or 1 person ; e. g.
oiflDf heal her. The same is true in the plur. masc. of the
same conjugations. In the fem., the paragogic form with
suff. c. is the usual one. (Compare 2, above.)
D. Infinitive with Suffixes.
In the infinit. Pe. V-or^, in place of ] , ^ without a vowel
is inserted with suff. a. 1. In respect to the falling away
of A, before ^QO, ^xO , (see 1. above,) Lud. de Dieu^ p. 395,
doubts. The infinitives of the other conjugations are treat-
ed as in the regular verb. (Compare 36, D.)
E. Participle with Suffixes.
(Compare 20 and 36, E.)
Passive.
Active.
Plur.
Sing.
Plur. Sing.
vlV^,v\
^A
^^k '^k
\>
^^^
,S^^^
^ \ 7,^^
ff.
^^
!r.
PARTICIPLE WITH SUFFIXES. 107
The participles of the other conjugations are inflected in
a similar manner, retaining the characteristic vowels ; e. g.
Pa. act. .oZu^^ ye a^/l', .Aph. ^ujQiD we tharik^ Ethpe.
^1 iT^ASd we turn about.
General Bemark,
Yerbs of the form of piJD to console^ never lose the third
radical letter 1 when taking a suffix, but throw back i'^s
vowel upon the middle radical, which, according to 36, usu-
ally stands vacant ; e. g. pret. 3 sing. masc. .jujIjLo , ^]Il3 ,
3 p]!. masc. t-uJoVj::i, 5^o]ujd, fem. ^-^Ijld, .aaulAr:), fut. 3
sing. masc. ^aJJ-lOJ, ^ | i n 1, imperat. 2 sing. masc. ^jJuVi^a,
P 7 7 i ^ ^ 17 7 * T
uiOuV*^ , fem. wijufu^ , ^010^1^2 ) 2 plur. masc. toVaJO ,
..7 7 P. .7
108
VERBS |] WITH SUFFIXES.
Proper Form.
Sing. 1 c.
2 m.
2 f.
^'ret. Sing. Pe. j '{{a
1 r 7
3 m. Pa. ^ wkQja
7 7
wftJ.JlCLKA
P 7
71 7
Pe. ( 2-0
^/- Pa. ( Alm^
p,p
1 c. Zu-o
*
yt^\a
. ^asTAj'^
P^wr. 3 w. -j
X 7
. 7 1
7
3 /. ] ^^
-O 7
P 7
..p 7
p * 7..
R 7
/?l/w. Tr^=^
^;n!i
^'^
^a^-'nV)
2 m. ] Pa. \ -^.^
P 7
*
*
2 /. --^
^ll-^
*
*
PZwr. 2 m. 0'^
*
*
2/ ^\
P -^tP
!
*
Pwiwr. 3 w. VrQJ
7\ -R
VERBS
IJ WITH SUFFfXKS.
109
j 3 m.
3f.
Plur. 1 c.
2 TO.
~2f. 1
^ 7
01^
. P 7
p
7 7
X p
. 17
-R I 7
1
ai2-)
GlisJr^
oi2L^
)<
- A ^
^/u-^
X 7
dioo-o
diol-jo
.CUCJ
X -x 7
.QO00*r)
-^ -X 7
-^ .X 7
.. p 7
pT.
p^r.
-p':.
V 1^
^ p i< T.
au;nV>
6u\cx}i)
7 -n
X
P 7
6u^
. P 7
P 7
jf
jt
IP
. ip
ip
^xp
jf
*
^IJ,LI
X 7
. .X 7
. .Xij7
X-
1
p-n .p
. p -^lP
^Vl
*
jf
^r^
.on ifo 1
-n -. i
110 AUXILIAKY VERBS, OR VERBS SUBSTANTIVE.
38. Auxiliary Verbs^ or Verbs Substantive.
1. There are in Syriac two auxiliary verbs (verbs sub-
IP
001 to be^ which, in Hebrew,
exists as Yau conversive, is used to form the moods and
tenses which are wanting (see 18. 4. Bern.). The other,
which is properly a noun, A^ being^ substance^ essence {essen-
tia)^ with Olaph prosthetic Lk\ , takes the place of the aux-
001, belongs to
Yerbs ]] , like which it is inflected, but in respect to which
it is to be particularly observed, that, when connected with
the participle, preter.or future, the 01 (with Linea occultans)
is not pronounced ; this is also the case when the verb is
IP X 7
001 *0k\M he
has begun. Upon the double formation of the fut. (oou
and looiJ, see 35, 2, c. The inflection of Lk\ is as follows :
Plur.
F, a M.
^Lj\ {we are)
m^La\ (ye are) .QQ^Aji|
aOUA^I {they are) .OOIaZLiJ
Sing.
F. C. M.
^LiV {lam) 1.
iLiV {tliou art) y^l^X 2.
GVj^LkX{he, she is) ^OloZul^'s.
2. In connection with U is formed Zu.^, which is inflect-
ed similarly to Aaf ; e. g. *^^a.S / arn not. tu] in connec-
tion with looi forms the imperfect; e. g. looi Lj] or looi
^cioluXhe was. The same tense is also expressed by looi
looi. looi doubled marks the pluperfect ; e. g. A^ooi AaOOI
/ had been. .
DERIVATION OF NOUNS. Ill
CHAPTEE III
The Noun.
39. Derivation of Nouns.
1. Nouns, as in Hebrew and Chaldee, are primitive,
derivative, and sometimes compounded. To primitives
belong nouns of one and two syllables, which indicate ani-
mals, plants, metals, numbers, members of the bodies of
animals, etc. (See Gesenius^ Lehrgeb. p. 478, sq.). Inasmuch
as they coincide with simple verbal forms, they are always
recognized as nouns by the nature of the object which they
designate ; e. g. \n\'^Jlesh, JOOl; gold^ i*^rno silver. The
derivatives, which are by far the most numerous, are form
ed partly from verbs (verbals), and partly from nouns
(denominatives).
2. The derivation of nouns is effected ; a) without any
change of the original word ; e. g. ^^So counsel, from
< \V) to counsel ; \>J^ mourning, from ^\s1 to mourn ;
or by a mere change of the vowel ; e. g. j^-SJsO king,
\i\ fetter ; h) by the falling away of the radical letter ; e. g.
\LM sleep, from ^a^ ; (As care, from Zi .-j ; (JQ^ the
heart, from .nn\ ; but especially c) by the addition of
formative letters or of entire syllables. Those letters, if
initial, are 1 , SsO , u, 2 , * ; if medial, they are ^ and Q ;
final, 1 , , Z Several of these formative letters are some-
times found in the same noun ; e. g. yi V)\ Z scholar,
Xl^QM dominion, 1ZoiV)i;V) compassion, 1Aa^0i\ fame.
1.12 XOUXS DERIVED FROM VERBS.
40. Nouns derived from Verbs.
Verbal nouns are kindred either to participles, and de-
note the subject or object of the action (Concrete Nouns), or
they are kindred to the infinitive, and receive the significa-
tion of the action or quality itself (Abstract Nouns). But
frequently in the formation of these nouns, rare or obsolete
forms of the infinitives and participles arc chosen. The
following tables present a collective view of the modes of
formation.
TABULAR VIEW OFDERIVATIVE NOUNS. 113
TABULAR VIEW
OF
NOUNS DERIVED FROM REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS.
I. PARTICIPIAL FORMS
A. oTpeAL.
a. The simple hut unusual Participial Forms ^ ivhich are most-
ly Adjectives.
Absolute state, f ^^O
Emphat. state., ( V^
^.. a man.
^Aj an associate.
M^ryt leprous.
Ql and .J^
1
^\^
v^
Whsi
foolish.
P'oio
ruralf quiet.
^^
sick'.
pure.
^OiS mournful
V and Ji.
QM, \aQM equal. \tkO hard.
pil4 impure ; >,j>.tCX) much.
From these are derived Abstract Nouns ; e. g. |ZQ.iAOAarc?w<'55;
(Zo|A.|lb multitude.
114 TABULAE VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
b. Usual Participial Forms of Peal.
a. Active. /3. Passive.
Absolute state, j ^O j ^^.^ j \j^
Emphat. state, ^ ]]^ ( 111*4^ ^ llli^^
901CD a witness. X) i ^n sound. Q->>1 righteous,
>a3| 6/ac^. f^LkOlA given. 'r^vU ^ hireling,
Jk2) Ql and wk.! wkJZ)
PdA^ a^i inhabitant. ^o^ cursed. {*S i c?ry.
frOJ a herdsman. ;jQ1 6Z/w(?. 'r-Kt^ long-suffering.
Ql and wii ^ Ml'
P. ^ . l"*! *PI7
(^..^ reviling. (,Oi/^4 renowned. |*^int beloved.
iJ |jljk*/re^. IJ A.^> rare.
t.Ll> a herdsman. P
pQl* a landlord. (fiOD concealed.
U'and la U'and U
lim] a physician. \\Si m. '\Lk\Si f. beautiful.
j]"and li
Ipi beautiful. U and ^
Vk<iOJ prophet^ \Ljl^1 prophetess.
Here belong also AbstractNouns, as |ZQaJl AmZm^, ]Z on > n 4
publication^ \Lqi\^ freedom, Q^^?1 and |Z.QLQjt)l righteousness,
iZoai*^ I dryness.
TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 115
c. With Immutable Vowels.
t " ' >
Ab. Stat., j ^^\^ ^q4^ , ^q4^ \a^O ^OO & with J
f\^ a plough- JQl] sma^/. J^Oryl ^^^- (r>V)QCD a r^/
man. ' ^pheraer. {color).
^a^< weak. ^Q.Xm a mo6, ^0)1 a sower. AS^xi) a friend,
a rabble.
_2) fej |) merer.'] \si
\^ a carpenter. \}a2i\a preacher. ^0)( a ham- ^SODOf 6Zac^.
Ql and .LL ^2) Q^ and wtA Pr^O|aj905.<?6$5or.
jOki a spend- UQ^J c?a?7ip. pQ^I a ^iv^r. CLL and wiJL
thrift. CLL and t^.^^
p.^9 a judge. (aOa) a destroyer. \LQA\sOmortal. yl^Q^ fortunate.
Mi Mi Mi ^ ^
.ppv *p . 7 ^p -x p ^*p ^ <K ^^'vorce.
jjrj a combatant. f?Orit a youth. nOVy. barber. |J-^Oj a 6/// o/"
\}\^ an orator. ^Qa.* a spy. P > 5 a cleft.
P and wkL U and .^.^ |J and ^
PiV*^ a seer. H^H^ mournful. mO;2 creator.
I' >^* g'm'e^. (OOJ a mocker.
B'and ]2)
P P ^7
|.aJZ)( a baker.
From these are formed Abstract Nouns, like iZ oa\ i rejection^
IZOJQII littleness^ IZobOjI division^ IZoJO*! 5'i^i'wy, etc.
116
TABULAE VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
B. PARTICIPIAL FORMS,
a. Of the other Active Conjugations.
Pael.
It takes the usual]
form, and the form j
with ^1- and the j
form U^QiD J
P^^Sd a leader.
|o(T>Vn poor.
]l^\V) a teacher.
a torturer.
QL and .^
L.OpO united.
}^'^ high.
Uand^
|l-i^i^ll7 seditious.
-^0 7
pUjOlSD a leader.
11 and^
|l f1D yiiD a physician.
a and ]i
Pf i^V> a comforter.
Aphel.
Usual form and ]
^^naV> a dwelling.
|^n\V) pincers.
^JOanV) an offense.
7 7
^>0V) despairing.
pp|nV) injurious.
QL and ijlI
]] and ^'
(VmIo a watch-tower.
pOVyjJisO a sickle.
]] and *jl)
jlajQib a confessor.
Sbapliel.
Usual form and
10 7
,n\V) a slave.
'k'p fO 7
|*^\ti changing,
^P P 7
p^lOs a deliverer,
]Jand^
|> NSaV) proud.
Part. pass.
t7 7
t i NSnaVi completed.
From these are derived Abstract Nouns, as (ZQJ;^,iD direction,
]2oi'^SV> doctrine, VZoiIflolli healing, &c.
TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
b. Of the Passive Conjugatwns.
Ethpeel.
117
Ethpaal.
Usual form and
Eshtaphal.
Usual form and
%P0
Usual form and | Usual lorm and | Usual torm and j
those with y^Xi. ) those with # , ]1 ) those with t , (1 )
Ql and *jil U^lf^ASo curdled. ]] and ^
]irn^2ASQ entreat- J^ ll i\V)Zl<iilO /^/Z.
^ilr*Z\iO Renowned.
Ml
]l^SV)Ak? eloquent.
C. PARTICIPIAL FORMS OF LESS FREQUENT CONJUGATIONS.
Palel. Pealel. Paiel
Usual form and | Usual form and ) Usual form and )
InbO^A^^ ^ church- (V>\V)\ unhurt. (j4-l) a farrier,
treasurer.
Parel.
Usual form and ^
10. 7 ^
Taphel. Qu. ""-iliterals.
Usual form and | ] AnLo
|Jy.;>j a pitcher. \jlyJ^L an interpreter.
^aCi;mV) sudden. |, >V)\Zi a pupil.
an accuser.
118 TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
II. INFINITIVE FOEMS.
A. OF PEAL.
a. Simple Infinitive Forms Segliolates.
Absolute state, J ^^y.^ j ^5\4^ J ^Q^O
Einphat. state, ^ ll^i) (' B^^ ^ U^QO
[mSll the soul. y^^'i rain. pt>QD holiness.
|V7m>\ bread. X**-^} morning. P9Q2 the knee.
]j^La sea-grass, \r^\ lamb. \*^yQ'\ a way.
yO'rA herbage. ji:Z)
|,X* a child. I As* c?2'%e7ice, (for lAa^-a).
Q2^ and .i^ Ql and .aJL Q1 and .iJL
(2qVo death. P-*^ peace. l^Q-4 goodness.
L.Ol a yoke. fjjij a dwelling. (QCO aw e?ic?.
|j and w^ |J and jl}^
(0,-M yoy. 1 1 N rest.
Ml ^^ Mi
(Vi* a treasure. \^^ the heart. |)GlO coldness.
]] and K W'and K U'and ^^i)
(Zja countenance. |Zo|J /nr^or, lAaoj anguish.
It is seldom that all three forms are found derived from one orig-
inal ; e. g. iJ^A* a rope^ U^jsi a pestilence^ JJSCLm g^dlt ; oftener
two forms, as |Jl an oak, \i] a storm (from ml).
TABULAR VIEW OF DKllIVATIVP: NOUNS.
119
b. Infinitive Forms with Immutable Vowels.
Abs.stat. ) ^\^ ( ^Q)
Em. Stat. /
\y\^a htrd. \ ^S^OJ a punc- ^A^n^N seizure. oLaCD foll(/.
If!^ a work. ture. V>?nnV) affiance. IZonSV) a kiwj
J2) (r^Q^ gleaning. (2)
VrCol a girdle. ]2) (and ]J) IIjQCoV a/ei/er.
|rCu| renown.
\ " - ^
P^ ,,.. ^ Qi.and*Al
)?1.L , IJ^Q^ ^rac?^7^(m. ')' ^ . ,7 .- Ql ar
ppaO a vessel. yk fO talkative- ^ y
oi and JL:^ ,,.^ ^ ^^5*.
}^y a floioing. ^^ ^"^ *^
]] and ^ P^0Q2);>er>m^.
Uv^Ol medita- 1*^?? ^"'^^^^''^^.
Mi
|] and ^j^Si
*p p I
f *Si a sprout.
Ql and .a^
on I ^ favor.
II and ^
(Zq.aJ1 indecency.
p. -x 7
(Z.QjiOVm appear-
ance.
\l0Q1O posses-
sion.
llandU
(ZQa^Q orna-
ment.
(nnn\ confi-
dence.
M and ^
^jjtQj error.
120 TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
B. USUAL INFINITIVE FORMS OF PEAL AND OF THE
OTHER CONJUGATIONS.
Peal Pael. Aphel. SliapLel.
. Usual form Usual form Usual foim and
and and
V^4ak),^^in!i, ^^4^2^ ^H^ "^^^
^a^ck) or ^q4o2 lAnV) l^^>iQ^
thought. change.
^oSOrSaO a bed. \ciMJLZiL flattery. |Zo,n\ slavery.
^^^ a desert. l^r^Z help. (JiAaSD a concussion.
PqaQ^ a thrust. \0LDL combat. |>*0C1S delay,
]^ '\Zi \zi ]si
Y^\^ a speech. ]LhQ.y]I.mer- IZqJ^QLo c?e
chandise. struction.
tf u o -
VS,^ insight. ^tx^^^oLdespair.^t^UXOLJ^a gift. \ti\OQM deliver-
_2) Ql and .aJL ^ ance.
ilO^ departure. |;fr>V) ri sa'^;.
fj^oaLo bellows. ]AQ^Z rubbish. i;nV) a /iO^.
Ql and .-Jl U and wi^ ]] (and "Js) (J and ^
fZlSiO harken- 1 A i moZ a man- IZq^AaSD an a5- ] i . > . V) a cow-
^ 2/1^. tie. sembly. elusion.
]]'and *aX P'and ^jlS P'and w^ IJ and *j^
}]'^ a drawing X^i^^ doctrine. IZoi i<=^0V) cow- VijOQ* a jt?ro-
*ojf (of water). * elusion. misc.
l]"and la
]A-i Z|SD arrival.
TABULAR VIEW OF DERIVATIVE NOUNS.
121
C. INFINITIVE FORMS OF THE LESS FREQUENT
CONJUGATIONS.
Palel and Palpel.
Pealel.
Pavel and Paiel.
..ox V
f;j)C11 splendor.
I'i^SnSv^Sji in-
]lLoZ a worm.
Ql and tJkL
nocence.
l]"and A
]j|J^Q.. motion.
Pali.
|J2i-lQ2) contam-
ination.
JuCni^QS astonish-
ment.
Parel. Pamel. Taphel.
^OIlQflO swiftness. (;l!iDO shame. |,V)\oZ doctrine.
122 DENOMINATIVE NOUNS.
41. Denominative Nouns.
Here belong :
1. Koans ; a) without any formative additions, derived
from some other nouns, which may be either primitives or
derivatives of verbs ; e. g. f^yt gardener^ from JJOl.. a
garden ; ]\V> a seaman^ from ]fcii\V) salt ; h) with the
formative syllables "U- masc, IZL- fern., (Patronymics or
Gentile Nouns) ; e.g. '^Sdo?'' Roman, l/U^',rCL'| /sraeZiVess ;
with the falling away of the syllable J3DQ in names
of towns ; e. g. V^xoa] an Ephesian, from ^ooma]^; or
Feminine Abstract Nouns, terminating in Vq and 1A^ ; e.g.
IZoiX^ youthfalness, from fll^ a youth ; 12o;^Ql Hind-
ness, from ;^Q1 blind; JA.1.JU9 beginning, from tAaS ^Ae
Aeac?, principal ; c) diminutives with tQ or *flDQ masc. and
IZUJQ fem. attached to the noun; e. g. X^o*^ a little son,
from 1;r:i ; "IjOk*! a little brother, from Ia*] ; lA^oZ^Q a lit-
tle daughter from IZ^Q ; |fl0on\o a young dog, from ]n\r)
Sometimes we find both forms in use ; e. g. IJO'f^i.. and
JCDO;^.. a manikin, from Ir^yi^ Dimmutives from com-
pound nouns also occur ; e. g. pQAJ;!D from (aj;2 ; also
a double formation ; e. g. poflDOjCi.. a very little man,
IA^qAjoZji:^ a very little daughter.
Rem. Amira (p. 145) mentions a form with the third radical
letter doubled, and Q inserted between them ; e.g. ]h^o{)o\ a little
assembly, from ]i^^
2. Adjectives belong here, which are formed ; a) by affix-
ing the terminations p masc. and IZLj fem. ; e. g. ^LmO)
masc. IAaLmoS fem., spiritual, from paOj ; h) by afiixing
the terminations V masc. IAju- fem. ; e. g. U^SosQ.. masc.
COMPOSITE AND EXOTIC NOUNS. 123
|A>V)Qyt fern, corporeal from |SqQ.. ; ordinal numerals
(see 50. 8) ; e. g. tkLSl the third, from ]i!il ; c) by affix-
ing the terminations \^ masc., IAjJ fem.; e.g. ]il mO> masc.,
VZuiI*Oj fern.
Rem. In respect to the cases under a. and c. above, Amira re-
marks (p. 106) that the latter is rather used in metaphorical lan-
guage, yet he also admits the interchange of the two forms.
42. Composite and Exotic Nouns.
1. The formation of words by composition is more frequent
m Syriac than in the other Semitic dialects, (see Michaelis,
p. 151 ; Lud. de Dieu, pp. 73, 74). The words most fre-
quently used in forming compounds are ^p son ; e. g. pu;^
man^ poZjIDuozce; >\1Q sir ; e.g. t^Q, NS*^ enemy; *^hmuch;
e. g. iLkSH JD) householder; ^Aaj principal ; e.g. (AjAuu)
firstling; ]LkJ^ house; e.g. AjJD ]msiO corn-house; sometimes
^^1 eating ; e. g. 1 *;nSol adversary. In changing the
Concrete idea into the Abstract, either the last part of the
compound word only is regarded ; e.g. l2on*o,Vsn hostility,
or both parts are changed into the feminine ; e. g. ]LoLk:>
Adj house-holding. Upon the plural inflection see 44.
2. The Syrians have introduced many Greek words into
their language, and given them either Syriac terminations
or permitted them to retain, more or less, the Greek forms.
The following are examples ; f-^-yn oiyicc, ^ a. \ %JO\ suay^eXjov,
(JQSQ-i^CTI j7fc>wv, ^qNNV) fJuaXXov, J^iD|Z\LD fxa^TifxaTa,
.rct nKnrcs r>\r>on (fvXkoyKf^og. There are some peculiarities
124 GENDER OF NOUNS.
in the formation of these words, for which see 12. 5. and
44. Kem. 8. At the time of the Crusades, the Syrians
introduced words also from the western languages ; e. g.
11.Ji^;a the Franks^ ."to]] ] (7ermawy, >lZuJiL^| England,
\ljk*^ Prince, ^^y^^Sl Henry, etc.
43. Gender of Nouns.
The Syriac language has but two genders, masculine and
feminine. The latter is distinguished partly by the signifi-
cation and partly by the form.
1. In respect to the signification, the gender is fixed by
the same rules as in Hebrew. Masculines are the names of
men, masculine offices, nations, mountains, months and
rivers. Feminines are the names of female persons and ani-
mals, countries, cities, and members of human and animal
bodies, which are found double although they have mascu-
line endings in the plural ; e. g. ^jiiyo/ee^ from ^y>, etc.
2. In respect to form, the feminine is characterized by
- ( 1^ ), *. i , Q , Z But the first of
those final syllables, which is particularly used for the for-
mation of feminines from masculines (e. g. \\Ci^ female com-
panion from ;^jsj masc), must not be confounded with a
similar sounding termination of masculines (the emphatic
state, 45, 8) usually given in the lexicons, as the only mas-
culine form in use. To distinguish this fem. form from the
masculines, it is usually given with the termination \L ;
e. g. lAnSV) the queen. The forms with q1 and *.i- have
arisen by apocope from |Z; e. g. oni ^ goodness, ^\o heam.
The last of the above mentioned endings Z is seldom used ;
e. g. t^^ part.
GENDER OF NOUNS. 125
Rem. 1 . The feminine ending (- is generally found in adjec
lives ; e. g. JQ^ masc. fii^ ^^^' ^^ ^^^^ word ends with f , this
letter is changed into jl , and forms (a ; e. g. (OJ masc. (>ni fem.
Gentile nouns and numerals ending with t.i change that termina-
tion into pu. ; e.g. taYOOLi masc. ^i>OCnu fem. Nouns with \L
final are masculine when Z is a radical letter of the noun ; e. g.
^Aa} bow, |AjD ornament, |Aal olive.
Rem. 2. Many nouns with a masculine ending are feminine or
common. They are usually given in the emphatic state ( 45. 3) ;
e. g. ]<=^^ skip, "U*'! W'ay, ll-L rib, ]1j"| mr^^, p..i1 pitcher,
>(q well, IJOQ ^erf?, Ij^ys ^**^^ of battle, \1^} com. /ime,
\b] leather bottle, (C)^ sword, com., vISQSD burden, I'fDD talent,
\si\D stone, IfiD^ 6e?/y, jlil-^ com. tongue, |jkL3 50mZ, fjQJ ^re,
jjOlfiO com. moow, f^IlCD shield, ffflCY) com. mo^A, ^2Lll branch,
IsD'fL bed, (a*09 com. mwc?, |A*Z> com. terror, yLj^oh com. firma-
ment, ^QU- hades, \L^QM rust, |iiV> com. heaven, {aSDa com.
sww, ^^* ^^^y Names of animals also are of the common gen-
der ; e. g. l;Sfli an ass, U-^yt camel ; also the cardinal num-
bers from 20 to 100^ Greek nouns retain their gender ; e. g.
DO,JQflD tfuvoJo^, (OaA^3 ^ja&>]x>). In general, those nouns are
considered as feminine which come from the feminine of the He-
brew, ending in n"r, and all of those nouns which, in the emphatic
state, end in IZ ( 45. 3).
126 NUMBER OF NOUNS.
44. Nurnher of Nouns.
There are two numbers in Syriac, the singular and plural.
There are, indeed, four dual forms, taken from the Hebrew,
ending in ^-i_ (^iZ masc. two.^ ^Ljl fem. two, ^Z]So two
hundred, and ^> ^ Egypt) ; but they cannot be considered
as a special form of the language. Pairs are usually ex-
pressed by the plural, and duality by the numeral two.
The plural of masculines is formed by annexing the
syllable ^^ to the noun sing. ; e. g. ^)Q4 mountains, from
jQ^ ; that of the feminine by ^ (instead of | ) ; e. g. (JoAs
virgin, plur. ^oA2
Rem. 1. Plural masculines of derivatives from Yerbs U,
ending with ]- and *jl- , terminate in ^ji_ ; e. g. P.^ hoy^
..-'^ 7 7 * 7
plur. ^iN(^ ; *^;aSo dwelling, plur. ^,^alD* Feminines
ending in q and L take tQ ; e. g. onW) kingdom, plur.
an\V) : those ending in *-l- take ^ ; e. g. *j;iO creature,
plur. ^r^* Nouns derived from Yerbs Ml , if the doubled
consonant appear again in the plural, take Linea oocultans
under the first of the similar lettere ; e. g. ^ .a Sfi^^ a from
P7 I.. 7 P7
pOt sea, ,^iV)V>S from (ioi people.
Rem. 2. Some masculines form the plural in the same
manner as feminines. Here belong : Iflo] physician., plur.
.Qfiol ; \iSo\ crib, plur. VZqIjo] ; \S\ lion, plur. Uo-ail ;
^L\ place, plur.VZojZI ; ]Iq>^ snake, plur. '|ZoQ^;|Ij>Qa
mz^Z^, plur. tZQJ>Qr);i.CDiQr) throne, plur.|ZaDjQO ; f-i-ii^
night, plur. ]2oS 'i S ; ^0.0 member, plur. iZolcc ; U>
herdsman, plur. (as a part. ^^Aj) |Zqij ; \cib cup-heareft\
plur. lZoo> , &c. (Compare Agrell, Comment, de varietate
generis et numeri, p. 68 ; and upon the absolute and em
phatic states, their form and use, see 45. 1. 3.)
NUMBER OF NOUKS. 127
Rem. 3. The following feminines form the plural like mascu.
lines ; a) by rejecting the feminine ending of the emphatic singular
( 45. 3), \^Xell, ^J^V; (\ltS( woman, \mJ) ; ]hD]\an, ]cd1"
Xi^^ ffarden, \lyJ; fZ^OSD.. coa^JlDQ.. ; X^!^} Jif/-basket,
^^} ; VAiS)> tear, K^?^ ; 1\^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ '> iM^ wheat,
1^^ ; 1^\^ leaf {of paper), W]^ ; 12\\^ sickle, W]^ ;
I^^LcLaIO sieve, ^Ow^ ; l^^lSO word, llSo ; l^li AaiV, ]liD*
l2;sV) cave, TpkkJ ; Vi'^MC 6ar%, iJlQD ; VAljLflD skip, IjLsiCD;
VAoiI cluster (of ff rapes), l^lll ; lAo'^l thonff, U^pl ; l2>cL^a
6H(f^e, 1>C1.^ ; lAsilikD bark, ]f^So ; l^ryv* almond, Irvn* ;
I'Ali ymr, ^^ ; I'Ali hour, ^^ ; I'AjfZ /^, "^fZ, etc. ;
6) by retaining Z; e. g. l2^ Joo^y, X^\^ *, T^iy. cry, lAl^^^;
(Zixi siffht, (ZIkm ; |Z)^ noxious means, \L\^ ; \l\ ugliness, \L\ ;
X^\ care, X^\ ', 1^^ callin(/, X^^ ; l^^^OS rw5?, lAjaQ*
(see Agrell, passim, p. 70. 55',)
Rem. 4. Some nouns form a double plural (the feminine fotm
father,
^G12( and tdO( ; ^\jlaj army, ^^iNia* and ^ ON t ;
\^f^ breast, ^t** ^^d ^O,.** ; ^Ql time, ^iini and ^^1^1 [times,
^i^rns m repetition) ; ^k Ziawc?, ^r*] and iCIr^l [gripe of the hand);
X 17 97 "i^C ^V* -, y %^
^Qa (/ay, ^-liDO* and ^LOOi ; |n\ Amr^, ^^iH^ and ^QilLl ;
I'rLo /ore?, ^'^ and ^O*^ ; JOIJ stream, ^JQIJ and ^OJOU ;
Xr^ feast, ^^""and ^>K ; 1^^ eye, ^La and ^IjlI (/oi^w-
tain) ; if^ol ^eeZ, ^.i.,OnS and ^^nOS ; ^J^O ^orw, ^*r) and
^^ {corner) ; "ISO* wam^, ^OISDs and ^OlSO* , etc. Some
128 NUMBER OF NOUNS.
masculines as in some of the above examples, take Q or CJI between
the plural ending and the last radical. Also some feminines in \L
take Q and 01 before the plural ending ; e.g. "{t^O^ people, ^ZoSdI;
1i\ik) ^ar/, l2QlLiD ; \i^ offering, '^LoiiL', \iJ:){ mother, 'iL(jC^'{\
IAIsdI handmaid^ |ZoiSD( (compare 49). Sometimes jb is in-
serted ; e. g. I^JQlDj 6^e, |Aa>QO> ; (Adoj j^Zac^, jAjJDOj ;
(AfiDQCD mar^, |Aj[ix}QfiD, etc.
Rem. 5. The composites (42.1) form the plural in such a man-
ner that either ; a) the last part of the composite is inflected ; e.g.
trciao Aa^ granary, or ; 5) the first part ; e.g. (a1aJL2 man-
kind, or ; c) both parts ; e.g. tJ.oZl2 tattling,
Kem. 6. Some words only occur in the plural ; e.g. (.ftlD water,
yjL^ life, [Si] face, puSD> worth.
Rem. T. Some singular names (collectives) take the plural mark,
ijJiJMi ( 6) ; e. g. (a3) horses, f^QO cai^/e, (xi sAee^. Amira
IP" J ^ ^e X
^^4 ^^^^5 and (r'i^^ draft-cattle.
Rem. 8. Greek nouns, without regard to gender, take the Syriac
plural ending of masculines in |L ; e.g. taQOrfti*^! iifKfxoieoi,
L J^2) (paXa/ysj, pQ.iO> doyiJjOLra. Less frequently do they take
^ . . ^. . . . ^"1 "k^j " ^ T ^
the plural terminations of feminines in \L ; e.g. (Zol^pO /xiip^ava<,
(ZojAfiOl (fTdSia. Letters which constitute the Greek singular
terminations are commonly omitted; but in some instances retained;
e. g. |fiDQlQ3 vojxoi from vo^o^. The plural terminations 5sg and tss,
from 15 and as, are represented by |p and Xi'^^- g' u *^^ xXsj(Js^
from xXsig', X^^^rA oLvS^iavrsg from ctv^^ia^. The Syriac often re-
tains the termination of the Greek plural and of the cases, represent-
^7 7 *7
ingthe accusative aj (first declension) by fiD, %0], D0 and DOf;
7 ^y7 7 I 7 l^ 7
e. g. tlXlJOl ^uva^, JSM A^ (piaXa^, i2DQlaZ| 'A^vjva^,
;ain Ksyx^^sag; oi and ouj (second declension) by Q and
DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN 129
kCDO ; e. g. OOjOfe^t ^Tu'ixoi, ^CDO'^iNi^ ^tXiirieovg; and
; e. g. I |JlO xsqjaXaia ; the genitive
; e.g. >0( iO>| a^x^Luv ; s^ and a^ of the third declension
are represented by JXU., tlD, CD| and ^fiDO ; e.g. P;rnn Kaitfa^a^,
flolO-La'ff'Xaxaj, xaQ1 iNoi 'EXX7)vaff ; sig from the singular in j^
is represented by JSQa^; e. g. trn>rr>>f a]^s<fsis ; and the neuters
ending in ara, are represented by [^ and m ; e. g. 14SQ..0J and
7 7 N^
(4pQyt09 Jo^/fjoara. Some of these plural endings occur in Latin
nouns ; e. g. IX})jQJ| annonce ; %flD (j^^fc castra. The same is
true in respect to Syriac words ; e. g. iXdIi.* garden, for |i- from
lAl^. (comp. Affrell Otiol. Syr. p. 46 49). *
% 45. Different Eelations (States) of the Noun.
1. Besides the absolute and construct state of the Hebrew,
of which the latter marks the genitive, there is in Sjriac
and Chaldee, an emphatic state. It originally* marked the
noun with the definite article. It also occurs where we
should not expect to find the definite article.
Rem. The indefinite article is expressed by the absolute state,
7
or by r>* one. There are many nouns which never, or very seldom,
occur in the absolute state ; e. g. [^Om heat, JLdqo situation,
'iyoLhull, 'ilc^ death, etc.
2. The construct state ; a) of nouns masc. sing., does not
differ from the absolute state ; e. g. ^ good ; but in the
130 DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN.
plural, the ending ^x is changed into jl-; e. g. -.^^ con-
struct state from ^a^Z* Nouns masc, which form the plural
by ^.^ ( M.Bem.l), change that termination into aa ; e.g.
wA^r^ from ^r^ ; h) in the fem. sing., J- of the absolute
state is changed into 2 ; e. g. Lz^L from \^* To the ter-
minations Q and u^ only L is added ; e. g. 2on\v> from
on\V) , Aj'^ from ^\0* In the plural, 2 is appended
instead of ^ ; e.g. An^ from .^^*
8. The characteristic of the emphatic state, for both gen-
ders and numbers, is final 1 (= n the Hebrew article). This
is ; a) attached to the sing, of nouns masc. with 1^ preceding;
e.g. fiQL from ^<H people. In the plural the noun masc. takes
the termination (. with the falling away of - ; e. g.
I pi.. ^Ae me?2, (from the constr. state ^,JQyi ) from r^*i *,
/?) in the emphatic state fem. sing, and plur. \m is attached
to the construct state. In the sing.^ _1_ falls away before I ;
e. g. lA^oAo from constr. state AlioAa^ In the plural,
is retained before 2 ; e. g. lAl^^oAo from A^oAib*
Rem. 1. The emphatic state plur. masc. ends in (.a. in nouns
which take ^.^- in the plural, ( 44. Rem.l) ; e. g. Mr^^ f''om
A fM^* Only three nouns take [^^ instead of ^i. ; viz. }. .i \|j
boys, \m^^ fragments, and (-j^m 5reas^, from the emphat. sing.
(aA4 , M^) Mr*** Tii6 emphatic forms [^j>^ water, and
I >Vf> heaven, belong here. Buxtorf cites yet a third form, witli
U-; e.g. Rom. ix. 24. (iipO; 26. (.irD; Ephes. ii. 11. ]-ar^|
But these forms are not recognized by Amira, and the form in ^...
should perhaps be restored in these cases, af more correct. The fol-
lowing should be noted as irregular emphatic plural forms : (lO^ j
DIFFERENT RELATIONS OF THE NOUN. 131
from yd] fruit, (, 1 kj> from U*^9 odor, |-JOVm from '\o\j!*siff/it,
|Ao from (A.1^ house J etc.
Eem. 2. Feminines with masculine endings ( 43. Rem.2), form
tlie emj)hatic state like masculines by attaching the termination ^,
e. g. ^J ( mr^A, emphat. state yLj\ ; ^O^ A;wee, emphat. state
pjQO* Before the ending (. of the fem. absol., Q is inserted and
quiesces m ; e.g. \LOfj>* from lO^js^^oy. Forms with \^^ take
(A.&i* Some words in the emphatic form take Q before the last
radical ; e. g. ]ALqo|So from |JO pD/ooc?. Feminines which are
formed from masculines, like |Z^y. from r^ii, and especially
adjectives, form the emphatic state fem., by affixing the syllable
\L to the masc. absol. ; e. g. lAll^ (froui .jQ^ niasc). Adjectives
in I- change this termination into ; e.g. fAj^^L^ from Jj^ dull.
y ftxp7 7
Those in ^ take a, after 1 ; e. g. |^itV)M;V) from ^^>>;^
compassionate.. In the emphat. state plur., some words change jl
into Q ; e. g. f^QQJ from ^^.OJ sAeep. Some take Q ;
e. g. fZoiV) from tl^ part. Others insert jl ; e. g. fAar^pD
from |Z;flDpi> bundle.
Rem. 3. The emphatic form is found even before the genitive,
which is formed by J ; e. g. |2l^L0) ],dL servant of the kinr/
(vid. Syntax, 73).
182
TABLE OF RELATIONS OF NOUNS.
Table of the Different Relations (States) of the Noun,
( 45 and 48).
MASCULINES.
A. Nouns of one and two syllables with immutable vowels.
(Decl. 1. 48).
emphat.
Plural. Singular,
constr. absol. emphat. constr. and absol.
Head.
Vessel.
Thief.
Herh.
Nazariie.
Nation.
u-v
7 !
..IX
U*'>
^1
p]i^
^Is^
^J^D
IJU^
.ti)
-..-^ > 7
..7 7
x t> 7
* > P 7
7
,-^.*^ 7
7 *. 7
.. T 9v 7
<K 7
]VVlS
.ASn^i
iV^SqL
toL
^
B. Nouns in which asd of the ultimate syllable fall away,
but the vowel of the penultimate is retained (Decl. II).
^.. 7 r.. 7 I.. 7 n p 7 7 7
I r^lD ^ ^nO ^ .jaO 1 pD 'rllO Talent
Ijoicb *jjdii ^joim Ijoia joim TTi^wf*,?.
P7 .. c 7 ..x I..^X 1 ^ ^^ ' TT
Pir-| *^,-ji1 _ipi| |ri| r ^-al^^^.
U^ySi ^Io,SD ^u^jlD 1*10j5d) ^o^k^ ^;tor.
* -> , * J
DECLENSIOX OF NOL'XS. 183
C. Nouns in which (in gutturals ) of the ultimate syllable
falls away, and the vowel appears over the antepenultimate
radical consonant. (Decl III).
1]^*ALd JX^oALd ^i'^fc^Ak) IJ^ASd ^^^tlJD (One dead).
D. Segholate forms, which begin with a vacant consonant, over
. . ' "" ... *" .
which the original or ^ reappears in inflection, or Q is
assumed in their stead (Decl. IV). ,
T>.. IS 7" IS I.. 1\
[Mjao ^AjmyQjo ^^^^ao
..- r ..7 7 .. x 7
i. - .. 7 ..7 7 ..17
jlo^ 1jiS ^iliS
]]l Ji^ ^]^
h\<n
j,.Sv)
King.
7
Beck.
W?ao
^OrO
Holiness.
l]L)
^illD
Master.
]SdqI
iOOi
Bay.
U^'
X
Eye.
l]si^
u^
Impure.
E. Nouns derived from V^erbs P ending with (-,>>, t-^- , in which
I passes into %-k and is movable as in both the other forms
(Decl. V).
|aV ) - > V > >^< |^< pj ma^ grazes.
(ZqI > ZqIj ^Ql5 PiAj ^1> Herdsman.
y.Krf\Krs . > I VrnVn ^>VmV> ]\ VmO^ ^iSmV) Abandoned.
* * * ]V* - A Jiest.
]*^^ - o^ ^'^^ ]>*^* H^ Prisoner
IHI DIFFERENT RELATIOXS OF THE XOUX.
F E M I N I N E S.
A. Nouns with immutable vowels (Q, .ji ,etc.) before the ending
U (Dec!. I).
IJoAo Virgin, 135 Bride, ^L^ Citi/.
Plural Singular.
empliat. constr. absol. emphat. constr. absol.
l^^lIoAfi* Ai^oAo ^oAo I'AloAo l^oLa ]]oAo
]h^ A!So ^^' 12^ A^ Wo
I^O-j'fLD AL'r^iD ^'r^ li\l-i%D AL'pk) li-Trk)
B. Nouns, whose final syllable begins with two consonants, which,
in the emphat. state sing, ha^ e -I- or Jl. inserted between them
(Decl. II).
llLojf Widow, ]]Ll Chariot, \Qy\ Jims.
UlvD,T ASsoiT ^'T 1^^>V AV^DiV ULDiV
l^v? ^\^ ^^^ ^V ^ve V^
jAoji Aoji ^ji lAoji Aoji t)>i
C. Nouns, in whose emphat. state, the vowel of the first syllable is
moved forward to the second vacant consonant ( Decl. Ill ).
pSLM Partner, p-j.^ Cow.
IZ'^A* Z'riZlM ^^^ U'r^*^ ^*r^^ Tr^:^
lAS^' Ail^' ,^^ lAl^ AS^ 1]!^'
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 135
D. Derivatives of Verbs IJ ending in |.j and (0 , whose %^ and
O in the emphat. state sing, quiesce in_i, and Jl. ( Decl. IV ).
Xa.j^O Blame, 'Q.iJs Animal, H^Ji^ Crirl.
? 7 7 P 7 ^ff *.7 >'' ^"^
VAllI Ali^ ^ IkS^ ^ Ui^
E. Derivatives of Verbs (J ending in Q and t.^. ( ^ ) beginning
with two consonants, and having O 'Rnd -i movable in the plural
( Decl. V ).
O Thing, OjaV) Plague, *-i;.2 Creature. Q^ Request,
LllJD Part, OpD Dominion.
.. 7
p 7 ..
12^s
^^^i
12qm1o
Zoj^iii)
VAI-^
p.. -h
l2oS^
^.5
rzoiii
2ai^
l2o^i,
23-3ij
V^
P..7 p
12^,
2qo^
.*^^
r2ovi
ZomID
Om^
1^-,=
Zu*r>
wi-^
r2oi.
2<^,
ol,
lAliD
Alio
Also
120-^
. . p
o;^
10
136 NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.
46. Nouns with Suffixes.
The noun, m taking suffixes (see 16. 2. B. and table of
suffixes, 16), undergoes the following changes :
1. In masculines ; a) the suff. in the sing., is attached to
the emphatic state, with the falling away of 1- : e. g. pNV)
(from y^"^), with the suffix inSVi. In decl. I. III. lY. Y.
( 48. A) the radical vowels are not changed. In nouns
of decl. II., the final vowel of the absolute state JH or _L, re-
appears before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plural ;
e. g. ^oJil, emphat. ]^\\ with suffix , iSnSs ; jOl-flO,
JOlflO , with suffix ^OljOiflD* So also monosyllabic
nouns, which lose Jl or _L in the emphatic state, take it
again before the suffix of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. ; e.g.
^B , emphat. jkLs , with suffix ^^ln , j^Lq {^'^ from
^'), etc. In nouns, derived from Yerbs ]] ending in \2 ,
emphat. state U (Decl. Y), w* before the suffix of the 1
sing., 2 and 3 plur., quiesces m _!. ; e. g. ,i i\^ , ^oniN^
from jJi , emphat. I^X^ ; but before the other suffixes ^ is
movable ; e. g. ^ N(^ , o l i S^ ; ( and according to Syriac
grammarians, *a is movable even before the suffix 1 sing ;
e.g. wiJLX^)- The same is true also of nouns ending with jl-
(passive participles of Pa. Aph. and Shaph. of Yerbs IJj' 32.1,
48 masculines, Decl.Y); e.g. ^oouAAkJ, j^AmSo (^AmSo)
from w^AaLd drmh These nouns with suffixes of the 1,
sing, are pronounced like the absol. state ; e. g. ^aAjiId my
drink, (*-iIX)jQO my throne from |m>ao is an exception).
Here belong all the emphatic forms ending with V j having
a vacant consonant preceding, excepting U'^k) master, which
with a suffix is as follows : ^"^ , y^, Oi'^k) , .ooI'^Ld, etc.
Finally, in emphatic nouns ending in V"; having a vowel
preceding, the general rule is followed ; e.g. M-yi^ reflection^
NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES. I37
with suffix Aa.yiCn , or mo;o creator ^ with suff. a-o;q ,
^0\^* The same is true of nouns with || for Ja ; e. g.
itiOO with suff. ^al^QQ , *^UQS, ^aOIaQQ, etc., plur. ^JLiOO,
5^VQO But in cases where the termination ]] does not
stand for V , as in l|ico , 1 takes Lin. occul. in suff. 1 sing,
and 2 and 3 plur. ; e. g. J\lSi , ^]lco , etc. In the
other suff., and in the plur. with suff., the vowel of ( is
thrown back upon the preceding vacant consonant ; e. g.
^j^pio , ^(IQD ,plur. ^tlD , ^(lCO , etc.
b) Plural suffixes in the masc. are attached to the construct
foiTQ ( 45. 2. a) with which the suff. 1 sing, forms a crasis ;
e. g. >an\V). In the sing, masc, however, wi. passes into Q ;
y V IKY
e. g. ,iOinn\V> (also ^jOIQ- = Germ, aij (Engl, oi, nearly),
according to Lud. de Dieu^ p. 160, but not according to
Amira) ; and in the 3 fem. before ^^a passes into ; e. g.
qiinSV) ( 16. B). Plural nouns with ^-Jl , attach the suf-
nx to the construct form ending m ^jl^ ; e. g. ^->--^ii with
y 7 7 7 , v*
suff. t^ii >\.> , %a01Cu.^.. So also in the emphatic ending
^07 \^ ~ #7 ^ .7
with JjL- ; e.g. >*^y( , *jOlQ^.t (see Lud. de Dieu, p. 163).
- ; e.g. (i A^, with suff. .iNq and 1 1 N ({,
and those plurals which, with the suffix of 1 sing., differ
from the sing, with the same suff. only by taking Eibui ;
e.g. ^IAjilLd drink, with suff. ^a^m!^ ; plur. emphat. l-aAAk)
..77 ^ A " ''
with suff. uAmSD and ^o.AaSo my drinks.
Rem. 1. Collective nouns sing, with Ribui, take the suff. sing. ;
e.g. iKwith sufF. oul , jA^* Only liij] takes the suff. plur. ;
e. g. ^OlQuiil* Amira p. 213, supposes that l-iJQO with both
Buffixes belongs here.
188 NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.
Rem. 2. \i\ father, \jj\ brother, jUthj^ father-in-law, are formed
anomalously. The first two, with the suff. of the 1 sing., change
into ; e. g. wk^Of* The last takes ; e.g. A.SQi. Final |
before the other suflBxes is changed into Q; e. g. ^Qol , kSOo] ,
^OlQOl , OlQQl , ^QOJ , etc.
2. In Feminines ; a) the suffix in the sing, is attaclied
to the form of the emphat. state with a union vowel preced-
ing; e.g. OiA!LSd)1 from \i^i] widow^ emphat. state lAi^iV
The suffixes of the 1 sing, and of the 2 and 3 plur. are
attached to the construct state without the union vowel,
to avoid the concurrence of three vacant consonants ; e. g.
^L\Ol^ from l;^Js , constr. state 2;1m*
Rem. From yLf^ (emphat. state) mistresSj is found tOOlZ^So.
In 1^^ daughter, constr. state, L'fCi with the suflf. of the 1 sirig.,
moves forward from the first to the second consonant ; e. g. *aZ;q
It should be remarked that the letter marked with Linea occultans
is to be pronounced, if the above suffix occur; e. g. \t\ >,V> with
suff". .CLdAia^, IZpl with sufi". wZ^ Amira asserts (p. 190)
that the laterSyrians have the form.tOOlAljjSO , etc.
b) In the plural, feminines take singular suffixes ; e. g.
uA^'oA!D , yjbLLoLa , etc.
Rem. In respect to the cardinal numbers ( 50. 2), it shouJd be
remarked that they take both the sing, and plur. suffixes, forming
with the first, possessive pronouns, and with the last, demonstrative
pronouns ; e.g. Ol2;Dtl his ten, ^OOUjZ those two, ^CJuZlZ those
two, tOCTuALZ those three.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 139
47. Declension of Nouns in General,
Nouns are varied in respect to inflection (44.46) accord-
ing to their form, either with or without any vowel changes.
Thus they are divided into two principal classes, viz. ; those
with immutable and with mutable vowels. The latter class,
on account of its diversities, may be arranged under several
paradigms, and together with the former class, takes the place
of the declensions of the western languages (comp. 48).
48. Exhibition of Nouns according to Declension,
A. Masculines.
DecL I. This inclu^ps all monosyllabic nouns as well as
those having more syllables than one, with immutable vow-
els (ju, , Q, Q,) e. g. %-*> head^ H^ master^ *Q.JD fean,
Q.. midst, .i^OQ partition^ %oZoZ native. To the latter class
belong likewise those nouns whose penult, syllable is either
a close one ; e. g. t Q^^ herbage, (gentile nouns with a. ;
e. g. ^'r^ Nazarite), or such as would have a close penult,
syllable, if tlie Syrians employed duplication of letters
7
(= Dagh. forte ) ; e. g. *^^yf i^^tf-
Rem. Here also belong nouns derived from ^ Verbs with j
which in the plural, double the final radical letter, and mark the
first of the two doubled letters with Lin. occult. ; e. g.
^alwa^^on, plur. -jlSC^OI* But monosyllabic nouns having Q and ^ ,
and m the emphat. state, which change and into , belong to
segholate forms(Decl.IV); e.g. ^Q- da?/, emphat.state pOQ-i ; ^-lA
eye, emphat. state \lLL ; as do those also in which under the same
circumstances Q is transposed ; e. g. *0pO holiness, emphat. state
]ijao In S^>^^ young man, ^IQl Md, and ^CCLij;2> paradise,
2_ falls away in the inflection and j. with _L preceding, forms
ai ; e. g. emphat. state |V>iNs , etc.
140 DECLENSION OF NOUN^S.
Decl. 11. This includes nouns, with _1 and JL, which have
. two consonants ; e.g. ^Q name^ or two syllables, of which
the penult. is either a mixed one as in ^^f^So (part. pass.
Aph.), na^r> mighty ; or whose middle radical must be
77 71
doubled ; e.g. po a talent ; ;a sparrow ; or has an immu
table vowel ; e.g. ^q\i eternity ; JOICD witness ; ^\^\ wheel.
In these nouns, the vowel of the final syllable falls away,
excepting in the sing, before the suff. of the 1 sing, and be-
fore the 2 and 8 plur. ; e. g. emphat. state ]V>Ss with sufp.
01^\s, ,iV>^S, and *00lV>Sv
Rem. Here belongs also ^a Aawrf, emphat.state 1^^] ; plur.jipjl,
7* 7 . -^0 *7
etc. Forms also like i>*"'),V> a?/ar, and (m^^ belong here,
which take a new syllable with _^ over the first radical letter in
consequence of an accumulation of consonants ; e. g. ImIo,^ (see
15. 4). The following are examples : *.^^ morning^ osaAslLo
opening^ etc. From ^^^^^0 fountain^ appears the emphat. state
]lSV), plur. tLl!^>
Decl. III. To this belong those nouns, which, throughout
their inflection, lose 2_ (before gutt. _L) of the final syllable ;
but take _L as a helping vowel over the antepenultimate
radical consonant, viz. ; in participles Ethpe. ; e. g.
%^t^ dead, emphat. state ]l4^Ak)
Decl. IV. Here are to be enumerated all nouns which cor-
respond with Hebrew segholate forms (see Gesen. Lehrgeb.
p. 668 sq). Such for the most part in Syriac, are monosyl-
labic nouns which begin with a vacant consonant, and have
for their characteristic vowel _!_ or JL, which appears first
in the emphat. state over the first radical. In this form the
noun remains unchanged throughout its formations. They
may as in Hebrew, be divided into derivatives of verbs
with and without gutturals, and derivatives of Ql and *.*^
Verbs.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 141
A) To the first class belong forms like ^j^ hing^ emphat
state pj^; \ZiSO book, emphat. state l^acD; ^1' child^ em-
. phat. state ]^ ; with suff OialSo , .001;?} ff) , ^\\1^ To
the form with Hholem in Hebrew corresponds .^0^0 holiness,
emphat. state l^^ao; ^ojo hnee, emphat. state ]a5QQ
(comp. 15. 2. B. b). The same applies :
ft
B) In forms with gutturals ; e.g. ,<ai slave, emphat. state
Ir^^l; ^^Jkio master, emphat. state Plo Here belong also
emphatforms like \iS\ earth, }]i] cedar, \1do\ food, )aa>o) wa?/.
C) Finally, derivatives of Yerbs w&.^ and oL lose or
belonging to the middle quiescent radicals ^ or Q^ In con-
nection with _L, A and Q form the dipthongs ai and au ; e.g.
^v^ eye, emphat. state P-iJL; jo^Qla* guilt, emphatstate (ocLm
(AxT) constr. state, house, emphat. lAx^).
Rem. The following forms take , viz. : ;Q2 flesh, 'r^D side,
y^^ counsel, and the emphat. forms |j^ f mourning, (^ i] sea,
l^jl threshing floor, \2}l^ ship, 1;Sd"| lamb; from ^iwO*!, etc. Some
words which would in Hebrew, take Pattah, in Syriac, take J^ ; e.g.
^y.j/oo^, emphat.state |J.tJ , etc. ( is considered as a guttural when
at the end of )SL^ impure, emphat. state ] pCX^, plur. absol. ^p^,
constr. ^pQ^, emphat. ipCl^ ; and in the emphat. form ff jZ, plur.
al'Z ( also ^jlZ ) from the absolute form |j2 grass.
Decl V. Here belong derivatives (mostly participles and
(comp. 40.) ending in }., ^ and w*
The distinguishing characteristic is, that 1 is changed into ^^
and is movable as well as both the other endings in the
emphat. state sing, and before the suffixes with the union
vowel ; e.g. Uyt emphat. state M-^yi ; with suff. OU^ . But
before the suff. of the 1 sing, and 2 and 3 plur. ] quiesces in
142 DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
I . I #
; e. g. ^oou-^y. The same is true in the plur. which
ends with ^ ( 44. Eem. 1) with the falling away of ] ; e.g.
^jb^... The suffix is attached to the emphatic state ending
with ]jL as well as to the constr. state ending with .j^* In
respect to the changes of the vowels, it should be remarked
that the form with ]- takes in the emphatic state, if it be
a monosyllable and begin with a vacant consonant ; e. g.
VA.. from ]].. revealed. In words of two or more syllables
the preceding vowel remains unchanged ; e. g. pV**^ from
l]>j^ , Vi-^y. AJiD from UyiASo* Monosyllabic nouns witli
^ik mute likewise retain their vowels ; e.g. "jLao from - -^^
wine. Finally nouns ending with %. (part. pass, of Pa. and
Aph. see 32. 1), lose _L in the emphat. state sing. ; e. g.
]*\mV) from >iNmV) abandoned; but appears again in
the emphat. state plur. ; e. g. liSmV)*
Rem. From monosyllabic nouns ending with \Z. we find forms
with ; e. g. lifino (Matt. vi. 4) from JCOS* Also from [1^ we
have the plur. emphat. 1 1 \(i^ as though from t\(f* Here belongs
also |>V) from the obsolete form ]S/QA, constr. state plur. - ^^-
The part Pe. act. differs from the noun of the same form by being
inflected as usual,while thenoun,in the plur.takes the form of feminines
of decl. IV., and ( is changed into Q movable with _l_ preceding ;
e.g. Jl> pasturing^ plur. ^>-^) , constr. ti iS> , emphat. JjA) ; ^1>
herdsman^ on the contrary, becomes m the plur. ^Q^>, ZOl), (LQl)*
From |;Sd master^ both forms of the plur. cccur ; the latter form in
(qD9Q2 throne. The noun (.uQJ prophet, in the plur., contracts a.
and 1 into a., |>ni ; while the adjective % it ^ takes yet another],
emphat. |Jju^ , plur. ^^^ , ^^i.^, |U^^*
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 148
B. Feminines.
Bed. I. This includes all the Feminines ending with ]_ ,
which have an immutable vowel in the penult syllable. In
*.his case the penult syllable has either a vowel with a letter
quiescing in it ; e. g. ]]oAiD^;^V^m, or the noun is a derivative
of Yerbs ^, in which case in the plural, the first of
the duplicate radicals reappears, and takes Linea occultans ;
e.g. yi^ (also \i\i^ pretense from ^Sil ; Uo Iride^ plur. -SSo*
The sulf. of the 1. sing, is appended to the constr.state with-
out the union vowel ; e. g. w*A^oAq The suff. in other
persons is joined with the form of the emphat. state ; e. g.
yt^oL^ , etc. (comp. 46. 2).
Rem. From \laLq:^ waistcoat^ appears the plur. ^^il iZoO as if
from IjlIuZqD or A.laZQD Some forms with final \l take Linea
occult, in the emphat. state under J ; e.g. iLipSo city^ emphat. state
|Ajl,.Sd ; or J falls entirely away as in \i\jS\ another^ emphatic
state IZ^I* -^
Decl. 11. Here belong all nouns fem. whose final syllable
begins with two consonants. They have the peculiarity,
<hat between these two consonants, ' in the emphat. sing.,
or is inserted. This vowel is determined by the vowel
belonging to corresponding masculine terminations ; e.g.
USsDjI widow^ (from ^iiD>] masc), emphat. state f ALs^j] ;
IJ40 (from ^^4^ masc), emphat. state lAl^^ ; before guttu-
rals is always the vowel inserted between the two conso-
nants in the emphat. ; e.g. \^\Sifovjl^ emphat. state -jAja^S*
In the reception of suffixes this declension agrees with decl.
I ; e. g. ^aAilSDjf , OlA^il), ^tS^ and OlAll^.
Rem. Some insert Q ; e. g. \123^fall^ emphat. f Aj^Qi5^ So
too (;l0)Z wonder^ (k*^Z love.
Decl. III. This includes those nouns fem. whose vowel of
the first syllable is moved forward, in the emphat. state to
144 DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
the second vacant consonant ; e. g. l;^ja female companion^
emphat. lZ^x ; |].^ cow^ emphat. lA^.Il^ Nouns of this
class, taking a sufF. in the sing., are treated like nouns in
decl. L and II.
Rem. .i. Some nouns have several emphatic forms. Thus
}iD>l alms^ has three emphatic forms ; e. g. lAoj] , lAojl , lAojl*
In the same manner also are inflected (m^) offering^ (Ag12 terror^
|*^m woman, |J>*? /^<^^, etc. The following contractions in the
emphat. state should be mentioned : \Lr*^ for \LLfj>* new, \bsiy>>
for |Al21.. from K^yt ^^^^5 jAiiik for |^1*S\ from jmN brick.
Decl. IV. This includes fem. derivatives of Verbs |J end-
ing in t* and lo It should be remarked in reference to
them that the immutable vowel of the penult syllable is
retained, and ^ and Q , in the emphat. state sing., quiesce
in and ; e. g. (Ajj^o from Pft^O . reproach, jZOk-M
from |QjLj^ animal. If the masc. be monosyllabic the vowel
of the first syllable falls away ; e. g.lAjJl^ from \*!^ girl,
(Vi masc). But in the constr. state, and in all the plurals,
M and Q are movable ; e. g. Lm^j^o . , Zoi-m , ZuJL^ , plur.,
,^1 iO , etc.
Rem. Here belongs also the participle act. of Pa. and Aph. ; but
the fem. participle pass, in the same conjugations, ending, in the
raasc, with w*. , takes instead of in the emphat. state.
With this vowel a forms the dipthong ai ; e. g. j i N .t V) ,
emphat. |A>\.tV) from .i^y.Lo
Decl. V. To this belong mostly monosyllabic derivatives
of Yerbs ]] ending with Q and ^ (some end in Z ), which
begin with two consonants ; e. g. QjaSo calamity, -;) crea-
ture. Also dissvllabic nouns belong here with immutable
ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 145
vowels in the penult syllable ; e.g. 03] victory, -ijoZ thanks^
whose o and ^ quiesce, throughout in the sing. But in the
\AuT. where O and ^ are movable, some nouns (derivatives
of Pa.) take after the second radical letter ; e. g. oL.
entreaty J plur. iQ^ , ^^ti I^Cl^t* Nouns ending with
2 belong here, which in the plur. take Q with the falling
away of 2; e. g. ASi offering, plur. tOAl, Lcl^, I^QlSi*
Other nouns (derivatives of Pe.) take after the first rad-
ical letter ; e.g. QiD> resemblance, plur. tOSoj , Zoioj, |ZqSd>;
or wdth gutturals following, they take ; e. g. QaaId hloiv,
7
plur. tCl*AiD, etc.
Rem. The same peculiarity of taking a new vowel is found also
4, "7 ^ 7
in 0;iD authority, plur. tO^ , etc. ; (ini sheep^ plur. tOOJ and
()SD a hundred, plur. (Zo |ib as if from QOJ and 0|Sd So also in
some nouns which are not derivatives of ]j ; e. g. Q-i\*^ partition,
\7 v 0. -n ^\
plur. ^Qu^JiS}; OjOlCD testimony, plur. |Z0J01CD, and even
0*^\V) , .O^NV> , besides tO^NV) , and some others.
49. Anomalous Nouns.
Some nouns of very frequent occurrence are inflected in
a manner varying more or less from the above mentioned
paradigms ( 47, 48). This arises either from an attempt
to unite different ground-forms, or from the simple ground
form conforming less closely to the general laws of inflection.
These nouns are the following :
146 PARADIGMS OF NOUNS.
MASCULINES.
Plural. Singular,
emphat. constr. absol. emphat. constr. absol.
01Q| ^Gia] ^Cld] ) \oi\ *0| JD| Father.
*CPP7 * D m7 ""SI
IZoi^l Zoiol ^ai^l ^
\mJLO wJLO ^aLd ('^ \Ci jp 5ow.
I'Z^ JaAo ^'Ao I'A.&r) AjlO c^ ^02^5^.
loiSQA JoiSqs ^oiSqa ) ]Sn ^gl ^qs JVam^.
p, p p.. . pp.. ..p p r
(ZaiSOA ZoiSqa ^ctiSqs '
i26rzr 2o,'zr /ovzr lizr ^^^r ^lUiace,
F E M I N I N E S .
VZoiSir ZafiLof ^oiSDf tof :>o'f 5>of jl/o^Aer.
iMii Aii ^i) I'Z'rO Z'ri Daughter.
VZoilV 2culV t^V T^ Sister.
l2oikiV ZoiSdV .OliV l^V ^V "tofi/aiWm.
]2Qk)V ZqLD*!' tOS^jf IALOoI ALDo] lio] People.
p, p .. - , p .. -ft p .. -ft ft "-ft
|ZQ21D ZQ210 .QIQD |Z\lCD _^ Lip.
fAlooj Aliioj ^^o? l^ooj Aobj looj P/ce.
148
NOUNS WITH StJFFIXES.
Paradigms of Noum
A. Masculine Nouns.
Singular. Decl. II.
Stat, absol. jOlcb
Witness.
Suff.Sing. 1 c. *^>aicb
D
2 m. ^)C71C0
2 f. olOJOIOD
3 m. 01>GIQD
3 f. dlJOUX)
SufF.plur. 1 c.
2 ra.
2 f.
^AO?01flQ
Decl. IV.
King.
Decl. V.
Boy.
7. 7
Drink.
cuAaSd
7 4 7
2^
3 m. ^OOljOlCD
3 f. ^01)0120 ^cnn^iLo ^ouX^ ^guAaId
(To tlie sufF. 1 sing, of tlie forms ]li and *aAmLb add i iS^ and
aLmIhD , compare *^AaLo 46. 1. a). / y ^
Plural. ^>01CD ^
Suff.sing. 1 c. *^J01CD *>n\V)
2 m. ^>aiD y 1 n\V)
2 f. . > ^ >^mM> . ininNV)
3 m.^aio>aiD *uaion\V)
3 f. GU>C7lD Oli^SV)
Suff.plur. 1 c. ^jOlfib . inSV)
V
on
2 m..Q2^)0lD
^ -ft 7 D
2 f. ^jLiLijairo
3 m.,oau)OiD .oaiinW)
^n
7 7
3 f. ^OUJOICD ^Ol
nSv>
^OOLii^ ^001 > I \^
NOUNS WITH SUFFIXES.
149
loiih Suffixes,
B
. Feminine Nouns.
Comp. 49
. Table.
Decl. 1.
Decl. IV.
Decl V.
7
^r
1 Vol^
X^
^5
Son.
Father.
Virgin.
Maiden.
Petition.
-r^
^r
^t&ota
^td:^
oi7q1
otZqI.
^ooiZol.
^ctZqI.
wi^ALoAo
oi-b
X ..7
^OIQjDl
Gii\LoA:2
01AA4
0\\Ci
.- * ^7
OlOiDl
oiiMoAii
CT^uS4
7
. i.7
v .X ^7
^oAo
^qoASoAo
^oai;i
^ * X .7
X -X ^7
.OOIQ^I
^ASoAtd
^ooiAlIoAo
^001 All^
^ x .v"
^OlQliil
^oiASoAo
^oAo
^oiAll^
]1
Flood,
7
Waters.
0.7
7
^oioio
oi'i'V)
anjkSo
V
.ooilk} , ooii">^o
oiASoAo (jfAll^
oi'aSoAo oiAliJ^
.QoAlLoAiD .qoAII^
.ooiASoAtd ^ooiAlL^
^diASoAn) ^oiAjIL^
aZa^.
n^. 7^
*, p. 7^
oiZq1
.obZol^^
^-LoZqX
X ,p .7 V.
.ooiZqI*
V * , .7 V.
^oiZqI.
150 ADJECTIVES AND NUMERALS.
50. Adjectives and Numerals.
1. Adjectives being derivatives of verbs (see 40. and
tables) and having the same form as nouns^ are inflected ac-
cording to the same laws (see 44, 45, 48). In respect to
denominative adjectives, see 41. 2.
Rem. The Syriac has no special forms for the comparative and
superlative. For the manner in which these are expressed, see
Syntax Y7.
2. Numerals are either cardinal or ordinal. In the former
we should notice the peculiarity, that masculines from 3 to
10, as in Hebrew, have feminine endings ; but feminines, on
the contrary, have masculine endings. From 20 to 100
there is only one form for both genders.
The numbers from 1 to 10 are the following :
C ORDINALS.
Fem.
Masc.
Fem.
Masc.
Vr-
7
1.
a;
YA. 6.
^Vl
^'^
2.
W^m
iLoi 1.
tlL.
XtlL
3.
]iii2
]llii>2 8.
^hX
ii^^r
4.
^l
K.r 9.
.V)m
i^v.;.
5.
7
ItCQi 10.
Rem. Upon the union of these numerical words with suffixes,
see 46. 2. b. Rem.
The tens from 80 to 90 are expressed by the plural of
the cardinals from 3 to 9 ; e. g. ^iSSZ' 30, ^^^^jf 40,
^^laVOM 50, ^E^ 60, ^xini TO, ^jlii 80, ^-Jji2 90.
The plural of 10 (^r^) represents 20. All plurals" are of
the common gender. Iti) signifies 100, ^"ifco 200, l]k>AL7
or IZolliD ALZ 300, etc., with the preceding unit in the fem-
inme. i^ signifies 1000 (instead of *a!ik or .SiISL, em-
phat. Isil:^, plur. ,^i^^,'ta!L); ^i<^%^ ^ll signifies
ADJECTIVES AMD NUMERALS. 151
2000, ,^-ii^ Ta!^2 8000. etc. (with the preceding unit in
the masculine).
The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19 are formed by
the union of units with 10 in one word, in the following
manner :
Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc.
Vjmi'r^ ;mi^ 11. T'^TilKM 'r^^i
T>l2i2 'Ml 12. '^IhM ! !
TJcQlASZ ,aili^Z 13. f[resl^m -(^K^m 17.
yCQiZ^aV^M ^ 1 ^ms^Z 'rmi^Z 19.
The intermediate numbers from 21 to 29, 31 to 89, etc.,
are formed by the numeral representing the number of tens,
followed by the numeral under ten preceded by o ; e. g.
(Aj^Zo ^L\l masc. 33, .aSOmO ^A fem. 66. . Sometimes
the units precede ; e. g. ^^010 |^^^| 24, etc. So if the
number of numerical words combined be large, the greater
numerals are always placed before the smaller ; e. g.
U^O ^"fSoLo l]Sn")V)Zo 2l^ 1827.
8. The ordinal numbers, from 3 to 10, are formed from
the cardinal numbers by adding the terminations |^ masc,
f Aa- fem., and inserting before the ultimate radical. Foi
the first, a particular word is used, and for the second, a form
differing somewhat from the form of the cardinal for 2.
ORDINALS.
Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc.
VZuiDrO ]^rQ the first. lAa2uA ]lAaA the sixth.
VAxIIjZ lll)Z the second. VAiStn* l>Sin the seventh.
VLJLSL ]lhu^L the third. XLAj^I ViliV' Z the eighth
^A>v>A; ]\ K > A% the fourth. VZuloiZ ] i S i Z i/ie 7^^^^.'A.
liui-iSOM 1". ^^^^^ the fifth. lAa'piini ll'piXQl the tenth.
11
] 52 PARTICLES ADVEKBS.
The tens of ordinals from 20 are expressed, as in Hebrew,
either by cardinal numbers or by the addition thereto of the
terminations (.k. masc., \Ll. fem. ; e. g. (i ^^onv , {>< -n\^ ,
1 1 1 i sn> I , etc. The units are put after ; e. g. ]uAa.^Z
The intermediate numbers from 11 to 19, etc., are formed
by uniting the ordinal number 10 with a unit of the cardi-
nals, into one word, the unit preceding ; e. g. lAm'^mv >.
fem.,^;imSrM masc. the eleventh^\L^\ > ^\IM fem., |.;>rftv;/
masc. the twelfth^ etc. Sometimes the ordinal 10 is united
with a cardinal number and the word is preceded by > ; e.g.
7 7 7 7 ,*7
;rQ^rM> , 'jmuZj , etc.
Rem. The Syrians, like the Hebrews, express the idea o( a part,
by a feminine form and the insertion of Q after the first radical
letter ; e.g. lA^oZ , 'il209 , IaSoOm third part, etc. Upon the
other relations of numbers comp. Syntax 78.
CHAPTER FOUETH.
PARTICLES.
To Particles belong adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions
and interjections. In respect to their origin they may be
considered as primitive, derivative, or transferred from other
parts of speech. The last are by far the most numerous.
51. Adverbs.
1. The following may be considered as primitive adverbs:
^1 so, )] , Q^ not, ^>OL there, p here.
2. Those derived from nouns and adjectives with the
characteristic endings Al , Zo- and Lk\ , arc the following ;
/?
PREPOSITIONS. /. 163
Zu>*l at last J AlLOrO at first, ZqiIjZ again, Aa^oil^ godly,
Aa|>^ m sAor^, A^(;1L Hebraically, fP^QA today.
3. As transferred from other parts of speech are to be
considered those :
a) from substantives ; a ) with a preposition ; e. g.
|Z>i^ finally, \y\M^ truly, P^l^ once, <^i^ inwardly,
. \ ^ 1 Kc^i'nm/mpdiafphj^ Ajj.JiD anew ; j3)withouta preposition;
e. g. 1 '^*^ {want) not, |AmSo enough, ail^ , ^X^ wholly, na-
tively, also in the plural 1 Alibi sometimes ; h) from adjectives,
numerals and pronouns; e. g. %rx4, >-fc'yiffl very, >QuJ^,
O. . 7 7 ij7 -P *7 V f*" ^ '
jOkk^jQ ow?y, r**^l ) lp**^l ^i once, (rM^ immediately, ]iQO
Aow; mwc^ f )iSq1 , Qlk) i^^y -^ c) ^^^^^ verbal forms, as the
infinitive, *QoZ a^am ; or participles ^mV)S , ^mulp ^
almost.
Rem. Some adverbs are transferred from the Greek ; e. g.
nVVvr> ^aXkov, ^mi\V) fxaXio'Ta, "lo^] s/xii. The Syriae lan-
guage is especially rich in compound adverbs. Such are the fol-
lowing : ]au1 where ? p-U l^r^ wherefore? ]j ^^saO^ not yet,
*jiAliD]] l^OpL AoMJ long? piCn woz^>, (SOpL |Ld01^ until now, etc.
Among compound adverbs may also be placed the circumlocutory
A>V not to he (see 38). The simple interrogation is either not
7
expressed at all, or by the addition of wk^ : the negative interroga-
tion, is expressed by IJ , and loi (] The syllable %a1 prefixed
to pronouns and adverbs expresses an interrogation ; e. g. P-( ^Lo
whence ? pL | who ?
52. Prepositions.
1. To the original Prepositions belong the prefixes s ,
J (gen.), ^ (dat. and ace.) which are always joined with a
noun or pronoun, and are vacant when the noun or pronoun
begins with a regular consonant ; _e. g. ^QjlD , ln\\n\
Prefix prepositions take the vowel, which is usually _L, when
154 PREPOSITIONS.
the following consonant is vacant ; e. g. ]<^^*-^ ^ )X^^ ^
or when the vowel falls back from the quiescents ] or Oi;
e. g. llSoo from l^D for ]1^ ; .-klDOOi'S for *jiiooi'^.
Before words which begin with ] , *a or oil , the vowels, in
which these letters quiesce, fall back upon the preceding
prefix ; e. g. ]1jV3 , l^jo^i , 1%lJ , V,i\%N" , joi:^ from
li>l , etc.
Rem. Before (A 6, and ^A, these prepositions take , pro-
bably because they were also written "{Lb] and ^Al* In
^^^QO and ^>QD the preposition L quiesces in Q , * which falls
back (comp. 15. 2. B. c. and the tables following); e.g. V\^^nV
^r^oL , except when suffixes are appended with a union vowel, in
which case the _\ of the second syllable falls away and the original
form reappears ; e.g. OlXa on\ etc. Among the original preposi-
tions may also be reckoned the monosyllables ^Ql witk^ 7n<^\ hy^
ICL^ to.
2. Most of the other prepositions are considered as trans-
ferred from other parts of speech ; a) substantives in the
constr.state ; e. g. ^^ before^ tPOy instead, *'^\^tfor, a1 in
and ALfc^ between, hr*^ and ^)h^ about, Lo^L and Li^^Lunder,
^ (fromLl!^ part) from, 5Ao after ; b) substantives with
prefixes ; e.g. >AcQQ according to, ^nno\ against, ^loQ^
before ; c) compounds ; e. g. ^ t^r^ until to, ^^aL over,
plXo ^Sd without, >,-M ^laO around, about, \>^iOQ^ ^Sd against.
3. Several of the prepositions seem to have been origi-
nally plural nouns, on which account they are united with
plural suffixes. Here belong \^over, ?lt rt cfter,a-
gainst, %Si^**for, ^^O before, Lqj^L under (comp. 16. 2. C.
and the following paradigms).
^Instead of saying that -^ quiesces in Q the author should have
said that L takes the vowel with Q quiescing in it, as ^ is not a
quiescent (see 13). Tr.
PREPOSITIONS WITH SUFFIXES. 155
Prepositions with. Suffixes.
( 16. II. C. and 52 ).
A. With Suff. of the Sino. B. Of the Plur.
Masc. Fern.
^
ZoL
^5^q1 ^ ^Hi
in.
Sing.
1 C. ^JJ^
2 m. yJ^
to.
/ZoL
after,
y',L6
against. over, on account of.
3 f. oiQ cfi'Zol oi)Ao aiSrjQol olJ^ oi2^Asd
Plur.
1 c. ^ ^2q1 ^Ao ^^non\ ^j^ .Ai^So
2 m. .002 .qdZq^ .QD^Ab .nnNnoai .on i \\ .ooAIi^^
*^ *^ 1 P* *> , 5 ? -x 7 -X. -X .7 -X it"*. - *>
3 m..ooio ^ooiZo^ .ooijAo ^oaiNnooX^aujiL^ooiA^i^
3 f. ^012 ^CTiZolu^cn^^AQ^aiVnnoS ^guXi^giAI^^Sd
Rem. The following take no suffixes : Aa2 in, jlL without,
Q. A w^77im, ^M!L oi;er, A>aA!^ under, ]SdA ^^^^^ ^<^> and
^^ ;^^ except.
156 CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.
53. Conjunctions and Interjections.
1. The original ConjunctioDS are the copulative O , > that^
because (^before infinit.), il ^^ p as^ since, of or, *jlO hence,
^Qj^ (for this preposition in questions see 51. 3. Kem.)
r
namely. ^> lest.
Rem. O and J , like 2 and ^, are prefixed (see 52. 1).
2. Compound Conjunctions are ; a) with ^1 ; e. g. q2^ if,
^ 13] andlloi^ 7i7ilesSj ^] although, ^j ooul and^rj] if
hut, tlo ,1 he it he it ; b) with j ; e.g. Bj lest, especially
after prepositions ; e. g. j yu] as, j ^is^^ ? ^^ ^^^ ? *^^
because, j ^io ?e5/, j p^A until; c) with other conjunctions ;
e. g. ^i-OOl /lence, ^ inV> now, .Qyi ,i therefore, -*^^ p
although. From the Greek are borrowed |j ( aXXa, ;a.. ^ap,
3. Interjections as primitives are mostly onomatopoetic ;
e. g. Of , ,0| .-^ *^0 wo ! \Cl behold/ ^OU hey / ha!
They are sometimes borrowed from other parts of speech ;
e.g. 2)oA( , ^aol^ ify^l - OV*^*^ I pray you I
PART THIRD
SYNTAX.
CHAPTER FIRST.
THE PRONOUN.
51. Use of the Separable Personal Pronouns and Suffixes.
A. Separable Personal Pronouns.
1. These pronouns at tlie beginning of a sentence, denote
a certain empliasis, and stand in various relations to the verb
which follows in the same person. This relation is not only ;
a) that of the nominative absolute ; e. g. Rom. xiv. 10.
^aalJ Li\ . Ij plD a J Aj| hut thoti, ivhy judgest thou thy
brother I Eph. iv. 20., Acts xix. 15., II Tim. iv. 5 ; but
it may be also represented ; h) by the oblique cases ; e.g. a)
by the genitive ; e.g. Matt. iii. 11. oNnaV^N pf fQ U> ooi
wiOlQjmSD whose shoes I am not worthy to unloose^ John xix.
11., Ephes. vi. 20 ; ^ ) by the dative ; e. g. Kirsh. ii. 2.
Aj"! ^jlL JD;) ]3 \i\o but no one comes to me, Luke xxiii.41 ;
y) by the accusative ; e.g. Kirsh.iv.7.-9. ^ND ^oAjfj ]Ld 001
Uo oiiSuAo -K^ffio tjf ]snSai]i ^on"2> ]' \Sn ^tS\
OlA*An*1 what you seek to find in the nighty I seek to find in
the day time^ and find it not.
158 THE PKONOUN.
Rem. They are also emphatic after the verb; e.g. Luke iii. 14.
^Lm *a| fClL2 piO what then shall we do ? Upon ^ajj and -jUf
as accusatives, comp. 16. Rem. 1. and the preceding table.
2. United with substantives, adjectives or adverbs they
mark the Present ; a) of the substantive verb looi (see 38);
e.g. *uai l^'r* slit is true-^ Matt. xxiv. 26. 001 UdSqm^ he is
in the desert ; verse 23. OOl pjOl he is here ; h) of the finite
verb with its participle; e.g. pi ^1 /say, AjI pJ^Jl*
thou art horn (comp. 64).
Rem. (Upon ] and 01 see 12. 1. B). The contraction of the
pronoun with the participle or adjective into one word is found in the
1 pers. plur. ; e. g. ^^1 \\n we read ^ k}^^ "^^ ^^ ^^^ holy. It is
also found sometimes in other persons ; e. g. Eph. iii. 13. (l^lji
4^ 7
I beseech ; Gal.v.3. n*^u^ he is guilty ; iii.ll (comp. 20.and37.E).
3. Farther in these cases ; a) the pronoun of the same
person may be doubled, so that the former will denote the
subject and the latter the substantive verb ; e. g. John i. 20.
|j I Pi / am ; xiv. 20. tO Aj ( w^ # Aj | ye are in me ; Matt,
xxvi. 73 ; or the part, present of the finite verb is placed be-
tween ; e.g. Matt. iii. 11. p| ,V>SV> pf / baptize ; xxvii. 4;
John xiii. 13 ; Barh. 68, 16 ; 105, 14 ; 148, 15.
h) In the simple pronoun may be contained both
the subject and substantive verb ; e. g. Gen. xxix. 4.
^Ija >* ^Sd fO^Jf pV^if whence are ye ? we are from
Haran; Assem. I. 83 ; 12, 13.
c ) The pronoun 001 , as substantive verb, may follow
the 1 and 2 person as subject ; e. g. Acts xxii. 8.
^Q*^ 001 pi I am Jesus ; Luke xxii. 67. f,iV) ooi Aj( .|
if thou art the Messiah ; verse 70 ; xxiv. 18 ; Ephr. I. 214. E;
Barh. 173, 18-20. Also ^Qjf and ^jY, follow the 1 and 2
PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 159
pers. as subject ; e. g. Matt. v. 13. IijIj 01m>\V) .qjV.oAj]
ye are the salt of the earth; I. Cor. iii. 17; Barh. 133. 1.
Rem. Instead of the pronouns, thePhiloxenlan version of the N.T.
uses A^l with suff.; e. g. ^OloZuf \i\ Iam\ ^QD^Ljk\ ^bS\ye are,
B. Suffixes
1. The pronominal suffixes of the verb denote the accusa-
tive ; rarely, and for tbe most part in translations from
the Hebrew, the dative ; e. g. wi-jAoctIji for w>JL Aiiou thou
hast given to me.
Rem. This imitation of the Heb. is neglected in passages of the
0. T. ; e. g. Zach. vii. 5. comp. with Ephr. II. 296. B. and Isa. xxiv.
4, comp. with II. 65. C.
2. In the relation of genitive, the suffixes are attached to
the nomen rectum or to the genitive proper; e.g. Ez. xvi. 18.
jbOAo^j p 1^ thy embroidered garments^ literally of
thine embroidery or ornament ; vii. 20; xi. 15 ; xxvii. 16, 27;
y p *> ^ " ^^
Matt. vi. 11. ^inJQD> pOM^^ our necessary hread^ literally
of our need.
Rem. The suffix is seldom found with the nomen regens ; e.g. Ez.
xvi. 27. fLQjkJlJ .-fc-DAjaJOJ ^SsD of thy lewd ways, usually in con-
nection with |1 i V)i the right, and |JSD0 the left ; e.g. Acts. iii. 7.
|l iSf). kJ ClpA^ on his right hand; Matt.v.29; Rev.i.I7. Sometimes
a double suffix occurs ; e.g. Ephr. I. 204. B. and G. ^^PQ^ yr^-^
thy first horn.
3. The noun taking a suffix stands before an adjective
PxV ^'a'"
connected with it ; e. g. Ps. Ixxxvii. 1. t*-"rO 01jq4o
in his holy mountain'^ Ez. vi. 9; Ephr. I. 284. A. Jn^ Ol) .o]
his good treasure.
4. The suffix to the noun is often understood objectively;
8. g. Exod. XX. 20. OiA!iI*j/ear before him ; I Cor. xi. 25.
.ftJ;30rL in remembrance of me\ John xv. 10. OliiOA*
love to'him] Barh. 218, 14. *
Rem. 1. Possessives are also expressed by ^\^J with suff. ( 16.
B) ; e. g. Barh. 49. 7. Oll^j ]]1mwU9 his commander ; 146, 10.
160 PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS.
This manner of expression is used particularly when a stronger eia-
phasis is required than is indicated by the mere suffix ; e. g. Matt.
vi. 13. ]Zon\V) wCn y^y thine is the kingdom ; Barh. 146, 1.
;>A.O> ^^? (A05 (Lrl our great church in Haran. If the suff.
to the noun be also repeated, it indicates (emphatically) the Greek
possessives ^[klg tfo^, &c. ; e. g. John iv. 34. N*? *-A^QD]Sd
sfAov /3^u/xa ; vii. 6 ; xv. 9 ; Rom. 3.7. The same repetition of the
7 1 7
suffix occurs also in prepositions; e.g. II Cor. v. 19. ^X*9 ^^
iv vi\iA\) ; I John ii. 2, and in certain forms of expression; e.g. Matt.
xxvii. 4. ^^ PiD ^ T If fag >jfxa^ ; John xxi. 22.
7
Rem. 2. We should mention the use of the sufF. in ^;lD , .rSD,
for the pronoun of the second, and in ,ui,*^\, ^ASd( , j^^aijfor
the pronoun of the first person, when the discourse is addressed
to superiors ; e. g. Genesis xliv. 16. ->;V) \ ;SDp plD
what shall we say to thee {my lord) ? .^ii,*^s\ (Ol^^* our {thy
servants') iniquity ; ve;*se 32. So kings in speaking of themselves
use \d!^ ; e. g. Esth. viii. 8. ln\V)> ]V)n QCJo'Ao write
in {my) the king's name; and in reference to God, 01, vv
is used ; e. g. Gen. v. 1. Also %a^ stands connected with the
second and third persons ; e. g. Mark xii. 37. ji;Ld Ol^ \\i
7
he calls him his {my) Lord, and diflfers from y^ , in that the for-
mer is the common form of salutation, while the latter marks the
pluralis majestatis, and is used of Christ in the version of the New
Testament ; e. g. Acts i. 1 ; Rom. xiv. 8.
Rem. 3. It is rather to be considered as an imitation of a Hebrew
idiom, when the suffix relates to a noun which does not occur till
later in the discourse (comp. Gesenius Lehrgeb. p. 739) ; or when
the noun itself is repeated instead of the pronoun ; e.g. Gen. xvi. 16.
55. Pleonastic Use of Pronouns.
A. Separable Personal Pronouns.
Here belongs the pronoun of tlie third person ooi (Ol)
(comp. 12. 1. B) united with nearly all persons of the
sing, and plur., by which an emphasis is denoted, which is
disregarded in the later language. It is found still in such
PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS. 161
passages as John viii. 26. ]Sn\sn p] WVv^V) ooi ^.Aoi
thai {exactly) I speah hefore the world; verse 28 ; xv. 16 ;
Eom. iii. 31 ; Heb. ix. 17. It is to be considered merely
as pleonastic m Luke vii. 19. ^i >^nn<^ 01 ^*h^|J o|
or shall we wait for another ? Eom. xiv. 8 ; Heb. xiii. 22 ; I
Tim. \A\ V. 9; Barb. 188, 8 ; Assem.I. 221,A.5, especially
where it occurs with a feminine noun ; e, g. Eom. iii. 26.
|jL3;i:) *Djj]iD 001 jZaiSOjiOlO hy faith is a man justified. OCFl
is sometimes connected with a plural ; e. g. Ephr. I. 214, D.
^OOLUTDO OOI .OOUaJ AIj^^O on account of his ivives and
children.
Eem. Sometimes also the fem. -*01 (still more emphatic), is
found ; e. g. Eev. xxi. 2. Aafja VAaji^ ^6l l^^LoXo
and I saw (it) the holy city ; xxii. 19, and the plur. .QJOl Assem.L
YT, A. 20, 21. OOI and OOI are sometimes united together without
3 7 7 -X
emphasis ; e.g. John v.9. (^Qa 001 0010 and this day ; Barh.148,
X P .jft P 7 > *
3. Also in the plur. ; e.g. Matt. iii. 1. tOJOl fASoOin ^j tO^Jl^
but in these days. The pleonastic use of 001 is confirmed from
the fact that the Philoxenian version omits it altogether.
B. Suffixes.
1. The suffix is often used pleonastically with the verb,
when the object with ^ as though by way of explanation
follows; e. g. Matt. i. 21. Ol V)s\ wiOin > 1 ;jLy, oaifor he
shall bless (it) his people ; verse 24; ii. 6, 11 ; Mark xiv. 47.
Without ^in Matt. xxv. 25. j^J^a CxL^ki I hurled {it)
thy talent ; xxvii. 5 ; I Tim. vi. 14.
Rem. 1. The suffix also occurs pleonastically with " after verbs
of motion, going, coming, &c. ; e.g. Gen. xxvii.43. y^ ^1 go ; Luke
viii.37. OlS ^iU? therewith he departed; Matt.x.6 ; John xi.31; iv.3.
.jDoZ OlS l2lo and he came again ; Assem. 1.44,A.l7. Oli^ n^1
he went out ; 186,A.30. ]lkJjT^^^^ ^^ 1^ ^^ ^^ ^"^ O^ne
162 PLEONASTIC USE OF PRONOUNS.
to the Aramoeans ; Eplir. I. 260, B. l^!^ OlS ^OO Moses stood
up ; Matt. iii. 2. IaIQ*? iZonSV) cCL tCi^O the kingdom of
heaven is near ; the same is true frequently, after AoJ^ ( = ?o
depart from this life) ; e. g. John xi. 14. Ol^ AjlSd jV^ Lazarus
is dead ; Mark ix. 26 ; Assem.I. 367, 9 ; Ephr.l.204,A ; sometimes
7
with verbs which have not the signification of motion ; e. g. 'f!DD
to believe ; John xi. 31 ; fi^lL to maJce^ Barh. 217, 10 ; J4* to be
foolish^ Rom. i. 22 ; and even after |001 John i. 15.
Rem. 2.-f-0n the contrary, the suffix in active verbs, sometimes,
falls away when it can either be easily supplied from the context,
or the same object has already preceded ; e. g. Barh. 424. 9.
^OiQlDjO \MliO - llOtO \l^y \0 ^na] he brought out
all of the silver coin and heaped (it) up before him; particularly the
^k 7 7
neuter; e. g. Gen. xxiv. 49. t-iJOlOja inform me thereof. In many
verbs following each other the suffix which is to be repeated falls
away ; e.g. Matt. xiv. 19 ; I Cor. xi. 23, 24. Where two follow each
other the suffix is usually added to the latter verb ; e.g. Barh. 419,5.
Ol^ ,^1 i;O>V)0 ^1 > n>QSD we esteem and honor it.
2. The suffix is also pleonastic in the nomen regens which
precedes the genitive with j ; e. g. John iii. 18. olSiiAO
LpXMuk) in the name of the only begotten; xii.3. ^QAa> ^aOloL.. j
the feet of Jesus ; verse 81 ; Acts v. 2 ; Ephr. I. 87, B.
Rem. Here belongs also the repetition of the suff. before
^^j ( 54. B. 4. Rem. 1) and after ^^ = all^ without J following
it ; e.g. Matt. xiii. 2. (jklD UV^D the whole m,ultitude ; ii. 3, 4 ;
Kirsh. 114, 10. |Al*,V) ^01^ all cities. Sometimes ^\d with
suffix occurs after the noun ; e.g. Barh. 71, 6. Ol^ ^> (SDI but
the whole people ; Matt. vi. 33. ^01^ ^^iNoi all these things.
Without the suffix ^\o signifies each, every ; e. g. Matt. iv. 4. v^
|j5jO every word ; Acts xviii. 4.
3. Finally, a pleonastic suffix is attached to prepositions
thus ; ) > is placed before the accompanying noun and is
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 163
considered either as a sign of the genitive ( 52. 2) or as a
relative ; e. g. I Tim. i. 8. JcdqIQJj oiZqo( according to (it)
the law ; John i. 42. ^Qa^j oljAo /o (^m) Jesiis ; xviii. 15;
jfXk Eev. V. 11 ; 2ciL Luke xxiii. 7 ; ^^^JiD Kom. viii. 3.
liu^j oi^^S^JiO for (it) sin ; ^ Acts iii. 6 ; ^ Rom.
xiii.6 ; Barh. 74,18. M0;^> <^aiQjxL against {him) the tyrant;
^ai 76, 11 ; ^fd Luke v. 19 ; 6) or the preceding preposi-
tion with the suffix is repeated before the noun ; e. g. Luke
ii.8. 'ihI\L ai::^ in {it) the field ; Barh.192,7; Assem.L 27, 1,
29; Ephr.I.87,B ; ^^ John ii. 2. VZoAaSqI oiS to {it to) the
feast; ^ Acts viii. 35 ; ^ Acts ix. 21, etc.
General Remark on Personal Pronouns.
In Syriac, we also find in personal pronouns enallage ; a)
oi number in A-i*! ; e.g. Barh. 166, 6. ^;01 tOOlO ^oioAal
|,^Q |;Q10 (aj there were among them twenty women and
ten children ; in words whose plural only is used ; e.g. Luke
xxiii. 45. OiAi-Ld ^!i tlo^GI) ]ijZ Jia] -j4 tl^ the vail
of the temple was rent {in its midst) in twain. The same is
true in the dual ; e. g. Hebrews xi. 26. ^>^) oiASOiXO
the treasures {of it) Egypt; Barh. 108, 2/, h) oi gender ; e. g.
Michael. Chr. 20, 9, 10. ^Oir^ l2o>21\ooilo all places
in these ; c ) of gender and number together, if by collec-
tives sing. fern, are signified names of countries and cities,
men or inhabitants ; e.g. Barh. 565, 18, 19. Xlamj] Ql**sim\
fZollo O-Dj .O^Oll alo UU-J^ they found a great
many men, and these odso they led into captivity ;
l2aJ^ 580, 1, 2 ; iW^ 591, 5, 6 ; .^^Vl50, 11, 12
164 RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
56. Use of the Relative Pronoun ( 17. 2).
1. The Kelative j gives to adverbs of interrogation, place,
time, etc., a relative signification; e. g. liil where? > p^l
there^ where^ Jonn i. 28. ^IaaOi (001 ^SqiSdj pu| ihere^ luhere
John haptized ; verse 40 ; Barli.82,2 ; '^i^ ivhither f ? ]L^
thither^ where: e. g. John xiii. ZQ. \i\ \\\y |iill whither I go ;
Barh. 198, 13 ; Assem.I. 27; 2.3.V. E ; l^'{how ? ? liif
jiLst as ; e. g. John iii. 14 ; v. 26 ; xiii. 83 ; ^t^] when ?
J wiASol when^ as ; e. g. v. 25. ^QlSomJj ^Ak)1 when they shall
hear; ]UlD how much? j ]Sdo so much ; e. g. John vi. 11.
QO .J jSOD fl5 mwc/i a5 they would, y gives the same mean-
ingsometimes to nouns; e.g. >^ I JO Zflce ; > 5Z| where; e.g.
John iii. 8.
2. The oblique cases are formed by some mark of the
case followed by a sufi&x ; a ) the genitive is indicated by
the suffix added to the nomen regeris ; e.g. John ix. ll.
^QA.A OISq^j whose name is Jesus ; Assem.I. 165, A. 14; h)
the dative^ according to the following example ; Eom. i. 9.
\i\ . V^iiV) aC^^ whom I serve ; verse 31 ; c) the accusative,
thus ; e. g. John i. 26. 01^ .oAj*! ^-i^r^ U \ObS\y luhom ye
know not. The accusative is also expressed by the suffix at-
tached to the verb ; e. g. iii.84. CJIj^ji loCLj whom God hath
sent ; d) the ablative by .^ ; e.g. John i.48; by ^io Rom.i.6.
In a similar manner the relative is united with the preposi-
7 '"7kPP7
tion ; e.g. ^1, John iii.2. OlSoi |Ol22^j with whom is God^ etc.
Rem. In connection with the suffix of the 1 and 2 person, added
to the verb, it (the relative) forms, with reference to a preceding
subject of the same person, the oblique cases who^ /, whom^ me, like
the Lat. qui; e. g. Gen. xlv. 4. *jlUoAi)1j ^afiOOi '{j] W lam
Joseph whom [me) ye have sold ; Num. xxii. 30 ; Isa. xli. 8 (Ephr.
TI.88. E) 5^Aiil>jj L{\ ^^4 thou art Israel whom [thee) I have
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 165
nidde strong. The same occurs with prepositiona; e. g. Num. xxii.
30. thy she ass i \\ Aj| ^.^uS^jy upon whom (me) thou hast ridden.
The relative alone sometimes marks the accusative, particular!}
the neuter; e. g. Gen. i. 31. r^^^} \^ all that he made. The re
lative is sometimes used before the mark of the case ; e.g. Barh. 43,
12. OUr^lTij to which time ; 137, 5. |OCri puk^) which belonged
to the Arabians.
3. The Syrians express the relative with a demonstrative
preceding Ae, or iliis^ who^ that, which, etc., as follows ; a) by
> 001 , y 001 , > poi masc, ? ^Ol , > fjoi fern., and in the
plur. J ^QjOl masc, j ^01 fem. ; e. g. John vii. 16. ^]
7 9 7
vJLJ9r? OOlj buthiSj who has sent me; Eom.iv. 5; vii. 6; Phil.
ii.6. waOioA^lj Ijoi thatj which was; John i.24 0J>A1> tOJOl
;^Ao5e luho were sent; Barh. 17, 2 ; 170,5 ; i) by > ^ masc.
and. fem., and j ^jib neut. ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 12. A^lj ^Sn\
I30l Aj Ol^ to him who hath, shall be given ; John iv. 34 ;
V.30 ; vii.l7, 18 ; Matt.xiii.l7. ^o*AjV^v,.Ij U)^ that luhich
^ ^0 *7 ^i7 ^7
ye see ; Eom. i. 28 ; viii. 25 ; c) by j P-| masc, j fj-l fem.
and plur. j ^^>\>] com. ; e. g. Eom. ii.29. 001 fimnn> \ju\
he ivho is inwardly /John viii. 9 ; Eom. ii. 2, 3 ; iv. 7 ; v. 14 ;
Barh. 85, 3 ; d) frequently by the participle ; e.g. Eom.vii.l.
(fiDOSas (.k^r^ those ivho know the law.
Rem. If a particular emphasis is to be indicated the demonstra-
001 QAu> 001 QJOl this very
one is he who sat. Sometimes, like the Greek ^attraction, the
demonstrative is wanting; e. g. John iv. 14. Ol^ ^Z| pfj |lSo
cou vSaros ou s/w ^wtfw olCtg) ; or the relative is wanting ; e. g. Heb.
V.2. ..^>'^^0-> ]Lk]o and he {or this) who can; less frequently are both
wanting, according to Hebrew usage ; e. g. Job xxiv. 19. Finally
the relative occurs pleonastically before participles; e.g. Amos vi. 1.
Q^Ol I!^ _a.^A.Ar^ *aO woe to those who depiseZion; Ephr.II.274.D.
166 DEMONSTEATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
57. Use of Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns.
The demonstrative is neither usecl for the relative^ nor
does it give, as in Hebrew, a special emphasis to particles
aDd numerals (comp, Gesen. Lehrgeb. p. 750 sq.). It is
used only in its proper signification.
Rem. It IS emphatic m connection "with 001 and w01 ( 17. 1.
Rem.) ; e. g. Matt. v. 47. Sometimes fJOl may be translated by
hicce ; e. g. John xix. 19.
2. The interrogative pronoun ( 17. 8 ) is united with
Douns of both genders and numbers ; e. g. Matt. xii. 48.
wi.ja| ^QJ I -S^O ' ^| *a01 _Sd who is my mother and who are
my brethren f The oblique cases are either so expressed
that, in the genitive, the noun in the constr. state precedes ;
e. g. Gen. xxiv. 23. ^tj) ^io L\i whose daughter art thou f
or so that ^ follows with y preceding ; e. g. I Sam. xii. 8.
^j ]r-a) ^Lo/rom whose handf or Qlk)j stands before
the noun ; e. g. Matt. xxii. 20. ^dAdo poi ^iii^t QiSDj
ivhose image and writing is this ? The other cases are form-
ed by the special case-signs preceding, or by prepositions ;
e.g. Assem. 1. 84, 6. ^Zl ^sb^ to whom shall I give ? Matt.
xii. 27. (iSqo whereby e
Rem. Sometimes }1ji| occurs instead of the relative in the
indirect question, without J following it ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 42.
^00;V) iZ"! (Al* \fjL\a at what hour your lord will come ? and
QlLo includes (OOl ; e.g. John xviii. 38. (>;* QlLo what is
truth ? vii. 20.
58. Pronouns for which the Syrians have no special forms.
A. Eeflexive Pronouns.
The Syrians express the reflexive pronoun ( 17. 4) as fol.
fows ; a) by the passive (comp. 21. 2. 22. 2. 24. 2); b)
often, particularly in the third person, by the personal pro-
OTHER PRONOUNS. 167
noun ; e. g. Barh. 54, 15. ^*i4^ OliT 001 he killed himself;
77, 5. laLi ^001^ qSOi^I they chose themselves a king ;
83, 16; by prepositions; e.g.Barh. 164,12. Qn i.Kv oiL^lo
and they lead hy themselves ; c) by \mSLi and }5aOQlD The
former is used in reference to persons ; e.g. Matt, xxiii. 12.
OlisiJ 2>CL;Jj jl^^ Ae who exalteth himself; Barh. 56, 2 ; 84,
15 ; 144, 12 ; less frequently, in reference to things ; e. g.
Luke xi. 17. 0la2U ^ y^^ly on\V) ^^ every kingdo'^i
which is divided against itself ]iDQlo is used in reference
to both persons and things ; e.g. II Cor. xii. 15. VWl^ .>Vn oi^
I give myself; Luke xi. 17. ^o-SsAsi oiSOQlo ^j liud
a house which is divided against itself
Kem. Less frequently occur in ;i reflexive signification,
\*i\ heart ; e.g. Lakeii .51 ; i^) head ; p^O) spirit ; e.g. Dan.
^7 7 * P .
iv. 5, 9 ; |a.M life; Ps. vii. 6. The pronouns (jkL3 and (LdQIO by
way of periphrasis for other pronouns; e. g. Rom. x. 3. (ZopO
tOGlAU> their own righteousness ; 1 Cor.vi.l9 ; Phil.ii.4,5 ; Rom.
ix. 3. , iV>Q10 X^X I myself ; Heb. i. 3 ; ix. 28.
B. Other Pronouns.
The other pronouns are thus expressed :
1. :77m, thai, see 56. 3.
2. Each, every, are expressed ; a) as substantives, by
1-i '. Gen. xl. 5 ; ^1 I Cor. iii. 8 ; vii. 2, 8 ; Gal. vi. 4 ;^
the latter is doubled in Acts ii. 88, 45 ; I Cor. vii. 17 ;
xi. 21 ; II Cor. v. 10 ; I Thess. iv. 4. Sometimes they are
expressed by %MSn ^^ Kom. xiii. 1 ; r^ r** ^^ Eph. v.
88 ; ^ .^jI ^ Luke xiv. 83 ; ^'rTilo or ^-^i ^
Rom. xii. 18 ; h) as adjectives ; a) by ^ Matt. vii. 17 ;
1 John iv. 8 ; ^So ^^Ad Assem. I. 11, A. 19 ; ^) by a re-
petition of the noun defined by each, every ; e. g. II Kings
12
168 OTHER PHONO UXS.
7 7
xvii. 29. ^<l^ >0.1 every nation ; Matt. xx. 10 ; / ) by the
plural ; e.g. Amos iv. 4. Ir^ J^ every morning; sometimes
by ttie singular which is to be considered as a distributive ;
e. g. Jer. xxxvii. 21. V^XlxO each day. The neuter is ex-
pressed by ^r^ ^\o John iv. 25.
3. Whosoever, (quicunque), is expressed by uu] ^o or
cat\o John i. 7; 1 Cor. iii. 13; ?^ Matt. xiii. 19 ;
? Vi-T^O I John iii. 3 ; j ^ Mark vii. 16 ; Barh. 195, 3 ;
198,12. The neuter by ? |kilo Acts iii.22 ; iv. 23 ; ? U)^
Matt. X. 27.
4. Somebody, anybody (aliquis)^ in interrogative and con-
ditional clauses, are expressed ; ) by ^mS\ and |J^i John
iv. 33. ^ISol \>o;^ oliT JA^V^] ]\n\ AcfrA a/t// one
brought him aughi to eat ? vii. 48 ; I Tim. vi.3. Ukl\ Zu| . |
aiJ!^j ?/" any one teach ; Rev. xxii. 18 ; ft) by > ^io Mark
vii. 16. OlL AjiIj ^ib hath any one? c) sometimes by ^io
Rom. iii. 3. ^ooiliD ^ s/ Tivsg ; Mark xii. 5 ; or more in ac-
cordance with the Hebrew idiom, by ]mS12 Lev. i v. 2 ; v. 1 ,
2, 4 ; vii. 27. The neuter is expressed ; a)hj ^^ Acts
V. 36 ; *S> 001 ^r^> that he was something {great) ; John
vii.4 ; I John ii. 15 ; b) sometimes by ^ Lev. v. 9. JSoj ^
some {of the) blood; or U^^^^ (= 1^1 ) Gen. xviii.l4.
' 5. Nobody, no one ; a) as substantives, are expressed by
m] 1] Matt.ix.l6; John i.l8 ; James i.l3 ; ]i\mS\ Acts xviii.
10 flCor.ii.ll ; 'riy. ]]''Num.xxxi.49 ; .ail 'r^ jl Jer.li.43 ;
*mj1 Lj\ John vii.4 ; sometimes by *mS\} A^ John xv.l3 ;
J A^ik or simply by Aa^ v/ith an adjective or participle fol-
lowing; e.g. Matt.xix.l7. IfL^ AjlL no one is good. The neuter,
by U)r^ 13' or U'^^lio Phil. ii. 3 ; I Tim. vi. 7; A^^ fol-
OTHER PRONOUNS. 169
lowed by ^r^ Matt. x. 26 ; with ^^ preceding, II Cor.
vi. 10 ; without '^^ James iv. 2 ; b) as adjectives, by IJ
after the noun, with the verb, I Cor. ii.9. L\j^ ]] ]ijlL no eye
hath seen it ; before the noun, Eom. viii. 39. \tu^ ]] no
creature ; by A^ with the noun following, Luke iv. 24.
I ni Aa.^ no prophet ; Heb.iv.13 ; with the noun preceding,
Eph. V. 5 ; with the words standing between, John xv. 22.
(Aa.4** ^001-^ Zooi Aa^ they would have had no sin.
6. Some, any^ are expressed ; ) by j A^] Matt. xvi. 14.
^r^l? Aa"| some say ; John ix. 9 ; with words interposed,
vii, 12. ^'^l? rO.^OOOl L^X for some said ; ? ]jul A^f
I Cor. viii. 7 ; xv. 34; fl Thes. iii. 11 ; b) hj **j] "^]
Phil. i. 15 ; I Tim. iv. 1 ; ^ |ju1 John ix. 16 ; c) elipti-
cally, by ^, Matt, xxiii. 34. ^oAj"| ^iS^ .oouSd some
shall ye kill ; Mark xii. o ; Acts xvii. 32 ; Eom. v. 8 ; (f)
sometimes by the plural of the noun ; e. g. Dan. viii. 27.
I ALdOa some days ; poll , Gren. xxix. 20. The neuter is
expressed by j Ajj , Matt. xiii. 4. ^^aj> A^l some fell ; also
in verse 8.
7. Some, others, are expressed ; a) by \^\^ ^aj] , Acts
xxviii. 24 ; or by .mJl ^mj] uijl ^mS\ Phil. i. 15 ; b) by
)^r*A ? Aa"! Matt. xvi. 14 ; John vii. 12 ; or with > A^^
repeated, Assem. I. 10. Eem. 1, 2 ; c) by ^OOUio .ooilSo
Acts xvii. 32 ; Barh. 105, 10 ; with the sign of the case
prefixed, 114,14. ^00111 * s ScL .oouSdLo qI^^ ^oouIdIo
some they hilled, others he blinded ; finally by Mr**| ^
Barh. 93, 18.
Rem. When some signifies the greater party it is expressed by
170 OTHER PRONOUNS.
p,.A*| ^5;D (Jo-i^CO , John vii. 40. So7ne this others that, by
VA1j->*1 \i^] Acts xix. 32.
8. The one, the other, (alter) are expressed ; a) of persons,
by ;iii masc. IZji** fern., repeated; or by 'fCi.y l;.0*i Isa.
iii. 5 ; r^\\ k*I Gren. xiii. 11 ; also of inanimate objects,
Matt. xii. 13. OlZ'^^js* ^^^l AloZo oi^r^^iLa he stretched
forth his hand and it became sound as the other; I Cor. xiv.7;
Col. iii. 13. ISQIOJ cniri>l ^ .aj]] Zuf^V i/* one hath an
accusation against another ; Phil. ii. 3, 4 ; h) by ,.** or ^JOl
repeated, Kom.xii.lO; j**.^ ja* one to the other {^each other,
comp. Kemark) ; Matt. xxiv. 10 ; John xiii. 35 ; also by
]j>*l - r-^ Matt. vi. 24. ^'h^I ^>A John iv. 37 ; c)
by the repetition of the same noun, Acts xxi. 34.
io^o i>0^ - \nl] one this, another that ; or by Ij^x* Gal.vi.2.
lVp*i5 1j^Q- CIII.4 ^^^ ^^^ ^^'^^^ (Another's burden.
77^
j^EM. One another is represented by ^x* ,m, with a preposition
interposed between, John xiii. 14; xxii. 34, 36 ; sometimes by the
simple preposition with sufRx, Rom.i.24. ^OOIO among one another ;
or in like manner by |jr^ John xvi. 19 ; Barh. 41, 18.
9. The same, himself, herself, itself, are expressed ; a) by
a personal pronoun doubled, with p placed between ; e. g.
Heb.x.ll. U*^? tOJOl ^ .0301 i/ie 5a/?2e sacrifice ; Phil.iii.l.
_a.JOl p ^JOI the same; also without p ; e.g.Assem.I.44,13.
IALdcu .QJOlO -QJ-0l2^ ^he same time ; 6 ) by a compound-
ing of the demonstrative pronoun ( l7. 1. Rem.; 57. 1.
Rem.) ; c) by the pleonastic suffix befol-e the noun; e.g.Mark
i. 42. |A\aO OIQ at the same hour; Heb. ii. 14; ix. 24.
1j.VQali cnS into heaven itself ; Matt. xxvi. 44 ; Heb. ix. 21.
OTHER PRONOUNS. 17 1
PiDj ^k) ouSd with the same blood ; with ^> and tlie noun
following ; e.g. Assem. 1.415; 3. lAij giLa) i/ie ^awe year ;
416, 1 ; d) sometimes bj \m2il and Udqit) with suffix ( 58.
A), Matt. iv. 6 ; John v. 26, 43.
Rem. More definite are 001 QJOl , equivalent to just the mme^
exactly the same ;John i. 15 ; vii. 25 ; Barh. 26, 2.
10. Jl certain (one) ; a ) by ^^ masc. (^m fern. ; John iv.
46. pM p-^ a certain king; v. 2. Ih^ lAoo J a ceriam
place ; Barh.116,10 ; 117,3 ; with ^.Sd following; e.g. Assem.
I. 33; 22, 27 ; Barh. 93, 6 ; ft ) by ^JSO relating to things ;
e.g. Barh, l70, 3. W^ T-^'p^ ^ P when he had entered
into a house ; l78, 2 ; 194, 3.
Rem. In proper nouns it is sometimes expressed, by circumlocu-
tion, by C31SQ> jl;e. g. Assem. 350, 18 ; 351, 2.
11. As great as {tantus quantus) is expressed by^^i*!;
e.g. Barh. 190, 16. 001 ISdqJj Ij^o] ^V . OV** ^i'they saw
no need so great as on this day. Of which nature of such ,
or 50 as [talis-qualis), are expressed by U^Oi j \i^] ; e.g.
Assem. 1.39 ; 17,18. ^oioA.^Tliooi - IjoSoil Ajfljl^j )LQr>t
as the statue which thou hast seen, so is he. This latter idea
alone is also expressed by ^fand a pronoun following; e.g.
John iv. 23; ^*S(7l ^Ij such; Barh. 55, 13 ; 70, 18.
CHAPTEE SECOND
THE VERB.
59. General View.
The use of the Preterit and of the Future^ as iii ihe He-
brew, is so comprehensive, that by them almost all liie other
relations of time are designated, in accordance with definite
rules (comp. 65). This, however, is usually in such a
manner that the preterite designates those tenses which
stand in connection with past time, while the future has the
same influence upon future time.
60. Use of the Preterit
1. In the Past it designates ;
-n 7 7
a) the absolutely pa^t tense ; e.g. Matt.ii.2. oiiiOQD ^W
we have seen his star ; Ol-i y.tfflV^\ ^2*1 we are come to ivor-
ship him ; John iii. 16; Assem. I. 861, 26, 27 ;
h) the Narrative tense [Aorist) ; a ) mostly before the sub-
ject ; e.g. Mark xi. 11. ^S)o]] ^am^ ^ Jesus came to Je-
rusalem ; John ii.22. wiOlOpji^Z Op?^! his disciples remem-
bered; /3) after particles (when something ac^waZ is denoted),
e. g. rS, Barh. 68,12. oi^o ]] p since they did not receive;
line 4. > t^r^ until that ; Matt. i. 25. l^'i P^A until she
brought forth ; Barh. 24, 6 ; AjlSdj ^^^^ wni!i7 Ae died ; 213,
18 ; 217, 3 ; Assem. 1. 31,l7 ; Ephr. I. 196, F ;
USE OF THE PRETERIT. 178
c) tlie Pluperfect ; a) in relative clauses which define the
principal action, and in point of time, precede it ; e.g. Matt.
i. 24. ]1'^} OloOlo aC^ r^\ "U^T p^ he did as the angel
of the Lord had commanded ; Mark xi. 6 ; b) after particles ;
e.g. p when, aft^r ; Matt. ii. 1. ^QJu A^Z] p t6'Aen Jesws
iw.? /wm; verse 9 ; John ii. 22 ; vi. 23, 24 ; Barh. 90, 9 ;
Assem L 84, B. 6. ? iA^) q/J:er ^Aa^ ; Barh. 39,7. ^5>^? >Ao
*fiDCUJ^ after that he hadslainDarius; 164,8. j >Aq ^, ibid;
Assem. I. 213, A. 25; ? Vr**^ ^o soor* a5 ; Barh. 79, 12.
Rem. More frequently, however, for the pluperfect, stands the
If
^.^ ^ ocn(65).
2. It denotes the Present Tense ;
q) in verbs of quality and condition ; e. g. Matt. xvi. 2, 3.
y^ Z\nV)fY) the shy is red; John iv. 35. OjOk.? ]lLj(the
fields which are white ; Isa. i. 3 ; Ephr. II. 11 7, A ; b) in
general designations of time, denoting simply what is usual
and customary ; e. g. Ps. xiv. 2. Q^J I M^Sb ^Ae Zorc? holes
down ; xxv. 2 ; c) when it denotes a state or condition ; e.g.
Gen. iv. 6. j^S *'liZ"| ]lV)\ vjAy ^^^ ^^<^^ angry f
3. It marks the Future Tense ;
a) in prophecies, asseverations, and ^e like, (for the
most part, however, only in translations from the Hebrew),
which are viewed as already fulfilled and accomplished ; e.g.
Isa. ix. 2. ]b> (ioiQJ OU* they shall see ^ a great light ; Gen.
xvii. 20 ; sometimes after verbs in which is involved the
idea of a future action ; e. g. Barh. 80, 1. ^oouj ;2i'| he
promised that he would give ; b) the completed future (futurum
exactum) after J |k5 ; e.g. Mark xii.25. lAlSo ^ qSQ)> ]Sd
t<;Ae?i they shall rise from the dead ; John iv. 25.
4. In exhortations, and in clauses which contain condi-
tions or conclusions, the preterite also expresses the rela-
tion of the subjunctive ; a) of the present tense, (loqi with a
XX r
participle or adjective) ; e. g. I Thess. v. 6. ^'riA ^ooi let
us he watchful; verse 8 ; Eph. ii. 11 ; Tit. li. 9, 10 ; h) of
174 USE OF THE PKETERIT.
the imperfect : e. g. Jobn ix. 41. A^^ ^oLkOGl ]'^f^ Q^
|Aa.4** fCia^ Zooi if ye were blind, then would ye have had
no sin; xv. 19 ; c) of the pluperfect ; e. g. John xi. 21.
*u-m1 looi Zpo |J Zuooi ^L qIL hadst thou been here my
brother had not died ; Barh. 93, 10 ; Ephr. I. 225, E.
001 is sometimes want-
ing; e. g. Matt. ix. 17. iSl ^;4^ ]]j the bottles do not thereby
hurst ; xxv. 24 ; Mark i. 44 ; ii. 21,22 ; Luke v. 36 ; the imperfect
subjunctive is more frequently expressed by the future ( 61) ; and
sometimes the preterite with jiQ^ oh, that, denotes the optative
( 65); e.g. Rev. iii. 15. A^OOl 1;^;^ ^Q^ oh, that thou wert
cold ; Epiir. III. 284. Oil ,Xi ^ ZUOOI ll'^oL would that I
were not of her children. Tiiis idea seems also involved in the
cases under c.
5. Finally, the preterit also stands for the Imperative
and the Infinitive ;
a) the preterit fooi occurs as an Imperative in connec-
tion with an adjective or participle ; e. g. Mark v. 84.
]*r)iNi kaAaOOI iV^j hyir^g ; II Tim. iv. 5 ; Rom. xii. 9, 10.
tQQ.kM|J ,^iV>>> .OZUOOI love your brethren ; I Pet. ii. 13 ;
iv. 9 ; after preceding imperatives ; e. g. Luke x. 87.
I Pet. iii. 15 ;
b) the preterit stands as an Infinitive after verbs signify-
ing to come^ to go, to send, etc., without the copula ; e. g.
Barh. 415,2. oni ^ ]{ ]1] he came to besiege Acco ; 402,
8; with the copula, Barh. 403, 16, 17. oLdO ^ oV^
the^ sent to entreat ; especially after *^\m ; e. g. Barh. 68, 1 .
.jj.O,,k50 .j^As -ftV* be began to open and to offer up.
USE OF THE FUTURE. 175
Rem. But this union frequently denotes merely the aorist ; e. g.
Assem. /. 288, 2. oZ"! oSnn thei/ arose to go\, e. they went.
61. Use of the Future.
1. The Future stands ;
a) for the Absolute Future ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. Zd.
.;riU ]] . I \V)0 tOjriiJ ]:S\o ]>V^ Heaven and earth shall
2oass aivay, but my word shall not jpass aivay ; i. 21, 23 ;
Luke xviii. 8 ; John xiv. 18 ;
h) for the Complete Future in conditional clauses, (with
the future in the conclusion of the sentence) ; John v. 43.
^oSnnZ OOT^i^ OIaU JxuilQ IZ^j" ^I>*1 tf ^Z" another shall
have come in his own name^ him will ye receive ; viii. 28.
XV. 7, 10.
2. Furthermore, it denotes, the following relations of time;
a) the Present although, more rarely than in Hebrew ; e.g.
01^ JDOZ Ulo ^>\m ^ |AaJ > \0
"TTaj 6 'ttj'vwv sx rou uJaro^ roJrou, (Jj-vJ^yjtfgj -Tr'aXiv ; with 1 1 verse 48,
after > ^r^ I^^ke xxii. 61. l]l..-J>Z' I'Oj' j ^5,^^ 5^re
the coch crows ; h) the Imperfect ; "" a ) after such verbs as
> ^*^ ; Assem. I. 27, 20. Ol!^ '^'U ? ^'r* ^^ sjmke to him
(began to speak) ; /3 ) after particles ? \^^ until ; j ^pO
before; e. g. Luke ii. 2L \a^'^ ^^^ ? ^r^ ^'ore 7ie
i(;(X5 conceived in his mothers womb ; Barh. xi. 15 ; c)
more rarely the Perfect ; e. g. Jud. v. 8. loiL^ ^VT' ^^^
Aa^/i chosen; Isa. xliii. 17, 19 ; d) i\iQ' Pluperfect : after
|]'^, > ^r^ Z>e/ore ; e. g. Jer. i. 5.
'3. It serves to express the following Moods ;
.4 ) the Subjunctive ; a) of the Present ; ) in general ;
176 USE OF THE FUTURE.
John vii. . 37. lAmJO *j2q^ ]l\3 let him come to me and
drink ; Barh. 79, 1. ioSOJ ^inV) now let him die ; /5) after
J , |j> with a preceding present or imperative ; e. g. John
V. 10. 4a*rl ^QaZj *A 4*ii' "^it is not lawful that thou
should'st carry thy bed; vi. 12. 5o^ ^]j ]]j QmlO
gather that nothing he lost ; Matt.xxvi.41 ; Assem.I.877,10,
11,13 ; h) of the Imperfect ; a) in conditional clauses ; John
ix. 22. Oia IjQJ AJ] ^1 if any man should confess concern-
ing him ; (3) after a preceding imperfect ; e. g. John ii. 25.
>aiQJ AJ(> fOOl *niiro iJ it was not needful that any one
should testify; after a preterite; v.27. ]i-j r^ loouj Ci^^l
he gave him authority that he should execute judgment ;
i. 31 ; Barh. 80, 8 ; Assem. I. 359, 5 ; after the pluper-
feet ; e. g. John iv. 8. .QlOp) 0001 Ouskl they were gone
that they might buy ; 7) sometimes with (OOI appended; e.g.
Ephr. I. 223, C. looi OlJniJ ]ilLt'{how he would do ; As-
sem. I. 297, B. 3. V. E ; c) of the Perfect sometimes, in con-
ditional clauses, after J and ^| ll( {in case that) ; e.g. John
vii. 51 ; Ephr. I. 237, B. and E ; <7) of the Pluperfect, more
rarely, and only with (OOl appended ; e. g. Ephr. I. 40, B.
001 IZliJ ^i^> U^i*? i?CT^ fooi (oou p-rflDOM p.2^
lohat harm loould have arisen because it had brought forth
good ears ?
Rem. May, might, can, should, must, and the Hke, are also ex-
pressed by the future ; e. g. Ephr. I. 203, F. ]u*So ^{|/? that
he might go and see ; John iv. 40. .OOl^Q-!^ fOOUj CUlJ^ OS*^
they entreated him that he toould remain with them, ^ verse 47 ; v.
14 ; Rom. vi. 1. |QOJ ^|j yllki what shall we say, shall lot
ronflnue? Gen. ii. 16, 30, 31 ; Luke xviii. 7 ; John vi. 28 ; Heb.
USE OF THE FUTURE. 177
i. 6 ; Barh. 63, 19. ZqSDJ ^m^^J ]]j ^ every one who of-
fered not should die ; 68, 18 ; Mark ix. 49. IAmjD) ^
t\V)2Z ]\V)0 every sacrifice should he salted with salt ;
Prov. XX. 9 ; jS^P ^2iD who can say? By way of circumlocution,
7
may and should are expressed by > *^i n ; e. g. 1 Cor. xi. 7 ;
must by 3 |J0 with a future following ; e. g. John iv. 24 ; I
Tim. iii. 2.
B) The Imperative ; a) in Prohibitions ; e.g. Matt. i. 20.
V5yjLj2 tf/ear wo^ ; John iii. 7 ; vi. 20 ; I Cor. xv. 33, 34.
tQ4>*2 |j sin not ; h) after a preceding imperative ; e. g.
John i. 40. ^OVwZo o2 Ipp^sc^s xa? /'^srs, verse 47; viii. 11.
Rem. The third person of the imperative, which is wanting, is
9G1QJ |OCU let
there he light.
C) The future marks the Irifinitivt after verbs which in-
volve the intention of some action ; e. g. Barh. 34, 4, 5.
fSQ. J"j ]l5 he sought to kill ; 90,7,8. ^uOloJ^^^? ^^1^
he thought to kill him ; Matt. ii. 22. ^l^J? ^^J he feared to
--*7 7 -A 7 17
go; Assem. 1. 33, 25. |j^JO ^O^) -'r* he began to fast
and to pray ; John iii. 3. fV^J? .^.aV) P //e cannot see ;
verses 4, 5 ; xv. 4 (without j following, Matt. viii. 28). In
like manner occur '\l\ Matt. v.l7 ; ^r- xvi. 3 ; ^0i Luke
viii. 55 ; Acts i. 4 ; and many others.
Rem. The infinitive with ^ also follows these verbs. Com-
pare 63. B.
4. Finally, the future is also expressed by h^I ready ^
about to he ( = jasXXsjv ) and a following infinitive ; e.g.Matt.
xi. 14. ]1\^ r-Al? he who is to come ; John iii. 14.
]aj1 > Oi;o qSD)2AS^ h^ lioai eten so the Son of Man
iv to be lifted up ; vi. 6 ; vii. 35 ; in the plural ; Luke xxi.
178 USE OF THE IMPERATIVE.
OOISq^ ^jl^GI ^jJf ^H>Al this will come to pass; verse86.
The implied idea of the imperfect is expressed by looi ap-
pended; e.g. John vii. 89. oSnnV)^ oooi ^^^? \L6y
the spirit which they were to receive.
Rem. Also occurs J ^jiAl with a following future ; e. g. Assem.
I. 481, 22. X't^l IjOIO H'^Alj the priest shall begin ; 37, 17 ;
Eplir. I. 197, D ; in the plural ; John vi. 15. The idea of willing^
purposing^ is also expressed by |s ; a ) with J and a future fol-
lowing; especially Matt. xvi. 24. tu^Ao f^pj r^t? r~^
whoso will follow after me ; v. 40 ; Barh. 68,6 ; or without > ; e. g.
Luke xviii. 13. ^Q^p i (001 |o JJ Ae would not lift up ; b)
with an infinitive following ; John i.44. n<^V)\ |i f he would
go forth.
62. Use of the Imperative,
1. The Imperative expresses either a command ; e.g. John
V. 8. 5^010 ^&0;l ^on >OQO anse^ take up thy bed and
walk ; or encouragement and permission ; e. g. Mark i. 38.
|jynoV onLoi go into the city ; John xi. 15.
Rem. In the same signification the Syriac appends the impera-
tive of l2f (vid. 28. l.Rem. ; 2. Rem.) to the future of the finite
verb, especially of \L and %aL in the singular, w^hen two, are in-
tended ; e. g. Gen. xxxi. 44. |V^ O ^>m (Z let us make a
covenant ; xix. 32 ; and oZ in the plural, when several are meant ;
e.g. John xi. 7. ^i1j o2 let us go.
2. The imperative standing after the future, some-
times acquires a future signification ; e. g. Gen. xlv. 18.
Q^Qolo tOoL ^^2 1 / will give to you and ye shall eat;
USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 179
07' the latter of two imperatives, following each other with-
out a copula, denotes the infinitive ; e. g. John iv. 16.
^'fO *^] go to call ; verse 29. Vm qL come to see ; Ephr.
I. 201, E; or with the copula they stand in the relation of
cause and effect ; e. g. Gen. xlii. 18. Q-i-mO 0,i1 *|>oi do
this and live, i. e., if ye would live.
Rem. In this latter case the future also follows the imperative ;
e. g. Isa. viii.lO. - >Vr><^/7 jJo |A^Sd oWV> speak a word,
it shall not he fulfilled.
3. Of two successive imperatives, when one is negative, it
is expressed by the future ( 61. 8. B) ; e. g. John viii. 11.
^u-^i U .^oZ lC7l ^Ldo *jl^1 go and henceforth sin no
more ; Eom. xi. 20 ; Eph. iv. 26.
Rem. Concerning the third person of the imperative, com-
001 to designate this
person, see 60. 5. a.
63. Use of the Infinitive.
The Syriac, which has not, like the Hebrew, a double
form for the infinitive absolute and construct, denotes the
latter by ^ prefixed (compare 19. B. 3).
A. Infinitive Absolute.
The infinitive without ^ is mostly used adverbially,
and in connection with its finite verb, which it precedes,
denotes ; a) a strenthening of the action ; e. g. Hebr.vi. 14.
. . > " !! m*! cL-lfiOSoo v2^1 QDj^qLd / will bless thee exceed-
ingly and multiply thee greatly ; I Sam. xx. 6 ; xxiii. 22 ;
John ix. 9. OlS ISdj \i>^ he is very like Mm ; Acts v.
180 USE OF THE INFINITIVE.
28 ; Philem. verse 9 ; b) certainty, confirmation ; e. g. BarL.
15, 13. ^>Z ^pSo thou shalt know with certainty. N"eg-
atively with (J before the finite verb it is equivalent to, hy
no means ; e.g. John xx. 5. ^oi p m^Sd he hy no means
went in ; Eom. ix. 6. ; c) it sometimes denotes continuance ;
e.g. Isa. XXX. 19. ^QQoZ p p*^So ye shall not always weep ;
Exod. xxxiv. 7.
Rem. By the infinitive absolute are also expressed, rather how-
ever after the idiom of the Hebrew, other minute points of the
language; e.g. much, much more; Jer. xxii. 10. Q^Q ]^oVn
weep much ; somewhat, indeed ( Germ, etwa ), Gen. xxxvii. 8.
Nv Aj"! ' A^^ on ^V)V) wilt thou indeed rule over us ?
then, truly; xliii.Y. ^OGI ^-Ir^ ^^^ could we then know ? per-
haps, indeed ; Aci^ vW. ^^. LkY^k ]\.*1d I have indeed seen. More
frequently it is merely pleonastic ; e. g. Luke i. 22 ; John xiii. 29 ;
Acts vii. 45 ; and it is appended to the imperative ; e. g. Isa. vi. 9.
7 7
MSQaSd Qllfis hear ye. The negative sometimes stands before
it ; e.g. Gen. iii. 4. ^L^iiDL ASibJiD ]] ye surely shall not die.
The case a, in translations of passages from the01dTestament,is also
expressed by the noun formed from the finite verb ; e. g. Gen. ii.lY.
ZqLdZ IZqLd ^:])2Sr| ^li)3 thou shalt surely die (compare
T
Ephr. 1. 24, A), which is closely connected with the ordinary Syriac
mode of expression ; as %:Ol^ |Asi |Zo,-m |,j<* rejoice exceed-
ingly ; see 67. I.e.
B. Infinitive with ^ or the Construct form.
The Infinitive with ^ stands ;
a) after verbs which denote a purpose, wish, determina-
tiony capacity, command, etc. ; e. g. Luke xi. 54. ^jSO
T> * 7 * t
^^ ratSQ^ they sought to catch something; Matt. xxi. 46;
THE INFINITIVE. 181
John V. 16; vii. 1. QIjikOlSDiii loai \^1 J]" he would not
go; Matt. xiv. 5; Barh. 14, 18; 88, 6 ; Matt. vi. 24.
, \<^V)\ K>. naV) All |J no man can serve ; Mark ii. 7 ;
Jolinm.2; x.21; Barli.192,20. vqAsqI ^ ioZl ^2 Uaf
here also could he not remain ; Luke xv. 15. ]v ;<^V OVifM
he sent him to feed ; John iv. 83. ^\o|s2iik ^Lk{ he
brought to eat ; Ephr. I. 280, D. OjcrUSol _ ^oriCDj they
shall take to kindle ; John xi. 31. ]^nV)^ ]]l] V^Cini^j
that she goeth unto the grave to weep ; Barh. 12, 20; h)
after verbs signifying to begin^ to cease, to be accustomed ;
e. g. Matt. iv. l7. 01pV)\ *^\ he began to preach;
xvi. 21 ; Barh. I, 1, 2 ; 5, 2 ; Assem. I. 5l8, B. 20 ; Acts
V. 42. 0<^\V)\ 0001 ,^iS> |] they ceased not to teach ;
Eph. i. 16; Barh. 5. 10. Q^iIkkaSqI ^"l:^ they were ac-
customed to changes.
Rem. 1. The infinitive with ^ (which can sometimes, viz. in
passages translated from the Hebrew, be rendered by while, or
when ; e.g. Gen. ii. 3. ,nNV)\ loi^ Vr^^ which God created,
when he made it); forms, after fuAl ( 61. 4) and after looi, a cir-
cumlocution for the future ; e.g. Gen. xv.l2. *^;SV)\ {aSQa ]oai
the sun shall go down. But of the Hebrew idiom, by which the
infinitive, joined with a preposition or conjunction, is explained by
the finite verb, there occurs in Syriac, only the construction with
J ^ before ^ ; e.g. Assem. 1. 42,8. 0<^^V)S> ^ ]oai IJa ]]o
and he ceased not to teach ; negatively, in Hebr. iv. 1.
^^ASli^j Sd *A\Zi^ who should refrain from entering, i. e.,
ivho should not enter ; or comparatively, without > ; Gen. iv. 13.
.o^0-^\ ^V) ^Zo \^CY) wftOI \oiy my crime is greater, than
can he forgiven me.
Rem. 2. Tn the poets we sometimes meet with a transition
182 USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.
from the infinitive to the finite verb; e.g. Ephr. III. 129, F.
{IQ^Sd \i> i^l /ar fte^^er is it, in time of thirst to drink water^
than, instead of drinkimj to measure fountains (Hterally, and loe
will not measure) ; and likewise conversely ; which seems to be
done for the sake of the metre (compare Hahn et Sieff. Chr. p. V .
Anm.). The Syriac also expresses the infinitive by the future,
with or without J prefixed ( 61. 3. C ) or by the participle
( 64. 3. B ).
64. Use of the Participle.
1. Participles may be considered either as Adjectives or
as Substantives :
A) As Adjectives^ they assume the number and gender
of their subject; and take their object in the case or
with the preposition of the verb from which they are
formed ; thus ; a ) the Active Participle ; e. g. John ii. 14.
ija^0 l^r^O \j0L ^A.12p^? ^^Ol those who sold oxen, sheep,
and doves ; verse 16 ; viii. 44 ; Barh. 52, 4, 5 ; 74, 20.
IbilSv ^\Lj ln\V) a hing who fears God; Assem. I. 270,
A. Kem. 9 ; Acts vi. 3. \1'S^} olLoj ^>Sv> full of the
Holy Ghost ; Rom. i. 29 ; John iii.l5. oii ^^(k^l ^aila
every one who believes on him ; h) the Passive Participle,
with the case or the preposition of its active ; e. g. Ez. ix. 2.
V.QQ ^d^ clothed in Byssus ; Barh. 32, 14 ; 108, 6 ; l70,
19. Ir*"! ...i^aZ) maimed in the hand ; Lev. ii. 4.
]M>>V>n ,^\ig^ V^'*''Vl <^^^^^'^ anointed with oil ; I Sam. ii.18.
ll;Snh^ 5^jiD blessed of the Lord.
B) As Substantives^ participles stand, in a genitive re-
lation, in the construct state, before the noun ; thus a) the
USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. ]8B
Active Participle ; e.g. Gen. xxiii. 10. \Lj2 > \.^]L those who
went m at the gate ; Kom. vii. 1 . (COQSQJ ^AApi those who
know ike law (literally, the knowers of the law) ; Barh. 1 95,
11. ^alco I f^Sn who had draiun the sword '^ 214, 1 ;
even before prepositions; II Tim. iii. 2. |2o*^ifcjD ^;ZiD
ivho deny (i.e. refuse to acknowledge) favors; I Tim. i. 10.
lAisOoi ^^ ^r^^ breaker of their oath ; b ) the Passive
Participle; Gen. xxiv. 81. Hr^> Ol^i;*^ blessed of God\
xxvi. 29.
2. Participles mark the following relations of time :
A) The present^ in connection with the separable pro-
noun denoting the subject ( 54. 2 ) ; e. g. John iv. 9.
Aj 1 \^ thou prayest ( art pro.ying ) ; xv. 15 ; Assem. I.
34, 9. t^So ^Sd '\i\ , >n<^ j] / have no command from our
Lord.
Rem. In the third person which is usually already rendered
definite by a preceding noun or pronoun, the separable pronoun is
omitted ; e. g. Luke xv. 5. 01^ ^\ci0 and he heareth it (the
sheep) ; verse 6. - >mnVr>>^\ \^0 <JlAi*^\ fZIo and cometh
into his house and calleth his friends ; John iii. 18, 20; iv. 36;
vii. 17 ; viii. 47 ; iv. 23. liJlli \kll\ B 1 hut the time cometh.
B) The past ; a) the Imperfect ; a ) in connection with
looi ( Qb); (3) without looi after a preceding imperfect ;
e. g. John. iii. 22. ^knSoo .OOlSoi looi ^OlAiD he tar-
ried with them and baptized ; iv. 27, 31 ; vi. 2 ; 7 ) after the
preterite in a relative parenthetical clause ; e. g. John vi. 5.
Ol^Q^ Xl]\ 1] > r^^ \m10 Iwo <^^<^ ^^^ ^^^ ^ great com-
pany who came to him ; verse 11 ; Assem. I . 75, A.86 ;
joined with o copulative ; e. g. Barh. 4, 3. ho^ik QONcT)
13
184 THE PARTICIPLE.
^)x0 ^oS o; , n > they went up on Mount Hermon and abode ;
h ) the Perfect ; John vii. 52. ]3-^yi ,^ K^?' -^W *^^^
^]jO U search and see^ that out of Galilee hath arisen no
'prophet.
Rem. It is to be regarded as a mere imitation, and not as a
constant idiom of the language, when tlie Hebrew infinitive
tliin ^^ ^^ participle "rTbh' (^7 which, coming before the finite
verb, is indicated the continuance or gradual progress of an action),
is expressed in Syriac by the participle of ^1 ( ; e. g. Gen. viii. 5.
^lmI*o oboi ^iV "Uioo ( ^^t)r^^ -jibn ^^^n D^iTari") )
and the waters decreased more and more ; I Sam. ii. 26.
^l ^-lo ^iT U^o ( nit)i bi!\i tibn "i5sm ) ^
<he 6oy ^rei^> /rom <?ay to day.
C ) The Future ; a ) the Absolute Future ; a ) in general
propositions ; e. g. John xi. 23. .-iJDaMl ^\o thy brother
shall rise again ; (3) after a present ; John xi. 2-i.
^poj ^i] "iLfjk I know that he shall rise again ; iv. 25 ;
y) after a preterite, Barh. 80, 20 ; 81, 1. jAjDj oiS -^^01
l^g^^V)^ OlS IjI ^oSiSO ^ISDCU 12^Z Ae said to him that in
three days he would surrender the city ; John iv. 25 ; ^ ) after
a future ; John xiv. 23. ^Z| oiZoio w>oio>V^Kt;j ^q(
my Father will love him, and lue will come to him ; Assem. I.
862, 5, 8. \i\ looi |i-a4^XLP - ? -^ ^ouAj ^" if it
shall be granted me that then will I become a christian ; s )
after an imperative ; Mark xi. 24. ^oAjj ^-.1CQJ> QlSaaC31
believe that ye shall receive ; X,) after loi, John xvi. 32.
lAl taZl loi behold the hour shall come ; Gen. vi. 17 ;
xlviii.4 ; Exod. ix. 18 ; ^i ) in direct and indirect questions :
USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 185
e. g. John vii. 41. V ^ iaV) ]l] O^y. ^ ]Sn\/ shall the
Messiah come out of Galilee ? verse 31 ; viii. 22 ; xiii. 27.
Aj| r^^y 2>0jSd w;7ja^ ^Aow t^;2;7^ do; b) thefuturum exacium ;
a ) after particles ; e. g. Jolin vii. 27. Xl]\ ^Aif t(;^m Ae
shall have come ; verse 81. Barh. 133, 2. ^tS\ 1iLq> ]So
a5 5007Z as thou shall have heard ; /3 ) in conditional clauses ;
e.g. Eplir. I. 218, F. tio ^ooiL Vl *SOUj tff unless I
shall have given him water.
3. In like manner, participles indicate various Moods ;
A ) The Subjunctive ; viz. ) of the Imperfect ( with
OOl , compare 65 ) after ^f ; e. g. Barh. 38, 10.
^ZAk) U ]jZ| ;oZASo jr^V^ ^1 even though the vessel broke^
the ground would not break ; Assem. I. 379, 2.
I^ B'lo \1L ]iV)0 \ZiCi ^ if he denied Christ then
should he live^ ifnot^ he should die ; after ? U ], Barh. 56, 12.
n , V)\ ^^^( 11? (J I ^e5ic?e5 that they would not sac-
rifice ; in relative clauses depending upon a future
.( = imperfect subjunctive ) ; e. g. Assem. I. 362, 19.
^/ia^ /^e shoidd be given them as Bishop^ ivhom they should
ask ; 6 ) of the Pluperfect^ with (001 in conditional clauses
( compare 60. 4. c ) ; e. g. Gal. iv. 15. iocJl ]naV) oliv
- V ^ mn -oAaOOI ! riiO^t ^ - ^ ^^ ^^ ^^<^^ possible
ye would have plucked out your own eyes^ and given them to me;
Heb. X. 2 ; xi. 15; I John ii. 19.
B ) The Infinitive^ after verbs signifying to begin, to cease,
to permit, to (ommand, to be able, etc.; e.g. Matt. xii. 1.
^r^SV) Q^\ they began to pluck; Mark i. 45 ; Luke v. 21 ;
186 USE OF THE PARTICIPLE.
XV. 14 ; I John ii. 8. (Vml\Sd ^ji;* IjOIQJ they began tos';e
the light ; Assem. I. 37,15. llO ^\m he began to call ; 60,
5 ; Barh. 96, 7 ;. 108, 19 ; 160, 7 ; 180, 5 ; 83, 12 ;
(Zpl ^>m ^io ^4^ /e ceased to build churches ; Matt. xiii.
30. ^-a^' opar^ji sw^er to grow ; Luke xviii. 16 ; John
XL 44 ; xviii. .8 ; Luke x. 40. *jlS '{S^^ cHL '^'{ bid her
help me ; Mark ii. 2. ^aJ| r-^l ^*^| U 2^ could not
hold them / vii. 15 ; John v. 19 ; viii. 43 ; Acts x.47 ; Mark
vi. 37. ^^fcfns^ .001^ ^Aj loe will give them to eat.
Rem. Sometimes > also stands before such a participle ; e. g.
Matt. xxiv.30. TZlj Imjlj (J\\Cl^ ^OVwJ they shall see the Son
of man coming ; John v. 19 ; Acts xxi. 32. ^^ > >D ) ^io Q^OIO
DQJ^Qk^ 0001 J'ff'ajO'avTo roitrovrsg rdv IlauXov.
4. The Absolute Participle is distinguished bj a) p pre-
ceding it ; e.g. Matt.xiv.25. ^01Ld p ^om^ ^OOlZoi jZf
]vVn ^\l /e5W5 came <o <Aew walking upon the sea ; xv. 32;
John ix. 7. lu* p Ulo /ie came seeing ; Barh. 62, 6.
A>Vr> |Q;or^ ^^^Ak) p disquieted by war he died ; 73,4.
1^) p l]']*^^]^ p U 710^ standing, but bowed to the earth;
ft) by J preceding ; e. g. Mark ii. 14. ]mnV) Zuo j:^tly
silting at the receipt of custom ; xi. 2, 4 ; Matt. xiv. 26 ;
xxvi. 64.
Rem. If to such a participle, a noun be appended, this con-
struction sometimes expresses the Latin ablative absolute ; e. g.
Matt. XV. 20. -010,-| i^mk) tl r^ with unwashed hands ;
Mark vii. 2, 5 ; John xi. 44. ^Cnoiy^JO *uOldyal ^>^1 P
hound hand and foot. Tn the translation of the New Testament,
the participle is sometimes to be understood as in the person of the
finite verb following it ; e. g. Matt. ii. 8. onn\ qI] ^opsu&s'vrsg
c-^cTcctfaT? verses 9, 10, 11, 13,
USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 187
5. The passive participles frequently have an active
signification ; a ) those from transitive verbs ; e. g. Matt,
viu. 18. 01^ ^pif^i those surrounding him ; Luke vii.
14. aCL 0001 ^o-^jkOA) tliose hearing him ; John v. 4.
M.Sal locn MliD troubling the water ; Actsxxi.l6; Assem.
I. 80, 4. U^^^^JulQ* yi bearing the child; 84,9 ; 87,8 ;
877, 2. Olyuti Oil Zooi 1n*n\ she drew him by the
hand ; b ) those from intransitive verbs ; e. g. Matt. v. 4.
U^SU ^OOU^oi blessed are those who mourn ; Mark vii.
80 ; John xi. 19. OOOI --it/Zl they were come ; xii. 15.
xl ^ .0^9 ri(/iw^ w;7o/i a foal ; Barh. 170, 2 ; 228, 1.
|C)( M^ jQaAji ^ sitting upon a bed.
Rem. Participles sometimes have the signification of the
Latin participle in -ndus ; e. g. Barh. 128, 2. ^^^..a-Mj timendus.
Here also belong ( compare No. 5 ) such constructions as
v^ vaI .Cu.ClM I have forsaken all ; y*^ oul \ASiD I deny
thee ; .i^ >a.i-M)) *^1 as I will.
6. Finally participles are also used impersonally thus ;
a) the Masculine ; Eom. xvi. 2. ]ii i,n\ *Ojlj ^1 as i7
becometh saints ; Heb. viii. 8 ; Philem. 8 ; Assem. I. 88,20.
j^l *:>1 *^;Q Twy 50/1, 2i behoveth thee ; 455, A. 24, 41.
1oi-Lj TtO^V Wsi |J it behoveth not a servant of the Lord ;
John iii. 30. (o;<^V (ooi jJo OOl OGL^ he must increase ;
ix. 4. Uo *^ I must ; Acts xxv. 27 ; xxvi. 1 ; Rom. xiv.
4 ; Mark iv. 88. , i > .^1^ ..\ ^4^ U oy jasXsi Coi, on
a-jroXXjfAs&a ; 6 ) the Feminine ; especially to denote the
neuter; e. g. Gal. vi.9. ^1 jj^^ ZoOT W let it not be bur-
densome to us; Barh. 45, 13. VisD? |?cn Mw 25 probable ;
188 MOODS AND TENSES.
Assem. Ll79,B.22. 2!6cn XJ^ it was necessary ; 482, 24.
JojlO \kQM it is honorable and right ; 5 19, A. 4.
Rem. Here belongs also Rom. xiv. 4. ^aiOpAlfl) 14^ ^^ corner
into A/i' hands ; i. e. Ae caw ; and in the feminine, Acts v. 39.
nn>^ ]o |-^Vr> |j ye cannot.
65. View of the manner of designating all the Tenses and
Moods ; of the Imperfect^ Pluperfect^ and Optative in
particular.
1. The Indicative ;
A ) of the Present is expressed; a) by the preterit (60,
2) ; h) sometimes by the future (61. 2. a); c) usually by
the participle ( 54. .2. b, and 64. 2. A);
B ) of the Imperfect ; a) usually by the participle joined
19
ooi ( 18.4. Eem., and 38 ; also without the substan-
tive verb, 64. 2.B. ^ ) ; e.g. Matt. ii.9. Iboi \\{ he went ;
verse 20. |i\^> Olmsu oocn ^ > " *~^7 ^OJOl who sought the
child's life ; iii. 5. JOOU CJLio ZoCTI joaj all Judea went
out ; John xvii. 12. AaOOl '^ I kept; h)hj the prete-
rite ( 60. 1. b), and rarely ; c ) by the future ( 61.
2. b ) ;
C ) of the Perfect^ besides cases noted in ( 60. I ) ;
a) rarely by the future ( 61. 2. c) ; 6) by the participle
(64.2.''B.b);
10
001 in the same
person and number added to the preterit ; e. g. Luke v. 9
MOODS AND TENSES. 189
jOOl C\r*A jOlSiDZ terror had seized him; John iv. 8,
oocn oi^ the}/ had gone into ; v. 13. looi JJ-yi^1 he had
hidden himself; x. 22. |001 |001 he had been ; h) by
the preterit ( 60. J. c ) ; c) rarely by the future ( 61.
2. d);
E) of the Fm^m re besides cases noted in 61.1., some-
times ; a) by the Preterit ( 60. 3. a) ; h) by the impera-
tive ( 62. 2) ; c) by the participle ( 64. 2. C);
F ) of the Futurum exactum ; a) by the preterit ( 60.
3. b), more frequently ; h) by the future (^ 61. 1. b), some-
times ; c) by the participle ( 64. 2. C. b).
//. The Subjunctive ;
A ) of the Present is given ; a) by the preterit of
1oc31 ( 60. 4. a ), very often ; b) by the future ( 61.
3. A. a ) ;
B ) of the Imperfect ; a) usually like the indicative of
the same tense, by the participle with (OOl in conditional
clauses ; e. g. John viii. 19. *)| ^oAaOOl ^.i^r* *-^ CL^
,oA^001 '^. - i"*^!' i/ye A;nei(; me, ye would also knoiv my
father ; verses 39, 42 ; xviii. 30, 36 ; xxi. 25 ; b) by the
future ( 61. 3. A. b), sometimes ; c) by the participle alone
( 64. 3. A. a) ;
C ) of the Perfect; sometimes by the future ( 61. 3.
A.c);
D ) of the Pluperfect ; a) by the preterit (60. 4. c) ;
b) by the future ( 61. 3. A. d), more frequently ; c) by the
participle with looi ( 64. 3. A. b).
in. The Optatice is expressed ; a)\)j the interrogative
190 THE PERSONS OF THE VERB.
pronoun with a preterit or future following ; e. g. Judges
ix. 29. ^r-A^ MCJl toil Olkllsl' ^j ^ oh thai I had
{who will give over to me) this people in my power / Ps. iv. 7 ;
lv.7; 6) by tlie particles aO^and SioLm] oh that, with a pre-
terit following ( 60. 4.1lem.);the Future; e.g. Gen. xvii.18.
]a*P %aoA| oh that he might live ; or the participle with
looi ; e. g. II Cor. xi.l. ouL ^oZuom ^;n>fnV^ *aoAl
may ye yet hear with me !
Rem The optative is sometimes also expressed by ! or Q-^ ;
7 7 7 >lt^ ^
e.g. Ps.lxxxi.13. 1 iINV^p i V)S Q^ would that my people would
hearken to me ; by verbs that denote a wish with a following j ;
e.g. Exod. xvi. 3. tZ\.iJ^> ^001 ,^i,0 would that we were dead !
When the substantive verb denotes a wish, it is omitted ; e. g.
Luke. ii.l4. I^L^U |Aa*0*^oZ glory toGod. Sometimes instead of
the Hebrew n^jji n)^ occurs the almost correspondent J ^11 ^Sd ;
e.g. Job xxiii. 3 ; but it is literally translated in Cant. viii. 1.
jl!^ Vm| ^a^Aj Si3 oh that thou wert my brother.
IV". The Imperative^ besides the cases under 62, is ex-
pressed ; a) by the preterit of loai ( 60. 5. a) ; b) by the
future, especially negatively ( 61. 8. B).
Y. The Infinitive^ finally, besides the cases under 63, is
expressed ; a) by the preterit ( 60. 5. b) ; h) by the fu-
ture ( 61. 3. C) , and more frequently ; c) by the partici-
ple ( 64. 3. B).
m. TJie Persons of the Verb,
1. The third singular masc. and fem. of the active and
passive conjugations is sometimes used impersonally thus r
THE PERSONS OF THE VERB. 191
a ) the masculine ; a) of the preterit ; e. g. Heb. x. 34.
^onL ^p it pained you ; Luke x.34. wiOloSl Ol^ ^i^^M
ke cared for him ; j^ ) of the future, Deut. vi. 24.
^ kSl^J it would he good for us ; Jer. vii.6, . r>^V ]ij
it would harm you ; b) the feminine ; a) of the preterit ,
Ps. xcv.lO. 001 |j^ wi.i^ Aj}Ld it shames me, {I am asham-
ed) of this generation ; Ps. xxxi.9. aJl Aoi it grieves me ;
Luke xviii. 23. (yi^ A^;^ it pained him ; /3) of the future,
Gal. vi. 9. ^ tl^l2 U it will not he grievous to us ; Ps.
Ixix. 20. Olik ]p2> ^SoL whom it grieved.
2. In like manner in Syriac, the neuter is usually ex-
pressed ; a) by the third person singular feminine of the
verb, thus ; a) in impersonal phrases, as Lukb vi. 13
2 7 > , A ^ *
OlyJ it vjas light ; John vi. 17. Aaan it was dark ; pas
. 7 7 ^-n
sively, Barh. 84,14. A^^A* ( the report was spread abroad,
Assem. L 298. A.ll. OlL A.A..Z1 it was revealed to him ,
481, 7 ; i3 ) in connection with the demonstrative pro
noun or with adjectives as subjects ; e. g. John i. 28
..7 "J^'a'* C'
*uOC\ \m1L Aa^^o ^^x^OI this came to pass at Bethany ; i. 3
loai ]fj>* yal there was not any thing ; Ephr. L 240, F
-'^^^ '7.. 7 -no -7 -n
tQiD ->< '^*^ IjOl L\ZiM it seemed good to Moses ; passively,
Assem. I. 380, 4. ^ A^VmZI JDjl it seemed just to us. Yet
we also find for the neuter ; b) the third person singular mas-
culine ; e.g. Isa. xxiii. 12. in\ 1 1 1 )] there will he no
rest for thee ; Barh. 133, 8. 01^ r^JM it was said to him;
X T I -n - 1>
Assem. I. 362, 5. --i JDCnuAj ^| it shall he permitted to me,
3. When the subject of the verb is general or indefi-
nite, it is expressed, in Syriac, in various ways, as in the
English, thus; a)hj the third person singular ; e.g.
192 , THE PERSONS OF THE A^ERB.
Gen. xi. 9. ]'fJD he calls ; (i.e. one calls, it is called) ; to
which is also appended by way of explanation, after the
Hebrew idiom, the participle or participial noun of the same
verb ; e. g. Isa. xvi. 10. jsCU) ^ao^J the wine ireaders shall
tread ( no more wine ; i. e. no one shall tread); or (JUf and
(;^yt ; e.g. I Sam. ix. 9. Tr^yt locn ;Sb| he (i. e. any one)
saza ; John iii. 4. |aco |;^t r^^? ^**^^^ P^^-l /^<^^^ c<^^^
one he horn when he is old? or passively Matt. xxvi. 13.
^k)Aj ?7 5/^aZ^ he told ; Acts xvi. 13. /ui looi IvmASo ^Z
1Zol^ there 'prayer loas wont to he made ; Barh. 58, 13, 15 ;
h) by the third person plural ; e.g. Isa. Ixiv. 3. oZ. |J they
( i. e., men in general ) have not heard ; xlvii. 1 ; Dan. i. 12 ;
Heb. xi. 3. woai ^VmALdj ^jJ^OI i^Aa^ they see (i. e. ^i^/^a^
any one sees, what is seen ) ; also with an explanatory parti-
ciple or adjective; e.g. Isa. xxiv. 16. OiNs ] iJQl they fail-
ecZ ; c) by the second singular ; e. g. Luke li. 4. ^;)Z p
tvhen thou hringest ; I Tim. ii. 1. ^O'^ok) looiZj ^Aa^ thou of-
fer est (i. e. that there he offered ) ; sometimes the verb is in
the second plural. Matt. vi. 24 ; d) sometimes by the first
plural ; e.g. Mark vii.27. V^'pJO nmi) (or by the infin-
itive with ^, Matt. XV. 26. 0>V);V)!i:^o ^acoSoL xxii.17),
that we (i.e. anyone) should take and cast; e) more fre-
quently by the participle alone ; e.g. Matt.vii.l6. ,-a4q^ jSo.^
do men gather f v. 15 ; ix.l7 ; x. 29 ; I Cor. iv.l2 ; Barh.6.2.
^;So| they say ; 58, 9.
R,EM. Here belongs filso |;iiD|ASD they say, it is said ; and im-
personal phrases with an infinitive following ; e. g. Matt. xii. 12.
^^vO^V ,^Xa one may do ; Acts v. 20. om^^^ASoL ]]o
v}e {any one) must obey.
VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 193
4. When the Deity or those in high stations (e.g. Kings),
speak of themselves^ the first person plural denotes the
pluralis excellentice ; e. g. Gen. i. 26. pu| ,^U let us
(i. e. I will) mahe man', xi. 7; Barh. 90, 9. -iqZo jCJl he-
hold we (i.e. ij Justinian)^ have written ; 11. ^ )oAo r^ri'/^
to us (me) .
Rem. Sometimes though for the most part only in passages
translated from the Old and New Testaments, the construction
changes from one person to the other, viz. ; a ) from the third
to the second, or vice versa ; Micah vii. 18. ^Zq2| (Oll^ AX
<^efe is no God as thou, who forgiveth sins, and remitteth the
transgressions of the remnant of his heritage, and retainest not
(compare Ephr. II. 284, A. B); Mai. ii. 15; Gal. iv. 21-
^qSqj L^L .ooouj rr^h r^l' tO^V *^ O'^]
yjysri fjLoj, ol u-ro vo'/xov hiXovrsg sivai ; Rom. ii. 1 ; Matt, xxiii.37 ;
h ) from the first to the third person ; e. g. Isa. xlii. 24, 25.
tOOIiNs fM\ 01-^ ^.1.4^? ^^ because we have sinned against
him, hath he 'poured out upon them (us). Here also belong the
instances where writers include themselves, in the first person plural,
in what they declare of their ancestors; e. g. Psalm Ixvi. 6.
Old Ir^J ^^Z fhen did we rejoice in him. When several verbs
having different subjects follow each other in the same person, it
appears to be rather according to the Syriac idiom, not to indicate
more particularly the difference of the subject ; e.g. II Sam. xi.l3.
67. Construction of the Verb with various Cases and
Prepositions.
I. Verbs with the Accusative.
1. With an Accusative are construed ;
a ) Transitive Verbs ; e. g. Matt. 11. 6. .-lOlQjtl'pJ OOlj
194: VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.
-'^^^ who shall feed my people ; iv. 16 ; even intransitives,
having at the same time a transitive signification ; e.g. Barh.
214, 2. I^SQm fOOl J^Dy he rode upon an ass ; 215, 11.
Rem. Here also belong such verbs as in other languages govern
other cases ; e. g. rQ) to command ; Matt, xxviii. 20. ,^V)i01 to
believe ; John xii. 38; Romans x. 16, ( with JD John ii. 23 ) ;
(ll ^0 answer ; Ephr. III. 285; }iD <o announce; Acts xvi.
10. etc.
h ) Here belong the following classes of verbs ; a ) those
signifying to put on or put off clothing, to adorn, to gird, to
cover with anything ; *mn\ I Cor. xv. 53 ; Eph. vi. 11 ;
Barh. 223, 12. ^jjnn\ an\l> that he put on our gar-
ments ; *M^ Col. iii. 9 ; ^1 I Sam. ii. 4 ; Acts xii. 8 ;
even passive verbs ; e.g. .^4^Z| Acts xii. 8 ; fcxCDoZl Ps.
civ. 2 ; and /3) those denoting a want or excess ; e. g. Acts
vi. 8. 1]..*jO yiaCLk^ looi ]]Sd he was full of faith and pow-
er ; xiii. 10 ; Kom. i. 29 ; Mark viii. 36. ;m*jj Oliaj . f
if he suffer harm as to his soul. Furthermore here belong ;
y) verbs of remembering and forgetting, joii John xv. 20 ;
Luke i. 72 ; pjZf John ii. 17, 22 ; \li Heb. vi. 10 ; and
tin ally ; 5) verbs of coming and going to a place ; e. g. Matt.
XV.21. >0j JLoQajAjL |Z|o he came into the region of Tyre
Mark v. 38 ; Luke ii. 51 ; John iv. 5 ; \\\ Luke iv. 42
John vi. 1; ^0l Luke ii. 39 ; iv. 14 ; \^ Acts ix. 3
A*Ij John ii. 12 ; -Qaj i.44 ; ^CiScD v. 1 ; ^ xviii.33 ;
c) several neuters also take an accusative, viz ;
.2) in connection with a noun, as their object, formed
!rom the same verb ; e. g. Judg. xiv. 12. IZ^^o] ^ to
VERBS WITH THE ACCUSAflVE. 195
propose a riddle ; Ez. xvii. 2 ; Acts ii. 17. POVm |W
]^^" ^,\i to have visions dreams ; Matt. xiii. 24 ;
Ephr. I. 251, C ; 253, A ; especially /3 ) when the noun is
more accurately defined by an adjective; e. g. Matt. ii. lO.
1Aq> 12o,-m QarA* they rejoiced exceedingly; John iii. 29 ;
Assem. L*362, 18 ; Gen. xxvii. 34. Xbjo'y lALlLV^^VAe
lamented sorely ; Zach. i. 14.
10
001 , in the sense of to befall^ to happen to any one,
also governs the accusative of the ohject ; e. g. Luke xiii. 2.
tOj] fOOl (1201) , because this has befallen them ; Acts vii. 40.
w0L001 (ik) what has happened to him ; Acts xxviii. 5, 6.
2 The following govern a double accusative ;
a ) verbs in Pa,^ Aph., and /S7ia., Pe. of which takes an
accusative, viz.; a) verbs of putting on or off clothing,
adorning, covering with anything; e. g. in \\, iN|
Mark xv. l7,20; Ephr. 1. 239, A. TAjJu^qo ^cjf.an^o
he clothed them with garments ; II. 178, D ; John xix. 2.
IjQy.ilj IAmJ a01CLkQD0 they put upon him, a purple robe;
Ez. xvi. 10 ; i^) verbs oi filling up, satisfying ; e. g. Ephr.
I. 527, A. ]ilmli t^Q^ A>\V> lAlSDjf ^Ae i^^^^ow; yi/feo?
^/e vessels with oil; Luke i. 53. fArni ^Inm |l^ ^/le hun-
gry he fills with good things ; 7) those which denote teaching,
or showing ; e. g. John xiv. 26. Vo^^Solo ^nn*^\ j Ae w;z7
/eac^ 3/0W aU things ; I Tim. iv. 6 ; John xiv. 8. "^ol ^Om
sAo^^ t5 the Father ; verses 10, 32 ;
h ) verbs in Peal with a double accusative signification.
Here belong ; a) verbs of clothing, covering (also with r^ of
the thing) ; e. g. Ephr. 1. 239, A. U^Ol ^QjV ;fl>f he
196 VEKBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.
girded them with girdles ; cm^^ to anoint^ Ps.xlv.7; ^>1 to sow ,
Lev. xix. 19 ; ^) verbs o^ filling up (also with and ^)
e. g. John ii. 7. '^^ V^ ^f qSlo fill {them) the water
pots ivith walfr ; verse 9 ; Barh. 212, 2 ; Assem. I. 332, A.
12; 7)verbs oi commanding ^ordering ^ (also with jiand ^\2hoi
the person and thing) ; e.g. Gen. vi.22. OirOaj ^^ all that
he had commanded him] Mark viii.ll. 121 OiS 0001 ^-b^1
they demanded of him a sign ; 5) verbs of showing or doing
any thing to any body, or malcing a person or thing to he
thus and so ; e. g. Gen, xvii. 5. ^.Aqou (a| / have made
thee a Father ; John viii.53. ^a1] Lh\ rOl QlSo i^//ia^ ma^-
69^ thou thyself? Heb. i. 2 ; Assem. I. 3-46, A. 4. v. E. Al-
so with an accusative of the material of which anything is
formed; e. g. I Kings viii. 52. 1.^^^/^ lapL ^-ij1 ll5
he huilt of {them) the stones an altar ; s) verbs of naming, 1;jO
Isa. Ix. 18 ; I John iii. 1.
II. Verbs with Prepositions.
1. Yerbs are construed with 2 which in English are
joined with m, on, upon, about, conoerning, etc. Here belong
especially ; a) verbs which denote some state or emotion of
the mind ; e.g. Luke i.l4. oi,\oV)n t^r^^ ^^^y ^^^^^ rejoice
at his birth ; Barh.90,20; *^ y^^to have pleasure in some-
thing ; Matt. iii. 17 ; Heb. x. 38; *^ oiLdZZI to wonder at;
7
Matt. xxii. 33 ; Luke ii. 47 ; *^ \^iSD to hope in ; Matt. xii.
21 ; John v. 45 ; Q ^LOkOl to believe on ; Mark i. 15 ; John
ii. 11; .o jJ to look at ; John i. 36, 43 ; Barh. 190, 13 ;
Assem. L 89, A. l7 ; *S L(jif:^ to be ashamed of ; Rom. L
VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 197
16 ; *0 '^.^ to rebuke ; I Tim. v. 1 ; '\]o ibid, or threaten ;
Matt. viii. 26; Luke iv. 41 ; Barh. 53, 10; *Q wmIt: to moc\
at ; Matt. xx.l9 ; xxvii. 81; <S^ .nT^ to laugh at ; Acts ii.
13 ; b) verbs that denote acknowledging^ denying, siuearing
by, calling upon ; e. g. Matt. x. 32, 33. ^r*^ 1?^? i^*^
whosoever shall confess me ; Mark i. 5 ; Acts xxiii. 8 ;
Kom. x. 9, 10 ; Matt. x. 33. *j^ joanjj ^ whosoever
shall deny me ; xxvi. 84 ; I Tim. v. viii ; Assem. I. 341, A.
23; 372, 8, 9; Matt. xxvi. 63. U^ loi!^^ 1j1 ]SdqSo
7 adjure thee by the living God ; Mark v. 7 ; I Thess. v.27;
^ Ip /o call upon ; Gen. iv. 26. Here also belong ; c)
some verbs which denote a doing something for or against
some one ; e. g. ^TD p^il, .-&.S9| and .^Om <o /?rofe against
some one ; Acts xxiv. 27 ; xxv. 9 ; Kom. ix. 17 ; I Tim. i.
16; *C) JOICD (also with ^^) to testify against; Dent. xxxi.
28. Of verbs of motion, here belong ; d) ^d ^vS to encoun-
ter ; Luke viii. 27 ; xxii. 10 ; and *i \l] to come with (i. e.
bring) something ; Psalms Ixvi. 12;,
Rem. Here also belongs *2 |Aa to drink from ; Gen. xHv. 5.
*a^ OlO |AJ (02 ^^e cup from which my Lord drinks. Some
times 2 denotes a j^ar^ of the object ; e.g. II Sam. xxiii. 10.
|a^a\*^0 JD'f^ he made an overthrow atnony the Philistines ;
and here are to be placed %i ^OlL and ^\Sd to labor at something;
I Kings ix. 23.
2. The following verbs are construed with ^ as a sign of
the dative; a) those of giving, permittins:, commending;
e. g. John xiv.27. .qq\ pi ^ruoi-a wkXk> y U L n my peace
^ive I to you ; Matt, viii.21,31. ^ - cuA *Q2)| permit me
us ; Mark v. 13 ; Luke viii. 32 ; Acts xx. 32. ^^
198 VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS.
loi^l] .onL pi / commend you to God; I Peter i v. 19;
h) those of pleasing and displeasing ; e. g. John viii. 29
01^ fSiM} ^Ao if^^^ which pleases him ; Eom. xv. 2, 3 ;
Heb. xiii. 16 ; or c) those that denote likeness^ similarity;
e.g. Luke xiii. 18. louLj IZonSV) UiDj li^n\ to what is
the Kingdom of God like ? verses 9, 20 ; Heb. ii. 17 ; Barh.
137, 12. aii Ajj loi thou art like him.
Rem. Here also belong impersonal phrases, such as ^ ]] O it is
fitting for^ and ^ Aji| equivalent to to have ; e. g. Matt. iii. 9 ;
Luke xvi. 28,29 ; John x. 16. (with the accusative of the object in
relation to tx^'v, II John 9. OlS L?i li^^O |o]]o ^JOT
oZrog xoLi rdv ifOLri^a, xai tov uIov ;!^), and ^ A^ equivalent to
not to have ; Matt. xiii. 21 ; Johnxiv.30. In the same signification
occurs also ^ loOl ; e.g. Barh. 66, 4. IaLd CJl^ OOCTI '^tULl
he had three sons.
3. With ,i>D are connected ; a ) verbs which denote to
fear, flee, guarding oneself, retraining, ceasing, releasing ;
e g. Luke xxiii. 40. Aj] ^\Zy lai!!^ ^ V' *2i( fearest thou
not God? John ix. 22 ; Barh, 94,9 ; Kom. ii.3. ^0^2 tS\\
loi^j Oll^> ^JiO that thou shah escape the judgment of God;
I Cor. vi. 18 ; x. 14 ; Barh. 170, 4 ; Matt. x. 17. Ojoijl]
]r^ ''*^ ^^ hcv/are of men ; xvi. 6, 12; Luke xii. 15; xx.
46 ; John xvii. 15. (au.2 ^Sd ^qj] ;4^? ^^^^ ^^^^ shouldst
keep them from evil ; I Peter ii. 11. C7lA.^..> ^So QuO;aZ|
\r^} abstain from lusts of the flesh ; Acts xv. 29 ; I Pet.
iv.l. |0l4^ ^Sd 01^ i\ he csasethfrom sin; Barh. 102,9;
Assem. 1. 42, 8; II Thess. iii. 3. \mj^ ^ ^oaoiomj he
VEKBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 199
will keep you from evil ; b) those of filling up ^ lacking, and
failing; Luke xv. 16. Ioo^jva ^ OlCDp ]]SqSq^ to fill his
belli/ t/nth husks ; Barb. 69,1 ; I Tim. vi.lO. IZoiiCUOl _lo
7 ^^
QI4 ^^ey came short of the faith ; II Tim. ii. 18 ; c) those of
asking, beseeching; John i v. 31. OUlD 00(71 ^ >v*^ ^Aev
besought him ; verse 40; I Peter ii. II.
Rem. ^1d also expresses the Latin prce ; e. g. _k) A.Vn ^^ f/{g
6e/bre ; or per, with ^\l and nSm, John x. 1, 2.
4. With ^^ are construed verbs, which, in English, may
be followed by abouty concerning, viz. ; a ) some which ex-
press an affection of the mind; e.g. Matt.xv.22. - '^^ ^OlmjAI
be merciful to me ; xvii. 15 ; Eom. ix. 15 ; xi. 32 ; Matt.vi.
28. ^oAjI ^^^ pi liafli^ ^ why take ye thought for
raiment ; Luke xii. 26. ^ KtJ to be anxious ; Matt.v.22.
>\l ^omoZf to rejoice over ; Rev. xviii.20, ^\l po to weep
ove/*; Lukexxiii.27,28. ^ j^iioZ) to take counsel concern-
ing ; Matt. xxvi. 4; b) those which denote povjer or authori-
ty over somethmg ; e. g. Luke xix. 14. JjOl ^^iNs .^iW)i>
that this person should rule over us ; Rom. vi. 14 ; vii, 1 ;
Barh. 40, 6 ; Matt, xxiii. 35. ^nni\\ 1Z]j shall come upon
you ; Luke xxi. 34 ; John xviii. 4 ; Luke i. 1 .
^OloiLl A\g^i IALj^j fear fell upon him ; c ) those which
, denote a doing for or against^ or an occupation with some-
7 i V .I* -7
thing; e. g. Acts vii. 58. toenail ojoicoj ^^iNi] those who
t/istified against him ; Matt. xxvi. 62 ; John i. 8. ^\l jOlflCiJ?
IjOIQJ that he might bear witness of the light ; iii. 26 ; v. 31.
^ ^flOoV io accuse ; John viii. 46 ; ^ *oA3 to writA of,
concerning. John i. 46 ; v. 46 ; Acts xxi. 25. ^ '^'\ and
14
200 VERBS AVITH PREPOSITIONS.
^Si to speak of, about; John i. 22, 30; xiii. 22; vii. 13 ;
d) verbs of coverings protecting, or burdening ; e. g. Matt,
xvii. 5. ^OOIa^I A^I |Z;^ariJ tin a bright cloud covered
them ; Luke i. 35. - >*^.> Vv ^ V"^? OlNi i the power of
the Most High shall cover thee ; ^^ 14^ and too have the
same signification ; Jer. xviii. 23 ; 11 Sam. xiii. 25.
-^ Av jo'^j ]] J 50 that we shall not burden thee. And finally ;
e) several verbs that denote a charge, command or petition ;
e. g. ^^ r^2) to charge one ; II Chron. xxxvi. 23 ;
^^ %QZib to prescribe for one ; II Kings xxii. 13. ^^ PbQ
to pray for : John xvii. 9. ^\l ^li /o ask after ; Assem.
I. 50, 6.
Rem. Here also belong phrases compounded with nouns derived
from these verbs ; e. g. I Peter v. 1. \(JC^ ^\l O,* ^QoAa
cast your cares upon the Lord ; Barh. 77, 5. O^Ol j'^NV) ^\l
lZo\ > fc^ they took care for the King ; Isa. i. 14. i\s 0001
]Z;n.ljit they are a burden to me ; Job vii. 20.
5. With AjlO , %k\ >n and Ly >0 between^ are construed
verbs which denote dividing, separating, distinguishing;
e.g. Gen. i.4. poa>\ poiQJ Aa^d ^;a Ae separated be-
i//)eeM light and darkness ; Euth i. 17. AxQ ^, and (Vm
/o 6'ee, to perceive a difference between ; II Sam. xix. 35 ;
Mai. lii. 18.
6. With jAo after, are joined verbs which signify to go
(equivalent to to follow ) ; e. g. Matt. iv. 25. OliAo Q^l]
/Aey followed him; xii. 15; Mark x. 82; Matt, i v. 19.
wiiAri oL follow after me ; xix. 2 ; John viii. 12 ; jAo .^aiS
1 Tim vi. 1 J ; II Tim. ii. 22.
PASSIVES AND THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 201
Rem. More in accordance with the Hebrew idiom we find
)Aq with verbs signifying to put away, destroy : e. g. I Kings
xiv. 10 ; xxi. 21.
General Remarks.
To seerrij to appear, are expressed, as in Hebrew, by
. il iSO in the relation of genitive or with the suffix be
longing to the person ; e. g. Gen. xix. 14. 1 1 1 \n looi
7 7
.jOIQjAa* he seemed to his sons-in-law; II Sam. x. 8.
y 1 1 > SO (he) seems to thee. When rendered more definite
by the adjectives good or had, they are expressed either by
^ ;Si and ;i<^ , or *li21 without il i\n ; e. g. Acts
vi. 5 ; Kom. xv. 2. 8 ; Gen. xxi. 11 ; Matt. xxi. 15 ; or in
connection with i i\ \n ; e. g. Ephr. I. 240,F. looi }^Ji
\k'fiD -y -^^ ^aS^ would this seem good to God f In the trans-
lation of the New Testament, SoxsT is usually expressed by
^ VwASd ; e. g. Matt. xvii. 25; xviii. 12; xxi. 28; xxii.17:
Luke X. 36,
To suffer, permit, are expressed either by , n<^ to com-
mand, or hfM to cause (without the copula following) ; e.g.
Barh. 72, 12 ; or they are expressed in such a manner that
the thing to be done is implied in the imperative itself ;
Barh. 27, 2; 114, 14.
III. Passives and their Construction.
1. The active cause in passives is usually expressed by
^; e.g. Matt. vi. 16. ]fillVn^ ,OVmAj> that they may he
seen hy men ; Luke viii. 29. OlS looi l^ he was caught hy
202 VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.
him; Assem. 1. 89, 14, and 16. Co Oll^ MSdA1 there vjas a
voice heard hy him ; Barh. 152, 11.
Rem. Yet we also frequently find Sc, Matt. iii. 14. ^^liO)
^S^ZI that I should he baptized of thee ; v. 13 ; xx. 23.
2. Passives whose actives govern a double accusa-
tive, sometimes retain one of them; e.g. Luke i. 41.
fii^QD) H^0> A>\^/| 5^6 i^as yi^^cc? t(;i^A i/ie ^O'f?/ Ghost
man who was
Assem. I. 86,
A. 27, 28.
ii. 40 ; Barh. 32, 14. I^ob .m%A\y 1'^.^ a
clad in Byssus ; 90, 14 ; 108, 6 ; 223, 15; .
3. When passives, especially in verbs relating to the
mind, have an active signification, they are joined with the
accusative ; e.g. I Thess. i. 2. tZo^^ aa^ ^pjASo ive
remember you in our prayers ; n>iZ| to think, Rom. ii. 3 ;
XV. 5 ; ^>oAl to recognize, Acts xix. 15 ; MiAl ^^ ^^^Vi
Eph. vi. 1 ; Col. iii. 22 ; *..;..;2f to wish, I Tim. vi. 10.
Rem. Here also belong such passives as 99Q..Z| to chew the
cud, Lev. xi. 3,5 ; and hence also may be explained why participles
passive of the Pe. ( 64. 5) take the accusative of the object.
4. Passives have also frequently a reflective signification
( 21, 2 ; 22. 2 ; 24.2 ; 58. A. a ) ; e. g. John viii. 6.
.OlytZj A>jA^ ViQAu Jesus lowed himself down ; verse 8 ;
Mark i. 7 ; I Tim. v. 14. ^yiO?P ^J^? ^ *..!L^1 those who
are young shall marry ; iv. 13 ; ^\1a*Z1 to wax strong. Acts
xix. 16 ; xxiii. 11 ; %Aii^Zl to hide, John viii. 59 ; ^aIqZ^
to turn around^ Matt. ix. 22., etc.
Rem. Many neuters take a passive signification ; e. g. \^ to
MODE OF EXPKESSING GREEK COMPOSITES. 203
err, Luke xxi. 8. tQl^Z (SOJ^ fx^ leXavri^vire ; ,n,a ^o 6wrn,
>Q1S ^^i,ni xa< flrup? xalsrai ; ^\L] to/all, iii.lO.
jQlfD >\L3 sig 'n'up paXksrat ; J^EU <o ^o owi, viii. 12. ^Q02L1
ix^Xrj^rjtfovrai etc.
Upon the use of verbs for adverbs, see 82. 1.
Appendix to 67.
Mode of expressing Greek Composites.
To the subject of the construction of verbs with cases and prepo-
sitions, belongs also the manner of rendering Greek Composites,
which in the Syriac translation of the New Testament, are express-
ed as follows :
1. By simple verbs, in the signification of which ; a ) the idea
of the Greek preposition is included ; e. g. Matt. xx. 18.
^Lm ^iDNfO rtvapaivofASv ; viii. 1. AmJ ^ xara^avri ; iii. 2.
QSoZ ixsravosr-rs ; xvi. 5. Ql^ ^^rsXaStovro ; or by verbs which ;
h ) without respect to the Greek preposition, answer to the simple
Greek verb ; e. g. Matt. xi. 5. %\ n avai^XsVoutfj ; Acts xxiii. 33.
Q^GLk ava^o'vTS^ ; Rom. 14. 9. (.i.^ avi^rjtfsv; Luke xv. 24, 32 ;
x.31,32. ^jQl avTj'Tr'ap^X&sv ; Acts xxvi. 5. ^-b-^i-" "f po/'vwtfxovT^f ;
Rom. XV. 4. %!dAoZ| "Tposypa^T].
2. By verbs ; a ) with a preposition answering to the Greek ;
e.g. ^'^.ODoL = kvrl ; Luke xiii.lY. Oll^^OnL 0001 ^^ i V) i D)
oi avTjxsi'jxsvoi aurw ; Acts vi.lO ; Rora.xiii.2. ^\i= aVi' andxa-ra;
Luke x. 34. wkOloXl CJlli ^^ii^^Z] xa/ ^-n-SfxaX^^r} aiJrou ; Matt.
xxvi.62. '- ^^ %mmVo xa<ra|xap<rupoiJo'/v tfou ; >QL = fl'uv ; Rom.
204 PECULIARITIES OF VERBS.
1> 7 * I
vi.8. CTlSCl MjJ Cu^^jCoiuLSv ai3<rc5, Heb. iv. 15 ; II Tim. i. 8. ^^O
= 7rpo ; Acts vii. 40. aSOyQ oij^ip) oj' 'Trpo'B'opSurfov'rai >3|xwv ;
Matt. ii. 9 ; or b) by an adverb of similar signification ; e. g.
%Aji)) ^ ^ (xvtt, I Peter i.3; Uk^9) ^Sd tr^O| ava^sw^Caj '>;fAa^,
Ileb. vi. 6. ^ar^ ^ = -^rpo , II Cor. xiii. 2 ; 2*k5Vj>ai^ ^
rpos/p>)xa , Rom. i. 2 ; Col. i. 5.
3. By another verb representing the preposition, which usually
stands first, without any connective particle, in the same tense,
* 7
number, and gender with the finite verb ; e. g. ^fO ( to come he-
fore ) = "rrpo , Mark xiii. 23. 2l^| ALO^O 'n'pos/pyjxa, Acts vii. 52;
Rom. hi. 9 ; xi. 35. This verb sometimes follows ; e. g. John xx. 4.
4. If the composite is formed from a noun or adjective and a
verb, it is usually resolved into its components ; e. g. Mark iv. 20.
p \Si .k^Ol^ xccpito(popov(fiv ; iii. 4. *ai*^> Of -'^(j) i*^^^^
otra&o'Troiv^tfai ^ xaxo-n'oi^o'ai ; Matt. xix. 18. ZojOlfiO jOlCoZ |J
I^QA ou 4^su^ofiapTup^o'sj.
Rem. It seems to be merely pleonastic, where in John iv. 4.
^isp^stf^aj is translated by ;nM fZpj
68. ^^e Substantive Verb, and some other Peculiarities
chiefly relating to the Construction of the Vei'b.
A. Use of looi , L^ and AaS ( 38).
Instead of looi to be (with which, according to Qb. B.
and D, the imperfect and pluperfect are formed), the Sjriac
INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 205
also uses Lk\ , and in negative phrases LJ^ with suffixes,
and with them also in connection with the former (looi),
forms the imperfect ; e.g. John ix.24. looi uOloA^I he v:as;
verse 14. Zooi OuAj^I they were^ etc.
10
001 sometimes stands pleonastically with the preterit
without giving it the signification of the pluperfect ; e.g. Mark i.45.
001 ^\M he hegan ; Luke i. 8 ; John iii. 25. It is
sometimes omitted as present or imperfect, according to 54.
2 ; or when it would be a mere copula between the sub-
ject and object ; e. g. Matt, xxvii. 29 ( 65. III. Rem.) ;
Luke i.27. It seems to mark emphasis after IJ (in the Philoxenian
version Q-^ nowise)'^ e.g. John vi. 32. ^on\ *O0U |qSd loOl |J
Moses has not given you; verses 38, 58 ; xiii. 11, 18 ; Heb. ii.5,16 ;
or in interrogations with Jj = nonne ) ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 55.
POI fOOl U is this not ? xx. 13 ; Mark vi. 3 ; Luke xi, 40 ; xvii.
IT. Concerning |001 , A^f and Ajl!^ with ^ = to have not to
have, compare 6Y. II. 2. Rem.
B. Indirect Discourse.
The indirect discourse is usually expressed directly,
commencing with > ( = "iD <^'^' )? ^- S- ^^ohn iv. 17.
] Ko , A Lk^y ^^r^] t'*^* ^^^^ ^^^^ rightly said, I have
no husband; verse 53; ii. 17; vi. 81 ; Barh. 51,11.
AiSoif i^X p s he said; I (he) have heard; 135,10 ; 69,7.
]!] looi ]1' ]<^V>X ]rillDj ]SCU ^> 001 he svjore, he would
(I will) he no King of the heathen; 223, 11, 12.
Rem. Sometimes J is wanting at the beginning of the direct
discourse (especially before 1 ) ; e.g. Barh. 131, 11, 12; 374, 13;
443, 8 ; more frequently '^Y ; e. g. Barh. 106,3 ; 183,9 ; 219,5 ;
206
243, 10 ; 486, 5 ; 543, 19 ; 596, 11. Compare Assem. I. 479, A.
24, with 480, 1. The indirect discourse also occurs; e. g. Barh.
79, 19, ]iy^ ^OOlL laaco ]]i CIl^ 0-;ii{ they said to him, the
tribute is not sufficient for thee ; 94, 1 3 ; 97, 1. Sometimes the
direct discourse passes over into the indirect; e. g. 276, 8 10 and
vice versa ; 166, 19, 20 ; 513, 5, 6.
C. Ellipsis Zeugma Paronomasia, and Puns.
1 . "When a verb has previously been used in the protasis,
it is usually omitted in the apodosis, where it would proper-
ly be repeated ; e. g. Matt.i.22. llSoAaj Zooij cilLd ^j Ijoi
hut what has happened {has happened) that it might he fulfil-
led; xxi. 4; John xx. 81; Rom. v. 20 ; I Cor. ix. 25.
tnnrm> ^jL.4ai9) ^a^OI those who run {run) that they may
obtain ; II Cor. v. 13 ; Heb. vii. 19 ; viii. 8 ; I Peter iv. 11;
I John iii. 6. Sometimes the verb is to be suppHed from
the context ; Matt. 27,25. ,^iNs OllsOj his hlood {come) upon
us; Acts xxiv.6. ^ODQiQiaj ^| as it {is written ) in our
law.
Rem. The ellipsis must be considered as a pecuharity of the Sy-
riac language, where the Philoxenian translation, omitting the J in
the apodosis, adheres strictly to the Greek words ; e. g. Matt i. 22.
ZOCTI CTL^ _k) (jQl rovTo as oXov yiyovsv ; John xx. 31. Con-
cerning the omission of jLd| see B. Rem. above ; and concerning
IP
001 see A. Rem.
2. Sometimes a verb, by its signification, can belong to
only one of two connected nouns {Zeugma), so that to the
other noun another verb must be mentally supplied ;
USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL. 207
e. g. Job IV. 10. ^yCill] IIbo juilj IALdotj the roaring
of the lion {is stilled) and the teeth are broken ; x. 12.
3. Paronomasia and puns occur but rarely in Syriac.
The former is a mere imitation of the Hebrew original in
Ps. xl. 3. ^Oy*Jo IV^CD ^OWJ? ( tlij^^^n d'^n-l :iii:T )
that many see it and rejoice. Puns occur mostly in names
where the language does not require any such alteration to
be assumed ; e.g. Gen. xlix. 8. fOjQJ %^ IjOOU Judah {thy
brethren) shall praise thee, verses 16, 19.
CHAPTEE THIKD.
The Noun.
69. Use of the Noun in General.
1. Abstract nouns not unfrequently in Syriac take the
place of adjectives and then they stand in the relation of
genitive to the noun, with ? ; e. g. Matt. iii. 11.
M>Q5> paO'rO with the Holy Ghost; John xv.l. lVr> l^yt
the true vine ; I Cor. xv. 44. Especially does this union, as
in Hebrew, occur with adjectives which denote the material
or substance of which a thing is composed ; e. g. John ii. 6.
l2)]o> ]lT.f stone ivat^-pots ; Heb. ix. 4. I^OI)) ]^IX10
208 USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL.
a golden box ; II Cor. x. 4 ; II Tim. ii. 20 ; Barh. 11, 7, 8 ;
20, 10 ; 88, 2 ; 172, 8 ; 228, 7. IjCJIOJ? fjoSni a fiery
pillar.
Rem. Adjectives of material, however, do occur ; e.g. Barh. 59,4.
JLaAjlmJ ]; i^rn] a brazen celestial sphere ; and in the same con-
struction adjectives of quality with j prefixed, used for substantives ;
90x1) |AOa week of the white [clothes).
Abstract nouns with J in connection with a pronoun, supply the
place of the predicate; e.g. Rom. vii. 14. p| ;ffi*^> j p|
6m^ / am carnal ; or with a preposition prefixed they supply the
place of an adjective to which a noun is to be supplied ; e. g. Heb.
ii. 17. (ai-^rO in divine ( things ) ; Luke viii. 49. ^Lo *AJf
bi^ay one of the household ; even with suflSxes, -iC710)(a9
^ajfxovi^oiasvo^. Some abstract nouns, in the relation of genitive with
J following, precede as nomen regens ; e. g. Barh. 170, 20.
loAoj iVyfClbD Twawy writings ; 1*72, 4 ; 178, 5 ; 195,16. )o;iin
|1Aa*> in the remaining fortresses ; 198,13. Here also belongs ^^S
according to 55. B. 2. Rem.
2. Especially are adjectives or concrete substantives de-
noting possession^ custom^ similarity^ etc., expressed bj way
of circumlocution, by means of the nouns \!^ son ; 2;s
daughter ; ^'\ia and (;iO lord^ master ; JD) and ^m^h prince^
ruler ; and A^jQ ^owse. In respect to the use of these nouns
it is to be observed ;
a) \!^ designates ; a) Oentile names^ inhabitants^ etc. e. g.
Tit. i. 12. '{^^ Jlo Cretans; Barh. 167,1 ; Acts xxi. 12;
IjZI ^lOi ol ivroVjoj ; Barh. 80, 17. lAla^So %aJX3 citizens ;
91,12; /3) the idea of race, species^ kindred ; e.g. Rom. xi.l4.
VrCQO 'rO a kinsman ; Deut. xxiii.2 ; I Cor. vii.22. |){ja '^ID
USE OF THE NOUN IN GENERAL 209
a freeman ; John xviii. 85. (Soi olIO heathen ; Micliael.
Chr. 5. .JCCuxoiCFl ^ a heretic ; Assem. 11.248. ^hty\^ \^
a courtier ; Kev. ii. 14, 20. (Here also belongs Jaj^) ;
7) participation^ likeness^ {= cOv ojxoj) ; e. g. Eph. iii. 6.
!. s - ? 7..
|ZoZ> waa tfu/xX^povofAoi ; I Thess. ii. 14 ; Acts xviii. 3 ;
XIX. 24. (ZQlk)0| ;o l[t.Wcx^^ ; -Dan. i. 10. \1m \^ con-
temporaries ; Phil. iv. 8 ; Gal. i. 14 ; ^) locality^ situation^
and other circunLstances ; e.g. Isa. xxvi. 1. \yOM \a a moat;
Psalms cxxxii. 2. 1>0 9\^ a neck chain. And finally ; g )
the adverbial phrase 0iAl \i^ forthwith^ immediately ; Matt,
xiii. 5, 20 ; John v. 9 ; xiii. 80 ; Acts x. 2>^ ; xxi. 82.
h) Z^ plur. Axo forms ; a) rarely abstracts; e.g. Ii] A;^
circumcision; more frequently concretes in the feminine;
e. g. I Mace. xi. 7. |>|a* l\^ one horn free ; or it denotes;
/3) the product of anything ; e. g. lAl^O^ L\Ci grapes-,
|ASiQ.a Z;^ (/i^TTi on sea-weed ; and tropically |jO Z;i t;oice ;
Eom. X. 16, 18 ; Gral. iv. 20 ; and in the plural. Acts xii.
22 ; 7) implements^ clothing^ lAl^iO Z;i napkin ; 1> ^^^ ^;^
rm^ ; S) descendants ^ nations^ etc.; e. g. Luke xiii. 16.
V00IJ0I ZjQ the Hebrews ; Matt. xxi. 5. ^CLai^ Z;i Jerw-
salem, or its inhabitants.
c) ^10 denotes ; a) mostly concretes ; e. g. Eom. xi. 84.
jaiii ^is^ counselor ; Matt. v. 25 ; xiii. 28, 89 ; II Chron.
xiv. 5. Kdqu*Z ^\iq neighbor ; (3) sometimes nations ; e. g.
]] qSqSd ^\iq an Ethiopian. In like manner ;
d) l;So Luke vii. 41. IoqJ Ijio debtor ; Ephr. IL
860, C ;
e) *o> forms ; a) principally concretes of masculine offices
2l0 GENDER OF NOUNS.
e. g. II Sam. xviii. 1. 1a-L *ij a chiliarch ; Luke xvi. 1.
fAj^ *Q) o/xovojxoj ; Heb. iv. 14. \ ^^000 *^j ap;)^isplO^ ;
I Pet. V. 4 ; Luke xix. 2 ; ^) abstracts ; e. g. Luke xvi. 2.
|ZoAjib3 A29 o/xovo/xia. la like manner ;
/) ^mjS ; a) concretes of masculine offices; e.g. Luke viii.
41. ]AQ1D %A^9 app^itfuva/w/o^ ; John ii. 8, 9; Acts ii. 29;
I Thess. iv. 16 ; /3) more rarely abstracts ; e. g. Matt, xxiii.
6. ])ZQiD jla9 flfpwroxa^s^pj'a. Sometimes it denotes ; 7)
tlie extremity of a thing ; e. g. pSOQ^fiol ^a^j or^/?ce o/" ^ze
stomach ; Ua.1 *aa5 aperture of the mouth, Finally ;
g) LlO denotes ; a) the place or receptacle, in which a
thing is found or kept; e. g. Acts. xii. 17. 1 r-CDl A.*^
prison; Matt, xi v. 2. jZuio Aji^ grave; Acts xvii. 19.
]iJy Li^ judgment hall; Luke xix. 29. lA!*i Aj^ olive gar-
den ; Heb. ix. 4. ]V)mo AaTS censer (literally, house of in-
cense); II Tim. iv. 13 ; ^) countries, cities, etc. ; e.g. Assem.
I. 169,B.7, X-^OCly LMj::i the Boman dominions ; Michael.
Chr. 10. \ls\ki Lkh Persia.
Rem. Here, however, do not belong ^^OU Ajl2 Mesopotamia^
and 1' '^ LaJOi forehead, where Aa.Q signifies between. More
rarely we find similar compositions with *2)( father, and y)] wo^A-
r. Of the latter only occur |ma9) \1jd\ the crown of the head, and
|jl10) JSOJ hydraulics. The Syriac also, though more rarely than
the Hebrew, uses the names of countries and cities for nations and
inhabitants ; e. g. Barb. 150, 12. cjjd*'^] Africans ; 248, 6.
A^rytlZ Tagritians.
70. Gender of Nouns.
1. Nouns which in the plural take the termination of
GENDER OF NOUNS. 211
another gender ( 44. Kem. 2 and 8), retain the gender of
the singular, and in this case respect is rarely had to the
termination. Here belong ; a ) masculines with a femi-
nine termination in the plural ; e. g. Matt. xii. 43.
OOUD AoA m1d> |Zo>Z| place in which there is no water;
I Cor. X. 9. I^OOLm ^QJ( OjQO( the serpents destroyed them;
VioSlI* ( from WIaT) Luke ii. 13 ; fASooi ( from UdoI )
Matt, xxviii. 20; 12qS (from ]cS.) Luke xxi. 84;
IZoiau (from l>cnj) Matt. vii. 25, 26., etc. ; h) ferainines
with a masculine termination ; e. g. John xi. 35. ^2|
^Q*^> ^aiQlSo> *ji001 tears came into the eyes of Jesus ;
t4^ (from \k^) Matt. xiii. 30; BSo (from 1^^) xxiv.35;
liio (from lAlSo) x. 30 ; ^-lia (from Xtli) Acts xxiv. 17 ;
^^N* (from lAi*) xix. 34., etc.
2. When the abstract stands for the concrete, or when
the noun takes another than its proper signification, the
gender in both cases, is regulated by the sense. Concern-
ing the former of these cases, compare 80. B ; to the lat-
ter belongs IALLd XoYoj= Christ; e. g. John i. 1 1.
lA!i!^ looi ^oioZul it ivas the word; verse 14 ; or \xm Zqaa*
(literally, beast of tooth) ^^ ovrip^pjCro^, Rev. xiii. 1 ; xvi. 2,13;
xvii. 7, 8. QiD> a myriad {of men) ; Acts xxi. 20 ; Barh.
55, 9, 10 ; 334, 6 ; 895, 19. Ua/, in the plural, = inhahi-
tants ; Barh. 159, 10; 236, 8 ; 548, 20., etc.
3. In Syriac the neuter of nouns, as of verbs, is desig-
nated by the feminine ( 66. 2 ) ; e, g. Rom. vii. 18.
" ^
lAi4 aya^ov, |A^>^ xaxov ; in the plural, Assem. I. 218.
212 NUMBER.
B. 11. 1Z2hs0 lAOaAlL OiVnnl they despised the old and
the new.
71. Number,
1. Some nouns, particularly those which, denote cohesive
materials (liquids, metals and the like), form a plural only
when they may be conceived of as consisting of several
parts ; e. g. |Z;iflO WZey, plur. |,:^CD barley-corns; in like
manner [^ from IA^a* wheat ; Matt. iii. 12 ; John vi. 13 ;
I Cor. XV. 87 ; and |m.i o timber ; I Cor. iii. 12.
2. Some nouns singular have a plural signification {col-
lectives 44. Kem. 7), and then they take JRibui 6. 2. As
such they are joined either with the plural ; e. g. John iv.
30. |mJ( QQ2U0 there came out people ; or with the singu-
lar ; e. g. John x. 3. Ol-^D }lSO Jll ^/ie 5^ee^ /iear his
voice ; verses
Rem. 1. As collective plural forms, the following sometimes
occur, I^SQO tocust ; Michael. Chr. 63,11 ; 79, 6. lAliO (proper-
ly ^r<) remainder, members ; 102, 5, 8.
Rem. 2. As pluralis excellentice, the Syriac has, merely by im-
rp7 7 ^X 7
itation of the Hebrew i-iJjl or *^0>| = n^^^j^ , Michael. Chr. 30.
Pf pCU wftJOlpO / swore by the Lord.
72. Apposition and Duplication of Nouns,
1. A noun in apposition, usually includes a more accu-
rate definition or explanation of the previous noun, as for
APPOSITION AND DUPLICATION. 213
example in the names of cities , lA^pD, lAsj, "jAi^^,
Assem. I. 349, 3. lAoj lAl^j!i: ]iOOifcj1 Aniioch, a great
city. The noAin in apposition takes the number and case of
its subject ; e. g. Matt x. 8. tmak) *uAk) Matthew the Pub-
lican ; Barh. 82, 7. "Ui^Qj ^Ol!^ \^y IpAa the image
of Baal {of a) god of the Babylonians ; 11, 8; 12, 2.
I ' lM^ ^?] n\So ^io from Mekhisedech (from the) Ca-
naanite.
Rem. Sometimes the noun m apposition stands before the
principal noun; e. g. Barh. 39, 11. JQISO'^^ V^T nfni
Ae took for wife Roxane ; so too with nouns of weighty measure^
and time, in the genitive ; e. g. Rev. vi. 6. J0Oni>1OO lA^Z
I |J^QD> ^/iree measures ( o/") barley.
2. The duplication of the noun denotes ; a) a ^rea^ Tzwm-
her or quantity ; e. g. Ephr. III. 154. ijQj ]^'*^ Oir^ Aa|
^^QJ ^/iere are ?7za?2?/ fish in the sea ; h) the distributive
sense expressed in English bj each, by ; e. g. Matt. xx. 9, 10.
p-i> p-j a penny each ; Barh. 85, 6. ^^>an ,^i0
by heaps ; 424, 10 ; 165, 19. Especially in respect to
numbers ; e. g. Mark vi. 7. _-jZ liZ it^'o eac/i ; verse 40.
1]Sd IISo a hundred each ; II Cor. xi. 24 ; c) it forms a
circumlocution for aZ/, every ( 58. B. 2) ; e. g. Matt. xxiv.
7. t>0> ]oOpQ xard toVou? ; Tit. i. 5. iLr^ pUr^Q^
xara 'ToXjv ; c? ) a diversity, variety ; e. g. Mark ii. 17,
various diseases ; John v. 4 ; Acts x. 46.
\ Ao with different tongues ; xxi. 34 ; xxv. 19 ;
Assem. 1. 13, A. 6. v. E. 2^^^ 5^>5 ^? 1]sd]Sd
discourses having various contents ; 191, A. 7. v. E ; 280.
214 THE EMPHATIC STATE.
B. 13. V. E ; e ) a strengthening of the sense ( 77. B. b) ,
e.g. John vi. 7. ^*^wxSo WAo very little ; II Thess. iiL6.
73. TJie Emphatic jState.
1. The Emphatic State expresses the noun with the'
article with less definiteness, from the fact, that in many
nouns this form also denotes the absolute state ( 45. 1),
which is no longer in use ; e. g. Matt. x. 9. Sometimes
also it supplies the place of the indefinite article ; e. g. John
iv. 7. ^'r^Q* -So (ZAj| ZZ| there came a woman of Sa-
maria ; ix. 1 ; Acts vii. 37 ; xi. 24; even with r** masc.
Ih^ fern, appended ; e. g. Luke xix. 12. ^ ir^v\
a man.
Rem. From this should perhaps be distinguished the cases in
7
which r^ is used numerically ; e. g. Eph. iv. 6.
7
2. Hence to avoid any ambiguity OOi is also sometimes
joined with the emphatic state in order to designate it as
such. It stands either before the noun ; e. g. Matt. ix. 33.
|;jsi 001 mSo the dumb sjoahe ; John xviii. 16 ; or fol-
7 -P 7 O 1^
lows it ; e. g. John v. 9. OOl Vr^yi ^ClJik>*Z| the man
became whole.
Rem. In the first case the absolute state usually occurs,
when J follows 001 ; e. g. Luke xxii. 27. AiQjiiDj 001
the servant.
3. Hence also the emphatic state with j following is
used in the relation of genitive ; e. g. Eev. xviii. 2.
THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE. 215
IZlSo^ Uo5 ^? VZ>q4jo loljj l2-^ a haUiaiionof
devils and a Jiold of all unclean spirits.
% 74. The Construct State and the Genitive.
1. In the Syriac also the Construct state serves to denote
the relation of genitive, more frequently, however, in the
plural of the masculine and the singular of the feminine,
where it can at once be recognized by its special form ; e.f.
Matt. xi. 12. ^L^Oa JioQLi -i since the days of John ;
xni. 48. |V> i wj,acQ the shores of the sea ; Acts xxiv. 16 ;
Assem. I. 2, B. 1. Vr**o ^tS.1 Al* ^oi that is the thirty-
first year ; 37^ 3, 4. JDO;i\o Al^SOQ m ^Ae 7?22ffe^ o/ ^^e
cZeri^s ; 40, 4 ^OCJliaiiQjiCTi ^Or^ ^^^^^'^ deficient faith,
literally, i!Ae deficiency of their faith.
Rem. Yet the masculine singular of the noun occurs also
before the genitive in the construct state ; e. g. Matt. x. 41.
|lj ^QMd in the name of the Prophet ; xiii. 2. ]SqI ^aCD ^
on the shore of the sea ; verse 50. In addition to the nouns which
supply the place of adjectives ( 69. 2 ) it also occurs in
Qy. midst, and ^-a hand, etc. ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 1 ; Gal. iii. 19 ;
Barh. 255. 11. ^4m} O.^^ in the interior of the palace. Here
belongs moreover the use of the construct state in adjectives and
participles ( 64. 1. B), followed by the noun with a preposition or
particle belonging to both, by which is denoted either the genitive
relation ; e. g. Luke i. 28. |a12 Aqa;2 blessed of {among) women ,
II Tim. iii. 3. lAyiJ^ . <^v<fcVn slaves of passion ; I Tim. i. 10
ji^VOQlsD \y2k wipl^l violator of an oath ; or a more accural
15
216 THE CONSTRUCT STATE AND THE GENITIVE.
definition of the adjective or participle; e.g. Luke i. V, 18.
t00li\SjDQxO ^^.w^ far advanced in their years ; Rev. xiv. 4.
Pk>| ,-Lo 1 1 1 i ni redeemed from the earth ; Acts, xxiii. 23.
2. Far more usual is ; a) the connection of the emphatic
state as nomen regens^ with a following y before the genitive ;
e. g. Matt. X. 5. ]I1a> ]jsj>o|jD into the way of the Gentiles ;
verse 15. p^jj |Vnr>.o at the day of Judgment ; verse 42;
xii. 42. ^iaiZ> lA^Vvn the queen of the south ; xiii. 11, 45 ;
xxiii. 35 ; xxiv. 3 ; John viii. 47. loTL^^j |]So the icord of
God ; or h) with a pleonastic suffix referring to the
genitive following, ( 55. B. 2 ) ; e. g. Matt. xii. 8.
]LciJ ai'^ Lord of the Sabbath ; xi.2. |>aV)> .>mo *^v
heart of the earth.
Rem. Rarely, and chiefly in foreign words, J stands after the
construct state before the genitive ; e. g. Matt. xiii. 22.
pZoLj %M,k\OC ^^^^ deceitfulness of riches ; John x. 23.
tnV>t\> |d()>fD| the porch of Solomon. But it is commonly
used when one or more words are interposed between the nomen
regens and the genitive ; e.g. Barh. 421.13,20. yiA>ol9 OOl '\Sl\
the region^ that is of Jerusalem ; or when several geii-
itives follow each other ; e. g. Assem. 1. 83, B. 21.
,i^nrol> I'r^r^? U-J'^? loilL' V^ L^j Ifa?
the convent of the Mother of God^ of the Syrians in the Scythian
desert ; Barh. 81, 2. The nomen regens is sometimes wanting, and
the genitive is then to be distinguished by J ; e. g. Rom. xiv. 8.
,-l->j f^? the Lords are we ; Matt. xxii. 21. Sometimes j is
wanting when the noun forms an apposition with a preceding
genitive ; e. g. Matt. xii. 39. \jLdl ^Q-ft? C\L\ the sign of Jonah
the prophet. J stands before proper nouns, especially the names
THE CONSTRUCT STATE AJ^D THE GENITIVE. 217
of countries and cities, when they thereby acquire a more de
definite designation ; e. g. Matt. ii. 1, 6. 1>OOU9 ^Oil^ A^
Bethlehem in Judea. In some instances, especially in the super-
scriptions of some Psalms ; e. g. Ps. iv, v, vi, ^ (^ auctoris) sup-
plies the place of J ; very rarely elsewhere ; e.g. Barh. 17, 4.
m ;n) \ p^joa the deliverance of the (i.e. by the) Lord ; Assera. T.
346, A. 25, 26. So too with _So, when origin or descent is indi-
cated ; e.g. Barh. 372, 16. ]1J^'^ ^ lALi^ ^.lKr\J. .*->rp^
he took fifty cities of the Franks ; or when there is indicated a
7 7 7 .
choice or selection from several ; e.g. 271, 1. %jiaiO(JQl ^^ ^k>.^
one of his slaves ; 270,18. Pi^JOZ ^iD \\jk.y^ many of the
Turks.
3. The genitive is sometimes to be understood objectively;
e.g. Markxi. 22. lailLj lAoiLcuai faith o/(i. e. in) God ;
John ii. 17. )^Aa3> Olli^ ^7ze zeal of (i. Q.for) thine house;
vii. 13 ; Hebr. xi. 26. ( iV>> CFlpCOxi ^Tid reproach of
Christ (i.e. ^/la^ attached to hirn).
Rem. Other turns of expression imitating the Hebrew are
Isa. xvii. 2. ;aJLO;l> (ajQO cities of {about) Aroer ; Exod.xxii.lL
)^;l0> OlASooSb an oath of (by) the Lord ; Ez. xxxv. 5.
qOI^) \1Q,\ iniquity of {at) their downfall ; Isa.liv.9., etc. Not
unfrequently is this genitive of the object connected with the
preposition of the verb, from which the nomen regens is derived ;
e. g. Barh. 53, 18. i^^sQDj |Zaiia01 the faith in our Lord ;
Assem. I. 347,20.
4. Sometimes, especially when geographical references are
made, the genitive occurs (as in English) where apposition
would be more strictly correct; e. g. Acts vii. 40.
li jij llif ^ from the land of Egypt ; xx. 6 ; Eom. xi.
8 Barh. 114, l3. ^i^^? 1>CL^ Ol\n\ the whole mountain
of Lebanon.
218 DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES.
5. Standing after adjectives, the genitive is often used
merely to define them more accurately; e.g. Luke xxiv. 25.
|*^N wifAp aO |1 >\) w>, >mit Of fools and slow of heart ;
Acts vii. 51. PpO i i0 o] ye stiff necked ; Cant. ii. 5.
|ASQaa> ZoLija sick for love.
Rem. Sometimes a noun in the genitive takes the place of an
adjective ; e. g. John, xviii. 10. fl iV)i> cnjjf his right ear ;
xxi. 6 ( 54. B. 2. Rem.) ; and vice versa the nomen regens ; e. g.
Luke iv. 25. |ASLd>| -^yv^O itoXkul %^pa ; John ii. 12. In the
first case the Philoxenian translation uses, instead of J, the explana-
tory 001 and *a01, equivalent to i/ia^ is, namely ; e. g. OUj | ;
I A > 1 > Vr> ^01 and J is to be understood as a relative, when
it follows prepositions with suffixes ; e. g. Assem. I. 30, 17.
(2)QOQjLa(> |00lSd m7A (them) the bishops. Compare 55.
B. 3.
75. Designation and Use of the other Cases.
1. The dative and accusative have ^ for their common
sign, which may be omitted before the accusative ; e. g.
Matt. xvii. 4. ^^iSN^j^ A!LZ ,^iU let us make three taherna-
" x^7p7p ^
cles ; Barh. 60, 9.^CU^| |o> (jl2)0)9 he raised a great 'perse-
cution. No difficulty is thereby occasioned even when
the two cases stand together ; e. g. Acts xiii. 21.
^\n ]^\ -001^ .jOOU he gave them Saul ; xx. 82.
Rem. With verbs having a double accusative ( 67. I. 2) ^ falls
:iway in both cases. The same is also to be recognized in the pre-
.,eding pleonastic suffix to the verb ( 55. B. I) . Usuallv
DESIGNATION AND USE OF THE OTHER CASES. 219
^ ( = ""tliS: ) stands before the noun in the emphatic state ;
e. g. Barh. 14, 9 ; or before proper names, 11, 20. |ax.iJ^ C7ll^
he built Nineveh. For this, in Gen.i. 1 3, the Peshito has Al =
J^^ (compare Ephr. I. 116, D), which moreover occurs in Eccl. ii.
3 ; iii. IV ; iv. 1 ; viii. 9, 17 ; Cant. iii. 5 ; viii. 4.
2. The accusative is also used adverbially, and then de-
notes ; a) direction towards a place ( 67. 1, b) ; e. g. John
vii. 14,35; viii.14; xviii.3 ; Barh.58, 18,19; 6) in indicating
time it denotes ; a) the question, How long ? e.g. Barh.7,5,
6. ^.kloaa ,^iSn>| 1^4^ I^OT the rain continued forty days ;
3, 15, 16. ,^il 1'po ^OIqSl qLLIU they mourned for him
a hundred years ; 24, 7, 8 ; 85, 19, 20 ; 195, 6, 7 ; Assem.I.
18, A.] ; /3) When f Luke i. 59. ]1i1d2> ISdqII Iocfi it
came to pass on the eighth day ; Ps. i. 2. (' W^ |SQSa hy
day and night ; c) in reference to measure and weight ;
Hoiu long f How high ? etc. ; e. g. Barh. 38, 19. looi j^j]
^1 IALZ it tuas three cubits long; 20, 6; 179, 18.
^UD.. Mo J I ^aLk U^^ the snow lay four fingers deep;
d) concerning^ in relation to, as to ; e. g. Barh. 37,16. \^^im
looi lA^QD he luas heautiful as to form ; 17. JQI]
|VjDQl2)0 |i^:^ he had small eyes and a small mouth ; 38, 4;
Assem. I. 74, A. 30 ; 77, A. 22 ; 86, A. 25.
Rem. In indicating time, How old ? is commonly expressed by
\C^ or L'^ with the addition of the years ; e. g. John viii. 57.
I " I y 7
i* ^V>.> j3 fifty years old ; Barh. 3, 20.
3. Derivative nouns also take the accusative instead of
the genitive of their verbs, viz. ; a) participial forms; Heb,
220 THE CASE ABSOLUTE.
xii. 2. ^ZqiSQaOI^ yjoUly* the finisher of our faith ; James
iv.6 ; b) infinitive forms ; e.g. Kirsch.Chr.136,1. ]]-n m ^
>mi\o<^ni >t)^^on\ the conquest of Constantinople.
4. The vocative is distinguishable in part bj its connection ;
e.g. Matt. XXVI. 89, 42. ti^naV) . | in| wy Father if it he
-
2)ossible ; Rom. viii. 15 ; partly bv o], prefixed ; e. g. Rom.
^ DO 7 - P
ii. 1. JAJ'rO o( man ; verse 3 ; I Tim. vi. 11 ; James
V. 1.
Rem. The Philoxeuian translation imitates in Greek nouns the
vocative termination belonging to that language ; e. g. Luke i. 3,
and Acts i. 1. ]]lof2 6]' ^ so'ipiXs ; I Tim. vi.20.
5. Finally the ablative is distinguishable by the preposi-
tions, *o, ^, ^Ql, etc.. prefixed.
Rem. Time, When ? is frequently expressed in a similar man-
ner ; e. g. Gen. viii. 11. [m^j l*"^^ "^ eventide ; Prov. vii. 9 ;
Assem. I. 37, A. 11.
76. The Case Absolute.
By the case absolute is meant a noun, which, at the be-
ginning of a sentence, by itself and without connection
with what follows, forms a clause, and is usually to be ex-
plained by supplying, as to, concerning^ and the like. Here
belong especially ;
1. the Nominative absolute, which ; a) either forms the
subject of the following clause ; e. g. Gen. xxii. 24.
^G1 2)| Zf^O OlAO0j>0 o.nd his concubine she also bore ;
THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 221
or b) is to be rendered by an oblique case, wbich a suffix
to the noun, in the clause following shows to be ; a) a gen-
itive ; e.g. Ephr. I. 242, E. oi'^cooj ]^V)0 looil p lajj
1 Aa.aAD if there be found on the skin of the body of a man a
blemish ; I. 110, D ; Matt. iii. 4 ; or the suffix to the prepo-
sition indicates it as ; /3) a dative ; e. g. I Cor. vii. 7.
(Gu^ ^lib Gl}^ |i:LiGl.a lA^OIoSo i iNo to each one is given a
g'ftfrom God ; Acts xv. 21 ; /) an accusative ; e. g. Ephr.I.
223, F. K*ouoci |lk> ^Lm ^l^-^ 13 ViqSjO we know not
what has befalUn Moses ; ( 67. 1. c. Eem.) Ps. Ixxiv. 17;
i) an ablative (with a following *0 and ^io) ; e.g. Heb. x. 1.
. ^^J X^i'i OlO 1oOl A^f l^^AlS^ IcDQiQJ in the law is the
shadow of the good things to come ; Ephr. I. 237, A.
]I;Sq!^ |Ld}Q) ou^ ^qqcdZ V \^\ ^^o ;ji.sh* ^
cf anything leavened and of honey, bring ye no gift to the
Lord.
2. The accusative absolute ; e. g. Gen. xlvii. 21.
\\Cl^ VrO ^!iO QjI ^1 ISdiLo the people led he (literally led
he it) from one city to the other.
3. Cases with prepositions ; e. g. Gen. ii. 17.
oilib ^QoTZ ]]' VAain?o' lAni? 1A^^^? U^V ^
o/ i^e ^ree o/ ^Ae knowledge of good and evil {of it) shalt
thou not eat.
. Rem. Sometimes, instead of the suffix, the precedinor noun
absolute is repeated ; e. g. Esth. vi. 1 9. i ;*^oN
];^^^ . >mn^><^\ir> as for the man thus let him be clothed ;
likewise with the pronoun ; e. g. Jer. xxvii. 8.
222 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
77. Comparison of Adjectives,
A. The Comparative.
The comparative is usually expressed by the simple ad-
jective,with^So = prce following and before the object com-
pared ; e. g. John viii. 53. tObV ^ tS( ^y tS\' ISol
iooi;^] art thou^ then^ greater than our father Abraham ; vii.
31 ; xiii. 16; xiv. 12 ; xix. 11 ; Assem. I. 378, 19. w>IdV
|A n\V> ^^ .kJ^ li4 my onother is dearer to me than the
queen ; 872, 3. v. E ; Barh. 82, 20. f^/. ^OOlii) ^O
(ASo) ZoOl JQa)] she was a cubit taller than any man.
Rem. Besides ^Sd, sometimes also i^^ very, or p>A^ 7nore,
equivalent to by far, is added to the adjective in order to strengthen
the meaning ; e. g. Acts xx. 35. 'r^Lk t^OUj ^tl ^aiQDa4
^DlCQJ) (la I ^iDhappier by far is he who gives than he who receives;
Heb. iii. 3 ; iv. 12. The simple adjective is used as a comparative
in stating the age of two persons ; e. g. Ez. xvi. 61. A^CQJj
IZioi^Xd "lAaianS wai2aMi] since I have received thy sisters,
the elder and the younger ; Barh. 27, 6, V. Rarely after the He-
brew idiom, are we obliged to supply the comparative adjective
from the context ; e. g. Job xi. 17; more frequent is ^iD = too ;
e. g. Deut. xiv. 24. ^mSo] ^^llO %u01 1] ' jl ^ the way is too great
for thee ; or before an infinitive with ^'= than that ; e. g. Gen.
iv. 13. nnaV)S ^Sd Idh greater than that it can be forgiven.
This construction with ^Ld occurs also with verbs of quality ; e. g.
Lam. iv. 7. ]r\\^t ^ OjOmO Kv^2 ^Ld QaSJ they are purer
than snow and whiter than milk. The adverbial more or less, in
respect to numbers, is expressed by ^So ^ Aa and ^^ ^ ; Barn,
156, 2; Assem. I. 414, 3.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 223
B The Superlative.
The Superlative, is expressed; a) by the positive^ with
the noun following in the genitive plural ; e.g. I Cor. xv.9.
\ M > \ti > tOGDQll the least of the Apostles ; or with *o in-
stead of the genitive; e. g. Matt.ii.6. I'OOLi) ]^V<r^^ lUV^
the least among the {'princes) towns in Judah ; or simply by
the emphatic state ; e.g. Matt. v.l9. I'H^ the least ; Barh.
85, 7. K^^l? X^y lAl-i^ *^oi B/jme^ the greatest city
of Italy ; Assem. I. 823" A. 20 ; 335, A. 14. v. E ; in the
plural, ICor.vi.2. |o,.Oj s\(i-xi({ra, ; II Pet.i.4. |C)90) [Liytdra.-^
or when a preference is given to one individual over a
whole species, by \0 ^SsO and a following plural ; e. g.
Ephr.I. 204, C. ^oZ^ ^ ^ ^> the greatest of all evils ;
b) by doubling the adjective or noun, so that the latter
stands in the relation of genitive in the plural ; e.g.Gen.ix.25.
^r^l pOl the meanest slave ; Exod.xxvi.38. Pau^QO vSO^O
the holy of holies^ i. e. the holiest place ; Num. iii. 32 ; Bafh.
530, 3, 4. ].^^LLo t ^ i N .Sd the king ofkingSy i.e. the might-
iest ldng\ c) by JO.^ and ;-A.a before the adjective ; e. g.
;n > V) i^L.^ t^iO the most precious wood ;
Barh. 87, 3.
Rem. To denote the superlative, use is also made of the words
*,aLkj and llib; e.g. Barh. 170, 13. |ZQfiD| ,Maj the most excellent
physician ; Assem. 1. 335, B. 4, 5. (SDaj)) |;iD ^Ae wo5^ w^m-
ful ; more like the Hebrew, by (GIL^ ; e. g. Ps. xxxvi. 6. f >Ql^
1oi!Sw the mountains of God, i.e. the greatest mountains. In verbs,
I 7
a strengthening is denoted by i . 00 much ; e. g. Barh. 56, 11.
.m^>Z]^jl.Zqd he was much disquieted ; or, by J^J many ( 67.1.
c. 13) ; e.g. Barh. 6, 5 ; 135, 1. To be noted also are such forms as
OiASQSLmJ, literally, whose wisdom (is known) for the wisest.
224 CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS.
78. Construction of Numerals ( 50):
A. Cardinal Numbers.
The cardinals from three upwards, are connected with
nouns in the following manner ; a) the object numbered pre-
cedes the emphatic state plural ; e.g. Luke i.56. TA1^2 X^^r^-^
three months ; Barh. 133, 1 6. ^ZjZo ^rCQl \^Xm tvjenty-iwo
years ; 4, 5. *aV>>0 ^lJLd (jlIa ^it'O hundred and five years;
or 6) it follows in the absolute state ; e. g. Matt. x. 29.
^r2) ^IjZ /i^o oparrows ; xiv. 20. ,^il t<^QQ ;fiQl)iC
^6t;e/ye baskets ; John v. 5 ; Acts xx. 8 ; Barh. 135, 10.
Rem. Exceptions to this rule, however, occur, tlie object num-
bered standing after the number in the emphatic state ; e. g. Barh.
160,17. YfCiL ^i.a!L' IlllbZ ei(jht thousand slaves ; 121,8;
164, 4 ; or the cardinal, though rarely, stands as nomen regens in
the construct state ; e. g. Matt. iv. 25. jAl-jifSD Z^T^l ^e/i cities,
(literally, the ten of the cities). Some nouns, such as liOQji, f Al*
also follow the numeral in the singular ; e. g. Assem. I. 213, A. 21,
P77 X7 77->
22. pJDCLk fKtO ^juSOk* 0;iQl> ^!iD tvhen fifty-one days had pas-
sed; Barh. 10,1 6. Concerning the designation of age by 'fd and L^d
comp. 75.2. Rem.; Assem.I. 31,21 ; 377, 1 ; Ephr.I.195,D ; Barh.
50,13 ; 179,4; with the omission of ^^JJi ; Barh. 5, 12. ]]^ '^
.aSQjsjO ^AaO one hundred and sixty five years old. For the
combination of numerals without any numbered object, compare
50; in respect to which it is to be noticed that, contrary to the He
brew usage the smaller numbers follow the larger ; e. g. Num. iv.
43; 1. Kings V. 11. Concerning suffixes to cardinal numbers, see
46. 2. b.Rem.
B. Ordinal Numbers.
1. Ordinals are connected like adjectives with their nouns
P. 7 7
in the same number and case ; e. g. Matt. xiv. 25. |Z;4^^
CONSTRUCTION OF NUMERALS. 225
l ^^ ? (A..Li^> in the fourth watch of the night ; Kev. iv. 7 ;
vi. 9. U^LiiOM lis^ the fifth seal ; verse 12 ; xvii. 11.
2. The cardinal numbers also supply the place of ordinals
as follows ; a) the units, especially in designating time ; a)
with the noun standing before the numeral in the emphatic
state plural ; e. g. John xix. 14. As K^ ^ about the sixth
hour ; /3) with the noun after the numeral, in the absolute
state ; e. g. John iv. 6. ^2lJi A^ *a6oiAj>^ it was the sixth
hour ; verse 52 ; Acts iii. 1 ; x. 9, 30 ; but more especially ;
h) in numbers above ten with the noun preceding in the
construct state ; e.g. Luke iii. 1. liaimSa^ Sim^ in thefif
teenth year ; Assem. I. 2, A. 1. 2, v.E. |rCQllb IILd AiaQ
in the one hundred and seventeenth year ; I. 8, A. 3 7. B. 19 ;
888, 8 ; 889, 1, 8, 5; 407, 10 ; or with j following in the
emphatic state ; e.g. Barh. 4, 16. ]V)\s> tal^J lAlio in the
ymr of the world one thousand ; or c) the J prefixed raises the
cardinals to ordinals ; e. g. Matt. xxii. 26. ^)^> the second;
X^'LLj the third ; verse 89 ; Luke xii. 88. A!^Z? o] ^IjI^
the second or the third ; especially in designating the years
of the reign of a sovereign; e. g. Barh. lO, 14; 11, 1 :
86, U.
Rem. Sometimes also, in accordance with Hebrew usage, the
object numbered is repeated after the numeral in the absolute state
plural ; e.g. Gen. vii.ll. ^^AS 'W^D Lm AlAQ in the six hundredth
year; and the years of the reign are given with ^o^J with a suffix ;
e. g. Barh. 19, 9. OlS/j ^miZOAO in the tenth year of his reign ;
60, 8. In giving the days of the month, either ^d without U>Q4
is repeated after the numeral, before the name of the month ; e. g.
Assem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E. ^li.lO li-OaiASAo on the IZtk of Ni-
san(Aprii); 272,B.31 ; 399,19,20 ; 407,8,9 ; or, reversely, after the
name of the month, before the numeral following it ; e. g. 397, 13,
f' -r* 9 I 7 1 .i^
Old ]1Aq rrA'U* ;in on the 9th of June ; or with >OaxS
226 RELATIONS OF NUMBERS.
before the numeral and the name of the month which follows with
ID repeated ; e. g. 398, 7. ^QID ^ja'r^O ^,iniO ]LciM ^cL-Q
on the 2^ th of December ; 274,30; or reversely, so that y^QjkJD
stands after the name of the month, before the numeral ; e. g. 399,
14. OIQ ^rO^O ^>Z ^Qj.i:3 q1 xpk^ on the 22nd of Au-
gust. This takes place even in designating the days of the week ;
e.g. Matt, xxviii. 1. |*^aO h^ the first day of the week ; John xx.
19; Assem. I. 2, B. 12. v. E!
C. Other Relations of Numbers.
1. Distnhutives are formed ; a) by doubling the cardinal
numbers ( 72. 2. b) ; e. g. Mark vi. 40 ; Barb. 19, 14 ; h)
sometimes by circumlocution by means of ^\o ; e. g. Barb.
41, 16. r*^ ^>2 ^5ol two each ; 17.
2. Numerical adverbs ; a) in answer to tb.e question, How
many times f (Multiplicatives) ; a) by h^ and *o before a
cardinal number following, wbicb. more 'clearly defines it ;
^9 7 7
e.g. Gen. iv. 15. fsnan ^^ seven-fold; Luke viii.8; without
*0, Jer. xvii.18. ^jL ^ twofold ; /3) by tbe simple numeral
with *0, Luke xix.8. Ilo^l^ (i.e. 1^1) fourfold; h) in answer
to the question How often f a)with the signification of a cardi-
7 I 7
nal, by means of ^1 time^ plaral ^il*^1 times^ as in Eng-
lish ; e. g. II Cor. xi. 24, 25. ^Ol 1^^ once ; ^^>ini ,ttV^n
five times ; Matt, xviii. 22 ; Luke xvii. 4 ; John xiii. 38 ;
by VAlil plural lAlQl, Asssem. 1. 484, 27, 80 ; sometimes
by .A tirtie^ plural ^ A; Barb. 10, 19 ; more rarely by
11*>ol way^ or merely by the feminine of the ordinal num-
ber , e. g. Gen. iv. 24 ; ^) in an ordinal signification, in
-0 7
such a manner that either |i^l of the cardinal precedes
with >, and is repeated after it in the plural ; e.g. AblZj |iai
CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES. 227
^J[5{ (also elliptically ASZj U^l or ^^jiii A-lIZj) for the
third time ; or by adverbs of the ordinals in Zo, e. g. Jude,
verse 12. Loi^lfor the second time.
8. Fractions are represented ; a) by special forms derived
from tiie cardinal numbers ; e. g. Rev. viii. 7. ]ALo2 one-
third; vi. 8. (in^O) one fourth; Heb.vii.2 ; h) by circumlo-
c * > y
cution ; e.g. Rev. xi.l3. rrCQl ^ j** one-tenth ; Epbr. 1.204,
D ; Ez. V. 2. ^Qilib AlZ ^ lU**
79. Connection of the Noun ivith Adjectives,
The adjective is related to the noun either as epithet or
predicate.
I. As epithet it follows the noun in the same gender and
number ; e. g. Matt. xvii. ]. p^> |jQ4 an high mountain ;
xvi. 4. IZ'H^yiO lAa>n lAo;* a wicked and adulterous gener-
(i^ibri ; xi. 8. |^ i O > |AajJ 5q/if raiment ; John xi. 47.
IZul,^ 1Z6Z1 mawy miracles. The same is true in respect
to pronouns and participles ; e. g. Matt. xv. 8. licji \^ this
people ; verse 12 ; xix. 1 ; Rev. iii. 8. ]aiuA2) ]liZ a?i opew
door. Collectives in the singular are followed by the ad-
jective in the plural ; e. g.. Assem. I. 78, A. 4. ^^4^ \^
IcoQku the people who hold to the law ; so also with nouns
in the plural having a singular signification ; e. g. John vii.
88. IIa. ]1so living water ; Heb. x. 24 ; or in the singular
ad sensura ; e. g. IS'um. iv. 5. ^SD^\Si-> Pk>I *j^f the vail
which was spread out.
Rem. The pronoun frequently comes first ; e. g. John xi. 47.
V;^yt IjOT ^A^f 7wn ; Matt, xviii. 1 : xvii. 18. Adjectives are also used
228 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH ADJECTIVES.
emphatically,especially in titles; e.g. Assem.l.25,A.l4. ^pD pL2Q4
5a'a1 the pious Ephraem; ll7,B.23.^LMa ^'fJi \au^rO the holy
John; 286, A. 1. If an adjective is appended to the demonstrative
pronoun for the sake of more particular designation, the pronoun
usually stands between the noun and the adjective ; e. g. Ephr. 1
124,E. ^SOfQO IrJB^I 001 IjOIQJ this light first spread abroad;
127, D; or before both, 132, F. "l^) ]l^\V) 001 this great teach-
er. ^\o occurs (as a noun) exclusively before the noun ; e.g. Matt.
XV. 13. (pi| (Ao^J ^\o this whole planting, (with suffix, compare
55.B. 2.Rem.). A word, generally a particle, sometimes stands be-
tween the noun and the adjective ; e. g. Acts xvii. 20. ;-*... |J>So
|A^-^QJ strange words indeed. But very rarely the adjective fol-
lows in a gender different from that required by the noun ; e. g.
Barh. 454, 18. \m^r^ l*r*? (fem. lAm^r^) the hohj cloister. Or
with nouns of the common gender, the gender of several adjectives
following: one after the other, is interchanged ; e. g. Michael. Chr.
61. 1, 2^
2. As predicate (with the substantive verb expressed or to
be supplied) the adjective precedes the noun, which follows
in the absolute state, or with a suffix ; e. g. Mark xv. 23.
|)QSo OlO >4iL\*>> l^-^ '^^^^ ^^^^ which myrrh was mingled ;
verse 26. 1A!^ Zooi |^Ao as reason was written ; Matt.xv.
28. tJbSZcLliCUOl ^01 |^> great is thy faith. In like manner
the pronoun ; e. g. Mark xv. 26. JjiJOOLij pW) QJOl thai is
the King of the Jews ; Luke ii. 12. |Z| ^QO}^ (jOl thai shall he
for you the sign.
Rem. Sometimes the adjective, as predicate, follows the noun,
viz.: when several words follow which define more closely the signi-
fication of the adjective; e. g. Gen. xix. 20. t^;o IjOl lAa;-0
Vr>A\ .ov<un\ ^CH this city is nigh to fiee unto ; or an adver-
bial idea is embraced in the preposition ; e. g. Gen xxix. 7. ^^-iJD^
bQ.x.0 pDQji it is yet high day^ i. e. high in the day. Sometimes
CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 229
the adjective singular, as predicate, stands before the plural noun ;
e.g. Barh. 542, 14, 15. |JSo oio *S^tO to that same were the
words written ; or it follows a plural, being itself in the singular ;
e.g. Assem. I. 21,5, 6. Ol2^ ^-^-^^ (Z;..a1o10 |A^..Q0 songs and
hymns were composed hy him. But especially the adjective in the
plural follows collectives ; e. g. Rev. xix. 1. i;V>|> |1!l..t^ falO
a great multitude^ who said ; Barh. 88, 4. The predicate is also
expressed by a noun ; e. g. I Cor. xii. 27. ^A>Sf)> tOAj| G1^^
ye are the body of Christ ; Eph. v. 30.
3. "When several nouns of different genders are connected,
the adjective as epithet and predicate, usually conforms to
the masculine ; e.g. Luke i. 5, 6. VLomlS. Oi'ZAjIo ]Ipl
(Ol^ ^r^ OOCJl _a1^)1 tOaUjZ Zacharias and his wife Eliz-
abeth both feared God ; verses 6,7 ; Barh. 106,9.
Rem. Concerning the neuter the same rules prevail as in QQ.
2, and 70. 3 ; e.g. Assem. I. 36, 6. l^LiAoj wiOl that which has
been written; 372, 19 ; Ephr. I. 241,B ; Barh.24, 18. ^AjuO) ^OlL
he did that which was evil.
% 80. Connection of the Koun with the Verb.
Tlie Yerb conforms in number and gender to the subject;
but to this there are many exceptions, which may be refer-
red to the following cases. Compare Agrell Comment, de
varieiaie generis et numeriin LL.OO. LundcE, 1815, 4.
A. In regard to IT amber.
Here it should be remarked :
1. That collectives or those nouns which are regarded as
^ ,^ .^ ^ ^, -'^; e.g.
Barh. 9-4, 10. qLqV-CdJ2i!:1 llsbo'? fl^x* the Roman army
230 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.
proceeded towards Persia ; 96, 9 ; ^^ ; e. g. Acts xxvi. 18.
0001 iV^N> ^i^ all who were with me ; Michael. Chr. 15,5 ;
and its compounds, r ^ ^;e.g.Assem.I.39,3 5. QoAd"| ^m^Is
all wrote ; ^^V)\^ ; e.g.Michael.Chr. 14,15. O'^lj ^^ all
who said; *mjl ^O; e.g.Barli.277,6. oioiZ >a i\o > that everij
one wondered; also (am; e.g.Lukexxiii.l.^OOUiio oiXd nVnf4
the vjhole multitude aro5e;lL.QflD;e.g.Barli.422,10.1)ytQCD oZ]
a great multitude came ; Assem.I. 386,15,16 ; JSOI; e.g. John
V. 3. (0UrO> i''^\V^ r^^ OOCn -jlLD) ^^x^OlO in these (pooh)
lay a great multitude of invalids ; Assem. I. 483, 19 ; Barh.
95,6,7; 227,8 ; 312,7 ; lo-^'; e.g. Barh.211,8. 01^]^-^
.X)*r^s2^ the others fled ; 342, 19. According to the same
construction are names of places put for their inhabitants ;
e.g. V^Ql cloister; Assem.I.411, ]^ote B. 4 6. r^ V^^OQl
v 7
jiOIOOp^ when the monks saw him.
Rem. The same nouns also are found with the verb singular ; e.g.
UjLja, BaTh.551, 13 ; ^^*^ 288,12, and its compounds, |\n ; e,cf.
309,14; ^V^\o; e.g. 314,2 ; ULl} ^ or ,l\n;e.g.373,l;also'i^l
e.g.Acts xiv.4; pDl; e.g.Acts v.26;Barh. 301,9,10. In like manner,
abstract feminines occur for concretes; e. g. (ZojUf, Barh. 490, 18.
Ad'^I IZqaj] 01^ all men fled ; l^in* for prisoner; Assem. 1.
490, A. 31 ; lAla^ for inhabitants-^ e.g.Acts xiii.44 ; 12,^ for con-
gregation; e.g.ICor.xiv.23. Still more remarkable is the construction
of these nouns in one and the same period with a singular and plu-i
ral verb ; e.g. IJIaJ, Barh.212,1. ^OlO^lO 1]1>1 ^^Oioill ^il
an army conquered him and took him captive ; Jl3| ^\o e.g. 388,3,
4 ; Vioi; e.g. Acts xxi. 36 ; Barh. 371, 8.
2. Nouns with a plural form having a singular significa-
tion ( 44. Kem. 6 ), are either ; a) in respect to form
CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 23 I
connected with the plural verb ; e. g. )al, II Cor. iii.
7 ^ V7 l>..7
18. lA^ii (2)|0 i{;iVA uncovered face ; Barh. 201, 1 ; Jjua*;
e.g. John iii.lo. J^Sl^j III* CJl^ ^OOOIJ he shall ha,ve eternal
life ; V.26; Barh.219,12 ; llso; e.g. John v.7. Qi^fZZV? |k5
|1L^ when the water was troubled; Barh. 194, 3 ; 268, 7, 8,
12; and I * V) ;e.g.Marki lO.fiV^^ OOjAflOf oupavo/ o'x'JqVsvoi;
James v. 18. Trfi^ QOOU (^iOS 6 ojpavoj usrov edwxsv ; or h)
more rarely, in respect to signification, they are connected
with the singular verb ; e. g. Luke xxiii. 45. *uk.h] ^-^i A
(ijZ ^/i vaiY was rent ; John i. 4. fOOl ].,>>< OIQ m him wub
Zi/e; Num. xxxiii. 14. }-jl-Sd ^-^^ |oai Aa.^ ^Aere was no
water there ; Luke iii. 21. (l^s a*A2)Z1 the heaven was open-
ed ; as feminine, II Petr. iii. 5. ;>Qji;jD ^ ZoC31 Ol.Aal \*!in
ojpavo; '^fl'av sx's'aXai ; Barh. 228. 10.
8. With the noun plural also is connected the verb singu-
lar; a) when the verb preceding is use! impersonally; a)
^x . 7 9 i. * 7 .7 T
A^l and A^Ji. ; e, g. John vi. 9. t t^ri aU1m wkOiQ^ A^j
.&JQJ ^9^0 |p.lCD> he has five barley-loaves and tioo fishes ;
xxi. 25 ; I Cor. xv. 40 ; Barh. 144, 8 ; with looi, John v. 2.
lOf^fiOf jjikLQAA OIQ (OOl Aj| there were in the same fi,ve porches ;
Assem. I. 852, 18 ; ^) other verbs relating to persons ;
e. g. Luke ii. 18. U^*? it-SV^ (Zaj^** *al.jaZl there ap-
peared many of the heavenly host ; Barh. 124, 11. ( 1* r^l
1la.A the Arabians made peace; 188, 12. - ai^ 1^>1 AaId
there died four thousand; 177, 14; 839, 9 ; or b) when
the verb follows though more rarely ; a) Ljt] and LjJ^
e.g. Barh. 148, 10. X>QAAiil looi A^t 1'^ U^Z. Chisum
had five walls : f3) other verbs relating to persons ; e. g.
16
232 IN RESPECT TO GENDER.
Barb. 11-2, ]0. ^\|j3Zl itvi many were slain; 125, 14,15.
jH^^S^I (->~v-b ^he Arabians chose for Icing ; 190, 9. >^\Ci
^j ji - fAlap^ since the inhabitants feared ; 298, 17 ;
513, 3; 532, 19.*
Rem. Some have attempted to explain this singular of the verb
as the third plural pret. defectively written ( 6 ; comp. Agrell a. a.
O.p. 12,13) ; still it is remarkable that one and the same author, as
Barhebrseus, should employ interchangeably both ways of writing.
On the contrary this construction is found in Hebrew and more
frequently in the Arabic ; and to both of these languages, such a
defective form of the 3 pret. plur. is unknown. When a plural
is to be considered as distributive {one of them, or each one of them).,
the Syriac uses not only the singular but the plural also, and marks
this construction more accurately by r^iw^D, tOOUlD ^^^ or ^^
^jJ^OI; e.g. Barh. 434, 12. OI>2]3 ^.^kIs ^iT.QJOl each one of
them went into his country ; 101, 14, 15. r*' i^N*^ Qil^ ^
tOOIlliO each one of them had answered.
4. The dual, whicb. is used in four words only, ( 44), is
connected with the plural verb ; e. g. Matt. xxiv. 40.
^oocru ^jZ two shall he ; xviii. 19 ; xix. 5 ; Barh. 165, 19.
^OLiZjZ wftr^O and' they both brought forth.
Rem. Sometimes, also, according to the sense, the verb in the
singular is found with ^)^ ; e.g. Barh.396,12. ^'^^ Aq2)J>
01 p**! ^ib that it should be called Egypt ; 433,20. Similar is
* 7 '^t"^T "
Barh. 121, 11. ^;A!iO ^ZjZ Zj> there departed two armies.
B. In respect to Gender.
1. Nouns masculine, singular and plural, sometimes take
the verb, whether it precede or follow, in the feminine
when they are masculine in respect to the termination, but
not as to signification (compare 43. Rem. 2, and 70.
1. b).
CONNECTION" OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 233
Kem. It must be considered as a solecism or a designation of
the neuter when the verb feminine is found with a noun masculine ;
e.g. Barh.527,16. IaSsO) iooi p when it was evening ; compared
with Matt. viii. 16 ; xiv. 15 ; or Barh. 152, 14. ^scL^ ^ L6(Jl
there arose a quarrel ; compared with Matt, xxvi, 5 ; Acts
xxiii. 10.
2. Feminines take a verb in the masculine; a) wiien they
are feminine merely in respect to termination (compare
70. l.a) ; b) when abstracts stand for concretes (compare
70. 2); e. g. ^aaJ, lAmaj/or mankind; Barh.236,8. yji
oA^lD lAmaJ 1..alL ^minL there died about fifty thousand
men; 548,20; 585,14. l2pCQl army; 581, 12. QmIdZ]
|Z;nrni ^.a^OI these armies were assembled ; or (ZqmJLz) milita-
ry for soldiers ; 607, 20.
Rem. These nouns are also found with the verb feminine ; e. g.
Barh. 341, 10, 11. ^iaj ]Ial JCQljZ y^ ^L^ there died
about twelve thousand men ; 348, 15, 16. But the preceding verb
masculine is to be considered as impersonal in such cases as Barh.
612, 14. |A2)| %QQIjiZ| there was occasion given ; compared with
579, 14. ZoCJl lAlDj lAal there was muchAOCcasion ; or 606, 19,
20. 1A-1k> OlZoi^ loOl he had fear ; compared with 136, 6.
]^ S.^ V^ lA\rr; A^2L3 fear fell upon the king.
3. Sometimes the nonn is connected, in the same sentence,
with the masculine and feminine of the verb ; not only, a)
nouns of the common gender ; e.g. Mark v. 13. U^oj QQ^iJ
r>Vv n 1i\ai.4 ^^Cn these unclean spirits went out and entered ;
but b) such also as have a determinate gender ; e. g. Barh.
268, 10. QoLmZIo 1 ff^<^^ auZjZ they both {mother and
daughter) fell and were suffocated ; 260, 11, 12.
234 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES.
C. In respect to both Gender and Number.
1. Collectives feminine often take, in accordance with tlie
meaning, the plural masc. of the verb ; e. g. Barh. 561, 6,
7. 0001 ^^ i n I'rl \Lam^\ the inhabitants had fled ; Gen.
xli. 57. oZ| |ij( OU^ the whole people {country) came ;
Matt. viii. 32. olaj wOT l^oi dllo this whole herd
perished ; Assem. I. 53, 17. ^a^QQ p IAu^Sd Ollo AaIoZI
rt// <Ae inhabitants {the vjhole city) assembled and wept. So
too the names of cities ; e. g. Assem. I. 51, Note B. 1.
^Q^4^Ajj Aq2U t-kOI^Of the inhabitants of Edessa went out to be
slain ; Barh. 248, 6, 7. '|Zq...4 for Mohammedans; Barh.
580, 1, 2.
2. With nouns plural feminine, sometimes occur verbs
singular masculine; as well before as after the noun ; e. g.
Isa. iii. 10. tO-^Ol^ Aia J^iu>ZZ| the daughters of Zion are
haughty ; Barh. 215, 7. Ol^ZoTD^ ^CTl^ f^Z] oZ/of his
goods had been plundered; Ephr. II. 145, A. looi JQ^Ao
lA^^Ao ^Olx-^ there were writings composed concerning
them ; Jer. xiv.5. . nn jX-* . IA!^] ^/jg /iznJ^ ca/i^e^ and
forsook; Barh. 368, 11, 12 ; 10, 9. c^OloLf^i.^ ASZ there
were three eyes.
Rem. Seldom are cases found, where the verb singular feminina
stands with the noun plural masculine ; e. g. Job xxxix.13, 14.
OlAlD JclQ* ^jlm.1S the ostrich leaveth her eggs.
D. Construction cf sentences when there is more than one subject^
or where the subject is compound.
l.When the subject of a sentence is compounded of a nom-
inative and genitive, the verb conforms ; a) usually to the
CONI^ECTION' OF THE NOUN- WITH THE VERB. 235
nominative ; e g. Barh. 228, 7. IjqSQ!^ ZaS>oj AalIZf there
was seen the form of a pillar ; 613, 14. (lacaScj |Aly
AiLdA#( iAe cr// of the jwor was heard ; 348, 20 ; Z>) the
verb conforms to the genitive, when the latter contains the
principal idea ; e. g. Job xxxii. 7. . ^'^ I Vo \j^y IfytOflo tJie
multitude of years shall teach; Barh 96,8,9. ]Al-.pSDj ai||..aco
A^2U a great part of the city was destroyed, ; 141, 10; 241,
10, 11 ; 188, 7, 8. OOOl ^^^oASo _ lAxSo ^Sai a multi-
tude of the dead were buried.
Rem. In the last connection ^O, almost always is found ; e. g.
Matt. viii. 34 ; Acts xxi. 30 ; I Cor. xiv. 23 ; to which the verb
rarely relates, as Barh.611,3. OlAloZ ^aOl^O VloAaJ all of his
petitions should be granted.
2. When it has several subjects connected by and^ the
verb stands as follows ; A) when they are of the same gen-
der ; fl ) in the plural ; thus a ) before the subjects ;
e. g. John xxi. 2. "jiooVZo \zi^ ^QlSoi lr**^1 00<^ ^OOuA^f
^^"JjAjO there were together Simon Peter, Thomas and Nathaniel;
Barh. 19, 7. .AlOiO ^o{ oNf^Zj Saul and Jonathan were
slain ; 78, 8 ; 193, 17 ; Assem. I. 30, A. 1, 2. ^ >in p
\mli OlSoO -rr><'> ; >^r> when the clergy and the whole congregation
were assembled ; Ephr. 1. 223, A ; ^) after the subjects ;
Exod. xvii. 10. rsr\rfs jOmO ^ojOiIo "IsoSd Moses, Aaron
and Hur, went up. But the verb is also frequently found ; b)
in the singular ; a) before the subjects ; e.g. Matt, xxviii. 1.
VZj>*l 5al'^0 VAJL-^i ^Xll'rJiO tl^ then came Mary Magda-
lene and the other Mary ; Barh. 106, 4, 5; 121, 19 ; 159, 9;
160 13. 1j2qSD0 llao looi ^/tere arose famine and pest-
ilence ; 193, 19; Assem. I. 272, A. 35, 36 ; Ephr. I. 216,B;
236 CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB.
230,D ; (3) after the subjects ; e.g. Johiiii.2. ^Qml 001 ^]'
^'fOL] *aaiO,aSn\2o Jesus and his disciples were invited ;
Barli. 111,10; Assem. I. 234, A. 5. v. E ; B) when the sub-
jects are of different genders, the verb conforms ; a) to the
gender of that standing nearest to it ; e. g. Barh. 106, 9.
^^fp (jUO I rO.t I ilO f^ when men^women and youth had
assembled together ; 192, 10. \Lj\yyO pCL^ Oi\.tZ] mountains
and islands appeared ; 195, 4 ; or h) the masculine is pre-
ferred, especially if the verb follow the subjects; e.g. Barb.
74, 12, 13. 0001 ^-iri>Ak> oiAj^o ^cooi^coojofi Theodosim
and his sister were educated ; 77, 7 ; 78, 2 ; Ephr.I. 253, A;
C) finally, when there are several subjects, if the construc-
tion commence with the singular of the verb, in the con-
tinuation of the sentence, the plural of the verb is used ; e.g.
Barh. 137, 14. QjD*1o' ^axo'J^O ]]iQ.I )>ao Gahala and his
confederates arose and fled ; 155, 16. P-> OlZo^ *n*^1
QO^O (uLi^O the judge and the elders went put and brought.
j^EM. The verb in the plural also follows, when several subjects
are united by 5>ai with ; e.g. Barh. 197,5,6. ^<11 )Q2LjCUJ ^.O
r>i<^ |jklDOJ> |/r>\ a. when Nicephorus with the Roman army
returned; 72,2; 85,9. When there are two different subjects,
of which one is a pronoun of the first person, the verb follows in the
first person plural; e. g. Luke ii. 48. J2))Q4^ ^^dOfO p|
..\ _>001 ^*^ lt'1-^vQD I and thy father (we) have sought thee
with much sorrow ; Assem. T. 173, B. 23 25. Yet sometimes
when the subjects are in the first and third persons, the verb is in
the first person singular ; e.g. Assem. 1, 347, 28, 29. |M^*A!iO0 \i\
ijkbu\ |1aJD rAj I and the Messiah are (am) one nature.
PECULIARITIES RELATING TO NOUNS. 237
81. Peculiarities relating to Nouns.
A. Ellipsis.
1. If the subject of a sentence would be repeated in the
predicate, before a genitive for the purpose of defining it
more accurately, that subject is omitted, and only the geni-
tive is used; e. g. Matt. iii. 4. I^^ICD) oisanL looi *^oioAj]
IJSQ.*) his clothing was ( a clothing of) cameCs hair ; John
V. ZQ. ^lAQa) ^iD ^Ojj (ZojOl-flO a vntness which is great-
tr than that of John; x. 21; xi. 4 ; Heb. iii. 3; v. 14.
IZ;^;^ lA^QD^i I r*^y? ^0 those who are of full age belongs
strong meat ; Col. iii. 22.
Rem. This Ellipsis also occurs in designations of time and place,
with fAli ; e. g. Assem. I. 394, 6, 7. cio Zboij \Lim ^^
JiOAil*^ >DOJOIJQCO a year before the Nicene council^ for (Ala
VAi* ^^ ; 1- 11- lAlj CJliAo the year thereafter, for lAli
VAi> 6\Sbh ; Mark xiv. 9. IjOI ^Z'pQg) lpZ2> ^iuif ^
(viz : jZ|) where-ever this my gospel shall be preached.
2. Sometimes the accusative is wanting with the active
verb, when the object can be easily supplied from the sig-
7
nification of the verb ; e. g. 'rOj to plough, literally to drive
(fjra the yoke -plough), I Sam.viii.l2. (in full,Luke xvii.7) ; ^
r-lLl to bring forth, Aph. pSo") to beget (U-J^), Gren. xvi.
J ; xxx. 1; >nffll to marry, literally to take (IZAjI); Ezra.
ix. 2, 12 (in full, Barh. 39, 11) ; w*.ii1 to cast lots, literally
to cast (]ma a lot)', I Sam. xiv. 42 (in full, Ps. xxil 19);
also nouns with prepositions ; ^03 to consider, literally to
lay a '*^^^ in the Heart): Job xxxiv. 23 (in full, Acts v.
238 ZEUGMA AND HENDIADYS.
J) to ship^ literally to go, (|Sn*n upon the sea) ; Mark vi
48 ; Luke viii. 23.
Rem. Here also seem to belong impersonal plirases ( 66. 1, 2)
like ^ ^r^, ^ AjpD to which may be supplied \mSli or
VkiO) ; and ^ .^p to which may be supplied (ioL* To Zoi-jJ
it is clear, and Aiiaa* it is dark, it is forced and unnecessary to
supply llj| or jAS^Q^*
B. Zeugma and Hendiadys.
Zeugma occurs with the noun as well as with the verb
( 68. C. 2); e.g. Gen. ii. 1. ^ooil^ Olloo U'lo ]1sq the
heavens and the. earth and all their host ; or Hendiadys ;
e.g. Gen. iii. 16. >inii[)^0 * n > n p thy sorrow and thy
conception, i. e. the sorrow of thy conception ; Job iv. 16.
Cases of Paronomasia are merely imitations of the Hebrew;
e.g. Isa. xxviii. 10, 13 ; and passages of accidental asson-
ance ; e.g. Barh. 102, 18. "M^oao W ]rniVn \S not by
persuasion hut by the sword.
APPENDIX.
T^ie Rendering of Composite Greek nouns.
The Syrians render the Greek composite noun as well as
the verb (compare Appendix to 67) into their language,
in the following manner ; 1) by simple Syriac words of
like signification ; e. g. I Tim. iv. 13. ava^vwCi^ U-^0;
n-apaxXyjtfjff |Zq1Q ; i. 9. a(fsl3sTs \LjlJ ; avoVioj U-^ ; Matt,
xviii. 28. tfJvtJouXo? ]Lxd ; or 2) by writing two words for
one ; a) in the relation of genitive; e.g. Acts ii.23. 'rtp6yvu(fig
lAir a Zq1d,.qSd; II Tim. iii.2. a^apitfroi |Zona()^ ^.^^SiD
or b) by two nouns, of which the latter stands in apposi-
THE RENDERING OF GREEK COMPOSITE NOUNS. 239
tion ; e.g. John xi.l6. trufxjxa^rjra; aWou ^oio,^Lm 1 ^ .CnK ?
c) hj a participle and noun whicli correspond with the
verb ; e. g. Acts iv. 13. a/pa.a/xaroi l^sico ^^r^ \f
or by participles and adjectives and the noun with ^ pre
fixed; e.g. II Pet. iii. 16. ^uCvo'rjroff P-OqcqL jzllHOL
or 6?) by the pronoun and verb ; e. g. I Cor. vii. 8
a/afxoi \mJ ^001^ A^j ^^\1* If the composites are form
ed -from adjectives and nouns ; 3) they are frequently re
solved into their component parts, and rendered in the same
manner as in cases mentioned above ; a) in the relation of
genitive; e. g. Mark xvi. 14. (fx\y]poxoLpSia "J^S Za^mo;
Col. ii. 14. x^ipo'/pa^ov ^oqk r4; Matt. xxiv. 24.
^/sutJo-rpotpVa* (ZoOrOj ja-OJ ; h) by the noun and adjec-
tive ; e. g. Phil. ii. 3. xsvo^olla jQajDD {m.2Qs ; II Cor. xi.
13. 4'Su(^a'n'oVroXoj |J-yi? 1*j^a-^ ; 4 ) ^sometimes we can
trace definite laws of rendering ; a) nouns, adjectives, and
adverbs compounded with ^ag-, take ^^ ; e. g. Luke xi. 22.
flravo'TrXi'a \Lk\ CPL^ ; xxiii. 18. jrajAcr'Xii&s/ ]alO 01^ ; Sap.
xviii. 15. 'ff'avTo^jvafjLoj |a^So ^i-D> ; h) when they are com-
pounded with a privative, the latter is represented by
U'and ]]j ; e. g. I Cor. xv. 53. a^avatf/a \LoLa^ }]'; Eph.
i. 4. a/xwfJLo? ^C^ ]]j ; Matt. iii. 12. aa^edrog ]aij Un
Finally, in composites formed with tfOv , this is often ren-
dered by 5^ ; e. g. Philem. verse 23. Cuvaip^ftaXwroV
^ou *^i^> ]1^ ; Rom. xvi. 9. o Cuvsp/o^ ^m-wv VAa
7 7
CHAPTEE FOUETH.
P AETICLES.
82. Construction and union of Adverbs.
1. Besides the formation of adverbs described in 51, is
to be noticed as a special peculiarity tbe expressing of them
by certain verbs, which, either stand in the same tense, num-
ber, and gender, with the finite verb, with or without the
copula, or the infinitive of the verb follows with ^^ In
this connection stand ; a) yS^UV to return^ and *aflDO| to con-
tinue^ioT once more^ farther^ again; e. g. Gen. viii. 10. j^Ol
uijfBO again he sent her out ; Ps. Ixxi. 20. ySi(y\L
jLm2)2 thou shall bring me again ; Job vii.7. %xSQ2)CnZ U
IijmwSqa they shall no more see ; Luke xx. 11, 12. iCDo'|
Jr0 he sent again ; Assem. I. 203, A. 7, 8 ; Gen. iv. 2.
,^]SfiS AaCDol she bare again ; Barh. 152, 3 ; also by ad-
ding pleonastically ^oL again ; Gen. viii. 21. 2iC00| |J
|l>]] rnl\\wL ,^oZ / will no more curse the earth ; h)
a.y^rol to make much^ for very ; e. g. Barh. 9*2, 14. ^i^fiol
CONSTRUCTION AND UNION OP ADVERBS. 241
7 r
;Q-a he esteemed very much ; II Cor. viii.l6 ; II Kings xxi.
6. auJOi} , nsV)\ * i.yt ff> ] he did much evil ; c) ^aS lo
end,f or wholly, completely ;e.g.GeJi.x'slv.\ 6. '^^^^^^^ ^Olm ]]"
he had not yet done speaking ; d) ^^ to precede (always
witliOTit tlie copula) for before ; e. g. ZjSd| b!^fO I have said
before ; Acts ii. 31 ; vii. 52 ; Rom. iii. 9, 25; viiL 28,30, xi.
35 ; xii. 11 ; I Cor. ii. 7; Gal. iii. 8.
Rem. More according to the Hebrew, seems to be the expression
in Hos. vi. 4 ; '^O :>oJaLDj ll'U (^^'n d'l^tp^ btp) <^ ^^^^
which early is scattered ; Gen. xxxvii. 7 ; or II Kings ii. 10.
Z^^ A^JDol (ii^t?b rr^tfpil) thou askest too great a thiny;com-
pare Ephr. I. 519, D. E ; ^^^i^Stl ^^ II Chron.xxvi.l5,is expressed
by wkye^l ; compare Jer.iv.5,and onward. If the finite verb already
precede, it may be omitted in adverbial usage ; e. g. I Sam. xx. 41.
- > 1 fy>| ,-*0> ^;2 QUO they mourned but David the
most.
2. Adverbs like adjectives, are connected with nouns
and stand ; a) before tliem ; e. g. Luke iv. 25. .>.itt>
Xt^LHiDj] many widows ; John ii. 12. IASdgL* ^h^nfew
days ; Barb. 78, 1 ; 105, 3 ; 106, 8 ; Assem. I. 30, 15, 21 ;
270, A. 6. V. E ; with words standing between; 284, A. 10.
V. E. ; ^) more seldom after the noun ; e. g. I Cor. v. 6.
^5)wI!^D lU^** ct little leaven ; II Chron. ii. 9. ]m n
-J^ much wood ; Barh. 80, 16. Zu^A^ ^ 1>QJ the fire
placed under.
Rem. Sometimes nouns represent the adverb by a following geni-
tive ; e. g. Ephr. I. 219, A. ^m? I^^^ISoV ^^ JooiZuV
IjqSQIO they had continually the cloud and the pillar, Particu-
242 INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION.
larly should be noticed ; ^^ Vk^^CI'^ almost ; or _Ld ^^ ^<^
^\^^^^ >Z| ^SjO, %ji..t a ) partly^ etc.
3. The repetition of the adverb indicates ; a) a strength-
ening or increase of the meaning ; e. g. Gen. vii. 19.
^4 ^^ ?^*^^ ready ; Matt. iv. 24. >n iiin very 5acZ ;
John vi. 7 ; Barh. 65, 14. ^i-i^io ^iSnn and 84, 17.
jAq )Aq Z>?/ degrees ; h) sometimes a diversity is expressed
by adverbs of place ; e. g. I Kings xx. 40. )aj^O \2l^ here
and there.
% 83. Use of the Interrogation^ Affirmation^ and Negation,
A. Upon the construction of the interrogation, it should
be remarked ;
1. That the simple direct question is distinguished ; a)
either by being preceded by an interrogatory pronoun or
particle; e.g. Luke xxii.27. *^S Qi^D iv ho is the greatest ^
^ r^^ M^ what has he done to thee f verse
10. - > ^ > ^ wfc-MAaZI \lQu\ how were thine eyes opened f
verse 19 ; vii. 35 ; Assem. 1. 33, 15 ; 179, B. 25. lakliV^
V m 0001 ^li^r^ whence know they thisi or h) by the
position of the words employed, the prominent word in
forming the question being generally placed first ; e. g.
Matt, xxvii. ll. MjOOUj |a\V) OOlAJf art thou the Icing of
the Jews? Assem. I. 33, l7. V^^ y^ A^l is it thy
wish f
2. A question with U usually contains an affirmation ; e.g.
John iv. 35. 1?^*^ fif ^iH U^>T >Ai^j ^-^f ^oAjf l3
say ye not, that afUr four months comelh the harvest ?
INTERROGATION, AFFIRMATION AND NEGATION. 243
xviii.26 ; but with ISiA it embraces a negation; e.g. John v.
45. ^Oal XA -yii4^ V]i ^oAjI ^-^nco ^ol believe ye that
I shall accuse you ? x. 21 ; xviii.35 ; or a doubt ; e.g. Matt,
xxvi. 22. ^-fio Ul fcol Lord is it I? John ix. 27; xviii.25;
so also with *xO ; e. g. Ephr. I. 240, F, *xO looi \^^^
|a;io i1 iSn vjould this please God f Luke xviii. 8 ; xxiv.
18 ; John vii. 85.
Rem. The direct question is also found with ]>( (apa), Barh.
131, 12 ; with U^ for U^ 119, 10.
8. The indirect question is indicated bj t] = whether ;
e.g. Matt. xxvi. 63. loil^j Ol'^O liV> OOl bS\ /| whether
thou art the Christ the son of God. The disjunctive {whether
or (uirum an) is marked by o] in the second part ; e. g.
Matt. xi. 3. ^LcqSD 001 ^;>*l]'oVl2]? OCT OCT*^^ll (^rt thou
he who should come or shall we look for another ? John ix.
2; Assem. 1. 87, B. 12, 13; 377, 20, 21.
Rem. The affirmation or negation of a question is usually expres-
sed by a repetition of the leading verb with the personal pronoun ;
e.g. Assem. I. 375, 7. O'^l ZJIdV? ^'r^ *1>1V ^oAlSC*
L'^\y ^r^Q-^ 1SQ have you heard^my brethren^ wliat I have
7 V ? 7 p.. ;: 7
said ? and they answered^ yes, all ; 10. OSOO -^ (J Of tr*^
. ^\My is it true or not ? and they answered it is true, i. e. yes ;
sometimes by another verb; e.g.Matt.xxvii.l 1. Z;!!*! Li] thou hast
said it, i. e. yes ; in the negative with the same repetition ; e. g.
Assem. I. 378, 7, 11. Sometimes only IJ == not, appears ; e. g.
Assem. I. 33,19. w^l ]] jSolo and he said, No, my father.
B. The 'negative particles ]] and oli (and nonne f ) are
distinguished from A-I.S by this latter forming the negation
244 PREPOSITIONS.
to A-1, and with nouns, adjectives, and participles ( 68.
B. 5) or with suffixes ( 38. 2), it includes the substantive
verb.
Rem. IJ is repeated in the latter of two negative clauses ; e. g.
I Cor. xi. 11, 16 (but the negative sense is lost when the parti-
cle is to be taken affirmatively ; as in Matt. v. 25 ; Luke xxi. 34).
To adjectives and participles it gives a negative or privative signifi-
cation ( = un, in, -less) ; e. g. Eph. i. 4. ^qSd |J spotless ;
Rom. i. 23. ^\cu*ALd ]] imperishable. Before nouns it signifies
nothing less than ; e.g. Deut. xxxii.21. *V>\ |J nothing less than
my (God^s) people. Before the future (equivalent to an imper-
ative) it is prohibitory ; compare 61. 3. B, and 62. 3. Doub-
led(ljO -_ UO or iJo U ), it signifies neither nor ; John viii.
19; ix. 3.
84. Prepositions,
1. "When prepositions come together, in many instances ;
a) the signification of one of them is only apparently lost.
Thus for example, ^^ ; a) before prepositions, denotes
the direction from a place whose position is more closely
defined by those which follow ; e. g. Assem. I. 4G, 21.
1,^ l^P A.-mZ _1^ out from under a rock, 1. 37,19 ; p) after
prepositions it denotes a removal from the place more closely
defined bj those Avhich precede ; e. g. Assem. 1. 54, 7.
^LfL So AmA^ -aOloSDCD theg buried him under the Churth ;
Barh. 200, 16. I'Alaj:^ ^ 'r^il before the city; 72, 19, 20;
QQ^ 13. (jQ* ^io \Ok-^ from beloiu^ (i. e. above) the walls ;
figuratively, 31, 17. li!D>0> ,0Ollo ^ ^il^ above all ex-
cellence ; one of the prepositions is ; b) merely pleonastic ;
e. g. Eccl. X. 14. OljAo ^ after him ; Assem. I. 36, 22.
PKEPOSITIONS. 245
j^Zoik ^ from thee ; 87, 1 ; Dan. v. 24. ^OIOSd^ -Sd ie-
/ore him ; Barh. 65, 9. ]a\V)S 2q1 to ^7ie if%.
2. Several of the prepositions have a peculiar consecu-
tion ; e.g. betwixt arzc? between^ ^O * * I n; e.g.Matt.xx.l7.
OOl^O %aaiQ1 i.O between him and them ; frequently with-
out the copula, xix. 10 ; ^ AjlQ ; e. g. Barh. 60, 13.
wiCnioy t*r-^ ^-^ between Ear an and Edessa ; 75, 17,18 ; 83,
15 ; 146, 13 ; rarely ^ ^ ; e. g. Barh. 60,8 ; from to,
\ lSD'r:k-^;e.g.Matt.i.l7 r0^^ fco^^ ^CT'of ^ /ro/w
AbroJiam to David; in more general (''^jsignations also with-
out toA; e. g. Barh. 99, 17; 105, 7.
8. Besides the cases mentioned in 65. B. 3. b) preposi-
tions are repeated with several nouns which follow after one
another, and depend upon one and the same preposition ;
e. g. Barh. 82, 10 ; 104, 11, 13 ; but the preposition is quite
as frequently omitted after the first noun ; e. g. Barh. 6, 1 ;
40, 12 ; 66, 6.
Rem. As special, idioms, are to be regarded the following ; o)
*0 sottietimes stands for ^ (sv == s/V) ; e. g. Luke ii. 3. looi ^ll
OlidjT-LQQ - 1^'^*^ each went to his own city ; iii. 3 ; Barh. QQ,
16 17 or serves to designate the value or price of a thing, equiva-
lent to for ; Barh. 64, 6. ^ilk) ^ ^ >0 ^^l}^ for tioo
hundred and fifty oholi ; 149, 8, 9 ; 191, 1, 2 ; 193, 19 ; h) \
denotes direction towards a place ( 67. 1. b. ^) ; with numerals,
with ]SOA preceding = about to ; c) Zgl^ and ^Q-i show, some-
times a possession in a physical and intellectual sense ( = penes) ;
e.ff. Job XV. 9. tZoik loOl l]j which stands not in our power ; 23.
14; c?) -JiO forms adverbs ( 51. 3. a) ; expresses the pronouns
amjhody some ( 58. B. 4, 6,7), and sometimes indicates the di-
rection to a place ; e. g. Assem. I. 485, 28. U^yi ^ toward*
24:6 CONJUNCTIONS.
morning ; 1. 29 ; e) xy^l often occurs before a duty or obligation
( 67. II. 4. b) ; Ezra x. 4. It may also in respect to signification,
be considered as a preposition ; /) |J J without ; e. g. Barh. 227,5.
IJ..J PjO Hr'l \1} without hands and without feet.
85. Conjunctions.
The Sjriac language, in common with the other Semitic
dialects, is very deficient in conjunctions ; but affluence of
periodic diction in all languages arises from this class of
Avords. Hence in sjriac, upon the one hand, the periods
are wanting in variety and continuance ; and on the other
hand the connective particles which do exist have many
significations. In general the following may be observ-
ed :
1. Those conjunctions (e. g. ivhen^ then) are frequently
omitted, which, in the protasis indicate the relation to the
apodosis, and the two members are united by and ; e. g.
Gen. xix. 23, ^ 4^0 ^^ ^iSoi when the Sun had
arisen^ Lot came ; xliv. 4.
Rem. Moreover the following fall away ; a) O {asyndeton) after
verbs of motion ; e. g. Matt. ix. 7. ^1 1 ^oi he arose and went ;
Barh. 25, 1; 197, 19 ; especially in earnest discourse ; e. g. I Sam.
XV. 6 ; h) oior ; e.g. II Kings ix. 32. ^jISoicflSD XtULl ^>Z
two or three eunuchs ; c) J more in accordance with Hebrew
usage ; e. g. Isa. 1. 2. ^mS\ L^Q b^L\ flV)\ wherefore was, I
came, {when I came), no one there. On the other hand is often
repeated [polysyndeton) ; e. g. Barh. 51, 20. ; 'PdZIo AaIdo
|Vr>^\ .o\mr> ^dOO he died, was buried, arose, and went to
heaven ; 82, l7; 38, 5, 6.
2. As correlatives, conjunctions are used doubled in a
CONJUNCTIONS. 247
sentence ; a) the same word ; e. g. o o and ^df aY
as well asj both- and ; e. g. Assem. I. 291, A. 10, ll,v.E;
oX^oX either^or ; Barh. 112, 4 ; 223, 4, 5 ; ^V^l wheth-
er or; e.g. 21 7, 13; or 6)different words ; e.g. liDOl j^f
like as; Assem. I. 75, B. ll, 13, v.E; 374, 23, 24; with
J llilil preceding; Ephr.I. 214, E; UT ^X although yet;
e.g. Barh. 91, 12, 13.
o. The conjunctions > == that^ thereby^ or Pj = thai not^
are usually connected with the future ( 61.3. A) ; e. g. As-
sem. I. 515, B.32 ; Barh. 213, 6 ; but in as far as they have
the signification of since^ because^ (quod), they are connected
with the preterite ; e.g. Matt. ix. 8. %2au> loi^)] rt^^^m
they praised God, because he had given ; 12, 41 ; 13, 11 ;
Barh. 24, 9.
4. Concerning the use of particular conjunctions, the fol-
lowing may be noted ;
a) 6] is sometimes used in comparisons (=^ ^) ; e. g.
Matt, xi.22 ; xix. 24 ; and likewise b) ^] in comparing
one thing with another of the same species ; e. g. Isa. i. 7 ;
Job xxiv. 14; Assem. I. 75, A. 1. v. E ; 168, B. 29 ; with
numerals it signifies really^ about ; Barh.104,13 ; c) o!^ if^
( ^ T]^ sav ) denotes, in doubtful cases, the relation of the
subjunctive ; tf = Gi^ ^' i^ cases of certainty, denotes
the indicative, and also occurs in indirect questions ( 83.3);
it is negative in those passages containing asseverations
under oath, yet only in those which are translated, and which,
according to the Hebrew idiom, are without any negation ;
with a negative (1 X )] ] or ^ U ], it is affirmative(compare
355^ and {^*3 di^? Gesenius Lehrg. p. 844) ; e. g. Cant 2. 7.
17*
248 CONJUNCTIONS.
x'r^^ (\o ^'r-i-lZ ^1 wake not, rouse not ; d) j (for the further
use of which see ^m-, % 69.1 ; 73. 3 ; 74. 2.; 78.B.2)
a) from particles which it follows, forms conjunctions
e. g. > y^just as, Assem. I. 34, 17 ; so thai, Matt. ii. 13
J Urul just as, John viii. 28 ; Ephr. I. 214, E ; > ^uALof
(of time) as, when, Assem.I. 485, 15 ; J *jOIS since, because,
Barh. 112, 7, 8 ; 160, 12 ; > j^, 39,7, and j hlL ^, As-
sem. I. 213, A. 25, afterwards ; > OlAlk^'rO as soon as, 1.218,
27 ; ? fco (of time) luhen, 1.485,20 ; j Vi^, Barh.160, 16,
and > ^\l, 158,12, smce,hecause ; j P^r^ until, //m^, (including
the terminus ad quern), Ephr. II. 125, B ; 242, A ; lio'^
> ^ai^ 50 w?/c/z jJ/ia^, Barh.193,2 ; ? i*0^^ ^<?/ore,150,l3 ; /3)
in the signification of that, j is sometimes omitted before the
future ; e.g. John xxi. 3. \i02 jo.*) pf Vtl] /^o iliail may
catch fish; after ^1 , John v. 7. p| |Z| p] yl until that I
come ; or it is pleonastic after ^| ; e. g. Matt. x. 13. OOi J
fZuTi |a> Wiew the house is vwrthy ; Mark viii. 3 ; Luke
vi. 7 ; John viii. 36 ; after ^f, Matt. ix. 21 ; ]]'q!S^ Mark
13, 20 ; e) the copula O also denotes a) that^ especially
after verbs of sending^ entreating, commanding, etc ; e. g.
Assem. I. 77, 23, 24 ; Barh. 11, 18 ; 97, 8; 105, 1 ; 152, 5 ;
221,2; it forms ^) the apodosis ; e.g. Barh. 39, 7.8; and
is y) equivalent to hut ; e. g. Barh. 11, 16; 16, 9 ; ^) it
sometimes supplies the place of the comparative ^| ; e. g.
Job V. 7. Also the Hebrew Qb^b^ is translated by the fre-
7 T
quently occurring ^\J^ yet, nevertheless.
INTERJECTIONS. 249
86. Interjections,
1. The Interjection which denotes an imprecation or cry of
distress, is usually connected with ^ following ; e. g. Eccl.
X. 1 6. * i ^N i-aO looe to thee I ii. 1 ^. ^0^\ ^0 woe to you I
Matt, xviii. 7 ; xxiii. 13-16 ; xxiv. 19 ; Ephr. II. 135, E.
1jOOI-a? I'^SSnS ^o woe, to tJie king of Judak I 274, 1).
|Al . i *^ atASoA fcuO woi' to those who meditate deceit ! 351, 0.
^jJaOOinN (aO ; or with --^^ appended; e^g- pO ^^woe to mt!
Ez. XXX. 2 h^ClL^ Olo] woe for the day ! sometimes with
^^ ; e. g. Jer. 1. 27. |001->.-\S %aO woe to you I or ji,
Amira p. 449. fjOl jAlli^ ^!^ OlOf looe to this generation.
Without an intervening preposition, they are the usual ex-
pressions of grief and mourning, and the noun is then to be
taken in the accusative ; e. g. Judges xi. 35. *a2;z:3 oio]
alas^ my daughter I Rev.xviii.10,16,19.
Rem. Sometimes 0| occurs as an ordinary exclamation, with ^
as a sign of the accusative ; e. g. Barh. 333, 3, 4. As a particle of
exclamation sometimes also occurs u| , properly, verily^ truly ;
compare Amira p. 436.
2. Concerning the construction of particular interjections,
the following may be observed :
a) loi lo ! behold^ is frequently pleonastic; e.g. Ephr. III.
149, B. ]^<*^ |]Z loi 12^J^ 001 ^^-aDCT IL^ the mortal
body is thus dependent upon the soul ; or at the beginning of
a period it serves to give animation to the discourse ; e. g.
Ephr.III.247,C. ^^>01 ul*;^ loi lo ! our brother (member)
is separat'id ; in designations of time, like the Greek ^(5ii, it
signifies now^ already ; e. g. Matt. iii. 10. ^>QjJ:q |..;j |ol
[jjLk(> Ir^^ ^*^ the axe is already laid at the roots of the tree ;
Num. xxii. 28. ^iin] A^Z loi already the third time ; As-
sem. I. 369, 30 ; with j ^ following, since tiat: e.g. Acts
250 PECULIARITIES IN" THE POSITION" OF WORDS.
X. 30. Ij] ^K? ^ 1^ since that I have fasted; Col. i. 4 ;
preceded by 11 (loi Jj , from which comes Q^) oj^s nonnef
e.g.Matt.v.4G. ^r^^ 1?^ *-^ loft*^^ ^Si\ loi |] do not even the
publicans the same? verse 47; xiii. 27 ;
h) *mj>* far be it, with ^ of the person and j before the fu-
ture of the finite verb ; e.g. Matt. xvi. 22. *j;-!aD ^^ .mxi
IjOl j^Jk lOCriZj far be it from thee, my lord, that this should hap-
pen to thee; Assem 1. 341, A. 30. IoiSLq ioaajj ^ ml*
far he it from us that ive should deny God ; 375, 13. Some-
times the participle follows ; e. g. Assem. I. 51, 12, 13.
r X p c or
t^'gin^ _^ *CQj^ l>j far be it from us that ive should deny ;
the verb follows in the fnture^with ^| preceding (^Qjj^ com-
pare 85. 4. c) ; e. g. I Sam. xxiv. 7 ; or in the infinitive
vrith ^ ; e. g. Gen. xliv. 7 ;
c) -i.odi hail! (= ^i-itDi^) with sufiix plural, and the
noun following with ^, to which the preceding suffix relatesr
e.g. Matt. V.3. .Ka0;O ]l.omV>\ .OOLi^o^ hail to the poor
in spirit; verses 4-11 ; with a word interposed; e.g. Assem.
I. 95, A. 3, 6, V. E. \zi^ ^QlSa j^S *2)V >-^Q^ hall also to
thee, Simon Peter ; frequently absolute without ^ ; B. 3. v.
E. ^^m 6Vwi^A.oa4 hail to thee Sichem ; 96, A. 17, 19.
The Hebrew }j^5 is, in the Peshito, expressed by ]-J ; e. g.
I Kinsrs xxii. 12.
APPENDIX.
Peculiarities in the Position of Words.
In the position of words, which, as in the Hebrew, is very
easy and natural, besides the peculiarities referred to in the
preceding chapters, the following deviations from the usual
ooi and ;Sd| are interposed
PECULIARITIES IN THE POSITION OF WORDS. 25l
between words, which, according to their grammatical connec-
tion, cannot be separated; e. g. Exod. vii. 7. ; *^ (r>-Vo
,^il 1 001 ^jLLIdl Moses was eighty years old ; Luke v. 3 ;
Exod. V. 16. OLD)} _!^ . ;V)| p*l\o and hricks^say they to u^,make
ye. The same is true ; h) of personal pronouns, having the
signification of fOOl ; e.g.John viii.33.iO0lja(> i>> oilJl we
are Abraham's seed ; verse 37 ; Ileb. vii. 28. f*< '<*^ (fiDOSOJ
( r^QO ^0^.010 |0L r^ 001 27 Z5 <Ae law which makes priests of
feeble men ; c) more rarely the same occurs with the noun ;
e. g. Matt. xvi. 1. y6S{ IguIjj U^ t-^ l^V OlS ^lU they
besought him that he would give them a sign from heaven ; d )
more frequently it occurs with particles ; e. g. Mark i. 45.
lAl a,V)>> ^Q^J i^ui'tlL.. he should go openly into the city.
Comi3are \6l and IcTl U" ( 86. 2. a).
EXERCISES
SYRIAC GRAMMAR,
AND
A CHRBSTOMATHY.
PREPARED WITH REFERENCE TO
THE TRANSLATION OF
UHLEMANN'S SYRIAC GRAMMAR
BY ENOCH HUTCHINSON.
NEW YORK
1875.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1855,
By E. HUTCHINSON,
in the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District
of New York.
PART IV,
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
The following Exercises are designed for beginners, who
need something simple, and at the same time, something
which will lead them into a thorough knowledge of the
grammar.
A small portion of Syriac, perhaps a page, should be se-
lected and carefully analyzed in reference to all the import-
ant phenomena of the language. Every peculiarity in res-
pect to each word should be critically examined. Perhaps
the best course would be to trace one peculiarity throughout
the page, searching the grammar and other helps ; then
trace another, and so on, until every peculiarity shall have
been examined. Thus the most important facts will be
strongly impressed upon the memory.
The great difficulty, especially with beginners, is, that
they often attempt to investigate too many subjects at once
and thus do not obtain clear ideas of any. There is fre-
quently a great inclination to press forward and translate
rapidly. Hence, many important subjects of investigation
are entirely neglected, Superficial scholarship, is the un-
avoidable result of such a course.
That nothing may escape observation, a few general di-
rections are presented to aid the learner in making his
analysis. In mentioning those points, which arc to be ex-
amined, the exact order in which they occur in the gram-
25i INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.
mar, has not been followed, but tbey have been so arranged,
it is hoped, as best to facilitate the progress of the student ;
and thej are intended to embrace the most important phen-
nomena necessary to be attended to by the learner.
Before commencing the examinatioif the pupil should be
directed to the Introduction of the grammar, that he may
become somewhat acquainted with the history and literature
of the Syriac Language. The grammar should be studied
rather as a book of reference than as one, which must be
committed to memory. The student, at first, should consult
it as an aid in analyzing. At the commencement of the an-
alysis, he will feel the need of assistance, and that assistance
he must find in the grammar. When he there discovers a
principle of the language and perceives its application in
parsing, he can easily retain it in his memory. By the
time that he has carefully studied the Exercises and Chres-
tomathy through, he will not only have a considerable
knowledge of the language ; but will have most of the gram-
mar committed to mem/)ry^ with but very little effort, and
no loss of time in learning rules and principles, whose ap-
plication he does not perceive, and which consequently are
apt to escape from the mind. After the pupil, in the course
of his analysis, shall have become somewhat familiar with
the grammar, he may recite it regularly through, and it will
not be an unmeaning nor an uninteresting exercise.
The general divisions, in the Exercises, are marked by
the character T, to distinguish them from similar divisions
in the grammar marked . Smaller divisions are inserted
under Kemarks and Explanations.
GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING.
I. Find the Guttural Letters on page first of the Chrestomathy.
Yid. Gram. 1. Rem. 3, 4.
II. " " Aspirates f or on what letters Kushoi and Rukok
are found. Yid. Gram. 1. Rem. 4 ; 5.
III. '* " Diacritical Points, for which the vowels are de-
signed to compensate, formerly used instead of
Towels and for other purposes. Yid. 2, 3, 4,
and Rem.
lY. " " Lmig and Short Vowels. Yid. 3. Rem. 3.
Y. " " Simple and Mixed syllables.
YI. " " Pure and Impure, Mutalk and Immutable vowels.
Yid. 45. A ; 48. A.
YII. " " Dipthongs, Quiescent and Otiant letters. Yid. 3.
Rem. 4 ; 13 ; 14. ^
YIH. " " Lin^ce Marhetono, Mehagyono and Sheva.
IX. " " Linea Occultans. Yid. 8.
X. Find on what syllables the Toti^ is to be found. Yid. 9.
XL Examine the Marks of Punctiiation. Yid. 10.
XII. Find Rihui. Yid. 6.
XIII. Read the Sjfriac.
XIY. Translate.
XY. Examine the Changes of Consonants assimilated trans-
posed dropped added and exchanged. Yid.
12.
256 GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR ANALYZING.
XYI. Find the Changes of Vowels thrown back exchanged
transposed dropped and added. Vid. 15.
XVII. Find the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformatives and Prcfor
matives, Yid. 16 ; 36 ; 46.
XYIII. Parse. In respect to Verhs ascertain whether they are
Simple or Compound Their Conjugation Voice Regu-
lar or Irregular Active, Passive or Neuter Number
Person Gender Mood Tense Conjugate and Injkit
them to the Case, Mood, Tense, etc., where they are
ioxmdi Rule. Yid. 19., etc.; 59., etc.
Nouns ' Signification Suffix or Prefix Adjective or
Substantive Derivation and Formation Declension
Person Number Gender State Case . A^id . 43;
70; 44; n; 45; 73; U; 46; 47;
48; 50; 77., etc.
Pronouns What kind Person Number Gender
Case Suffix Rule. Yid. 16 ; 17 ; 54., ttc.
Participles Derivation Active or Passive Conjugation
Rule.
Adverbs Primitive or Derivative What they qualify. Yid.
51 ; 82.
Numerals Cardinal or Ordinal Gender Decline To
what they belong.
Propositions Suffixes What they govern. Yid 52; 84.
Conjunctions ^What kind Suffix or Prefix What they
connect. Yid. 53. 1, 2 ; 85.
Interjections Primitive or Derivative. Yid. 53. 3; 86.
EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
EXERCISE FIRST,
ViD. Gram. 1. Rem. 3, 4.
H 1.
Find the Gutturals on the first page of the Chrestomathy.
1. Select all those letters which are ever used as
Gutturals; thus:
loioilloilloioilloTllailloioiloilcn
lloioi] loil^oioilioiTljaloioioiloiA*
loilj^lVoioiHcnoiT*^! oijs* Hlcjioiin
loiloij^oini oilaiioiloi]oi]aicn]cyil
Hoiioilloicjiloilloillilitcjilin 01
Ol 1 1 I t 1 Ol
EXPLANATIONS.
a) The above are all guttural letters, but not all used as such
in the text from which they are taken.
h) The guttural 1 resembles the Spiritus lenis of the Greeks,
258 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
being a scarcely audible breathing from the lungs. 1 has always
a feeble sound. The Galileans pronounced 1 and ja like i^ of
the Hebrews. An Arabian would pronounce 1 as a sort of vowel
sound like a. It is a kind of soft breathing (comp. Gesenius'
Hebrew Grammar, by Conant, 6). The Greeks express %**
as well as \ sometimes by Spiritus asper, and sometimes by
y. Usually -m is sounded like M with a rolling of the palate.
01 before a vowel is our h (Spiritus asper); but when uttered after
a vowel, it has nearly the sound of h in Korah, perhaps a little
softer, as in ah ! oh ! It is difficult to ascertain exactly the
sounds of these letters ; still it is important that the learner should
fix upon a definite pronunciation of each.
2. Find those letters which are here used as gutturals.
ciibj^oioioicTiaioioicnoiGiGioi oi*
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 3. word 8., Cl is a guttural, as it would in Hebrew
take a composite sheva, and it has no vowel of its own. (Some
would perhaps prefer to call 01 a regular movable consonant, and
consider 1 at the end of the word as otiant, and O as quiescing
in )
h) Verse 3. word 4., 1 is a guttural for the same reasons.
c) Verse 3. word 6., ** is a guttural for the same reasons.
d) Verse 4. word 6., 01 is a guttural being movable. It be-
longs to the second syllable of the word, being preceded by a
vowel ( 15. 4. d). The other cases may be similarly explained.
Rem. It should be remarked that there are some other guttural
letters on the first page of the chrestomathy, which should be con-
EXERCISE FIRST QUTTURAL LETTERS. 259
sidered merely as movable consonants. It is true that all gutturals
are sounded, and might be said to be movable consonants (com-
pare Gesen. Heb. Gram., transl. by Conant, 23.2). Still we prefer
to make a difference between gutturals and regular movable con-
sonants. The latter, though guttural letters on page first, are the
following :
3. Find those guttural letters which are regular
movable consonants :
loilloioiloioillcnoiloioijajaloi
oim^oiaj*! Gi|aic7ijsAailcFi^aiGiailoi
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 2., 1 is a regular movable consonant, and
is sounded nearly like the vowel , and does not quiesce
in its vowel. In dialects kindred to the Hebrew, ] melts in-
to the vowel far more readily than the sound of the Hebrew
;5^ melts into its vowel. Still 1 retains its power as a movable
consonant. It is very common in Syriac for a guttural let-
ter to take a long vowel, where in Hebrew, it would have a
composite Sheva. This seldom occurs in Hebrew (vid.Ges-
enius' Heb. Gram, by Conant. 23. 2. Rem. 2).
b) Y. 1. w. 5., 01 is movable, as it does not quiesce and
is not otiant.
c) Y. 1. w. 8., (not a guttural) is movable, as the pre-
ceding letter is not sounded, and the following one is
quiescent.
d) Y. 1. w.lO., 1 should be considered as movable though
its sound so melts into the vowel, we can scarcely perceive
that it has the power of a consonant.
260 EXERCISES m SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
e) y. 1. w. 11., ] is not movable, as it quiesces, though
7
seldom, in ( 13. 1. Rem).
/) Y. 1. w. 11., Ol is movable for the same reasons as
others above. preceding it, belongs to the previous sylla-
ble (comp. t 5. 1. f ; 15. 4. d).
g) y. 3. w. 2., Ol is movable as it is a suffix, and = ^ of
the Hebrew ( 13. Rem.).
h) y. 9. w. 9., 1 is movable as it has a vowel of its own,
though it so flows into the sound of the vowel that it is
scarcely perceptible (T 1. 1. b).
Rem. It should be remarked that two of the guttural letters ]
and 01 are sometimes used as quiescents and sometimes as otiant
letters ( 12. A. B. and Rem.; 13; 14).
EXERCISE SECOND.
12.
Find the Aspirates or in what letters Kuslioi (*jL*ao a hard-
ening^ and Rvkok (*^0>) a softening are found.
1. Those which are ever aspirated ( 1. Rera. 3).
joAjsruoo jQi J A>2j2>5>o:d,.jA
2. Find those, which are aspirated on page first
(5. and Eem. by Tr.).
EXERCISE SECOND ASPIRATES. 261
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yersel. wordl., A is aspirated as it closes the syllable
(5. 2. Kem. c. a).
b) Y.l. W.2., A is aspirated as it follows an open or sim-
ple syllable ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c, and 15. 4. d).
c) Y.l. W.4., A is aspirated, because a letter, which would
in Hebrew, take a vocal Sheva, precedes it ( 5. 2. Rem.
c.b).
d) Y. 2. w. 4., s^ is aspirated as the preceding word ends
with 1 (5. 2. Rem.a).
e) Y.3. W.2., r is aspirated as it follows an open syllable
( 5. 2. Rem. c. c).
f) Y.3. W.4., o is aspirated because it follows a letter
which would in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva, ( 5. 2. Rem.
c.b).
g) Y.3. W.4., r is aspirated as it is preceded by a letter
which would in fiebrew take a composite Sheva and would
of course be vocal (5. 2. Rem. c. b).
h) Y.3. W.5., Si is aspirated as it follows an open syllable
( 5. 2. Rem. c. c).
i) Y.4. W.7., ? is aspirated as the preceding word ends
in 1 (5. 2. Rem. a).
k) Y.4. W.7., Ci is aspirated as it closes a syllable (5. 2.
Rem. c. a).
Z) Y.7. W.4., > is aspirated as it closes a syllable ( 5. 2.
Rem. c. a).
m ) Y.lO. w. 4., r is aspirated as it follows an open sylla-
ble ( 5. 2. Rem. c. c).
3. Find those which are not aspirated'
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., i is not aspirated as it begins a
word ( 5. 2. Rem. a).
18
262 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR
h) y.4. W.I., d is not aspirated tliougliitis preceded by]
(J5. 2. Rem.a), because it begins a verse.
c) Y.Q W.3., A is not aspirated as it is preceded by a let-
ter, which, in Hebrew, would not take a vocal Sheva, and
which has no vowel ( 5.2. Note by Tr.).
d) For the pronunciation of these aspirates see the Alph-
abet^ and 1. Eem. 8, 4.
Rem. Q when aspirated is sounded Hke v^ and when not aspira-
ted hke h ; f like th in that^ when aspirated, but otherwise like d
) when aspirated is sounded like ph or /, and otherwise like p
A when aspirated like th in thin^ in other situations like t
.. is sounded like g hard whether it be aspirated or not *
O when aspirated is sounded like hh or k with a rolling of the
palate ; in other situations like k. In general the aspirates are
pronounced like the corresponding letters in Hebrew (vid. referenc-
es above and Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar by Conant, 6. 2. 3. and
Note by Tr.).
EXEKOISE THIKD.
1 3.
( 2 ; 3 ; 4 anc? Rem).
Find tlie diacritical points for which tbe vowels
are designed to compensate, formerly used instead of
vowels and for other purposes :
VA^ 0010 VAik 001 li^ *j]L looi "Zooi looij looi ooio
looi 12] J^ 001 looi 1 2l> looi J\i looi*
* The aspiration of .. would be indicated by the rolling of the
palate.
EXERCISE THIRD DIACRITICAL POINTS. 263
EXPLANATIONS.
Rem. 1. Diacritical points sometimes mark particular tenses and
persons of verbs ( 4. Rem.).
Rem. 2. The vowel system of the Syrians began to be introduced
in the time of Mohammed. Then and even after the system was
completed by introducing characters from the Greek vowels, the
ancient diacritical points were used to some extent by many writers.
They are now seen in the more ancient writings.
Rem. 3. The diacritical points here presented and others, appear
in ancient Syriac writings, perhaps from the fact that they have
been copied from more ancient editions, and in some cases doubt-
less, directly from the oldest editions of the Peshito. The several
editions have been copied with so much care, that even after the
vowel system came into use, the diacritical points, which had been
used long before, were copied as well as the more recent vowels.
Thus appear sometimes two characters to represent one vowel sound.
As later editions have appeared, however, those points have gradu-
ally been omitted and vowels substituted, though, some remnants of
the old system are still left (2; 3; 4).
a) Verse 1. word 4., 1AL The diacritical point under \
according to the principles laid down byLadov. deDieu,indi-
cates the vowel We have then here the vowel and the
ancient diacritical point for which the vowel compensates
(4.Eem.).
6) y.l. w. 5., 0010* The point under 01, according to
Amira, indicates (4.Eem.).
c) Y.3. w. 2., *^]o* The point under wi indicates, ac-
cording to Ludov. de Dieu, the vowel (g4. Rem.).
d) Y.3. w. 3., looi* Diacritical points are often placed
under and over the radical letters of verbs, sometimes to dis-
tinguish particular persons and sometimes to indicate vowels
(vid. T 3. Rem. 1). In the imperative and infinitive it may-
be wholly omitted or inserted underneath (vid. 4:.Rem.; al-
so compare Hoffmann's Syriac Gram. 14).
264 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
EXEKCISE FOUETH.
1 4
Find the Long and Short vovjels ( 3. Bern, 3).
I. Find the Long ones :
ftpppipxx p p p I -h p -n p p p OP
'r,i>p-^'r,pi\x*,^ppp^^p^^Of>
^.CP'npoPTi'n PPt>*^P0pt\0 9^
pii9sPP-*>r. fiP*,P^pt<p ^*PI^
*k 9 9 P 'f' P P P P P P P * f 9 9 P
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word I., JL JL are both long as they are fol-
lowed by u quiescent ( 3. Kem. 3. b).
b) y.l. W.5., . is long because o quiesces in it.
c) y. 1. w. 11., JL is long as it has a quiescent (13. 1.
Rem.).
The other instances need no explanation.
2. Find the Short voxels :
T77V77 ^^777777777 7
77'7^7777 777#.7
EXERCISE FIFTH SIMPLE SYLLABLES. 265
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 2., _L is sLort as it is a regular short
vowel.
b) Y.l. w. 10., ^ is short as Olaph is movable, not
quiescing.
c) V. 3. w. 1., Jl is short as it has not O quiescing in it
(3. Rem.3).
7
Rem. In v.l. w.2., and several other short vowels on page
first, form dipthongs with O and ^* These quiescent letters do not
fully coalesce with their respective vowels ; but melt into them to
a greater extent than they would do in Hebrew, under similar cir-
cumstances. They can scarcely, therefore, be considered as mov-
able consonants, as they would be in Hebrew. Still the vowels in
these cases are heterogeneous and the quiescents do not sufficiently
coalesce, in our estimation, to make the vowels long (vid. Gesen.
Heb. Gram, by Conant, 8. 4 ; Uhlemann 1. Rem.4).
EXERCISE FIFTH.
1 5.
Find the Simple and Mixed Syllables (15. 3 and 4).
I. Find the Simple Syllables :
^^ J!{oL Iboi i TA^ ooio i VaI *aT oA Iboi 1 1 loi
lo H^ Ibi ^f oL IcSoi boi So lAl 6\ ]j J(o\ looi S\Ci }
1 loi jb locji ao il Oj I iJa fr** So |o >^ f-u. |ooi a*oU
J\ .iA Qj |joi .ja 1 I* ocno qj (jcji ja> om p ajO qa
]i ]]' looi 1. U r. 'A. n I6i a. ^ oi ]i XIL ml
266 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
OJOI \L QJ |301 wiOl (a P 0C31 lOOl QJ |j01 1 (J Q-J jjOl
EXPLANATIONS.
Rem, A simple syllable terminates in a vowel sound, and that
vowel sometimes has a \owel letter quiescing in it. A mixed syll-
able terminates in one or more movable consonants. Every vowel
stands in a simple syllable when the following consonant takes a
vowel.
X
a) Yerse 1. word 1., ^\Ci is a simple syllable as it ends in a
vowel sound, althongli it has a quiescent ; * has a vowel of
its own and is of course sounded with the following syllable
(vid. 1 5. 1. Eem., and 15. 4. d).
b) Y.l. W.2., w] is simple for the same reason as last,
the syllable ending with ^ and not with A (vid. 15. 4.d).
c) Y.l. W.2., oA is a dipthong and should be considered,
we think, as a simple syllable because O coalesces in the
vowel to such an extent that the syllable ends in a vowel
sound, though the coalescence is not so perfect as in a regu-
lar case of quiescence. Some may regard O as a movable
consonant as it would be in Hebrew, under similar circum-
stances, but we incline to the former opinion (vid. ^4. 2.
Rem. ; Ges^.n. Heb.Gram. by Conant, 8.4).
d) Y.l. W.4., So is simple (vid. reference above).
e) Y.l.w. 4., ]jt^ is simple, 1 quiescing in
/) Y.l. W.5., OOIO is simple, the last o quiescmg.
g) Y.l. w.lO., 1 is simple as ^ which follows Olaph has
a vowel of its own.
h) Y.l. w.ll., (o is simple, Olaph quiescing in , though
it seldom quiesces in that vowel (vid 13.1 Rem. ; compare
1 1. 8. e).
i) Y. 3. W.2., Vd is simple, | quiescing in and . being
otiant.
EXERCISE FIFTH MIXED SYLLABLES. 267
A;) Y.3. W.5., I is simple as is a long vowel and 2) be-
longs to the next syllable (15.4. d).
V) Y.4. w.S., ^A is a dipthong and ends in a vowel sound
as wi melts into the vowel to such an extent that it can hard-
ly be considered as a movable consonant as it would be in
Hebrew. We choose then to place the syllable among
siraple ones ; -i.l in verse 4. word 7., and -ol in verse 7.
word 8, are similar instances (vid.T4.2.Rem. ; To.l.c).
m) y.4. W.6., QJ is simple as O quiesces in making it
a long vowel, and 01 belongs to the next syllable (l5.4.d).
n) y.7. W.3., q!^ is simple as 01 belongs to the penult
syllable and follows a long vowel (15.4. d. ; compare ^ 1.
2. d).
2. Find the Mixed Syllables :
Ajla ZqL A^i ZqL ^ 01% 'Zooi iOy oij csL^Ci
.001 oj iLd joi jl 01 C) \^ )> ^ ois* ^ m-jj
JOI \>.i lo *-ja ^SD Oly Q-J> JOI ^\l 'H-yt ^y 1-Si3?
501 J^ril .A-l Olj r-a Oi_l
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., A..a is mixed as it ends with a con-
sonant sound (vid. T 5.1. Rem.).
h) y.l. w. 9., Zal is mixed, ending in a consonant sound
(vid. 1 5. l.Rem.).
c) Y.3. W.2., Olr is mixed as 01 = ^ in Hebrew and is of
course movable ( l3. Rem.).
d) y.7. W.7., ^? is mixed as is short when o does
not quiesce in it, and* the following consonant has no vowel
(vid. I5.4,and3.Rem.3).
268 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
EXEKCISE SIXTH.
1 6.
Find the Pure^ Impure^ Mutable and Immutable voiveh
(45.^; 48. A).
1. Find tlie Pure vowels :
0fitkitr'nyv7r7P'r>77fytt7e
EXPLANATIONS.
Rem. a pure vowel, is one with which no consonant colesces.
An impure vowel is one with which a consonant coalesces.
7 7. ^
a) Verse 1. word 2., is pure* as the syllable oA is a
dipthong (vid. 3. Kem. 4 ; also Palfrey's Gram. 2), and O
does not fully quiesce in !_, though it so far coalesces that
it can hardly be considered as a movable consonant. Still
as the vowel is a heterogeneous one and O does not fully
coalesce in it, we scarcely feel authorized to place the vowel
among the impure ones, though some may prefer to do so,
(vid. T" 4. 2. Eem. ; T 5. 1. c. and 1 ; Gesenius' Heb. Gram-
mar by Conant, 8.4 ; compare 15. 4. d; also T 6.2. Rem.,
and T' 6.1. Rem. V
b) Y.l. W.9., is pure as o does not quiesce in it, being
a movable consonant and ^ preceding being pronounced
with a vocal sheva.
* It is also mutable ( ^ 6. 4; b ).
EXERCISE SIXTH IMPURE VOWELS. 269
c) Y.l. w. 10., is pure as Olapli does not quiesce in
that vowel. Olapb. is here a movable consonant according
to the analogy of the Hebrew (vid.l. Rem.4.;also Gesenius*
Heb. Gram, by Conant, 23.2).
d) Y,3. W.5., (the first one) is pure f as 1 being a
movable consonant does not quiesce in _L (vid. last referen-
ces).
e) Y.3. W.7., is pure as O is movable, cri being sound-
ed as if it had Sheva, and forming a part of the syllable.
/) y.3. W.9., is pure and immutable as 01 does not
quiesce in it, being a guttural (comp. Tf I. 2. a).
g) Y.4. W.5., is pure as wiA is a dipthong (vid. a
above).
h) Y.7. W.3., is pure as Ol is a guttural.
i) Y.7. W.9., is pure as Ol is = ^ in Hebrew and is of
course a movable consonant (vid. 13.Eem. JL is also mu-
table according to the general rule (T6. 2. Eem.).
2. Find the Impure vowels :
9vPP^px!>i>P p-nppOPP^O
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., and are both impure vowels
as they have j> quiescing in them.
f j_ is also immutable ( ^ 6. 4 ).
270 EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
/) V.l. W.3., is impure as 1 quiesces in it (compare T
6. 1. e).
V
c) V.l. w.ll., is impure asOlaph quiesces init,thougli
it does not often quiesce in that vowel ( 13. 1 and Rem.).
The other cases are similarly explained.
Rem. As a general thing, those vowels, which are pure are mut-
able and those which are impure are immutable ; but there are as
in Hebrew many exceptions (vid.^ 6. 1. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i).
3. Find the Mutable vowels (compare 1" 6. 2
Rem.) :
' ^i _ _ .^_ _ ^
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 10., is mutable (also pure, according
to the general rule (vid. ^ 6. 1. c ) as it is in a simple sylla-
ble (compare T 6. 4. d).
b) Y.S. W.2., is mutable as it has no quiescent and is
long.
c) V.4. \v.2., is mutable as it is in a simple sylla-
ble.
4. Find the Im7nutaUe vowels :
I,
Jl,
I
o
*
^
JL
I
p
p
1_
_
p
p
X
P .
r,
I
p
X
p
p
P
^
X
P
p
p
f>
p
P 7
9
-
I
^
^
r
p
p
4^
>
P
X
p
7
7
X P
p
7
P
p
X
P
p
P
p
p
^
P
7 7
^
"
9
I
9
v
p
p
r
7
v
I
p
j;_
_-_
_L-1
EXERCISE SEVENTH DIPTHONGS. 271
PPP P0900I0C0P
EXPL A.NATIONS.
Rem. Those vowels are immutable,as in Hebrew ; in which either
a vowel letter quiesces; or from which a vowel letter has fallen away;
short vowels in mixed syllables which would inHebrew takeDaghesh
forte; and vowels immutable by nature.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., are both immutable as well as
impure, having quiescents.
b) y.l. W.2., is in a simple syllable, is pure, and cannot
properly be considered as immutable though O coalesces
with it to some extent (vid. T"4.2.Ilem. ; T5.1.c; TfG.l.a).
t
c) Y.I.W.4., over So is immutable by position as
li\i^ is derived from Wd a ^1L verb, and the i^ is in
reality doubled and the first would, if expressed, take Linea
occultans. This is similar to Daghesh forte in Hebrew, and
makes, as in that language, the preceding vowel impure and
immutable (compare 48.B.Feminines),
d) Y.l. w.lO., is short but in a simple syllable ( To.
1 . g) and consequently not immutable.
e) Y.l. w.lO., (the first one) is immutable by nature
(48. A. Masculines) ; it is sometimes, however, like all the
other vowels, mutable (vid.g 15.1.b ; 45.2.b) as in Hebrew
(vid. Stuarts' Heb. Gram. 127).
/) Y.l. w.ll, is immutable as 1 quiesces in it ( T 6.
2. c).
g) Y.o. W.I., is immutable as it is in a short mixed
syllable.
272 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
EXEKCISE SEVENTH.
1 7.
Find the Dipthongs, Quiescents and Otiant Letters {^S.BemA ;
13; 14).
I. Find tlie Dipthongs ( 3. Kern. 4 ; Palfrey's
Gram. 2) :
7 7 7 7 " 7 7 7 7
O... 0-1- 0.^1^ O.. 0.1- ji... .k.. ji o.^
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 1. word 2., o is a dipthong as o is in the same
syllable with JL without fully quiescing in it, though
O so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be consider-
ed as ending in a vowel sound (vid. T"4.2.Kem.; ^"5. 1. c and
1 ; Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant, 8. 4).
6) V'3. W.4., o is a dipthong for the same reason as
last.
c) y.4. W.5., A is a dipthong as a unites with _ but
does not fully quiesce in it (vid. references above).
Rem. It will be observed that dipthongs in Syriac as well as in
Hebrew, are quiescent letters with heterogeneous vowels ; but in
Hebrew the quiescent letters are movable while the reverse is true in
Syriac.
2. Find the Quiescents :
- . ^ iioi ^1 ni -1 ou - 1- - u
innn-oQiioaia)ann] a
EXERCISE SEVENTH OTIANTS. 273
uiu
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 1. word 1., * is a quiescent as it unites with the
sound of the preceding vowel (13.3).
5) Y.l. W.2., o is a regular quiescent letter; bat does not
here fully quiesce, though it forms a dipthong and
so melts into the vowel that the syllable may be considered
as ending with a vowel sound (vid. TT.l.a).
c) Y.l. W.3., o is not quiescent as it is a movable conson-
ant, 01 not being sounded. The following | however qui-
esces in the preceding vowel.
d) Y-1. W.5., o (the first one) is movable as it would
in Hebrew take a vocal Sheva ; the second o quiesces
in_L
e) Y.l. W.9., Q does not quiesce in as it is movable
(vid. 16.1. b).
/) Y.l. w.ll., 1 quiesces in though it is rather un-
usual (13. l.Eem.).
g) Y.3. W.2., ( quiesces m > *
3. Find the Otiant Letters
a) Yerse 1. word 2., *^ is otiant as it is a part of the suf-
fix and is not followed by ooi (vid. 14. 2. b).
h) Y.3, W.2., - is otiant because it follows a quiescent.
5^74 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
EXEECISE EIGHTH.
1 8.
FindLinece Marhetono Q^(J\'^)^ Mehagyono (]la...OlLD), and
JSheva, where iJiere is no accumulation of consonants.
1. Find instances of MarTietono and Mehagyono :
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 5. word 7., > ? Here is an accumulation of con-
sonants, and to indicate that they could not all be sounded con-
veniently, Marhetdno (or a horizontal line) would regularly
be placed over > In this case the J would in Hebrew take
silent Sheva. J must of course be pronounced with a vocal
Sheva (vid.7).
Rem. 1. There seems to be no instance of Mehagyono on the
first page. A.T.IIoffmann in his SyriacGrammar gives (AXisa) as an
instance. The ^ is to be sounded as though a short e followed it
(vid. 1).
Rem. 2. It appears that Marhetono indicates silent Sheva when
t here is an accumulation of vowelless consonants,but under no other
circumstances, though silent Sheva, in reality, frequently occurs as
in Hebrew. So Mehagyono represents vocal Sheva only when there
is a similar accumulation of vowelless consonants,though when there
is no accumulation vocal Sheva often occurs.
2. Find instances of Simple vocal Sheva :
EXERCISE EIGHTH VOCAL SHEVA. 275
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 1., O would, in Hebrew, take a vocal
Sheva, and as it cannot well be pronounced without the aid
of a vowel or half vowel we must use the Sheva. This can-
not be considered as an instance of Mehagydno, for there is
no accumulation of consonants which are destitute of vowels
(vid. 7). According to Lud. de Dieu and Norberg, the
Syrians did use the Sheva and pronounced consonants ac-
cordingly, as in Hebrew (vid. 5.1).
h) Y. 1. W.4., ^ should be pronounced with a vocal She-
va like d under a (vid. references above).
Rem. We find no characters to indicate Sheva and seldom any
to indicate Marhetono and Mehagyoiio, still we are to pronounce
the consonants where those characters would regularly occur, as we
should if they had actually appeared.
c) Y.3. W.5., a is pronouncod with a Sheva. The pre-
ceding syllable being simple^ 2) belongs to the final syll-
able.
d) V.3. W.9., oi makes a part of the first syllable of the
word and should not be pronounced with vocal Sheva.
e) Y,Q. W.3., is pronounced with a vocal Sheva as it
constitutes a part of the penultimate syllable, being preceded
by a long vowel ( 15.4).
/) Y.9. W.9., ^ should be pronounced with a vocal Sheva
(vid. last reference).
3. Find tlie silent Shevas, where there is no ac
cumulation of consonants destitute of vowels :
A2A2^oiZi^oioi,i:ii5?oi;>^oi^m?
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., A would regularly in Hebrew take a
276 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAM^IAR.
silent Sheva (vid. Conants' Gesen. Ileb.Gram. 10 ; also ^S.
2. a. b and Eem.).
h) y.l. W.2., O would in Hebrew take a silent Sbeva, be-
ing a movable consonant at the end of a syllable ; but in
Syriac it so melts into its vowel, that the syllable may be con-,
fiidered as terminating in a vowel sound, and O does not
take silent Sheva (vid. T" 4. 2. Eem. ; comp. references
above).
c) Y.3. W.I., Stakes silent Sheva as it closes a sylla-
ble.
(T) V.3. W.2., Ol is a movable consonant at the end of a
syllable being equivalent to jtj in Hebrew and takes silent
Sheva.
e) Y.3. W.9., CJl is at the end of a mixed syllable with a
short vowel, and takes silent Sheva though a guttural (vid.
T"8.4:.d; I'G.l.f ; comp. Gesen. Heb. Gram, by Conant, 22.
3).
/) V.4. W.5., u forms with the vowel a dipthong. It
would in Hebrew be pronounced as a movable consonant
and take a silent Sheva ; but in Syriac it so melts into its
vowel that it can hardly be considered as a movable con-
sonant and does not tnke a silent Sheva (vid. ^4. 2. Eem.;
18.3.b).
g) Y.9.W.5., - takes a silent Sheva as it is preceded by a
short vowel and ends the antepenultimate syllable.
4. Find instances of Composite Sheva :
01aOIO1G1G1O101G1O1G1G1O101G1*
a) Yerse 3. word.3., Ol would in Hebrew take a compo-
site Sheva and is pronounced as though it did here (vid.
Gesen. Heb. Grammar by Conant, 22. 3 ; T1.2.a).
h) Yerse 3. w.6., ** takes composite sheva for similar rea-
sons as in the case above.
EXERCISE NINTH LINEA OCCULTANS 277
r) y.3.w.9., 01 does not take composite Sheva but silent
Sheva simple as in Hebrew. The Gutturals take simple
Sheva where other consonants would take silent Sheva
(Gesen.Heb.Gram. by Conant,22.3).
(/)Y.4. W.6., 01 takes composite Sheva (vid. a above).
EXEKCISE NINTH.
t 9.
Find instances of Linea Occultans (8) :
01010101010I0101010101*
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 2., 01 is an instance of Linea occultans,
indicating that the Ol is not sounded (vid. 8; 12.1. A. and
B., also Eem.).
h) Y.l. W.3., 01 is another instance of Linea occultans.
The horizontal line under 01 shows that the letter is not to
be pronounced. In this case o begins the syllable. The
othe cases are similarly explained.
19
278 EXERgiSES in syeiac grammar.
EXERCISE TENTH.
t 10.
Find on wliat Syllables the Tone rests ( 9) :
ZuA w*l" loCTi Ld 0010 So wV looi Zol '1 '1 Jf ]6ai
ooi Ld oi v^l fooi Zua Zq^ ik \^ oi^ (ooi i 1 1^^.
lOOl SDr Cl> Ol-TD >s jOOl >* .OOl QJ 1 0010 QJ QA JOl
^
QA U Ol-D (OOl J >J ^ ^ OISD* ^1 Ol 1 0> JOl \^
QJ *J. ^LO Olp U 001 loOl QJ I JOl ^ Q-J w1 lOOl
^.. Q-j ; JOl ^A-1 Ij 1^ iQ jooi :i.o oiy (001 10 U
oui
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., Aim istlie final syllable and takes
the tone because it ends with a movable consonant ( 9.1
and 2).
b) Y.l. W.2., w( takes the tone, as o in the final syllable
oA is not movable (vid. ^4. 2. Eem.; ^8. 3. b ; 9.1 and 2).
01 and t^ are not sounded.
c) Y.l. W.4., li> is the penultimate syllable and has the
tone according to the general rule (9.1).
'
d) Y.8. W.2., Olc is the final syllable and takes the tone
because oi is movable.
EXERCISE ELEVENTH MARKS OF PUNCTUATION. 279
e) Y.3. W.5., I is the penultimate and takes the tone.
2) belongs to the last syllable (15. 4. d).
/) Y.4. AV.5., tOOi takes the tone because it ends with a
movable consonant.
g) Y.o. W.3., Qm is inserted above as receiving the tone
according to the general rule, though it is somewhat doubt-
ful whether, in such cases the tone was on the penultimate or
ultimate syllable (9. 1. Rem.). Euphony would seem to
favor the former opinion; there is another instance of the
same kind in v.7. w.3.
EXERCISE ELEVENTH.
1 11.
Find the Marks of Punctuation (10) :
* A. * *
*>* *.
EXPLANATION'S.
a) Yerse 1. word 4., is a mark of punctuation more gen-
erally used to denote the end of a period, but sometimes
used in the middle to denote a slight pause similar perhaps
to our comma. It is used so here (l0.d).
b) Y.l. W.15., denotes the full close of the period.
c) Y.5. W.4., '. indicates the end of the protasis (^lO.a).
d) Y.5. W.7., is supposed to indicate the longest pause
of any mark of punctuation. It is sometimes written thus ::
(PO.c).
c) Y.B. W.5., / indicates the end of the apodosis(vid.10.c).
280 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
EXEKCISE TWELFTH.
t 12.
Find instances of Hihui (6) :
EXPLANATIONS.
rt) Yerse 3. word 4., " over the word is an instance of
Ribui indicating that the preposition has a plural suffix (
6.]. Rem.; 16.0).
h) V.4. W.2., here Ribui indicates that the noun over
which it is placed is in the plural number though it is ren-
dered as if it were in the singular. This word occurs only
in the plural form (44.Rem.6). The same is true in respect
to V.4. W.4.
c) Y.4.W.7., Ribui indicates simply the plural form of tho
noun as above.
EXERCISE THIRTEENTH.
1 13.
Head the Syriac :
Yerse 1.. B^rishith aithau vo meletho v^iu m^ltho
aithau vo l^voth aloho. valoho aithau vo hu melHho.
EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR. 281
V. 2., hono aithau vo vVishith lvoth aloho.
V. 3., kul bidheh lilivo vVel'odhau opMo hhMho hh^voth
niedh^m dahlivo.
V. 4., beh. hhaye lili*vo. v^hhaye aithayhuu nuh*'ro
dhavnaynoslio.
" / / / / / /
V. 5., vliu nuh^ro v^hhesliuko manhar*. v^hheshuko lo
adhAeli^
V. 6., lihvo varnoslio dheshtadhar men alolio v sliin6h
yuhhanon.
V. 7., liono etho l^'soh^dliutlio dlinashedh al nuh'ro.
d^kulnosh n^aymen b'idheh.
V. 8 , lo bu b^vo nub^ro. elo db^nasbedb al nub**ro.
/ / / / / /
V. 9.5aitbau VO ger nubro dhasbroro-.db^manbar l^ulnosh
/ - . ..
detbo polmo.
V. 10.,bolmo bvo. volmo vidbebbvo.volmo lo yadheli.
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 1., ^'t^ is tbe first syllable, O not mak-
ing a syllable of itself. Tbe answers to tbe Sbeva in He-
brew, and is pronounced like a very sbort e.
Z*) Y. 1. w. 2., J is perbaps best pronounced like ai',
tbougb tbe a sound is scarcely perceivable. ^ In oA, o bav-
ing a beterogeneous vowel, does not fully quiesce, still it so
melts into tbe vowel tbat it can bardly be considered as a
282 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRA^TMAR.
movable consonant (vid If4:.2.Eem.). ,01 is not sonniod as
it takes Linea occultans (8) and the w is otiant ( 14. 2).
c) V.l. W.3 , loqi* 01 is not sounded on account of Linea
occultans, aiid o becomes vocal by beginning a syllable.
d) Y.l. w.lO., I is pronounced a. Olapb so unites with
the a sound that it is scarcely "perceivable in pronun-
ciation, though being at the beginning of a syllable it is a
regular movable consonant. It is at the same time a gut-
tural letter and must have the sound of the Spiritus lenis of
the Greeks (vid. T1.2.Ilem.).
_ 7
e) V.l. w.ll., |0 _L is pronounced broad and hng as it
has a quiescent (glS.l.Kem.).
/) Y.3. W.I., ^^ is pronounced thus : kul, u taking the
broad and short sound. The _!. is short here as it has no
quiescent (vid. 3. Rem. 3).
g) V.3.W.2., Oi,..a]o bidheh. 1 quiesces in _L, and ^ is
otiant. Ol is a movable consonant though a guttural letter.
h) V.3.VV.4., vVel^othau. ^ must be sounded with a
vocal Sheva (vid. T^8.2). r being preceded by a vowel is as-
pirated. - as well as Ol {s otiant.
.. r> 7 -
i) y.3. W.9., (ooij dahhvo. ^ is movable and pronoun-
ced with the first syllable. _L has a broad and short
sound.
y ) Y.4. W.5., wiA thay . is short and broad as it has
no quiesceri't though *a so melts into the vowel that it
can hardly be considered as a movable consonant (vid. T 4.
2. Rem.).
'
h) V.6.W.I., fooi hh70. 01 is pronounced with Sheva.
is vocal and l quiescep in J_>
EXERCISE FOURTEENTH TRANSLATION. 283
EXEECISE FOURTEENTn.
1 14
Trarislate Literally :
Verse 1. In (the) beginning was (the) Word and
he (or- it the) Word was with God and God was he
or it (the) Word.
2. This was in (the) beginning with God.
3. Every (thing) by (the) hand of him was ; and
without him also not anything was which was.
4. In him life (lit. lives) was, and life was (lit.
lives were) (the) light of (the) sons of man.
5. And he (or it) light, into (the) darkness, shin-
eth (lit. causing or permitting to shine 23.2.(2.^),
and (the) darkness did not comprehend it.
6. (There) was a son of man, who was sent from
God, whose name (lit. the name of him) (was) John.
7. This (man) came for a witness, who shall
(should) bear witness concerning (the) light, that eve-
ry man might believe through (the) hand of him.
8. He was not (lit. not he was) (the) light ; but
(came for a witness) who might bear witness concern-
ing (the) light.
284 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
9. For (tliat light) was (the) light of truth, which
shine th upon every man, who cometh into (the)
world.
10. (He) was in (the) world (lit. in the world was)
and (the) world was by his hand and (the) world did
not know him.
EXPLANATIONS:
.IX
a) Yerse 1. word 1., Llm^^S^* In translating this word,
the is supplied. There is no distinct character in Syriac for
the definite article. It was originally expressed by the
noun in the emphatic state ; but this is by no means uni-
versal in laterSyriac. There are many cases, as in Hebrew,
in which the definite and indefinite articles have no word
nor character to represent them, and they must be supplied
in translating (45.1).
b) Y-^- W.2 and3., looi ^(Jiotu] was. The substan-
tive verb (OOl io 6e,in connection with the other substantive
verb Lk] to he, (third person masculine wiOloAjil) forms the
imperfect tense, was (38.1,2).
c) Y.l. W.5., oqio* 001 is a pronoun of the masculine
gender. It is pleonastic and need not be rendered (55). As
the neuter gender in Syriac is included in the masculine
and feminine OOl might be considered either as neuter or
masculine and may mean he or it (43).
d) Y.3. W.3., fOOi is rendered i^"a5, and is in the imperfect
without aOioA-il (vid. 65.B.a).
e) Y.3. W.7., i.001 is rendered was, same as last. The
same is true in respect to |oai> (v. 3. w.9).
/) Y.3. W.6., TrM and y>jLk) (v.3. w.8) should be taken
tof^etlier. The first means amj and the second someiUing or
EXERCISE FIFTEENTH CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 285
thing. Taken together they should be rendered any Itiing.
g) Y.4. W.2., (.JuAA is rendered life. The noun always
takes the plural form though it usually takes a singular
meaning and has sometimes a singular and sometimes a plu-
ral verb. Here it takes a verb singular and in v.4. w.i, a
verb plural.
w 7
h) Y.5. W.4., SouLo is a participle ; but it is used instead
of the present tense of the verb (64.2. A. andRem. ; also T
18.5).
i) Y.Q. W.3., >?Alj means (lit.) is sent; but with loOT it
forms the imperfect tense.
EXERCISE FIFTEENTH.
TF 15.
Find the Changes of Consonants Assimilated Transposed
Dropped Added Exchanged (12).
1. Find those which are changed by aesimUor
lion :
All of those l^.tters which take Linea occultans, are in re-
ality assimilated (vid. 12. and ^9).
2. Find those whicli are changed by transposi-
tion :
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 6. ^vord 3., JjA^lj is in the Ethpa. conjugation
286 EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
and and A are transposed, the appropriate plaoe for A be
ing before* (12.2).
3. Find those Consonants wticli have been
dropped :
inniinnnv*
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 4., lAj^ is from ]]!sD, const. A^k3 1 is
dropped.
6) V.3. W.2., aip-.i]r:) 1 final is dropped to give place for
the suffix.
c) V.8. W.7., Zooi^ 1 is dropped to form the feminine
(87 Table).
7 7 .
d) YA. W.7., )a1 aiiOi* 1 is dropped before the second J.
e) V.o. W.4., jOULd* ] is dropped after the preforma-
tive ^*
f) Y.7. W.7., and v.9. w. 7., ^Ai!ij 1 is dropped be-
fore l
g) y.7. W.8., ^-ScuoiJ. 1 is dropped before So*
4. Find consonants wliicli are added :
a 1 ^a\o lA o 1A 1 woio 1 o 1 ] ^^oio lA 1 ^oio
Q 1 iD 1 Ol O ^C310 IZjOlloll ^OOU 1 ? 1 O
IidISdoII oiV?1 A"! cnLl jjI j woij o
1 en 1 J J 1 1 .-oio IjljkjljllciloliD
1 01 1 CFl
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., L^^^d* a is added as a prefix.
EXERCISE FIFTEENTH CHANGES OF CONSONANTS 287
h) Y.l. W.2., wfcOioLf. 1 is prosthetic (38.1). ^aio is a
suffix.
c) Y.l. W.4., IA^Ld* a is added from the construct state
and 1 is added because the word is in the emphatic state.
d) Y.l. w.IO., laCL 1 is added at the end to form the
emphatic state (^18.^).
e) Y.2. W.I., V>cn* Perhaps 1 should be considered as ad-
ded here because (JOi seems to be a kind of emphatic state
of #01, thougb we have omitted | above as the word usual-
ly appears in the emphatic form.
/) Y.3.W.6 ,]r*^* l^is added to form the feminine.
^)Y.3. W.7., Lo^* Z is added to form the feminine.
h) Y.4. W.2., V-l.iKj 1 is added to form the emphatic state
i) Y.4. W.5., ^ocyuA^I* ^oou is added in the course of
inflection and "j at tlie beginning is prosthetic (38).
k) Y.4.W.6., lioiQJ* 1 is added to form the emphatic state
(118. .V).
I) Y.5. ty.3., loQA>ll5 1 is added to form the emphatic
state.
m) Y.5. W.4., )OULd So is a preformative occurring ia
the course of inflection.
n) Y.5. W.7., ouij?!* 1 is added in the Aphel conjuga-
tion.
o) Y.6. W.3., >?A1? A and 1 are added in the course of
' inflection (comp. [15.2. a).
p) Y.7. W.4., >ai m./i* J is a preformative.
288 EXERCISES IN SYR [AC GRAMMAR.
q) y.7. W.8 , ^-SLfeOU* i-iOU is added in tlie course of in-
flection.
r) V.8. W.6., >ai.m.J>* J is added in the course of inflec-
tion.
s) Y.9. W.9., ]V) \\\ 1 is added to form the emphatic
state.
5. Find Consonants exchanged for each other :
There are no cases on page first. 1 is often exchanged
for 1 before 01 and vice versa. Other letters also exchange
with each other (12.4).
EXEECISE SIXTEENTH.
1 16. *
Find the changes of vowels ikrovjn bach exchanged trans-
posed dropped and added ( 15).
1. Find those which are thrown back :
___ __ __ ^ ^
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yersel. word 2., wiOToZuV JL is thrown back from
^ tol(l5.2.A.b; 13,1.8).
h) Y.l. W.7., .-iOTO^l same as above.
EXERCISE SIXTEENTH CHANGES OF VOWELS. 289
c) Y.l. w.ll., loiiLo. _L is thrown back from ] to
d) Y.3. W.2., ai|a(rD* ^ is thrown back from | to a on
account of the suffi'x.
e) Y.5. W.4., jOUSiD* ] the characteristic of Aphel is drop-
ped and its vowel -^ falls back upon the preformative of the
participle So (23. 1).
/) V.6. W.3., J>A1>^ JL is thrown back from 1 to >
g) Y.IO. W.8., ouipl* ^ falls back from , to ^ (36; 1
18.37), as the vowel _!. of the original form ^j-^ is dropped
and a suffix appended (T[16.2. e, and4i ; ^18.37).
2. Find those which are exchanged :
I 7 * 7 -w 7 .
for , for , for .
EXPLANATIONS:
n I V 7
a) Yerse 3. word 2., oipp3 is derived from p is
dropped and _f_ added in the course of inflection and ^ is
thrown back from 1 to Q (T16.1.C?) the .word here being in
the suffix state. Some would prefer to say that is chang-
ed into JL, (116.4. c and 5. d).
h) Y.4. W.7., \m\ im? is changed into in the con-
struct plural (45.2.a; ^18.1).
7 ? *
c) Y.5. W.4., >CTUiD In the second syllable, is changed
into , as the third radical of the verb from which jOULd is
derived, is Eesh (23.1).
f> 7 7 > *
d) Y.7. W.8., ^-SOaCTU is derived from ^N ischang-
ed into , and in the last part, into m passing from
Peal to Aphel. But it is better to say that is dropped
290 EXERCISES IS SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
and added in one case, and dropped and added in
the other (lfl6.4.h; 5.r).
e) V.lO. W.8., Ol-lr ^ is derived from ^i , and has
the appearance of being changed into Jl. on account of the
suffix (86.A.Rem.) ; but _^ is dropped and JL thrown back
upon *a (116.1..7 and 4.&; T18.37).
3. Find those vowels, whichi are transposed :
X -Js *> Ov ^ 9v
EXPLANATIONS.
jOlQj from JOU or JOOIJ* with O is
transposed in the emphatic state from the last to the first
part of the word (vid.T'18.?/).
The other cases are all similarly explained.
4. Find those vowels which are dropped :
pyp7P7707I'^'^-n75'P y 7 1 7
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 2., .-aioZU| -has an additional syllable
^qio ; but the original vowel is not dropped as a
quiesces in it making it immutable (vid.l5.3 ; 48. A).
/>) Y.l W.4., lAi^ is derived from jJlD, construct Ai^
JL is dropped to form the construct state and _!_ of the con-
struct state is dropped in the emphatic state because the ad-
EXERCISE SIXTEENTH CHANGES OF VOWELS. 29 1
ditional syllable | is added (vid.15.3; compare ^16.5.6).
c) V.3. W.2., CFijuV-O is derived from r*^ is dropped
and from the emphatic state, is dropped to give place to
the suffix (compare % 16.6.d).
^ . . . 7 7
d) Y.3. W.6., fr^ is the feminine form of ^a** is drop-
ped (vid. 116.5.7).
P p ..7 7 X
e) V.4. W.7., t i i i in n is dropped from the plural ab-
7
solute of jlIQ in passing into the construct state (vid. 15.3,
andEem.; ^I6.6.z; T'18.1).
/) V.5. W.7., OlDJjl is Aphel of j^jj with a suffix pro-
noun. In taking the suffix, of the verb is dropped and
of the suffix added (vid. Il6.5.m ; 118.7).
g) V.7. W.B., lAojcJiCQ^ is in the feminine emphatic state,
"^ p It
from the noun >OlDD, and, in the course of inflection is
dropped (vid.li6.5.p; ll8.17).
h) V.7. W.8., ^SOaOU is a verb from ^Sd], and is in the
Aphel conjugation. In the course of inflection, in the
first part of the word is dropped and in the last part, and
other vowels added (vid.T[16.5. r; ^f 18.22).
i) V.9. W.5., p^J is compounded of ? and p^* The latter
7 7 ,
is a noun in the emphatic state from ; falls away in
taking an additional syllable (^15. 3) to form the emphatic
st?.te (vid. 1 16. 5. .9 ; 1 18.32).
h) V.9.W.9., ISQ^ki^ is compounded of ^ and ]V>S>S, em-
phatic state from ^a^l is dropped in forming the em-
phatic state (15.3"^ as an additional syllable is received (^
IQ.b.t', fl8.36).
* 7
I) V.IO W.8., ail,-a is a verb with a suffix, derived from
292 EXERCISES IN" SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
^r-rf* In taking the suffix, is dropped and falls back
upon the first radical (36 ; ^"18. 87V
5. Find those vowels whicli are added :
r0077f7l'^rfi7f>r*s0779
oro7'>pi>rpvp7or'>i
f7P 700 f I 'ts ff It
EX PL AN ATIONS
7. .X 7
a) Verse 1. word 2., wOToA^l is added in the course
of inflection as a part of the sufformative of the verb.
h) V.l. W.4., lA^Lo is in the emphatic state from the con-
struct state AjikSo* is dropped and added (compare ^
16.4.6 ; 11^. d).
c) Y.l. w.lO., ]oi!^ is in the emphatic state, but as it al-
ways appears in this state it is perhaps better not to place
(at the end of the word) among the vowels added.
ct) Y.3. W.2., Cir-jito is derived from f^* is dropped
and a new vowel, , added. Then from the emphatic state
Ip-^I, is dropped to give place to the suffix with which
_L is added (vid. 46. 1. a ; compare lf 16. 4. c ; T 18.
m).
e)Y.8. w. 4.^ >jigo,\\oo is from yl!io is added
with the suffix.
/) V.3. W.6., IfAA is the feminine form for r** is drop
pc'd and ^ added.
EXERCISE SIXTEENTH CHANGES OF VOWELS. 293
ooij, is assumed over > to aid in the
pronunciation (vid.T"18.^).
h) Y.4. W.6., 1)0103 is derived from JOU or 90au* is
added in the emphatic state (vid.TflS.?/).
i) V.4. W.7., fal jinn at the beginning of the word
is assumed (vid.l5.4.6). The remainder of the word is com-
pounded of aIO and }aJ|^ The former is in the construct
plural, andjin passing from the absolute to the construct plural,
is dopped and added (vid. 15.3 and 4 ; Tl6. 4. e; T
18.1).
k) V.5. W.3., pQaj>Q This is from yiQAA* though the
emphatic state is the more usual form* _L is added.
,7 7
I) Y.5. W.4., )ailliD. This is a participle active, Aphel,
7 7 ,
from >OlJ. The first is assumed, forming a part of the
preformative (vid.^ 1 8.5).
-, ^7
m) V.5. W.7., OlOjjl is a verb in the Aphel conjugation
from ySy* is assumed in the preformative. is also
assumed with the suffix (vid.Tl6.4./; Tl8.7).
n) V.B. W.2., \^\^ is in the emphatic state and is ad-
ded (vid.ll8.9).
o) Y.^. W.3., >jA1? is compounded of j and the verb
j>Al" Ethpaal from 5p is added as a part of the pre-
formative. The first _!_ is assumed in the course of inflection
in Ethpaal.
p) Y.7. W.3., lAojOiai^ is in the feminine emphatic state
from ^a\sa* In the course of inflection and are added
and i. is dropped (vid.l" 1 6.4.^' ; ^IS l7).
q) Y!J. W.4., JOimJj is compounded of the relative j and
' 20 *
294: EXEIiCJSES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
the verb jOIQQJ, Apliel of joiflo^ is assumed in Aphel
in the course of inflection (vid. 18.18).
r) V.7.W.8., ^SOkCTU is a verb in the Aphel conjugation
from ^S)0|* In the course of inflection, in the first part
of the word is dropped and added, and in the latter part
of the word, is dropped and added (T16.4. A ; Tl8.
22).
j'rBJ is compounded of j and I>;* The
latter is a noun in the emphatic state from ;s or yfM* If
considered as derived from the former, _I_ is dropped on ac-
count of the additional syllable (l5.3),and, in consequence,
M} having no vowels, y takes the new vowel JL (15. 4. h).
_L is also added to form the emphatic state (vid. Tf 1 6.4. i ;
1"I8.32).
t) Y.9. W.9., |Sq\s^ is compounded of i^ and ) ^\s , em-
phatic state from V)\s is dropped in forming the 'em-
phatic state as a syllabic is added (15.3), and _L is assumed
(vid.Tl6.4.^; 1" 18.36).
EXEECISE SEVENTEENTH.
1 17.
Find the Suffixes and Prefixes, Sufformaiives and Preforma-
lives {%\Q; 36; 46).
1. Find the Prefixes :
CiOQCiCiQ'iCiQ'iOCiQy^y'i^y^y
EXERCISE SEVENTEEXTH SUFFIXES AND PREFIXES. 295
^ I L o o o o *
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., o is a prefix preposition.
h) V.3. W.2., iD is a prefix preposition with the vowel
thrown back upon it.
c) y.8. W.9., > > is a relative pronoun prefixed to the
verb, and, two vowelless consonants occurring together, _L is
assumed to aid in pronunciation. The other instances need
no explanation.
2. Find the Suffixes :
Ol.. t^OIOi Ol_ (TL^ 01 01..^ Gl_ G1-. *
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 3. word 2., OL is a suffix pronoun with its
union vowel.
* ^
b) Y.3. W.4., wiOio., is a suffix pronoun added to a prepo-
sition, though the same form when attached to Lt] is a suf-
formative.
Rem. We use the terms sufFormative and preform ative to indi-
cate those letters which are suffixed or prefixed to words as neces-
sary appendages in order to form particular conjugations, tenses,
moods, persons, numbers, gender*^ or states, according to the course
of inflection. Such are mere formative letters and properly consti-
tute a part of the word to which they are attached, while suffixes
and prefixes are appendages which have more distinct significations
of themselves, and do not necessarily compose a part of the word to
which they are attached.
296 EXERCISES IX SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
3. Find tlie PreformaUves :
Lo V ^ T -J -^CTU -J Ld
EXPLANATIONS.
a) Verse 1. word 2., 1 is, strictly speaking, a preformative ,
but the letter seems to constitute a part of the word through
all of its changes and does not so properly come under this
head as it does under "consonants added" (^15.4.6).
h) V.5. W.4., ^ is a preformative added in the course of
inflection.
c) V.5. W.7., I is a preformative added in the Aphel con-
jugation.
d) Y.^, W.3., A ^ are preformative letters added in the
Ethpaal conjugation.
e) Y.7. W.8., jOU is a preformative added in the Aphel
future.
4. Find the Svfformatives :
EXPLANATIONS:
a) Yerse 1. word 2., *^OTO is a sufformative as it forms,
according to the inflection, the third person singular mascu-
line preterite, though it is in reality a noun suffix attached
to the original noun Aji heing.
h) Y.l. W.4., lA is the sufformative ending of the empha-
tic state, or rather 1 is the ending of the emphatic state
EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH PARSE. 297
and A of the construct from which the emphatic ia
formed.
c) V.3. W.6., 1 is the emphatic ending.
d) y.3. W.7., I takes the place of 1 and is a formative
letter in constituting the feminine gender.
e) Y.4. W.5., ^OCTU ig a sufformative found in the course
of inflection.
/) Y.4. W.7., 1 is the ending of the emphatic state.
g) Y.6. W.2., ] is an emphatic ending.
EXEECISE EIGHTEENTH.
t 18.
a) Yerse 1. word 1., Ajju;Q is compounded of the pre-
position ^ in and the noun AjljuS beginning. O is a pre-
position governing i\jLA^> in the ablative case ( 75.5 ; 52 ;
84). L^y is a denominative noun (41) from the root
M^j principal^ chief, head (Hebrew "^jj^'-i Chaldee '^J&^l )
formed by adding to its root the formative letters Ll. (^39.2).
The vowel is added and aids to form the syllable Lk (15.4;
13.3). LamI^ is of the first declension as its vowels are im-
mutable (48. A) though it is somewhat irregular in its in-
flection (see its plural) third person, singular number(44).
298 EXERCISES IN SYKIAC GRAMMAR.
Aa.ju>, plural (AA.mj)^ The two points over h in the plural
compose Eibui. The point belonging to y still belongs to >
and at the same time is part of Eibui (6.2.Rem.) feminine
gender as it is the same as in Hebrew and is transferred from
that language (43.2.Rem.2). It ends also in lA a feminine
termination in the emphatic slate, | being the regular em-
phatic termination (vid. last reference and 45.3. Z>). In the
absolute state the form is A^ifcaJ, emphatic 1A.*^J ( 45 j
in the ablative case after the preposition Q and governed by
it (75.5).
b) Y.l. W.2., ^010Aa| is an auxiliary verb from A ^ I to he
(vid.Lexicon). A a*) is formed from the noun A^ being, vritn
a prosthetic ( uOloAu'| is irregular takes the noun suffix
wOlo_, as it is derived from a noun, though that suffix is
here to be considered as a suffiarmative (T 17.4. a; T 17.2.
Rem.) neuter ( 66.2 ; 19) singular number (88.1.Para-
digm) third person (38. 1. Paradigm) masculine gender
(vid.last reference) indicativemood(65.1 ; compare (18.4)
preterite imperfect tense,as looi immediately follows(18.4.
Rem.; 38.2;68.A). Inflect to the person where it is found.
First person common gender *^A^1 (/am), second masculine
^Zul {thou art\ second feminine > i n hLk\ {thou ar^),' third
masculine .-lOloA^I {he is) (vid. 38.1. Inflection). It agrees
with its nominative lAl^ji, though of a different gender (80.
B.2).
c) Y.l. W.8., looi is a substantive verb signifying to b('
(38.1) a ]]'verb(38. 1) irregular (32)neuter ( 19)
third personsingular number. When used with another
verb it has the effect of Yau conversive in Hebrew 38. 1)
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 299
masculine gender and used here merely as a jielping verb
to the preceding, in forming the imperfect tense(38^).
d) Y.l. W.4., IALSjD word is a substantive noiln, derived
from ^iSio to speak^ forming in the absolute state (^Vn (yid.
39. 2. h, third example ), construct state A\v> emphatic
IaIsd first declension (45.feminines A; 48.B. feminines;
T" 6. 4. c). Decline. Singular (vid.above) plural absolute,
^!io, construct Aiio, emphatic IASid ( 45. 3) third per-
son singular feminine emphatic state nominative case to
looi wiOloLr(80.B.2).
e) y.l. W.5., 0010 is compounded of the conjunction O
and the pronoun ooi* o is a copulative conjunction (53.
1) a prefix (53. 1. Rem.). It connects the two nouns.
001 may be translated by he or i\ as the neuter gender in
Syriac is included in the masculine and feminine (T 14. c;
43) a personal pronoun separate (16) third person sing-
ular. It is pleonastic and need not be rendered in transla-
ting (55). For explanations of the next three words vid.
supra.
f) y.l. W.9., Lcl^ wii\ a preposition governing (oCL
(52; 84).
g) y.l. w.lO., loi!lL God taken from the Hebrew ^j:^''
and that probably derived from ^jj^ God. niii^ is a de-
nominative noun taking the Syriac emphatic terminanon
1 is the ending of a large number of Syriac nouns, s )m'^-
times indicating the feminine and sometimes the emphatic
state (43.2; 45.3). Some nouns always appear in the em-
phatic or suffix state ( 45.1.Rem.). loilL has the form of
300 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
the emphatic state. It is a substantive noun and may be
7
declined like 2^it (Decl. 1. 45.masculines A) ^third person
singular-masculine-emphatic state ablative case and gov*
erned by icA (75.5).
li) Y.l. w.ll., IotlLo* O a?ic7, is a prefix conjunction oon-
tinning the sense, foi-^ God^ is in the nominative to
loqi ^oioZul (80). For further explanations vid. supra.
i) Y.1.W.14., ogi is a pleonastic pronoun (vid. si/pra).
y) V.l. W.15., IALLd word^ is in the nominative after
1bqi^qioLf(80; tlS.Z/).
k) Y.2. W.I., (JOl this^ same. It has the form of the em-
phatic state though it should be considered as one of the
original forms of the word. The forms are ^01 and poi
(17) a demonstrative pronoun ^singular-masculine-nomi-
native case to foqi woioAji] (80) used as a noun. Decline
it (vid.17).
I) Y.3. W.I., ^^ all^ every ^ each, (58.B.2.(3r,7;) a pronoun
used as an adjective (58.B.2.5) the noun thing to which
it belongs being implied declined according to decl. 1.
of nouns ^third person-masculine-absolute state. The im-
plied noun would be in the nominative to ] OCT; or ^^ itself
might be considered as a collective noun and in the nomi
native to loOl (80. A. 1 and Eem.).
m) Y.3. W.2., CTpi^o hy the hand of him or by his hand
Q is a prefix preposition governing jji] The whole word
7
is compounded of the preposition Q by, the noun r-> empha-
tic f,-i| ha7id,SLnd the suffix CT. of him or his. ,-*!-. is a de-
rivative noun (39), from r- and takes a suffix (Hebrew ^n
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. SOI
Chaldee^^)-2nd.declension-singular. Absolute and constr.^,
emphatic Ipiljpluralabsolute^ri), construct ^,^1, emphatic
Mr-^l third singular masculine (45. masculines B) abla-
tive case and governed by O (75.5). Oi., is a suffix pro-
noun attached to the emphatic state and f falls away (46. 1 .
c)-third singular masculine (16. Table) genitive case (54.
B.2) and governed by p.]l (16 ; 16.B; 74).
n) Y.3.W.3., (ooi to he is here rendered was, the imperfect
being sometimes thus formed (65). It agrees with ^i^
c) Y.3. W.4., ^aiOrl^20 and without him compounded
of the conjunction O, the preposition ,S\o, and the suffix
pronoun wiCTlo^* O and^ is a conjunction as above. ,sSo
without is a preposition with a suffix. It governs its suffix
wfeOio..* *aOiO-. him, is a noun suffix - plural (16.Table)
third singular masculine ablative case and governed by
^^ (^75.5).
j9) V.3. W.5., Pal also not, neither compounded of U not,
and Si\ oho. si\ is a conjunction(53.2.) and continues the
sense. U not is an adverb and qualifies Lo(j\*
q) V.3. w.^., Ir** one, any one, a certain one, certain, any,
from r^, is a pronoun (58.10.a and b) or a numerical adjec-
tive (50.2). Here it has the sense of an indefinite pronoun
singular feminine and belongs like an adjective to the noun
^]j^ (58.10.a).
?')y.3.w.7., Zoc?l to he from looi* 1 is changed into Z to
form the feminine (l9.Table). Imperfect and parsed like
001 (vid. n. supra)
302 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
ft T>
s) V.3. W.8., ^r ^ ^y thing, has a similar meaning to
that of (p>* above ; but has more the sense of a noun. It is
sometimes used in the same manner as |rM (58.10.6). It is
used here as a noun meaning ihrng, and I^m belongs to it, as
tlie pause between |oOl and ^^^Sd is one of minor impor-
tance (|f ll.c; 10)-third singular feminine-absolute state-
nominative case to Loot (80).
ty r
001 J which was compounded of (ocri and j
> which is a relative pronoun ( l7.2) is in the third singu-
lar nominative to looi*
u) Y.4. W.I., OL^iD in him, compounded of a in and Ol-
hii7i, O is a preposition, governing the ablative (75.5);
OU is a suffix pronoun ( iG.Table; 52.Table)-third person
singular in the ablative case and governed by ^ ( 75.5.
compare 54.3.1).
v) YA. W.2., t .* > life, is a verbal noun (concrete) (40Ta-
bleA). It occurs always in the plural form(44.Eem.6),gener-
ally with a singular signification (vid.Lexicon; 80.2)-deriv-
ed from ]aM to Zwe-appears in the emphatic form,like other
plural forms mentioned(44.Eem.6 and45.Eem.)though this
is its usual form. It is an anomalous noun having no
regular declension-third person plural masculine (45.Eem.)-
nominative case to locJl (80.2.6).
lo) YA. W.4., Jaj^O and life compounded of the conjunc-
tion O and, and \m.*^ life. This is parsed like the same word
above, only it is in the nominative to a plural verb (80.
2. a).
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING 803
x) Y.4. W.5., ^OOuZul was, literally were third person
plural masculine, and agrees with ^lil in gender and num-
ber (80.2.a; vid.also c. and d. supra).
y) y.4. W.6., 1>01QJ light, is a verbal noun from JOU to
shine an infinitive form in the emphatic state like U^QO
from ^54^) (^ 40.Table, II. A. a). Infinitive absolute you,
Sou or joou, emphatic state 1>01J, IjOU, "IjOIQJ. The So
which appears in the infinitive is here dropped (compare
39.2.6.and 40), though the emphatic form is the one in
whicb it usually appears-declensionIV.(45.masculines,D)-
third person singular-masculine-emphatic state, and in the
nommative case after ^oouAa], but used as the construct be-
fore J of the next word (74.2.a).
1) Y.4. W.7., ] ! a m > of the sons of men, a composite noun
(41.1)-compounded of >, .iJ^ and \mS\* j o;^ is a sign of
the genitive case, which follows (74.8). aIO sons, is
' . . . y
from \^ son, primitive anomalous. Singular absolute ;o,
construct ;o, emphatic |;o, plural absolute ^^ i m, construct
..7 _ (> 7
wkJJD, emphatic |>m (49.masculines)-third person plural-
masculine-construct state(in form and because the next noun
is in the genitive)-genitive case, though in the construct
state, as sometimes occurs in Hebrew (vid. Stuart's Hebrew
Grammar, 434. 5), governed by j (74). ^aj man, is from
%ju], the 1 being dropped (12.3.a)-derived from theHebrew
word 'Cjij}^ man (Chaldee tJi^JS})-^ primitive noun-declension
], but somewhat irregular (vid. Lexicon) third person
singular as it has not Eibui, though it has the same form
which appears in the plural-masculine emphatic state abso-
301 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
lute and construct ^mj], emphatic \mS\j absolute plural
^AJf or |Aj|-genitive case and governed by tlie preceding
noun lid (74).
2) y.5. w. I., OOlo {v]d.supra e).
1f> ^
jOi QJ Ujht,\s in the nominative absolute, with
the participle >0lllk5(76.1). For farther explanation of the
word vid. y above.
4) Y.5. W.3., pQA*jwOm(/7i6)iarArries5,is compounded of the
preposition a in, and PQaaj darkness. ]dqjlkm is a sub-
stantive noun (the Hebrew form is ^lajfl, a verbal noun)
declension fourth ( 45. masculines D) third person singu-
lar masculine-emphatic state-ablative case and governed by
=>(75.5).
5) V.5. W.4., jouio permitting to shine-a. pB.Tticiple from, the
irregular^, active intransitive verb (20.2) JOU to shine (33)
-in the Aphel conjugation ( 19 Table; 19.B.4 ; 23.1)-
an active participle (19.B. 4; 23.1). It is used here for
the third person singular of the present tense(64.2.A.Rem.)
and rendered the same as though it were a verb (vid. Trans.
^I4)third person singular. Conjugate to the place where it is
found. Preter. Peal JOU, preter. Ethpeel JOuZf ( l9.Table
II, and 21.1), preterite Pael hou (l9.Table II, and ^22.1),
preterite Ethpaal joiiZf ( 19. Table II, 22. 1 and Eem.),
preterite Aphel JOTjf (19. Table II; 23.1), future Aphel
JOUJ (19. Table II; 19.B.2,5; 23.1), imperative Aphel
50ijf ( 19. Table II; 19. B. 1; 23.1), infinitive Aphel
ojoiii (19.Table II; 19.B.3 and 9; 23.1)participle active
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 305
Aphel JOULo (L9.Table II ; 19.B.4; 23.1). It is found
in the Aphel conjugation-active participle masculine gen-
der, and belongs to HoiQJ ( 64. 1. A), or is absolute with
it.
6) Y.5. W.5., PQa_>jO and the darkness. O is a conjunc-
tion as above, and ]aoa,M is in the nominative case to
Ol-3jj( For farther explanations see 4. supra.
7) Y.5. w,7., (JVJ:ihi\ comprehended iV, is an irregular ac-
tive intransitive verb, composed of ^>j and Ol_ Irregular-
active voice-intransitive (19.Tablel)-indicative (65.1.B.b)
-Aphel preterite. The usual form is j^ij ] When the suffix
is appended, the final vowel of the verb is dropped (15.3)
*
and the last consonant forms a syllable with the suffix Ol-
It is in the 3rd.person masc; Pealj^Jj, Ethpeel ^>jZ|, Pael
* 7 7 7 ^^ * 7
*^>>, Ethpaal j^jJm, Aphel ySy\ and agrees with its nom-
inative ]anji !>> The suffix Ol- is a personal pronoun
third masculine singular-accusative case (54.B.l) and gov-
-^ -7
erned by *^>?|
8) Y.Q. W.I., looi vjas^ is a Lomadh Olaph verb Peal
active voice-3d. singular-masculine-indicative mood-present
tense (32.1) and agrees with 'iaa*^ (vid. ^18.c).
9) y.6. W.2., "U^T^ son of man, is a composite noun (42.
1) compounded of \Ci son and ^1 man. \^ is a primitive
noun anomalous singular, construct (vid. paradigm 49.
masculines) third person masculine nominative case
to logi* ImJ ^otw, is a noun derived from aj] man prim-
itive declension firs1>-third person singular masculine-em-
phatic state-in the genitive Case and governed by ',0 (74;
1[18 1).
306 EXERCISES IN SYRIAC GRAMMAR.
10) Y.6 W.3., >>As(> who was senilis compounded of ^ who^
and JjA*! ivas sent, j is a relative pronoun-third singular mas-
culine, a prefix, and in the nominative case to hiL] (17.
2 ; 56). J>A| is a verb in the Ejhpaal conjugation pas-
sive voice regular third singular masculine indicative
mood preterit imperfect tense (60.4), and agrees with
its nominative > Peal J>, Ethpeel i>A(, Pael 5>#, Eth-
paal 5>A1 In Ethpaal and the other passive conjugations
M is transposed (vid.T15.2.a).
11) YS. \v.4., ^So/roTT?, 0^ is a preposition and governs the
ablative case (75.5).
12) Y.6.W.5., fOl}^ Godj a noun declension first third
singular masculine emphatic state ablative case, and gov-
erned by ^ (75.5 ; ^iS.g).
13) Y.Q. \v.6., 01Sq his name^ compounded of SQ name
and CVhis. SQ is a noun from ^9 anomalous third
singular masculine. Absolute and constr. singular ^, em-
phatic pi suffix state 0lSQ (vid. paradigm, 49. mascu-
lines). JL of the absolute state falls away in the emphatic
state, and from the emphatic is formed the suffix state by
and adding 01 (46.1.cz) nominative case to
loCJl wiOloAaj 2vas (implied). In reference to jooi wiOloA^I
(vid.T"18. b and c). 01- his, is a suffix pronoun, third sing-
ular masculine (l6.Table)-genitive case (54.B. 2) and gov-
erned by SQ(I6; 16.B; 74).
14) y.6. W.7., ^.i-xQa John, a noun proper-anomalous-
third singular masculine, absolute state-nominative case af-
ter loOl wftOloAA]*
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 307
15) V. 7. w. 1., poi same, this a demonstrative pronoun,
singular, masc. nominative case to ]l] (vid. ^18. k),
16) V. 7. w. 2., ]l] came Lomath Olaph (]]) active
voice-Peal conjugation-pret. imperfect-3d pers. singular,
masc. indicative mood and agrees with poi (27 Tab.; 32).
17) Y. 7. w. 3., IZojoicoli/or a witness compounded of
^foVj and |Zojoioo witness. |IojOifiD is a noun derived from
the verb joifio ^o witness. The form ?oiflD appears as a noun
of the 2d declension. Absolute and construct ?OTCD, emph.
IjaiflO (45. masculines B). The feminine absolute has the
10
joico* In many nouns
Z is inserted before the final 1 in the feminine ; O with Z is
also sometimes inserted (45. 3 and Rem. 3) as in this word.
It has the form here of the emph. feminine. That indeed
seems to be the usual form in which the word appears
3d pers. singular, dative case and governed by ^ (75. 1).
18) V. 7. w. 4., )cn,m i> who shall (should) hear wit-
ness compounded of j who, and >ai ,. m i shall (should)
hear witness, or cause to hear witness (23. 2. a)
>a i . m 1 is a verb from joico to heget, to hear witness-A-ph.
conjugation-active voice-regular (26)-intransitive. 3d
sing. Peal jOifiO, Ethpe. joifloZJ, Pa. joiflo, Ethpa. 'OiooZj,
Aph. pret. ?OlCD(, Aph. fut. jounj-fut. tense, masc. gender.
7
In the fut. Aph. 3d. masc. usually we find - in the last sylla-
ble ; but sometimes as here we have - (23.2, where are ex-
amples, with 1 in the last syllable. Compare 19, Tables I
and II). The future tense is here used in the sense of the
subjunctive mood imperfect tense (61. 3. A. b) and
agrees with its nominative ? > is a relative pronoun-3d
308 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING.
pers. singular, masculine-a prefix-nominativ^e case to
;J._mJ(1fl8.0. ,
19) y. 7. w. 5., vOk to, against, on account of, q/-pre-
. ^* *- '
position governing pOlQJ .
20) Y. 7. w. 6., 1>C71QJ %A^-verbal noun from JOU to
sAme-declension fourth, Sd pers. singular, masculine, em-
phatic state, ablative case and governed by ^ (1[18. y).
21) V. 7. w. 7., ufci^j-compounded of ? that, iib all^
every, and *jl] man-} is a conjunction (85. 3 & 4, c?)-prefix
connecting? 01 OiJ and ^-SD^ou* ^O ever^/, a?^, is a pro-
noun, but here used as an adjective (58. B. 2. b. a) and
belongs to ^ai For declension, etc. vid. ^18. 1. *-*! ma7i
is a noun from wAJJ declension first, but is somewhat irregu-
lar-3d pers. singular, masc. absolute state, nom. case to
^^ V )>C7lJ. For further explanations, vid. ^ 18. 1.
22) V. 7. w. 8., ^ SO iOU migJit believe-a. verb doubly
irregular, ]zi and ^, and is placed among the defective
verbs (35. 2. c). In the Aph. conjugation. Pe. ^1,
Aph. ^i2-fcOl, future Aph. ^iQ-CFlJ-active voice-intransitive-
3d pers. singular masc.-future tense and used in the sense
of the subjunctive mood, imperfect tense, and agrees with
its nominative -*! (comp. ^18. 18).
23) Y. 7. w. 9., OI^Jq through or hy the hand of Mm.
For parsing, vid. ^ 18." m., where the same expression occurs.
24) Y. 8. w. 1., P not, is an adverb and qualifies looi
25) Y. 8. w\ 2., OOI Ae, is a personal pronoun separate-
3d pers. singular masc. and nominative case to looi (comp.
1fl8-)- ,. . , .
26) Y. 8. w. 3., fOOi tvas-axi irregular verb agreeing
with ocji for its nominative (vid. ^18. n).
EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PARSING. 309
27) V. 8. w. 4., IjCJIOJ UgJd-Si noun and nominative
case after loai ( vid. ^18. y).
28) V. 8. w. 5., (]] 5i^^-a conjunction, a contraction of U
not, and ^1 if ; it continues the sense. Following this and
preceding the next word, there is something implied;
after |J f supply jZojoim-^ ]l] came for a witness, the same
which is expressed in verse 7. For the remaining three
words of this verse, vid.^18. 18, 19, 20.
29) Y. 9. w. 1 and 2., looi uiOioA^] was-a. verb and
agrees with IVoiQ-J understood, IjCHQ-J Vjoi that light,
being implied. For parsing this verb fully, vid. ^18. h. & c.
30) y. 9.' w. 3., ;^t/or, is a conjunction continuing
the sense. ^
31) V. 9. w. 4., (>01Q-J ?^(77i^-a noun-nominative case
after fooi ^oloLl (vid. ^[18. y).
32) Y. 9. w. 5., P'r*? q/" #rw^/i-compounded of j of, and
)^ truth. ]yr is a noun derived from the verb >;* to he
coTim/icec^-declension first (vid. 48. A. decl. 1. Kem.)-
singular. Construct and absolute, 'r or >;, emphatic h'r*
forming the emphatic state, from 'r* _ falls away on ac-
count of the addition at the end (15. 3), then -? pre-
7
senting two vowelless consonants, ? takes the new vowel -
(15. 4. &)-3d pers. singular, masc.-genitive case after >
j'r*j fjOlQ-J is an instance
in which the abstract noun \y\M has the sense of an adjec-
tive, and the phrase is properly rendered the trite light.
7 y
33) Y. 9. w. 6., >Ol-J.-isDj which shineth, or having shone-
compounded of >ai l ^ shineth, or having shone, and >
which. jouo-Sd is an Aph. participle from Sou, absolute
21
310 EXERCISE EIGHTEENTH PAKSING.
with J (^18. 5). > lohicJi, is a relative pronoun, nomina
tive absolute with >CTUJ-Si> (76. 1 ; ^[18. 3).
34) V. 9. w. 7., *A^ Nn\ upon every man, compound-
ed of ^ upon J ^ every and ^ai man. V^ is a preposition
governing the accusative or dative. ^ is a pronoun used
adjectively and belongs to *-! (vid. 18. I). .*! is a noun
in the accusative and governed by ^ (If 18. 1, 9, 21).
35) V. 9. w. 8., IM? who comes, composed of > wJiOj and
]l\ comes. ]l'\ is a verb-Peal conjugation, present tense,
and agrees with its nominative j (T[18. 16).
36) Y. 9. w. 9., |V^ NnN into the t^orZd-rCompounded
of ^ intOj and pO-^ the loorld. ^ is a preposition
governing the accusative. ]Sn , \s is a noun from ^^N
second declension. Absolute and construct VAs , emphatic
t ^ Q^ ^* In SiQ-^ the final vowel falls away in the em-
phatic state as a syllable is added (15. 3)-3d pers. sin-
gular, masc. accusative case and governed by i^
37) V. 10. w. 8., (the seven precedinoj words are ex-
plained above). Cl-i,-a knew 7n'm-compounded of OU hiru,
and ^r hnew, ^r is a verb with a sufl&x pronoun at-
tached* to it-derived from the Hebrew 2?ii to know, doubly
anomalous. -^ and ^-Peal preterit -3d pers. singular,
masc. indicative mood and agrees with (^Q-J^i^ By taking
a suffix the usual form is changed. The common form of
7X1 7
the Peal preterit is ^r - falls away and - falls back upon
the first radical when the verb takes a suffix (vid. 36).
Ol- is a suffix pronoun with its union vowel (16. Tab. a)
7
-3d pers. singular, masc.-accusative, and governed by
(54. B. 1).
CHRESTOMATIIY.
CHRESTOMATHY.
FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
John i. 110.
looij
(1 iin? ])cnQj ^oouA^f U^o |oai ]^^ cis 4
: Cn2))| |J pQAjaO *. )GUlO POAM^ |)G1QJ 0010 5
P 7 -X T> aj p P7 '^ ,77 '^ ^pp 7 P
^^ou ,.ai\n> 1)'oiqIj ^"^ >oimj; V^o>oia^ ]1'\ Ijoi 7
Ijoiqj ^ jcjicQjj IJV Ijoiqj looi 001 O's
Y2T> .aAnS jouSdj . 1r^? Hoidi -h-^^ looi ^oioLTo
P' iLolio . looi oi,la]-i V^^^o loOT 1 SnSsn lo
314 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
Matthew ii. 1 10.
3 ^j msq* ail y^mV)\ ^l]o ]L^y^^ ciLdod
oiSoi :>a^9o| cnloo ^LiiZZ]o pllo D>0)ai
5a.,^V ^lT 1-jV ^1? JLjolaL o2 ^aouioZujiislj
CHRESrOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 315
Mark xiv. 3242.
.^CJlOpiSoi^A^k rSD|0 .,J^lCOr*i U'r^ASDj 1pi||AS0y^ oZ|0* 32
0'rilZZ]o ]a>01 OQg > VZoSqI |k?^ ^a^^lS OlS ^aOI ]Lp
)>jjamk) ^y "jooi y^Soo ]i'1 ^^ ^^JO VVAo jdoo* 35
Ulo* j^j gl ^A^j >aiIq^ fi UJ Ijot ^mo -xiSd 'rT^j 3:
^Q^Z P> C^tO O'pilZZi* O'rlZASD^ |AlS Ir-*^ Am^Os] |] 38
^llo* 01 ipVp^UI l^o^i^o U^^ l^oi vpnmi\39
,>j^T *ooZ 1Z| ^010* ^1 |A1Sd wioio ^. ^oZio
1. P "7 "P I 7 > 7 7 o> 17 7**
^.4J^j- |J0 ^001 ^r^Cljk ^OaLi.laA) \>4^ ^inV)> jS .Qj]
^OOll pSDJO ^oJ^l A!lZj (Z(0* . oil ^C'r^Op JliD OOOl 41
loio lAi* ZZlo IZ'pM A^J^ om^^ZZIo \uLak) oaSoj
loi ^(Ij oSdod* UI^j ^ootu'[-1 ]aj]j oi*b 5>qSAaSd J2
* jA y)NaV)> 001 jd;)
Luke xxiii. 18 27.
X 7 . ? 7
lAi^.^o Zooij .m>m5cpl ^^4^? W o6\* l^V^rA^ ,9.
310 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
2o^oaiSQi ViIsd ^> ^oZ* Or*^! AuTi looi lijD> |]4^o
I 7 . ? 7 * 0^ 9 ^ P -X I *P
23 ou^ 0001 ^^lo . toi IJns oooi ^^innZ ^j ^qjoi^"
* POID wi2>)0 .OOl^) ^OOl^O |0O1 ^AlO ^0UJQ1CP>
II oail ^ooil l-*o* .ooiA!i|i looi'Zj .oa ^'j ^o^iLa*
T>7 7i>i7 f>0 WO* I7*R*.'
olU? 001 l^lcol Zu^ looi "isoj U^^o .mmfciDl ^^>4^>
^6 , 01^ ^LoqLd po* .ooui.n A 5>ciLl ^j ^oi\
wiOloll qSQ00 *. lAa'rO ^ ]L]i ] 1 1 i>QO ^\V^a\ OpKil
Pv *P? .'^P **i -"P 7'9X
27*1] QflD oijAri looi Ulo* .^omaj oijAs ^^? (sludi
7 OP y 7 -T>7* pr
^OloSs ^i^O .Looi tr^^? r-^1 ^^ *U^?
7 -n 7
Luke xxiii. 33 42.
P7 v7 P 77P7^P. ^%5''
33 .^jZ *^01Q21D1 . lA2l3-rO Vr^^? Ir^ fAooA oZ| jOO
-iNp 7 * T7 tx y J>.P.X"7P -X Pt7
OUkJm) ^ r^0 OlLxSOi ^ r** * |Am^O ^jOl ^QJOl^O
34>.. ]] .OOlijk ^Cm ]^'\ OoOl 'rSDl ^QA^ ^? 001*
o m.Xv GLiiiO)(0 wkOlOA^J a.wJ^O ^r^^ M^ ^^^f*
t, 7 I'7 -nP y IX Z " 1^^*
35 OlO OOOl > o > <^Vr)Q , I^KiO ]SD1 ^J loOl ^(O* JCDS)
CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 3n
G12 0001 ^^tMlOSOO* *|0l2^> Ola*^.. (>. .^Vnix
*(Jaj Oil ^in;oV)o oiZol ^^^'rO ^.^ V^o > ^, f)fol
I ff7p7'^:>^ 107 K 7^ i> P
Zu|* ^Aaj VmI Vjoou) "lalSD 001 AjI ^ oil ^-^lo* g
Aa|LD001)0 ZujjOi *.0Uk3^\llLiAD)VDA2,l^>l001
7 P -x 3 '^ * 7 -^ P *^ ,. I P 7 7 9 x ff -n
^^r'nil .QJOl ^.^? r^* V?OCJU> ]n\V) QJCTI ZuV^TilO 39
^lo*AOialilooi ^p^ '.oiSoioooi ^^nA . > 1 Amlr^
*<7 7 ^'^ J>7P7 1 . 7*
012 IPO* ^ ^1 X^O ^a2U I^ * |m>iV) 001 Aj] ^1 40
AjI *2)|j . Aj| \yM> joi-^ ^ U ^ I oil 'rSDlo oi;o*
-i 7 -P 7 xpi77 px r -n
^u-. ^OOl ^Q*J ^1 ZU^JP ^1>*0* .U-r^ M 012 41
Oil r.m U jlflDJ 5>0^ ^J pbl ^'rSZI tr^^lj *^lo
P^-X7 ^^**^'' " 7 7 i\ v.* 7-K
. j^^oalSQo Aj I (Z] J tSD ^;k5 *aj.^p>Zl <^0(n\ '^lo* 42
43
Luke xxiii. 43 53.
loOlZ .kIlSQI llk}a^> * A ij( 'r^l ^^^1 ^QM^ oil 'rSsbl*
7 p.'>P y ^P y i\ .. 7 X p 7 7
^ I^QAm 1 0010 A tlA ^| ^> ^001 L^^ *> ]m.^<y^o 4^
*jl2)| ^'r^^lo >*** |aSQ0* . ^^A M*A1 IkJjJL ]lJ I Olio 45
7 - p p ..p p * p 7 7 * 11" ' ^^ ?
.-rSOfO (SD) fjQ2 ^QAa jlOO^ OlAl J^ ^ UOaOI) (1>Z46
ftp 7 'ft77'ft'>P vp *P 7.. I p
^> \\^ yO* VqIsO '^"I 1 JOI . *xja0> W y>]fiO ^p*|2 *jl21 47
op T0X7 '1PP7 77 P 7 * f *. *
lijOl A^Vr*r 'r^lo loil]] M>n OoOlJ ^,SO ]j0;^10
318 CHRESTOMATIIY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
48 0001 ^i.^AJD? ^aAj] ^MlD .001^0* *]0GI \cLk^] In^i
\^^^'^ p Qiiaoi looij ^ySD ow p 1>oi iZvwJ^
'O^P-X-XU-X 7 xp -x X7
49 ^OlQlOpi ^OOlLo IcLmOJ ^ OOOl ^aSAa^O* . .OOU^^
^U'O 'tJ^^^ ^ CnSDl a001 ^Zl> ^Ai] taJO V!)QAji)
-^ "?*'"*> - 7 '^ 7 7 *P 7 .t* p. .. 7
50 ^ . V4q^Q3 ^SlTDOi Olkl> y>* ^? I'r^M* <* ^^Aoi wOCJl
OOP 017 PPP P7 'X xpi PP
loCT lnfnV)o ..oou-LQmlo ^ooulsll Iboi :>qS^
-R? P7X p 1 pp k''''''k^*t''t
52>5i]o ',*cdq4^^^^ ZcA ,^^5 ]joi* IcnlLj |Zon\v^l
Tip pp-^ 7 -n7 T> 7 -x-^ -n7
53 oiSomo IjAoj Kjlm^ oiopo oiA>*lo* ViQAa> oi;.^2)
P I -n ^i 7 "''* p I p 4v V>\
loOl ^^LmSdLL] NSuJ^r^ *Aj1 Uj OOl Vr^13 ]yQCi^ ZuTHQ
Ol)
Acts xvii. 2232.
Tc.pT7 'n7 7-n P7 px7 "'' P7
22\'^jZ1 lr^\ 'r^l ^CDO.^ *fiDa>|:5 ^CDQ^QS) ><10 pO*
7 ..-R I 7 -n ^ X I 7 -X 7 -X p "^ P
ZuKn*] ^Qr)ALia> A^r^ A^ooi lv^o Aaooi ^pALo >.
7 PI Q 7 ' t ^ X7 9 PJ
ooi Ov^Sx 1^-^? ^-^^k looi v^^Aoj \1h^ ]L^
pp7iP7/*..7 P7P7rPP ^ ^ -R
U |u,Lt ^Ij (Jn^CJUD .]l'l?0 l-^^^? Vr^ OiOOlO Oli
r I) is 7 PP7 ..7X -K 7 7 f f>
CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 319
.. 777 X P4, -^ P<'^7^*^ P0 7 *7
y 7171X -n 7x7 **. * 7*7
^1 ^Zulo ^1iSilZAk)0 ^IjuuM *rK. 001 OlO* ^JiO rM28
7 4v -X - * 7 * *^ 7 "^x 7 i> p..p
^OIQ^ OOI OIISD) O'riol ^Q^> |V^>nM ^ [mS\ ^|>
P'Xj) -x pi7 01: r ox .7^ %'
IZoiiDolo ]=^\..> t2)]a^ 0I ]SD]ml ol iaoiA?
77 P-X '^ -n - 7 9,%^ \m^ m^" 0Pfi7l>7 X
oil UcLiA.4j 'huo U^l* iZoOllL ViiDj (AJ'r^> lAlpi^O 30
^Qyj> fltL oioj IldoI 5>ai^lj ^*5yl4^* %ooAj ]soj ^5ys ^i
. I 7 7797P 77 p*>i PkP7
7 7 1..i i -RI77 * *^ e 7 Q
7 I 7 K n -n ..I ff
*oooi ^ > ^ > ^ v> ^ooiik) *.|A^i^ LaJOi ^y \t^ak.o
np 7P7XP ^ 75 7 i.j^ *
>l>ai^>^i^iiSV) ^>*1 ^^ 0001 ^'riol ^oouLoo
"Romans vi. 1 10.
77^9*. 70 I 7 .pi>7 ''_^.. Iff^PP
jAjiZZ IZqo^j 1Aa4>j^ 010 looj . -rSolj ^5ui5oi U^^*
320 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSL iTING.
Hi
*.wiC7iQL^|) (AAjaosAr:) (A^iD A.>^ ^ |M>>a^ v^qa^ ^O)
5 ^^21 ly*xOl -H^O* *>^ Ur^ l-"^**^ ^:^ ^1 ^^
n-n ipr opro. - 7 pv 7 -^7
loaU OlAV^iOn )| (isoi *.oiZqSd) IZoSDr^ CflSOl
P T77* -r -n^jipxy 7 7 -K 7 10
6 ( ^ \>4^Ajj OlSQl *2IO>l| JOaAl ^'rlli? '^y ^luJLpi*
771^ T> IP. 7 ti" ^ 9^ "^ ^ ^t *" "k" ^'
'n7 pi 7 I ip. ?> pi -n t\
* 0pi 7 n'-ip >-A^x.p I 7 -^7
air:) ^AaSd P IZqSoo *Z1so (J }oZo .iZuib A.>^
X 777 '" '^ 7I7^ I
10001 ..A^ ^.A-M>o .^1 Ih^ AjlSd 0(71 lAif)\ 'pi.. Zul^>^
p 7
<
CoLossiANs iii. 1 15.
P7 5 77'n ""' ^ " ^ P I 7 7 -" P
2U'ki? "O Q1)Z1 ^\Aj* .loil^J ]liV>i ^ ^Zu
8 .lail]al,i^><ii^^4mOynnl'lMO .'r^. ^onL^oZZuk)*
Ov 7 t\ 'D " 7 7 *. . ;j -no*! 7 7 "K
4 .oAj] ^1 ^r>^ ^^JuM OiOOlJ U^ASD VjulaSD) ^uASdIo*
>. " 7 7 I.p 17 P .X '>7 -X ^
5 .QO^lDjOl \UJD01 0A.ii^f=^ jjj.iQJLQ oiSoi ^a\..ZZ
l2ano\\o .VAm^lLy^olSl^o tZQii4Ucuj{ .U'l^?
6 01].. O J ]l] ;a-. ^^01 ^4^* ,\fDLSi AAj^J ^01 *a01J
CHRESTUMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 321
*^ y -riff* 9 ^ 9 X ff e..f T 00 7
IZoJLk^ |ASQajH>\0> ^a^OI ^Ollo ^niV) CUj^aJ] ^>
Ul r*^ r** r*^ r^ ^OOOlZ |Jo* t2ll4 jJNSnV) ])JCL.
y 7 PP-X rp7rjrr*?7 't'lo
A^j p* ou-r^^j (ZqLd^ |A^r>^ Z^a^ASdj |Zh^ onn\o* n
PP-X IS 7 1\ -cy f> I-7 P P 7 p.. 7 7 I ?
\zuMOyo Isom'j .lria^LaO 1*^,^ loil^j l^n.. >^1 ^"{s-kaoi
P-Xj a^k 17 m.i>* X X '>PJ'X T7 m.(> J *. X 7
P^O) Zo'ra.^0 IZokkoJo .IjLkA) ZoninV)0 lZoV)imno
i-R 7 7 ^P7 71 7 ^77
X 7 PI 7P77PP-X '"''' Si
I^dom ^oiLd ^i\cn >Qio* onan* ^oAj| *2)| liaoiu
77 Pi 7 "?7 ^'j''^ X7^PP >*> ^
^jJ ] I aV)? CFlSQ^O* (ZO'H^o? M3W CLiOOlJ l3
n 7 , 7 7 7 7 *" ^ lC * *'"'' 1*
-
Revelations v. 1 10.
pp OP 7 ">P 7 T>i7 T*y
V^Ao .^coqjojZ ^ ^A^j o6i> oii.V)* ^ Aiwo* i
7*,7 X7P Ti -^ 7 * X7
uOioAu! QiSb .fiD) iJno ipSD? VjAIa-m p]Jk5 A^u*o*
322 CHRESTOM.VTHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING
spo* *oilu> ]i4-^ |;aV)No JsAal ^Aaiol 1qj
7 P 9 7 7 f> O 7 y P -R T p
Vk % ^ " X^ 7*-n.p 7 i< !> l> -x -K. 17
7'^_'^ 17 tvP
0> lypp-R -7 ik'*^ P 7 i> '7970 p
OCT hO>> Vr^^ oux :l>ooi^j lA:s*p ^? ooi tij] ]oi toi
P7 7 .^^ *^_'"P..' ''t'' PP. 7 7-n
7 T> X pi 7 -ftp p-n T<i7>p
^7 r> 7 7 O 7 ^0 7 -ni7
7 -R.. I7P 7 xiN4.p PP.. 7 77.. -np
DlJa^O (>Au^ ^OOUSD pM ,w\n\ A^l p Vr^I? ^^OlOlDrO
np IP7P7 PfV " 177 -HI7
*> ! 1* I -R..P 7 7-R7 *"''' '''" ''"^
^^^4^ cilji) ]LdAm^ ,^t^^\o *.|r:^AiL^ ,nmV^\ ^^A^l
lAo'^ \o ^ ^A^? P^r^ Icn^U ^ Air^io AfioiuZlj
1^.. w 7ipp''yl V'7 9*. P7 PP""
10 ]r>Vvn ^JS^j loiL]] ^QjI Z^TilO* IALDoIo ]SD10 U^O
p7 7 X 7- -R.. p
CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING. 323
Revelations xxii. 1 10.
J 7 -X 7 X 7 '"7 P 7.. 7 x i 7
PX '* *P07 ^7 7* -Filliff 'W..7
(jAj ^\00* ]SQSm> IZouDdIJ .*(m>o^ . .mr)c^"(^n ^Oli^j^
' -K P i 7. 7 7 P ? 7 *^ -n * A
.(ooij oio Vr^l ooijo |oi^> ^cdqjojZo *^ol loou U
G1^) ]20*r) ^VkJO* ^^OUJQJliQAJ 01^9 Ti^O ^
l>aiQj50 'L;*j l>oiQjj UcjQCD ^ooi-ik looiJ Uo .^ooZ
.QOLSOJO ^OOIJ^ JCJUiiD IoIjL Jj'rSDj ^SD /|mSQ>
!?i)i7 PP 7 -^1> "^P I 7* -^..p n.. p
. oi^aj plJSDi^ *^ wiJ)r* V^^? U*oyy |oi-^ ti-fk)
^,jiJD IooiSd^ ^jlj ^-Aoi oiL^j ],n\l OiOAjlai
9 p 7 P -X 17^ -n" 7p 7PP ^ 7 P ^""^ ^
iT7 TiO-ftp 7P 7P7.P'> P PP
A!.Sd po :^loi li.**o MSq> 001 ^TmOi \i\ *alo* poi s
7 P'7 7 .. 7 -h P 7 * t" '" "^ ' ^^ ?
001 p1J!^> *^oiq^.j ^jO y..iV)\ Alaj Zuv^o p]
.9 X P P P X 17 1. C ' C -i" -T ^ *
j^^ajlAlO ^U wV^ -ilJ^ 'r^lO* ^-i^Ol^A^ (001 IOmIDjQ
1^ 9 7 .* '^
'loA09 |]SQ^ ^*r4^? ^^01)0 ^X^Sn s/^A'i W1)0 /^Zu]
rt .V XT'** T^** 'X '^l^ "X. y ti ^ (?P^ Q P
]Zai^j? ]]Sq1 :>ooAjaZ |] uA '^lo* . ?Q.^ loilU . poi lo
7 X 17 1> P 7 Ni '7 P P P P 7
^OIoAj] ^n^'r^)) 'ri^. U^l OOI .^JOl ]*dAo>
321 CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IX TRANSLATING.
Revelations xxii. 11 21.
11 .JDa^ ^^^ 'IK? ^ .*S0Z ^QU ,^QSV)) 001*
^0 'K 77-KPir v T> '"^',*" I7PI7
i2|cn* .jiioZ ^r^Aj (AJriDo *:)oZ ^^^u iZon^^na^^io
yj\ y^Loi ^-^aiiA ...iDi .A^j l^lo AIl |j1_1Z1
(, 7 ? I 7 -^ * I p- 7 I
13 (>Vn,o 001 .OZO *21-S^ ]j( pf* Ol^^? fr^Iii *a010A-i(>
J'i .QJOl .QjI pAiSC3l4* |V>\o 0010 ]ma> 001 .(ji'rwl 0010
.^OOll^J U4^C^ lOOUJ ]iaji| Olla> Py5Cil ^r^il?
-no i>.p Ov 7 y P ?"* ' *?" *..P 7
(Tiio ^>aa9) ^o IpAa i S'g)0 Uq^do ^Ujio }*-h^o
iG onl o>oimSn\ \>A.>> ]D|]LQ-ik Zj^s ^qa^ p]* .|ZqX ?
7 17 P'^ -K '7 7xp^P P'i P t^ "
^1 roj> ]mi.. o V,m 001 *-iA^l W .IZyL ^^o ^^^oi
I -> P 7 P v PP 7 .7 P I 7 P 7 .7
17^-Ad1 lAloO P^OJO* .K2) OOl '.(mwi^ JiQOQD 001
np .7 TNi-77'^P 71 ^7 P -7 P
"la. J 0010 UVj loitj OOIO OZ ri>o]j MSQ? OOIO ,]l
^ 71.. 7P '^f" ""P P7'> y*' ? 7.. 7 -n
X "" 1^ . "^ C* i^-K AiJ P P ^ 7 -P. -x X 7
^^mi ,^01.1-^ ;>Qa.CJ ^Aj| ^(j poi MdAoj |ZQa.Q]>
P -n PPPP 7 0X79P.. 7 7 PP7
19 ^ ^lo* Ijoi XciLzia ^tliAdj IZowid ^oioli loi!^
oiAiSqI |oi}^ >^ij .fjoi IZoi-jQjj }oAa> (J^ ^ 5^u
p.. X7 P 17 .ppi i> T>.. 7 p 7
^njAa? lAmajD ^^oi lAi^rSD ^Loo ]jum> ]miO ^lo
7 PP X "ftp-B 7 .77< PPPp7
20 ^U^ WUl ^l ^i^oi joimlDj 001 ;Sd1=^ ."(joi IrsAaiD
7P X *.'*7P -n-X 7 Ov-nppp 17
21 iQl "Ufc-i-aV) ^QA^ ^'rSOJ OlZon*^* ^Q*j ]ji'^ IZ .^-ilol
X7-RX7 4, ,
^jir)! .]ii.*^^ ^ooij^
CHRESTOMATHY FIRST LESSONS IX TRANSLATING. 325
Psalm xlv. 1 10.
,>ia\ :]alSQl ^^ioi i^]o ,yL(, Ua^iAa ^jltA ^]*i
^ JQDJ :]il ^*A^Q*0 j^JJOl* 'Vr^^l .^.'i\n ]'^ifif>4
lA^r^ ^aSai IZoooi) ]ii2qLdo ]AsQ)9 IaXsd
]oV^ ^^ZomZ . olgu ]v^Snso ^ i 1 i 1 *^>\< * tj^juicajo
, ^>v>V ^\sl IcFili. .^.i>?QS^ : ]"^\V)> >acnnnn','\s'o> e
A >ipr> n 1Zqq.i?i ASOwj* t >^Znn\V)> 14^* l^'Jka U^^i 7
jaA^ IZorAij t*iwAk) : ^^oi!^ loOL .^.KaV> |joi!^4^ .]]q:^
Z^* : ^Qjir** *-ZcA ^o 'U'-'' Bii^oi ^ j^-i^orilo
Psalm li. 110.
..>vn ^r> lAmloo :Aj14m >^>QuSn ^* .^^lao^Qjl^
326 CHRESTOMAIHY FIRST LESSONS IN TRANSLATING.
6^> AjI* :*jlLd1 ^jLjAi4r:) Ioi^mjdo Ai^^Z] ]]qisj
7D0)'<' :wkjAl>0] ^ASOILm) lA>rnnr> Aj^. lA^QOiD
o .
: joL] ]^Z ^o cjini ,iii\\>'i ]djI]o Isjopii - Av
9:*iS wiZnS'ocf) ^GiLso *^6i^ ^ y^^] y^Cl]*
Psalm civ. 1 10.
1 IbaiO lOkl : ^ ^'r^ ^Ot!L Vr^ Vn^ ^1 ^u^'^^^'
2*^1 UiO* o^ASD : Uo^'r^ 5^1 UCJIOJ *jlQoZ]0* ,an\
5]]> oujiiASiD ^IijI^Z]* : Ir^ 1)QJ ^0iQimSiAk30
6 ^ouAxmi Uo-i'r!^ )^1 V^oaiZ* : ^^<n\s :>q1i1 wiJ^oiZ
7j^.*iQii>l]o^o ^-i^'ri;^Z|o^* :"lliDQkiDlja4^o
sAioZjliZlo lAioa oAmjo 1jcl4 nnSm* :^-i^oi)ASd
10 t^ inSoilD l?Q-4 AiaQo ]1^q Uo^i^ Z>,ji^
CHRESTOMATHY.
KOTES ON THE READING LESSONS-
After having analyzed the first page of the Chrestomathy, and thus
given a specimen of the manner in which the learner should proceed in
reading his first lessons in Syriac, it will only be necessary, in re-
spect to the remaining pages of the Chrestomathy, to explam the
derivation and formation of the most difficult words which there
occur. Thus the student will be thrown upon his own resources, and
be induced, it is hoped, to assiduously study his grammar.
EXPLANATIONS.
Matthew ii. 1 10.
1) Yerse 1. word 3., r^^l is a verb in the Ethpeel conjugation,
from r-i^*
2) V. 1. w.t., wilOQa^ is compounded of O a preposition and
a10CLa a noun of the fourth decl. construct plural, from ^Q-i
7 -> ? *
3) Y. 1. w. 10., oZ] is a verb from ]l] Pe. pret. 3d. masc. plural
(vid. 1fl8. 16).
7 *
4) Y. 2. w. 5., ^^a1t is a verb from |V***
5) Y. 2. w. 10., -tfinV) is a verb m the mfin. pret., from jv-CD
6) Y 3. w. 5., ^l221 is a verb in Ethpeel conjugation, from ^0\
or ^1
7) Y. 4. w. 1., .la is a verb in Pa. conjuga<;ion, from *Aia.
328 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMAIHY.
8) Y. 4. w. 2., tOOllo-from Lo and takes the noun suffix-3d
masc. plural.
9) Y. 4. w. 3., .-i^^-constr. plural from *Sj
10) Y. 4. w. 1, \>)ASsD-is a part, from \]m .
11) Y. 4. w. 8 and 11., ]6a\ jSJ'Asb* These two words
indicate the imperfect tense, the latter word being a passive parti-
ciple ( vid. 64. 2. B.a; 65. B. a).
12) Y. 6. w. 6., *jA-001 is a verb in the second person from |OCn
13) Y. 6. w. 12., *5QaJ-third, masc. fut. Pe., from *n2LJ
14) Y. 6. w. 15., ->aiOi \p is a verb in the fut. with suflBx, from
15) Y. 1. w. 8., M-Jipb is compounded of P-1 and d (vid.
Lexicon),
16) Y. T. w. 10., -iVmZI is a verb in Ethpe. pret. from ll>*
It) Y. 8. w. 6., Q^l is a verb in the imperative from ^ll (vid.
28. 1 and 2).
'^ 7 -n 7
18) Y. 8. w. Y., n*^OS, imperative from *^OS
19) Y. 8. w\ 12,, jiC31jLJ0A**.a(j is composed of *aOU-meaning
/im-3d. masc. suffix, y that a conjunction*-and JOA*xS| averb
7
in Aph. conjugation,2d. plural, from t >T
20) Y, 8, w. 13., o2 is a verb 2d. pi. masc, (vid. 28. 2. Rem.)-
p *
imperative from (2| /o co77?e.
21) Y. 8. w, 14., wiJOlOM is a verb from (Om 2d. masc.
plural, imperative, with a suffix pronoun (vid. 3t. table of verbs IJ
with suffixes ; 3t. 3).
22) Y. ID. w. 5., CLir^is a verb from \r>^*
23) Y. 10. w. t., \Lay is an adjective noun, fern. sing, construct,
from t^)
*In connection with the preceding word P^; it forms a compound conjunction
meaning when. (vid. ^ 85 4. d. a).
NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 329
Mark xiv. 32 42.
24) V. 32. w. 4., ]1'^ALd> is composed of ]l*r^^ and J
The relative J with the preceding pronoun should be rendered that
which (vid. 56. 3. a)-^;iASjD is an Ethpe. pass, participle, from
25) Y. 32. w. 8., oaZ-imperative from ^tl ( 29. 2. Rem).
26) Y. 32. w. 11., "t^LSC-Pa. act. participle from tl.
27) Y. 33. w. 1., O^IQdASq^ is composed of the prefix preposi-
tion and the verb infinitive Ethpe.
28) Y. 33. w. 8., QQlZAi-^O is composed of the conjunction O,
the prep. ^^ and the verb in the infinitive from *OQl or JO^
7 7 <j
29) Y. 34. w. 9., OQO- imperative from |QO*
30) Y. 34. w. 11., 0*p^ZZ]o-imperative, Ethpe. from >OLor;^.
31) Y. 35. w. 9., (n>'mV)-Aph. fem. participle, from n
32) Y. 35. w. 10., 'r^T-Pe. future, from 'r^*
33) Y. 37. w. 5., ^^^^? is a participle, plural from ,iaV>? and
that from the verb ^^^?
34) Y. 37. w. 15., b'riZASD-infinitive, Ethpe. from )Q1 or 'A*
35) Y. 38. w. 2., qS. ^ra2/-imperative, Pa. from 1^^*
36) Y. 38. w. 4., ^qSsZ {yQ)shallmter-'?Q. fut. 2nd. plural, from
^SLorV^i.
37) Y. 38. w. 8., In I \^\ willing-SLCt part. f. Pa. from %)Q4
38) Y. 40. w. 9., .OCJllLii their eijes-from \ij^ with a plural
suffix pronoun.
39) Y. 40. w. 10., Tr^-Q^ heavy-SiU. adjective in the plural, from
17 ^
10 7 X
40) Y. 40. w. 13., ^^^r* knew-from ^r
41) Y. 41. w. 8., OMuuZZlorg^^ye-Ethpe. imperative from ***QJ
or
330 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.
42) y. 41. w. 14., ^(l^tMl^ being betrayed-Eth^pe. participle from
43) Y. 42. w. 2., ^Uj future of ^ll to go.
44) Y. 42. w. 6., y>\ V) betraifing-Aiph. participle from !^\ii
Luke xxiii. 18 27.
45) Y. 18. w. 1., Qi^ cried out-Sd. masc. plural, from lio
46) Y. 18. w. 6., *jiau.-^QO take him away-2n6.. masc. plural,
imperative, with suffix pronoun (vid. 36. E table of suffixes).
47) Y. 20. w. 8.J IjmJ-future from I',* to release.
48) Y. 21. w. 6., .-iai^aQDI cn<a/i/ /^m-imperative, with a suffix
7
from ^SiO] ^ ^
49) Y. 22. w. 19., ^(JlQ^yj]-I ivill chastise him-fat. 1st. sing. Pe.
10 ,
>J with a suffix pronoun.
50) Y. 22. w. 21., ^aiQjLQ-^l*l-/ will let him ^o-future, Pe.
7
1st. singular, with a suffix pronoun, from Ql
X > 7 7
51) Y. 23. w. 3., |^*^oZ with OOOl urged-a part, from jQDZ
52) Y. 23. w. 10., *jOLilJQ21)P (that) they shall crucify him-
7
pret. Pe. fut. 3d. masc. plural, with suffix pronoun, from 2ID1 (vid.
36. Table).
53) Y. 24. w. 4., loofZ should Z>e-future of ibcjl
54) Y. 24. w. 5., tOaiAjLj* (according to) ^Aejr fife^ire-a feminine,
sing, noun, with a plural suffix (16. Table).
55) Y. 25. w. 16., ^Oll^Q* their wHI-sl noun with a suffix
plural from . lO
56) Y. 26. w. 2., ^-\or>V> leading or causing to lead away- Aiph.
part, plural from nSHa
y * 7 -^
57) Y. 26. w. 4., 0,.>*1 /ai^ Mc? o/-from h^|
NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 33]
58) Y. 26. w. 13., ^4J might carry-Mnre from ^.
59) Y. 2T. w. 8., xr^r^ bewailivg-Aph. part, from fOy
Luke xxiii. 33 42.
60) Y. 33. w. 5., ]I*r^^ calkd-Ethpe. pass, participle, from 1 JjO
61) Y. 34. w. 7., ^Ql^m fargive-imi^eTSitiye, from -<^^^
62) Y. 34. w. 16., Oiiiillcii^^-Aph. 3d. plural from lioi.
-no p
63) Y. 35. w. 1., ^\o ^/aTi^^iwfi'-participle from ^OO*
64) Y. 35. w. 12., VlfAjU to o^^^r^-plural from ^>*l-with the
prefix prep. Lomad.
X 7 y
65) Y. 35. w. 13., .~i-m1 saved- Ai^h. pret. from 1jl>**
66) Y. 35. w. 14., ih*i shall save-Ai^h. future, from m-m*
17 7
67) Y. 36. w. 1., ^-i^MpQSO- mocA;i7?^-part. from A*1^
68) Y. 37. w. 8.,Vki1 save-imperat. Aph. from m-m
7 7 *
69) Y. 42. w. 3., wi.lap>Z'| re?mmher ww-imperat. Ethpe. with
7
suf. from J3?
Luke xxiii. 4353.
70) Y. 45. w. 3., ^fif}^ was rent-Eth-pe. part, from Ij-* 2 is
transposed and changed into ^ ( 12. 2. Rem.).
71) Y. 46. w. 3., yio voice-mill a prefix preposition.
.. X 7
72) Y. 46. w. 7., )^r*t^ ^^^o % A<i?i<^5-from r* with a prefix
preposition, and a suffix pronoun.
73) Y. 46. w. 8., ^]SD am/iding-Fe. ict. participle from ^Om .
74) Y. 48. w. 4., ^'^-<^ caTM together- Aph, pret. plural from
332 NOTES ox THE CHRESTOMATHY.
75) Y. 48. w. 16., tOaUrAA their breasts-from p^M with suf.
plural.
1Q) Y. 49. w. 1., ^-1 SQajD 5^<z?i^m^-part. Pe. plural from ^do
77) Y. 49. w. 6., wiOlQlOpU his a cqimintance-f rom (lOpk with
suffix.
78) Y. 51. w. 7., ]^QSD-?/?ai;m^-participle from pCD .
79) Y. 53. w. 1., GlLtJ\^took dozen- A])h. pret. from AajJ*
80) Y. 53. w. 8., |;>m <rZ?*^ cz6^-part. passive, Peal from ;OJ
81) Y. 53. w. 13., UL^ll'fwas /i^-Ethpe. pret. from Joio
2 is doubled (vid. 12. 2. Rem ; 31. 2).
Acts xvii. 2232.
82) Y. 23. w. 3., j^pAi passing J^-Ethpe. part, fi'om j^p
83) Y. 23. w. 9., AakOsI Ifound-Aph. pret. 1st. singular from
84) Y. 23. w. 14., OlAl o7ii^^ with a suffix.
85) Y. 23. w. 29., ;nfnV) dedare-Vsi. part, from ;^m
7 7 -K -K 7
86) Y. 25. w. 2., vASDAAk)z(;or5>^i;)pMzo'-Ethpa.part.fr'omvaSQ*.
87) Y. 26. w. 8., .OOCru shall he, with ^J^ should dwell^Ye.
fut. 3d. plural of the defective verb (001
88) Y. 27 w. 2., ^^>S*^ ^ee/cw^-participle from h^iS*
17 7
89) Y. 27. w. 4., ^^ I ^nsV)^ seeJcing, feding-Fsiel pass, participle
-R 7
from t'^ns
7X7 7
90) Y. 28. w. 4., ^^ > > > o?^r /i/e-pl. absolute form with suf. ^
- 7
from |i
7 T I -R
91) Y. 28. w. 5., ,^1 iNilZAk? our moving-Ethi^e. part, and
suffix from ^01 or ^1
NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 333
92) y. 28. w. 6., ^A^l-ftrg-lst. person plural from A*] *
93) Y. 28. w. 12., t<l^> who with 3/<7!*-compose(l of tOO you^
\ with and > wJw.
94) y. 28. w. 16., ^01 Q^ our offspring-from ^OIQ^ with
buffix pronoun.
7 10 7 Of
95) y. 29. w. 8., ^^1 >ni M our debt, from *^i n with a suflBx.
96) y. 29. w. 9., 'rODQk) to /AJTz^-infinitive, Pe. from rico*
97) y. 29. w. 15., Ja.^. .. wri/^en or ^mre?i-participle, Pe. from
98) y. 29. w. 16., IZoiSooliD by art, from VZoiliol .
99) y. 30. w. 15., .jQoAj shall repent-Mnre Pe. from *OoZ
or *oZ
X 7 p
100) y. 31. w. 6., tOplj that shall judge-Mnre Pe. from tj with
the prefix J
X 7
101) y. 31. w. 14., %jl1)|0 a7id showed, made knovytir-A^h. from
17 ^
102) y. 32. w 8., ^..Qa.SqSD moc/aVio-participle, Pa. from *OQiD
Romans vi. 1 10.
OOJ shall remain-Pa., future from |QO
104) y. 1. w. 8., jAjZZ 5A/Z Se a52*w^?i^-Ethpa. future from )Aa
105) y. 2. w. t., 1*J^J 5^^// /jf6-future Pe. from ^Lm*
7 7
106) y. 3. w. 6., ^A^^} who were baptized-^ret Pe. 1st. pi.
7*7
com. from r^Q^ with the prefix >
7 -A
lot) y. 4. w. 1., ^;i:ioZ| are bu.riedr-Ethipe. pret. 1st. pi. com.
7
from ;A0 *
\ 7
108) y. 4. \v. 14., wiOlQOljo/i^w/k^Aer-a noun jn the suffix state,
334 NOTES ox THE CKRESTOMATHY.
3(1. masc. singular, from %Ci f with the prefix >
109) Y. 4. w. 20., jAcnJ 5Aow/<i ic/^-future Pa. from y\a\
110) Y. 5. w. 4., ^O f.iL\ have been planied-Ethipe. pret. from JD ^*
111) Y. 5. w. 11., loau 5Aa// Z>e-future Pe. from looi.
112) Y. 6. w. 1., ,^1 iSr A-TiMTw^-participle, witli a suffix from
113) Y. 6. w. 5., lO>lf is cruciJiedr-Ethpe. pret. from *2LD1
114) Y. 6. w. 1, ^^)^Aj> ^Ai 5Ao?*/^^ Je rfe^^r^j^/e^-Ethpa. from
^^s4^ with the prefix j
* 7 I *
115) Y. 8. w. 6., ^SlLiGU Jg/igre-Aph. future from ^Sd^ *
116) Y. 8 w. 10., |j1j%A^)!/Z fe-future Pe. from ]1m.
IIY) Y. 9. w. 13., .^^Amk) beiTig powerful-Ethpa. participle
from ^^-^ *
118) Y. 10. w. 9., *a-M living-peirt. Aph. from (xa**
CoLossiANS iii. 1 15.
119) Y. 1. w. 1., QikO ^ed-unperative of JIS*
7 7 '^
120) Y. 2. w. 2., QI9Z) lei your affections he ^Zacft^-Ethpe. im-
perative, from {Ly
X 7 7 ^-R .. 7
121) Y. 3. w. 4., tO^> > 2/02* r /z/e-from |i > n with a suffix
pron. and the prefix O *
122) Y. 4. w. 9., tOi^tZZ (ye) ^^^Z/ ^^^'^^r-future Ethpe. from
\-
123) Y. 5. w. 1., oAjlLdI 7nortify-Aph. imperative from Lk!^*
X .. 7 P 7
124) Y. 5. w. 3., 0'^iV)>01 your member s-Bn&ix state, 2nd. masc.
plural from V5>01
NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 335
125) Y 5. w. 11 and 12., -i01 ^ClJ* These pronouns seem to
include the substantive verb (comp. 54. 3. a).
126) Y. 1. w. 8., ^-fcjaaoiALo turning or having turned-Ethpa.
from wOaoi
12t) Y. 8. w. 3., QwwAJf put away~Aph. from mOJ or ujJ *
128) Y. 9. w. 2., ^OOOlZ i/e ^AaZ/ 5e-future from looi
129) Y. 9. w. 3., ^A.j^.r^ h^f^t <^6cwV/z^participle Pa., from
180) Y. 9. w. 7., tJkClQM^QM put off, cast ai/jaj^imperative Pe.,
from fciK^s It takes a suffix.
131) Y. 9. w. 12., ^Oioaaboi his deeds-suS. state, plural from
27 r.
^ . , f^L^J who being renewed-Ethi^a. part, pas-
. rJsi with the prefix J
-n p 1 '
133) Y. 10. w. 6., 0U;Q> w^ crm^e^ Ai7-from |JQ with a suf.
pronoun, with the prefix j
.^j-I^-mO ^?2^;? Z>e/M/'e^-plural from f*^i*^A*
with the prefix O
v 7 7 y
135) Y. 13. w. 1., ^AaOOlO and ^/^-frora 001 with the verbal
termination-2nd. pi. with the prefix O
136) Y. 13. w. 2., ^^IdjJOiHiD forbearing-Fa. part, from ;ifiD
137) Y. 15. w. 1., OlSl22:lb*0 and his peace, from |SdX with suf.
pronoun, and prefix O
138) Y. 15. w. 4., ^QDLClC3^your hearts, from \Ol^ with suf. prou.
^ I -h
139) Y. 15. w. 6., ^oLt'rOL] ye are called-Eih. 2nd. plural from
-n 7
140) Y. 15. w. 10., ^^)a Sd thanJcful-psiTt. active Aph. from
1U.
336 NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY.
Revelations y. 1 10.
141) Y. 1. w. 1., 2a^1>jO atid I saw-X^\\. pret, 1st. sing. fr(ni
IVm with prefix
142) Y. 2. w. 10., oaAalQ^ to open-Va. infinitive from o^As
with prefix !^ *
143) Y. 3. w. 17., CTU1m>V)\ to look on iV-infin. with suffix from
ll-M with the prefix ^
144) Y. 4. w. 2., AaOOI zV w-formed from A^l and 001, ] being
dropped. The phrase, including the word precedmg and the one
followmg, means literally, it is weeping much.
145) Y. 4. w. 7., .^i^AsI was found-'E\h^. from
146) Y. 5. w. 8., UlCiZ literally thou shalt 7eep-2nd. per. fut.
masc-put for the unperative (vid. 61. B. a).
141) Y. 6. w. 6 , ^\oy to stand. ^\o is a participle from ^OO
(vid. 64. 3. B. Rem.).
148) Y. 6. w. 8., ]rtVnj slain-psiss. part. Peal. fem. from *mnu
149) Y. 6. w. 21., ^9>A(> who were sent-M. per. f. plural,
,77
Ethpa. from J>
Revelations xxii. 1 10.
7^7 if ''
150) Y. 2. w. 23., wiOlQs'p^O and leaves of it-from Izi'^i with
a suffix, and prefix 0*
151) Y. 3. w. 4., looiJ shall 5e-future of looi
-X 7
152) Y. 3. w. 14., wiOUJOmSOmJ shall serve him-fut. 3d. masc.
> 7 ~
plural, Pa. from oftios with a suffix.
,77
153) Y. 5. w. 16., JOllI^D causing to shine- Aph. part. masc. from
>ou.
N0TE8 ON THK CHRESTOMATHY. 33T
154) Y. 6. w. 15., OiO>V>\ to sAow-iufmitiYe, Pa. from iuCLm*
155) V. 8. w. 13., rM ^rnSoN to woj'ship, to ;>raMe-infinitive, Peal
from rve^ *
156) Y. 11. w. 1., ]\i^ shall be filthy-fat. Ethpa. from \L*
15t) Y. 14. w. 15., toSsi they shall enter in-fut. 3d. masc. Peal
from ^\l
158) Y. It. w. 4., \L co7;ie-imperative of |Z(
,7 7 , r
159) Y. 19. w. 3., JfJ^ shall take away-Feal future from >^^
338 NOTES OX THE CHRESTOMATHY.
POETRY.
"We present a few specimens of Syriac poetry, taken from the
Peshito Bible, published by the British and Foreign Bible Society,
in 1826. It will be observed that the text does not appear in a
rhythmical form, nor are there any divisions into verses. The
Peshito or literal version was made near the close of the first,
or beginning of the second century, while the divisions into chapters
and verses were introduced in the thirteenth century. Points, in
addition to Rihui, will be noticed over and under particular letters.
These are intended to mark the occurrence of Kushoi and Rukok.
Psalm xlv. 110.
1) Yerse 2. word 9., ^JOlL^^ therefore. This is composed of the
conjunction m-^Sd and the suffix pronoun JJ01 Conjunctions as
well as other particles often take suffixes.
2) Y. 3. w. 1., 1SD)| cast (gird)-Aph. imperative, from poi*
See a sunilar instance in Matt. xvii. 2t.
Psalm li. 110.
3) Y. 2. w. 1., lyefi^l multiply-im])QVdiirfQ, Aph. from LwCD used
here adverbially in the sense of vary much.
4) Y. 2. w. 2,, * i 1 > .1 i ! wash we-imperative, Aph. from v^tO*
with a suffix pronoun.
NOTES ON THE CHRESTOMATHY. 339
5) V, 2. w. 7., %A.ia> cleanse ?M-imperative, Pa. from p> with a
suflQx pronoun.
6) Y. 3. w. 8., ^^niSnn in all time, always-from la all, ^]
time and the prefix preposition, Q in.
7) Y. 4. W.8., D>>lZ> ^A<2^ thou mighlest he just-Ethpa. 2nd. sing.
raasc. future from 0>1 The preformative falls away as the coa-
j unction J precedes.
8) Y. 6. w. 7., waAAl>0| thou Tnakest me to know-^xxidi. sing. pret.
Aph. from ^pi with a suffix pronoun.
9) Y. 9. w. 7., I \ llot owMmperative Pe. from VaI*
Psalm civ. 1 10.
10) Y. 5. w. 1., ^A| ^prepared, laid-Ethpe Jrom JJLO*
11) Y. 5. w. 4., CJUJLDALO-participie with a suffix pronoun from
12) Y. 7. w. 7., ^A^OljA^ hastening-an Ethpe. participle, from
13) Y. 9. w. 6., OUOmniO and (that) they should Twt arcer-M.
plural, Pa. from tCQO with a suffix pronoun, and the conjunction O
preceding.
SYRIAC LEXICON,
jof, ]o]] suf. *jjd1 a father, pi.
|OL.r::)| |^aio( parents.
rS| to perish, Aph. to cause to
perish, to destroy.
^ojQ ( to be sad, to be disturbed.
^ iioj Abnil (name of an idol).
^cn;:Dl Abraham.
lUi I m. a reward.
12^.'| a letter, a writing.
pj I an ear.
O I or.
0( ! (mark of the vocative).
AjJDoI namely, that is (from 0|
and AxO).
VZoiliol skill, ability.
VALDOJ^f. a nation.
;j^o1 Ophir (a proper name).
-kCn>0| Edessa in Mesopotamia
(a proper name).
X^kio] a way.
1A >)o1 the law book of Moses,
the Pentateuch.
^qXjo1 Jerusalem.
^ll to go, to go away.
\L] brother.
rjJ\ to hold, to seize, to lay
hold of.
U'r^\ the last, the end.
^*rJsl, Iju'r^jl another; fem.
lA-^'r-jal, pi. m. ^>*1,
C -X I
Jjl4sc1u^| an Egyptian.
Aat^SJOyj-il Adverh, like the
Egyptians.
Ipi"! hand-in Hebrew ^ .
]pi1 who, which, fem. of P-**!*
y^S\ SO as, according to, as to,
{secundum) nearly, > j^| just
as, therewith.
]n-al where? > P 1 there,
where ; p >(] whither ? P-a |
^iD whence ?
Q^^l where.
342 SYEIAC
f 'J
r r t 7
SO
, . 7 7'
^1, tlQ-il how? > Usui
that.
^^iNil pi. they,
,-jil truly, certainly, yes.
(JL1 who, what-Uatr^ at what.
.n m I Isaac (a proper name).
^^^I'jXfiuj Israel (a proper name).
|;Qji{ honor, a mark of esteem,
a solemn procession.
I 7 X
A "! it is, ^Lk\ I am, etc.
MP I serpent (e;)^i6va).
pMwD ( at the same time-together.
* 7 IN
vJD"! to eat, to consume.
U^ii-^Vjust as, ? l-^^T of
such a quality (qualis).
(.a \n\ n| a stranger, a guest
1j( but, yet (aXXa), if not
(J 0).
IJ I to lament.
Tai! God.
|aC31-^ godly.
iZooi-^ f. divinity, the godhead.
P 7 ^7
^>,irnn \^ an Alexandrian.
^alL Olaph, the first letter of
the alphabet.
LEXICON.
^l-^ to learn, Aph. to cause to
learn, to teach.
]'ny\ a ship.
vv to constrain, to compel,
to urge any one, i vv. op-
pressed.
U ^-^ oppressed.
JSdI mother.
pkiD] Amida in Mesopotamia
(a proper name).
I 7 -n 17
,^ i. V) |, |1*V)|, surely, firmly.
7 -n 7 -^ 7
^1 Aph. ^^.OiOl, fut. ^SOiOU
to believe.
c 1. 7
Ljk\\ iV)f Adv. constantly.
;iD I to say, to speak.
7 T
\fi\ a lamb.
7 -n
wALd1 (with > following) if.
i> 7
p1 I, pi. ^1x1 we.
^Q 3 1 m. ^-J1 f., that (^5 J.cc.)
X X 7
Cll 1 5-^ I Antinum (a proper
name).
7 '^
vM^Jj Ethpa. to sigh.
AJf man, a certain man, pi
^AJ( and (aJ(
SYRUC
|ZqaJ| humanity, as concrete,
mankind.
L iV m. *aA jV f. thou ; pi.
^oAj^m.
^""AjTf. you.
|ZAj] a woman, a wife.
(ZoflOl a healing.
l-^Va bound, pi iV^l ^^
a prison.
VrJQ^^l stylite (according to
Assem.) -
^mimfcvCO! sedition.
n .. 7 *
|4q4^1 <^il of cinnamon.
P -X 17 ^
(ZQl4'r4co! a soldier.
ISDjLaCDl external appearance,
dress, {dyyiiLa).
pASOi^CDj hypocrite
*2)1 also, |J2)| neither.
^1' 1-^V face, ^\-l SM
over, wi^U accordmg to,
towards.
|2)QQQ.B^j a bishop.
7 It
%Si 1 to be anxious, uneasy.
^li^il [Lay] four.
p i-n -ft
]n^i1 heterodox.
LEXICON. 843
p
Vii] a lion.
ISOj) I Arius.
7 J^
%OQy%i J2DCLk)| Areopagite.
JJQO>| a ruler, a chief man.
OPT
V&l0)l a Syrian, a Gentile.
p 7 -n-ft
l4o ty)>1 an errorist, a heretic.
.miflO?] heresy (al'^so'jj).
JU| earth, land, country.
I to find, Ethpe. to be found.
pDQ ^ 2 As I the six days work,
the creation.
p -n
fZl to come, Aph. to lead, to
bring, to conduct.
7 7 ff 7
JL], (jZ) a place, a region.
*Q in, from, through, to.
filNti:^ a possessor of a bath.
X 7 1
^"lo, tcU^ a pulpit {(Briiia).
*> 7
^Q-. pQ hence.
ZoiS to be ashamed, Aph. to
make ashamed.
7 *
]ZZoiQ shame, disgrace.
).^qLq2, wiZq^QjO a counselor.
[_Sq QDQ a agreeableness,
amiableness.
|jQQ awkward, uneducated.
su
SYRIAC LEXICON.
jVO Pa.
mock.
7 y
*\^ to deride, to
12; M Q (from IZ; A*1 end)
finally.
^^.4^ to cease, to destroy.
^4^ to conceive.
|i4o pregnant.
7 7
among, between.
m. (AflUJS evil.
m. an evil person-pi. ^AjlS,
flOain malice.
>^Q > n Besoe (a monk-proper
name).
A * A " '
Aa^ = A 1 1 Q between, by ;
hi I Q ^ out ; ^i'cnj
AaJD Mesopotamia.
-ft p 7 i> p > ..
Aa^, (AaA a hoase, (a^O)
AjlQ the Roman dominion.
^*jwJiAj^ Bethlehem (a proper
name).
Ibo to weep.
,ili TTlthout.
>.7 ,.., ,.7
falO pl. m. sons. MUf - - 1*^
o 7
Cmst. tl iin men, lit. sons
7
of men. ;Q is always used in the
sing, for son.
IcQO to despise. Part. P. ]miD
despised.
x I 7
g)ni Nirno Basilius (a pro-
per name.
kO% ^ 17
|ZnV)imn f. joy, benignity.
I'^C^O m. back.
^QQQ to perfume.
IVnmn odors.
JIQ to seek, with ^iD to entreat,
to demand.
^9 p -ft
|*^*^ | NS*^ enemy, an adversary.
1 Al!D the seekmg, the finding out.
, 7
J ^a to take away.
r^^ m. small-l^^fcO feminine.
fZo;^^ a small matter (for the
Adj. small).
I O *^ to explore, to discover,
Ethpa. with 2 to contemplate,
too a gnat, a midge.
fO, V^ sou. li\lji^ *jio au
inhabitant of the city.
1^ to create.
toj^oik Barabbas (a j^roper
name).
7
^;o;o a Barbarian.
7 7
t^j;o Bardesanes (a proper
name).
|Aj,!o houses, pl. feminine.
7
5^; O to fall down, to bend the
knees, Ethpa. to receive a bene-
diction, to bless one's-self.
SYRIAC I
V
>0'^ but, yet.
*mJ;o Etkpa. to become man.
iti^'r^ man.
lo;0 the lightning, brightness.
]l'r^, lya a daughter, pi. Al5
|JoA:D, f A^oAiD a young woman,
a maiden.
5Z\0 after, ^-OjAq afterwards.
^Ao jAo soon, (literally),
shortly thereupon.
IjLi, l^t an arrow, dart.
)iQ.* to choose, to select.
U^i-yi a side, a part, f^i-y\
|J-Sdcd> the wrong side, i. e. an
enemy.
p^. the choice.
1 ALjl1.. a formation, a creature.
;^., Il^kt a man, a person.
^^nn . Gethsemane (a proper
name)"!
*2)-.P^. 2)p,t to blaspheme.
iir.. to meet with any one, to
happen to any one.
Q-. in the midst, Qve^ within.
^>Qyk a troop, a multitude.
EXICON. 345
(2)>Q.t m. blasphemy.
M-JQ.I shame, disgrace.
]-i>Q.. Guria (proper name of
a woman).
I^JOLy circumcision.
54**Hy to laugh, to mock.
f^for.
lJ-.i to uncover, to discover,
Etkpe. to be discovered, to be
made known.
l^yt to rob, Ethpe. to be robbed.
Zu]ll^yi public, free.
p..i^y Gahlee (a proper name).
[y > \.t a revelation.
.^ij;^.. to engrave.
|Zo;AV)yt an accomplishment,
perfection.
,SCU to fulfill, to finisb.
Vri=if^ mighty.
VUi Pass. Fart. IWm hidden,
unknown.
|.iJ. to lend.
jni-. , |Ql-t race, family (/^vog)^
offspring.
jaaco.* Aph. *CDm I to lie down.
;!- to scold, with Q
(.i^^t the north.
po^t a bone, a hmb.
346
SYRIAC LEXICON.
> mark of the Genitive ; Rela-
tive Pronoun; while, that, there-
with, in order that.
7
.>xfD> to offer. Fa. the same.
p It
U*^y an offering.
*^y to carry, to take, Ethpe. to
be conducted, to conduct ones-
self.
^. J to lie, Fa. ^^i ?
(Za\.. J a falsehood.
{dClJ gold.
|;O0> behavior.
I 7
,-iO> David, sometimes written
)OCFU> (a proper name).
X -p -X ^0 .
^0>, poj, jAaoj, place.
X
^11 J, ^) to crush.
^^.**> to fear, to worship.
1> I 7 *
1A^> fear, terror, ]J\, Z\LjsjJ
superstition.
IP t> 7
Q^j an evil spirit, the Devil.
po^j to be possessed of an evil
spirit.
* \y aj a word accompanying the
Fossessive Fron. 16, nSn?
who is my, or my.
5,A-L> thy, or who is thy.
^> but (^i).
-^0 97
^JUj a Judge.
(la) judgment.
* This is formed from ^ and V^ , Vid.
reference above. Tr.
9 7
^^> Daison (the proper name
of a river).
10 7
\^y a cloister.
*P 5 7
Wr^^ ^ monk.
|Zql;j> monastic life.
X 1 7X
> O iAa> testament (^laS^jxr]).
Pj, jloj pure, clean.
^0 X 7
P> Pa. jlO? to purify.
7
pj to remember.
^>, and ISdj the blood.
(ZqSdj a resemblance, an image,
a likeness.
X^^} similar.
t) "7 .. 7
U^? Constr. St. wiiDj value.
^J to sleep.
^ 7
y A V) > sleepmg ; Matt. viii. 24, pi. .
..X 7
7
^12iD> to weep.
7
jliOj Ethpa. to wonder at, to ]je
astonished.
^y to judge, Fass. Fart, ^j
judged.
PmJj the feast of the appearance
of Christ ; Epiphany.
*!> 7
[xn^ the beard.
^jj Aph^jyy to comprehend.
jlij an arm.
7
v*)j to encounter, to speak with
any one.
SYRIAC
Toi lo I
fjOl Fa. -fc)Cn to lead, to guide.
IjOl this, she, PronSChal., ^j^n)-
T
^JOl members.
1)J01 honor, glory.
OOl m. *a01 f. and OOl m. wiCTI
7
f. that, the former ; > 001 who;
) ^OL.^ since.
looi to be {Verh Subst.) Fut.
loou^
X -x
CLiOOl he, she.
X
^ 001 them.
^0 -x
joaooi customs, deeds.
^r^OI there, then.
ii" ' ''
P-a^Ol a temple, a palace.
y/n iVn ,rri faith, belief, doc-
trine, Ili^Q* ^^-"'^ the sav-
ing faith.
ZoOOl in like manner.
^^o^Ol therefore.
^--DOl, U-^^ so, in this manner.
^Ol, ^OlL hence, for, there.
j^Ol Pa. to wander, to go forth,
to walk.
\^ they, these.
.01, J JOl m. IjOl f. plur. ^QJOl
m. ^xJOl f. this.
LEXICON. 347
p-ftJOl advantage, pleasure.
7
^01 to return, A'ph. to lead
back.
D>0)ai Herod (a proper name.)
p>01 here, hither.
^01, t^OI now, at present.
1o the letter Yan^ and.
^1 to redeem, Fut. ^p. Fa.
T> 7
^1, ll^l time, pi. liSl Acts
xvii. 26.
y *"7 17 y7
1 Aiai , ^Z?Z> or ^^ 1 ,1 ni r^ALii-i
twice ; ^-^1^1 ALZ thrice ;
y)'r-^ ^ ^1 before.
7 '
^-.l to grow dumb, to put to
silence.
)qji)1 just, upright.
*-)jl to be just, wOjl it befits,
it "is suitable, it is becoming.
lA-a Ojl agreement, corres-
pondence.
"JAdjI alms.
Zul;jiOll Adv. carefully.
>011 Bth'pa. to beware.
]*jwa01 praise, show, splendor.
.rr>.Air>^ Zenobius (a proper
name).
348
SYRIAC LEXICON.
Viol.
^01, ^i to move, to be restless.
1^01 a moving, a dance.
iSiO\ hyssop.
]ql1 honor, splendor.
PV*! a weed,
^1 to arm.
PI to conquer, to vanquish.
^9 7
[.mJD] a conqueror.
|;.A.k}l a song.
^ species, kind.
.A.J1, PftJl m. fornication.
IZo^i fornication.
>ail, 1>Q11 little, JOIV^ U? not
small.
7
..Oil to cry, to call,
|'^>ni cross.
7
%2lQ] to crucify, to torture.
IjU* free, l)iK;2 free.
>0* ought.
hfc.*Q *^ * quiet, concealed resi-
dence.
%C X 7 X .. I 7
tO a n K> beloved, pi. iniQAj^
I 7
n > n K Habib (a proper name).
.? 7
(;^Aj an associate, the other,
any one.
7
>*^* to enclose.
Kh^ a feast, a feast day.
^U*
\r^-y\^ lame.
j-M m. (rJs f. one, a certam one,
% P 7 7
any one |n0 ,^ Sunday.
I or
fpja, wftr_ja to rejoice ; ]L^J
1^0 ,-K> to rejoice very much.
f^LOpAA rejoicmg.
>pA* mutual, reciprocal.
(Oj-^*, I^OpM gladness.
h^r^ joy.
Mr** the breast, pi. suff. Luke,
xxiii. 48.
, 7
Jr^ to surround, to flow around.
|JJC71 honor, majesty.
7 P
>^jfj^ around.
ipM to renew.
7 *.. 7
fZ,-M new, 1)1. lZrK
II 7
Q>*, Fa. aCU to show, to in-
dicate.
% 7
^Qa love.
|irnV)Qjsj perseverance, patience.
P;iCLm injury.
(I XI to see Ethpe. to be seen, to
appear.
1 01 M a vision, pi. \lO\l* an
apparition.
P X
x\A^ June.
01.ja to bind.
\^\j^ bond, union.
(ZVjsj a view.
14^ to eiT, to sin.
|ai4>^ m. sin, crime, pi. )-n^,
fOl^Ak and ^Ol^AA*
TAj4a* f. sin.
lA^M wheat, pi. 14^ .
M-M to lire, Apk. %mj^]
B._ja and | > t life. (It always
has the plural form but gen-
erally a singular signification.
p 7 ..107
ni i m. a debtor, pi. ^^in* i
fZOLi-M living creature, an animal,
a monster.
I 7
^\jLJvi, |Ja.x a force, an army.
^ > > to strengthen.
.A\i > and pA^jLjsj strong.
f *^> linen, fine linen.
^ X 7 ^ l> X 7
S0'*^"% (V7>nM wise, plural
I .. I 7 ^ - ..17
,V.^>. and |V)>n*
]ASQa*A wisdom.
7
fjja vinegar.
V^Q- \> a gnat, a fly.
7
4 -^ to mingle, Ethpa. to
take part, to associate with
any one.
>Q.klLj, ]V>i\m sound, healthy.
7
vIa* to wash.
SYRIAC LEXICON. 349
^>Q-Lm to dream, Etkpe to re-
cover.
^'nSki for, instead of.
ASo** Ethpe. to be angry.
(AS^AA anger, wrath.
|A.|^Aaa a sigh.
^1a* we, us, pi. c. from p|
i*^! i a heathen, an idolater.
JXUa, %DQjsa far be it.
X 7
^mi vehement, strong.
7
^aCU to envy, with *0
I^Lm to cover Ethpa. to conceal
oneVself.
A^l^i^M dihgently.
7
',Su* Aph. to blush, to be ashamed.
# 7
{^^ the back, the loms.
>Qja to be white.
\^ to see, to look out.
^\j^, ^'r^l to curse, to detest.
^77
j^ja Pa. to liberate.
^ ^ " ''
pi^ a magician, a sorcerer.
12-H^ f. from l2-r>ll finally, the
end, enough.
]jlk endurance, suffering.
^QA, po>i darkness, pi
^-^QA>I Eph. iv. 18.
^Aa* to mark, to seal.
]LcAaa a seal.
350
SYRIAC LEXICON.
t^u.
ioili a rumor, a report.
.^4 ^4/- go<^d. Adv. very.
^u.i4 Part. P. m. sealed.
iLo^ seal.
^q4 P. t^iJL^ to be ready, to
be willing.
jlOQ^ the pious, the good.
(jAqq^ happy, blessed.
iooid^, and lioo^ kind, family,
offspring.
|Aj-^q4 vine, branch.
l^ iQ ^ readiness.
(CQ^Q^ a part (tomus.)
.ao^, ^^ to swim over any-
thing, to overflow.
fjQ^ a mountain.
^)Q4 distress, misfortune.
}. .1 M - 04 that which is con-
cealed, |!Lsq4s secret.
X 7 -x 7
Q *^ (j , fZonn ^ goodness, excel-
lence, benevolence, grace.
.^Xia^ to order, (Taccsiv).
|mn^ an arrangement, order,
state (Tafjj).
1J4, | i \^ a young man, a youth.
|AaX4 a girl, a maiden.
n !
^-ik^ to carry.
nN(^ Ethpa. to be dispersed.
lsb.4 foul, detestable.
1^1 (t unclean.
]Zo^lfc> uncleanness.
{14 to wander, to wander around,
to forget, with ^ to fall from
something, to apostatize, Aph.
to mislead, to deceive, to cheat.
|Zoi\^ error, heresy.
^Ql^ to taste, to taste well.
^.^ to be laden, to bear, Aph.
to cause to carry, to bring.
p
{^Zi2Ll=^a^) *2lI to over-
run. Aph. *2l41 to overflow,
to fill.
JCnZLi, Ethpe. ,mi^^Zl to ac-
quiesce, to obey.
J^ to chase away, to drive away
7 y 7 -^
JZi'rL to strike, Ethpe. ^'rLl] *
ySi'fi a leaf.
^0 .P P
()j, tVi fine, suitable, proper.
i>- 7
JCLk^ to wish very much, Ethpa.
the same.
^^.ilu to lead, to lead away,
*<n ,, I to dry up.
6YRIAC LEXICON.
351
r^, \r^\ hand, ,^.0 by, with help,
on account of.
|p-i Aph. -jO| to thank, with
' JD to believe in somethmg, to
confess.
p, m. acknowledged, known.
(Alpfc f. knowledge.
\i,.ji to know, to be acquainted
'with ; Ethjpe. to be known ;
Aph. to make known, to in-
dicate.
(.Ip*, [LOfjk an acquaintance, one
known.
lAl, h knowledge, insight, de-
vice.
7
^ r^ m to give. Imperative
- 7 -p 7
%.r:)G1 ; with \MSil to give
up one's life.
(ji)OaLi, 90au Judsea, ]j>oaU9
pi. Jews.
%QQ1 >10CU Jovmian (a proper
name).
9 7 .
'^ -^^^^ John (a proper name.)
^aCQQji Joseph (a proper name).
Si 0>\qji Julius ( a proper name ) .
P 7t -X
IP01 >\0i Julian (a proper
name).
(l*^\0* a doctrine, teaching.
^Q-a, "Isiol day, ]^^in
7 -kP !> 7
by day, ^iDO*, JlSDQa to day.
z
now ; >00 ^n daily.
for T ff r
M-SOLft a Greek, A^] JOi Adverb.
in the Greek manner, accord-
ing to the Greeks.
^>Za, P>Zq^ use, advantage.
*0 P II
Ml ^ hermit.
1 ^ to bring forth, Ethpe. to
be born.
1'r-Al birth.
15 9w #7
>0 N> a small boy, a child.
\SiQ ^ a teacher, a learned
man.
**n\ i to learn, Aph to inform.
|V) i the sea.
|V) * to swear, Aph. to cause to
swear, to swear to.
P I 7
|1 iV) the right hand, the right.
*P -x p
(^QIji a suckling, a baby.
-> X
%lQ.a Aph. to add.
jl to increase rapidly.
. 7
nonS> Jacob (a proper name).
^P 4^
{so ^ one who takes care.
,1* to burn.
IP 7
pOa flame, holocaust.
X 7 p 17^
;in>, |;>n* illustrious, honored,
great.
jD;a to be great, to increase (in
respectability).
352 SYRIA C LEXICON
|ja^ a mouth.
jlu'r^, fAlui'pi a tent.
^Q*^ Jesus.
Aa being, essence,
-ft I
^Aa to remain, to dwell, to
settle, to sit.
^Sd ;_^A^ more than.
fZo^^Zu superfluity.
>Li to win, to abound.
1p to prevent, to rebuke.
i p, (il^p passion.
MjIo justly.
"I Zojp justice, righteousness.
^]o a stone, a rock, Cephas,
or Peter.
IZp f. a rebuke.
7
*r^D perhaps.
7
fD as, during (pleonastic before
the Fart.).
iiOlD a priest.
QJOlO the priesthood.
r*jQa shame.
.9 7 .-ft .. 7
^r^OQS m. a star, ^^. pQ2QD
Matt. xxiv. 29.
I'^Sdqo a priest.
..QOQO, \nD m. a cup.
(.*.> QO a cell.
y^SDJQD a throne.
,.i M> 1 JElkpa.
tc
laying on
the hand
V
.3 each.
blush.
^7 IX -X I
JjL JQ ^O'pi^ the
or extending of
W ^ 7
\s._o all, every, , w^
l^i-Lo a dog.
^ i\o, Pa^ a crown.
ISd^^D every thing, any thing.
I'ALo a bride.
pbo how much, how much more.
7
;lQO to be amazed, to be sad.
\lD to give a surname.
(AlO a fellow servant.
\zilD bosom, lap.
7
10 to assemble, to collect to-
gether, Ethpa. to be assembled.
(lO an assembly.
|CC0 a cup.
IcQO to conceal, Pa. to cover,
Ethpa. to hide one's-self.
pus, |>mo, I* mo concealed,
p .. 7
|ll2 famine.
7
;10 to deny, to refuse, to desert
(with ^)*
7 7
p where, p^ there where.
IP to feel pain, ^ Aap it pains
one.
lip.
\jk\D sad, sorrowful, Etkpe. to
pass by, to go.
OUp, Ibup infirm, weak.
IP Aph. to announce (x>]^utf<''e'v).
|la.4^1Lp a christian.
^p to involve, to roll up, to pass
by.
I^Dp a roll, a scroll.
\1mD a collision, a shock.
\^SiMD Ethpa., w_21 A-O^l
to humbly entreat.
^to to write, Aph. the same.
loAo a writing, a book.
^5\o flax, linen.
laAo a shoulder.
hlo to remain, to remain behind.
tf not, no ; V? lest, without.
]ri!^ heart.
-^^ ^ to arouse, to che^r.
"[lAoV dress, a garment.
12q^Li.l^ a decision, reliance.
.^V to hold, to take hold.
;^V outside, without.
i^AV to clothe, to cover.
IqL Pa. to accompany, ^Mj?<i
to be accompanied, to be con
firmed.
SYRIAC LEXICON. 353
lA^Q^ abuse, insult.
WAr^nV against, towards.
Zq^ to, by, besides, with.
V^ to blot out.
pM^, >0\o only, alone.
lV)n>\ bread.
ii^, 111!^, lliS night, pi.
^oN I \ &c.
ZuL it is not.
]j L an insane person.
^"Mlover, up ; ^ ^Jyil before,
besides.
f^"^ ^ to eat.
t3onn\ opponent.
^\ ]i^^ tongue, langunuv.
]Sd that, what; J ]Sd when.
I'r^]^ word, discourse, a part
of speech.
)j|Sd a handle, a covermg.
IvnoVn spring, fountain.
liJopiSD a blessing, a benedic-
tion.
U-^, IA^-wSd scroll, volume,
roll.
y
r^s^ freely.
1 1 ^ V*^^ a wise man, pi
364 SYRIAC
(jj^fio an altar.
Vr^i^b a desert.
IZaJ;^,! redemption.
(pijlD a cloister, a chamber.
n
^r-^Lo thus, thence, therefore.
P-ifSo, lAlji,iD a town, a city.
^f^ something, ^,.liD P nothing.
^AiMbJr^ eastern, JwJr^ the
Eas't.
(s'rio a song, a hymn.
JiSD^Olk) believing, with |;-ft^
orthodox.
;jOlk5 prompt, ready.
fAcjOloi a gift.
X "K 7
^qS^, P^. *OiV> to deride.
?, -x
|>qSd myrrh.
]2Qk) death.
^^..-J^ to strike, to prick, to
bite.
|Zq>j.Sd a blow, plague, pi.
9. i> 7
|Ja.wwSD weak, humble.
^m^Sd on the morrow.
]jQaAiiD a tempest, pi. waves.
14^ to go, to come, to arrive,
3/. Fret. Z^
\s4^ from, of, over, on account
of; J ^\^ while.
LEXICON.
]\ i sf^V) a heretic, a seducer.
Ajfaii^V) secretly.
*0 .. 7
I* V) water.
Aa.^) to die, Aph. to cause to die,
to mortify.
, 7, 7
jAjlId distinguished, excellent.
POOLO humility, modesty.
*0 17
PinV) affable, modest.
v.riV) now, immediately.
P-> 17
|ZoninV> lowliness, intelli-
gence.
7 7
,i^V), ^*io to be depressed.
1J--LD to be full. Fa. to fill, ^%e.
to be filled.
t> Tt Ti -n
U Ld word, saying, plur. p !
}oP-J^ an angel, a messenger.
fI\V) a captain.
^ i-^ Sd to advise, to consult, to
reign.
y^^, "^a-Ai a king.
|Zq ^>> So a kingdom.
\\\ V> to speak, to converse,
l^kJ Abs. word.
IALLo jEmjpA., word^Z. Uio.
{la^Vo a teacher, a learned man.
IZaiajiLD learning.
Jj^SqSd speech.
SYRIAC LEXICON.
355
^Sd who ? y ^ V> that,* which,
QlLO who is this ?
7
^iD certainly (f^sv); it often is
superfluous.
^Sd of, from, on account of, since ;
LaL ^ from, of; ^-i
t J Ol afterwards, hereafter,
with sufiP, ^alo of us.
U^what?
(u >lV) a faithful servant.
lZ;iSD a candlestick.
IAjlSd a part.
|LQj;n>mV) patience.
|inff>V> poor.
VA^jQkHk) f. baptism.
l^LjiD, l2;S,Vn a hollow, a
cavern.
* p p 7
I 1 r>m <y\ Vn an mterpreter,
an explainer.
1 ^, \a ^ possible.
1 J^ to be able, Eth'pe,. the same,
to have power to do (with *S
by, through).
y2a*iD Sd splendor, light.
^^^k) in the midst.
I'AiIsd midst.
I^r^, 1-Sd, "ll-r^^ Lord, Sir, ^'^
literally my Lord (title for
bishop or any other ecclesias-
Va.-;.^.
tical person), ^;Sb our Lord,
(i. e. Christ); ^b^ title for
ecclesiastical ladies.
(i^-kXyt^So a pearl, a precious
stone.
7
>; Sd to fall off, to cast away,
to make free.
P 9k 7
|Zoj;1d a falling off, an injury.
k 7
t**;V) bold, impudent. Adv.
|4^r^ a garment.
p I 7
i;^;!^ bitter, sorrowful.
lAriiOjLb a chariot, a throne.
P PP 7
^>j;Sd that which relates to
Christ.
^^iS;V) a flock, an assembly, a
community.
Pr^^ a messenger.
* 7
.nV) to anoint.
]^SV) changable, variegated.
[>> >^<vn the Anointed, the Mes-
siah.
(OI^QaSo known, distinguished.
1 V<j^aVr> complete, perfect.
* P P 7
|i^Vr>^Vr> a deacon, a minister.
iZoiaiQASD the oflBce of a dea- .
con.
]aiV> a person sick of the palsy.
1A^;aLd a position, a bed.
356 SYRIAC
l2aim.iA^Ai f. obedience.
7.
-vASd to extend.
t>*ALD time, a period.
^liOy* )ASd an interi^reter.
lA^l-^^a tZASg necessity.
^ZjZASo a catechumen.
J.
)ini m. a prophet, Matt. i. 22.
jZOim f. prophecy.
Zo;-*-^ drawing out, patience,
suffering.
I 7
;-iaiJ shining, bright.
, 7
JOU to shine, Apk. to light, Ethpa.
to be bright.
f JOTJ a river.
1 90101 m. light; from JGU to
shine.
-mQJ, vmJ to repose, to be ap-
peased, Apk. to lay aside, to
put away.
.jsjQJ, paQJ rest.
P -x *o p *>
*apQ_J, (apQ^ a stranger,
VA^pOJ f. also Neuter.
iOQj, >QJ to sleep.
* P P -x
^i-DQJ distribution, expending.
1>QJ fire.
LEXICON.
I LO ;jP abstemiousness.
(JjjJ a valley.
A*jJ to go down, to descend, Apk.
to lay down, to take down, to
bring, to deliver.
IAjjJ m. a garment, pi. -^.AaiJ,
2i4j to drop.
7
*r^ to take care of, to watch.
(ZQmwjlJ f. lenity, meekness.
.7 11
(l O ^ l Nicoea (a proper name).
^, 1^ a yoke, a bow.
^m guilt, injury, crime.
7
fn^1 to augment, to honor, to
sacrifice, to slay.
^ 7
J]0OV)1 law.
7
*^m^ to take, to receive.
IP *. -n
JQajCQJ temptation.
,QJ to pour, Ethpe. %DanL'\*
7
orf)1 to ascend.
Mi]aJ refreshment.
^5siu to fall.
7
n<^1 to go out, Aph. to take out,
I 7
>ni*^ J spread.
Jjtaj the soul, reflexive, self.
I ^ to fight, to attack
7
fcS ^ to plant.
SYRIAC
P-M ^ a victory, an exploit.
X I
^^i^i^ 3 Nesibis in Mesopo-
tamia (a proper name),
P^-i^ victorious, superior, clear.
^QQJ Ethpa. to be avenged .
%Sim to adhere, to follow.
\cn to dig, to dig out.
lij {:pl. IZAjf) a woman.
pAj a downfall, a curse.
pb|ia3 silver, money.
IZlflO a bushel.
JiUCD an old man, Adj. old.
t m i ncio dense, extensive.
|A!idflD an ode, a song.
^l^IiCD to be satisfied.
7
;^iflD to believe, Pa. to declare,
to forbear, Ajpk to suppose.
10 7
;*^fr> hope.
^*X0 to multiply, to ipcrease.
IN
-wflO to worship, to honor.
IZpwi worship, honor.
(jQ-wflO a cluster.
I 7 ^^9 X 7
iyi fO , I f ji.t no much. Adv. very.
]Zo | >.t Cr> a multitude.
24
1\^
LEXICOX. 857
, 7
JrflO to order, to arrange.
jOlflD to testify, to witness, Aph.
to die as a martyr.
(jOlflD Emph. of >OlfiD a witness,
a martyr ( =fxa^'ru^).
|Z,OjOlCD testunony, witness, mar.
tjred one.
QflD a multitude.
JlSLi QD offense.
**om to long for something, to
take pleasure in.
UloQflO thought.
|n\orn reception, ascension to
heaven.
^QD, ^.D to place, to inter,
to add, ^^;2 to shut, l^]k)
to write or compose books,
Mftji;:0 to punish with death,
Ethjpe. to be interred, to be
buried.
jCOjJQfiD synod (tfuvofJoj).
(l^JQ CO indigence, poverty,
need.
PI^QfiD a deed, an occurrence.
*7 J .
Pa>QD Syria.
^^jQflD Adv. Syriac, in the
Syriac.
358 SYRIAC LEXICON
1a-)QflD a Syrian, Adj. Syrian.
.SUkCD to pull down, Fa. to
destroy, Ethjpa. to be dispersed.
|i4QD Satan (a proper name).
1;4^ a side, a page.
7 7
;niCY) to bear, to endure, to
tolerate.
^iflO the laying on (of hands).
lASifY) an assembly.
|2LiuD a sword (^I'fpos).
(QD to expect, Pa. tinco to wait.
IZoS^ro transgression.
n!:^CQ to ascend,
-x
^QCD, iOQCD to place, to lay upon,
to commit.
y o 7
*,i^CQ to support, [tkSil to take
refreshment, to tarry.
JJ-SQCD left, wrong.
UcD to hate.
tlCD hated, mean.
.niCD to need, .Oa.ICD Par?.
P(255. Pe.
y
;^QD to make, to do, to visit (the
sick).
I ^aDD a scribe, ^Z. ^ r^^^, 1 rSlCO.
li >^m, l^Oa-aoo a ship.
2iD, |;aD a book.
"lAaur, TJ^.l'Zoaa) the mouth, the
lips.
y
w*;CX^ Pa. to dishonor, to violate.
IjlL a feast, a feast-day.
7
i^il to do, to perform, to yield,
to make something (with a
double Accusative).
IP 7 r.. 7
r^i m. servant, _p/. ^^fi,*^S,
^ .. 7
(,m Mat. xiii. 21.
IP v* P
jaQl creator.
7
;..il to pass by, to pass over;
with JD, to pass around.
I .p -^
Aaj^iQl Hebrew, Ad. Hebra-
ically.
^^, ^^ shortly.
Myul, lA^^ a young cow.
jl until, ^5u^rllJ not yet; ILDjI
until, y "t^r^ until that;
p -K ikP p-^
^, jjjl time.
,7
)pl Pa. to support, to aid.
(Zpl church.
^Ql to act unjustly.
^Ql, pOl unjust, sinful.
7
Pol wicked, ungodly.
SYRIAC I
(pSDQl a habitation, an abode.
iVfJ^ tleatli.
(oJQ^ an answer, an alternative
song.
JDQl, Qi Ethft. to be troubled.
iZqI^jqL uncircumcision.
>al or ;i to watch.
)^ to blot.
jpoA custom.
,-jlI, M-fc^ eye.
? 7
;ji^ to arouse, 4?^- to stir up.
f^-i* a guardian angel.
\yik oyer, to, against, on account
of; > \y^ because.
fZciDQ^ avarice.
Ul, lAll cause.
|AXi an altar. Acts xvii. 23,
^1, ^^ to go, with *0 to go
into, with ^^ to carry on pro-
hibited intercourse with any
one, Eth'pe. to go into, Ajph.
to lead, to lead into.
^^, Emph. |^V>S world, race,
generation.
7
^Ql with, above.
'>a\ \ihi a nation, pi. ^-i^lioi,
r^Ql to suffer one's self to be dipped,
to suffer oneVself to be baptized.
EXICON.
359
^0 ^
(r^l dipping, baptism.
IjQiQl a pillar.
|)Qi01 an inhabitant.
fJSoi troul)le, labor.
fSQl to dwell.
]ll to hear, to answer, Ethye. to
converse.
(ZQaCLlL piety.
(r-kJ^ one who is dead.
tlii a cloud.
,^irf>S twenty. /
lai P<2. to inter.
|1 > \ aversion, opposition.
'^ 7 ^
'^0\ Pad, to inquire.
|;o:^ a root.
7
*5;i to flee.
^Al to avail, to prevail.
HAl prepared. Part, (put for
the future).
]na"Al ancient, old, f. I'Acu'Ai.
I. 7 %0 I. 7
fuAl, {-piAl rich.
1)la fruit, 'pl. lila*
7
^^2) to meet, to happen to (with
r^, Vry^ bo^y.
360
SYR I AC
iOSi*
wjaQS, .-*) to blow, to sound.
SD Q^oa Paul ( a proper name ) .
^LM.^Qa work.
Vooa, ILdqS mouth.
jj^DOa a command.
5Q2 Ethpe. to be unwilling.
}ai.t )Q2) a tower {''f^^yos).
^L1)Q) a reward, a recompense.
JlOjaa redemption, salvation.
i" " '^^
{ljQ2i separation.
fcQ2), *a2) to remain, to come
to any one.
1aQ2) doubt.
^' P -x
tQQ2> an explanation.
^Lj^a a phial.
"laQCDQ-LiLS) a philosopher.
*DQ4^ KSi Pilate (a proper
name).
\aijjSi mediation, entreaty. '
1> P -X I
'fioHiD'rJjSi a servant of the
clmrch.
\Zi2i cheek, jole.
^i^jla to divide, Eihpa. to doubt.
>j.,S>a, Par^. .xkS^} to work, to
serve.
|l2) to return. Fa. to answer,
^j?A. to lead back, to make
known; Eikpe. to turn one's-self.
LEXICON.
7 17 7
jifn^^l^ an apparition, an en-
chantment.
(AaIs) a limit, an end.
7
fcCQCQ2), .m<^ to free, ^^^. to
permit.
tCQ2) a lot, a portion, pi. ]flCL2
IZo^ia a work, labor.
^P X 7
( fJZi, Fa. -> ^ to free, to deliver.
7
pQ2) to command,
p . pp <k
^,^Q2), p^aa precept, com-
mand.
I Asia a camp, a valley.
P 7 7
UHjkJ'fSi paradise.
? -X !>
\O0\Si a redeemer, a deliverer.
P P -x p
t.*^0;a salutiferous, saving.
n
CD;a Persia.
\aS^'^ a Persian.
7
^;a to recompense, Ethpa. to be
rewarded.
P -X 7
\2iO flZi face, presence.
.-D;2) to preserve, to deliver.
7
^;a to separate, to divide, Ethpe.
to be divided, to appoint.
L\2i to break.
^^Mi to extend, to spread.
t4*'^ just, right.
T, 7
nn<^ to interpret.
^
Lsi,
IS^.Aa a word, a matter,
(As, PiAa wide.
%ajA2} to open.
13^ JP^- 1^- i^lo^s, images.
IpAa an idol, an image of a false
god.
11^ to be filthy.
11^ vile, filthy.
^ . to be willing, to wish.
fZoO^ will, -io-O^, lmlJ,
^ V) of one's-self, freely.
{jjOi t wilhng, ready.
^l will.
f1 iD . will, purpose.
lot* to thirst.
iOO . , iO^ to fast.
ISdo . days of fasting, fast days.
|ljO a figure, a pretence,
ll . to incline. Pa. to pray, with
^*5y-l to pray for any one, to
bless.
- 7
]]., ]a^. inclined.
-^Vr Ethpe. to be crucified.
l^Q^* a prayer, an entreaty.
SYRIAC LEXICON. Sfil
|^t\ a cru.ss.
)S^ a figure, an image.
VfSi early time, dawn.
]> Ethpe. to be separated, to
burst.
* r r *
\nn Fa. to receive ; ^^.^idAcdI
to happen, to come to pass.
;*^0 to bury.
];^D, 1>Q*^0 a sepulchre.
^OjipO ^V) from the beginning.
yj^O for, to, ? Wr~^ ^-k)
ere, before.
>^,o |*V)r) the first.
P xV
^JL^r^ holy.
loo to remain, to stop.
\laao a reception, an entertam-
ment.
[MJQQ holiness.
^QO, >CLD to stand up, to stand,
Aph. to erect, to set up, to
conclude, to appoint, to de-
termine; with^ l^;o pre-
ceding, to make war with any
one.
.Q^'r^^QO a church-yard, bary-
ing-ground.
362 SYRIAC
it' ^
JJojao*
IJajao a servant of the church,
sexton.
^flPOTifeA^COao Constantine
(a proper name).
V "^ .
Pi 900 a town, a city.
^ftJ.a)ao a Cyrenean (a proper
name)..
VAsQID truth.
(j q4^ 111. a murderer, a robber.
\^
^^ cunmng, ingenious.
]j4^ slaughter, murder.
]V)/n a league, ]V^ -0 ZojD
consecrated vhgins.
lASCiJD resurrection.
\L\ lO a song.
]m>n a tree, bark, a book.
IjAaO Cithara, harp.
1>0>A.i-D a player on the cithara.
^'ix3, (j-D a voice.
^iKo little.
.QDO; I No the clergy.
T^^li) a bride.
JJLO to acquire ; A'ph. to grant,
to bring.
1>.10 a pen, a reed,
po^fej^ a centurion.
U;QD Csesarea (a proper name).
(l) to call, to cry.
LEXICON.
^7 X s * 7 7
P-O0>(l3 Cappadocia (a prop-
er name).
|*mr) cassia.
(^ to name, to call, to choose.
n; n to approach, to draw-
near, Fa. to conduct, to bring;
IN -^
(m^) to sacrifice.
yo^'^ war
kCOcA^^O'rO a crystal.
I 7
*^i;n near.
p p '^
P-k;X} reading.
|Aj;) a field, a country.
^P 7
p;0 a horn.
|A<^,o;o calvary.
^P t 7
inn a priest, an elder.
7
^) much, great, loud, chief;
2) ateacher, jE;7ip>^^."lij Als
,.. 7 7.-7
'pl. ^S> Const.pl. %A^i*
ts> to grow, P<a^. to bring up, to
educate.
^ -J p ..
QlDj a myriad, pZ. tOliJ*
fZODj greatness, a multitude.
7
v.^i>, C..J to wish very much, to
desire, Ethpa. the same.
7 ,
Vyi J to be angry.
^j, (J^J foot.
SYRIAC
XI..) to stone.
jA.t) to mark, to feel, Aph. the
same, with JD to perceive, to
remark.
\I^yO a wish, a desire.
IP to go, to chastise ; with and
without IV) 1*^ to ship.
[ZiOyj a persecutor.
^^0)9 persecution.
7 ,
^^U\y to hasten, to tremble,jEMpe.
to be afraid, to be terrified.
AapDOClJ Roman, Adv. roina-:-
cally, Latin.
^01) to run, to hasten.
fu. 0> anger, misfortune.
wkaO) m. spirit.
P -x ,
JjaO) f. wind, breath, spirit.
|>ltO> spiritual.
"iP P -x ,
JZLiaO) bowel love, bowels of
mercies.
]1m6) distance ]1mOj ^Ld
from a distance.
X T 7
^0> Aph. ^Q li] to raise up,
to elevate.
IijlSoo? a gift.
P P -x,
paiO) a quarrel.
]LoOJ a cloth J a rag.
LEXICOX. 3(53
PID909 a prince, a person of
rank.
]iQ0> a sign.
y)t M> beloved.
^Q jsa) to love, Ethya. with
^^ il to feel compassion.
PCLm9 _p/. compassion, beneyv"
leuce, love.
IASOmj love.
7
2Lm9 to lie, to float.
7 ,
t n t> to be far distant.
U*^y smell.
^J spittle.
(lAa) the first named.
|Aajiu>, Aa.Aa9 firstling, begin-
ning, pi. (z\.i^^9*
^p p J
pai:^Aa9 the high priest.
*p p ^
pjij) a person of rank.
v02> to ride.
- 7
^j Ethpa. to feel inclined, tr be
moved.
^>, ]Sd> f jASDj high, loud, pi.
JSD) James iv. 6.
\hh to lie, to be placed, Aph. to
cast, to send; with *n\n to
administer; with IaL3 to lose
life.
364 SYRIAC
LEXICON.
]k)j.
* r
jSdj Part. P. thrown down, given
up
IALdj hills, Luke xxiii. 30.
]Zoffi>V)> patience, long suffer-
ing.
fmSDj evening.
nr>rf>) to sprinkle.
Jlj Pfl^. .jlIj to obtain again,
Ethpa. to be reconciled.
^^ PsDQl J mournful, deeply moved.
JjAj a herdsman.
p p p *
^A^9, p.kA9 sense, mind.
^1) Ethpe. to be angry.
JSOIJ thunder.
rOi to dance, to mourn, to lament.
*P 17
)l^9 sinful, a transgressor.
7 ,
^S) to make a sign.
oa^j to be inflamed, to rejoice.
^*
, 9v * 7
jOJ^ym Sapores (a pro}3er name).
Ijl* an evil spirit.
s^ to entreat. Pa. to ask ; with
^\l to ask after some one.
p * > ' *
lAiL*, 12]J- entreaty.
^t#, ^^A^ to reconcile, to calm.
|Z.Q^a* nearness.
| ii *^ captivity, destniction.
| >*^ praise-worthy.
|Aain a vine.
14^* a sceptre.
v>.ri to guide, to lead.
7 -p 7 X 7
>1^Q*, |sn seven, ^LTl^
seventy.
nn to leave, to give up, lo
permit, to let go.
IAqji a week.
J-i^Oy^ an uproar.
|a> >! restless, uneasy.
*rs^ to kindle.
^w* Ethpe. to be moved, to be
indignant.
\r to throw, to precipitate.
Jr P^. to send, Ethpa. SjA,
is sent.
, 7
901A to awake.
QM to be worthy, Ethpe. to be
considered as worthy.
(Qa, ^Qs equal, pi. ^Qs*
IP, p ^
)01oa renown.
ploQ* praise, renown, glory.
..a, v.1^ to wash.
* 7
*01 OS to free, to tear away.
i4-s>Q* dishonor, shame.
]^\ iQs change, exchange.
(So\(T consummation, end.
*^Qm, v^ to despise.
}l^a power, authority, right.
[OQM way, street.
(?a a wall.
-x
U)QS beginning.
pp ^
XiSOM confirmation.
P>^Q gain, advantage.
P -x p
f jq4 awkward, stupid.
IfiuL* despised, small, inferior.
%A*J^Mpl. f. ^oii^s present, Jp^.
*^ I to be able, to find.
wiAs to send, to put away.
]]*, >\ to cease, to rest.
. I N , I i N rest, ^
V*-^, ^*lV) sudden.
] iN* an apostle.
v^i^ Pa. *4^ to be able, to
be powerful.
^QA* to approach fulfillment, Pa.
to fulfill, to complete ; with ^\l
to salute, Apk to deliver up;
f mOj to give up the ghost,
to die.
SYRIAO LEXICON. 3^5
T f
]V)S jpl m. ]Sq^ peace
i<l*, ]lQ a name.
PQSq Samona (a proper name'.
*^qSq# Simon (a propername).
(b>1Qa heaven.
t^ a i V)^ Samosata (a proi^er
name).
i NSfT to finish, to complete.
MS>Q to hear.
^QlSfi* Simeon, Simon (a proper
name).
A^bOs to serve.
IaSQa the sun.
\1M Pa. to go away, Ol^icA or
OljlD ZoL to die.
* p *p p
M-, HJJ* insane, foolish.
ll, lAl* year.
p - ^
(rlA torment, pam, torture.
^, ]! tooth.
]l i1 sharp.
(1* ^iJA;>a. a1A| to relate.
\1l, lAli an hour; ]i\liD
p
01 O forthwith.
Ul jest, play.
\jJZiM beautiful, good, fern. pi.
|Z.V*^ also the neiUer, good-
ness.
R66 SYEUC
^\^.
^Q* to hear, to take; A])h. with
^Ld to go away.
\\ an inhabitant.
];* to dwell; with ^\l to besiege,
Pa. to begin.
J^\, \^\ generation, bio-
graphy.
L. ;* a light, wax light, a candle.
lAo. -. , y^^ a spectre, an ap-
parition.
P*r the remainder, the rest.
y^,'f Ethpa. to be convinced.
10^7 . x*P I 7
'ru'rS true, Adv. /L-ij^^'p* truly,
really.
IP,
y'r^ truth.
A six.
L4cuL Adv. silently.
.^A s to be silent, to be dumb.
L
t> 7
l^ilZ a merchant.
]k)ol2, .^otijolZ Thomas, (a
proper name).
^0O\g^olZ Theophilus (a
proper name).
LEXICON,
I
12.
\ML not clear, dirty. 2; dregs,
that which is most objection-
able.
^i^Z to demand.
7 7
;,iZ to carry on trade, Ethjpa. to
win (by trade), to be added
]Z)QSdjZ wonder.
pioolZ an abyss.
|;uOlZ wonderful.
J 01 Z to be surprised.
o'Z r^r-last letter of the Alpha-
bet.
J-iOL or *oZ to repent, to tui'P,
to return.
%aOL again.
01 oZ to be astonished.
pb-iJoZ interpretation.
fZoZ repentance.
jiDQjsAZ a limit, bound.
ZlmZ, ZomZ, Ajla*Z under, t^L
^iD from below, ^li AajA^
under.
P 1- 7%
(Z*V)tZ shame,
IZq^uZ repentance.
OoZ to urge, Part. ^jl^dL,
Luke XXV. 23.
iJZ to hanff up, to raise up.
SYRIAC
tSL
Jvh^I snow.
fZo-aLJSZ the Trinity.
pSo^Z to make a Scholar, Ethjpa.
to be learned, to be a scholar.
1)V)\Z a scholar.
ASZ,/.1Z2LZ7w. three.
OIIsDZ to wonder, to be astonished.
IouIdZ wonderful, remarkable.
y)iV>Z, I SnV)Z honest, genuine.
]j1dZ/. eight.
^iDL there, in that place.
pZ to repeat, Fa. to narrate.
LEXICON. 36T
Ja^oZ great, strong.
Xlyt'^ to explain, to interpret.
^-^>Z, ^-aZ^Z two ; ^ i'Zi
the second.
1^)Z right, true, faithful.
H'Z a door, a gate.
|A.^jZ mind, opinion.
I AjaQ^Z a hymn,a song ofprai.se
(AaSQsZ service, attendance.
VLsZ/. \LMLm. nine.
>SZ to narrate, from |jL*
|Aa1Z a narration.
Additions and Corrections
TRANS LA TED FROM THE
SECOND EDITION
OF
UHLEMANN'S
SYRIAC GRAMMAR
BY
ENOCH HUTCHINSON.
NEW YORK
1875.
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS PART OF THE
WORK.
A indicates the Second American Edition, the first figure or
figures following, refer to the page of the same edition, the next
figures, to the line ( always counted from the top of the page),
and the next figures indicate the word or words (always counted
from left to right), in or after which, the correction or addition
is to be made. For example : A. 12. 4. 6. indicate American
edition, page 12, line 4 from top of page, word 6, counting from
left to right. When there are references to Notes or Sections,
N. is inserted for the former and for the latter.
Additions and Corrections.
A. 18. 28. 4 After the word "east", in Translation, add :
"(i.e. Dortherly)".
A.20. 11. 6. Before "Syrian", add : ancient ".
A. 20. 16. 2. After "186", add: "Notice of a late work
on the modern Syriac tongue (cf. R'ddiger, Chrestomathia
Syriaca, p. 138, ff.), is found in the Journal of the American
Oriental Society, vol. v., no. 1., p. 1-180, under the title:
' Grammar of the Modern Syriac Language,' etc., hy Stod-
dard, 1S56, from which we learn what a transformation the
ancient Syriac has received, and what new, foreign elements
have been incorporated into the modern language."
A. 21. 35, 1. Instead of the sentence in translation beginning
with : *J More recently," etc., add : " whilst there is now
(1857) in press a copious and elaborate Syriac Lexicon,
whose author, the highly meritorious Bernstein, has already
distinguished himself in Syriac literature by his Syriac Lexi-
con attached to KirscJts Chrestomathy, (Lipsiae. 1836),
which will be a most essential aid in the study of the lan-
guage. Bernsteinh great lexicon contains the results of the
most important investigations made by the old Syriac Lexicog-
raphers, and with that work Syriac literature in respect to
lexicography of that period, closes. *
A. 21. 39. 2. After " Sieffert", add : " and Jidtf?^er".
A. 2L 41. 12. After " Syriac", add : "monumental".
A. 23. 39. 3. After " 4 ", add : " Ed. XL 1691".
* The first number of Geonje Henry Bernstein's great Lexicon was
issued in 1857, but, I regret to say, that, for want of sufficient encourage-
ment , the learned lexicographer was not able to proceed with the work,
^- 25
374 ADDITIO.SS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 25. 1 8. 4. After " Testament ", add : " Georg. Henry Bern-
stem^ liexicoa Syriacum Chrestomathiae KirschianiB denuo
editse. Lipsia. 1836-8.
A. 25. 29. 3. After "Bernstein", add: "Lipsia. 1832. 8vo.
A. 25. 36. 8. After "Syr.", add: "jEmil. Rddiger Chrestoma-
thia Syriaca (Glossario explanata). HalivS Saxonum. 1828.
8vo.
A. 28. 23. 2. Instead of the first five lines of Rem. 2, in Trans-
lation, add : " In respect to the above named joining of indi-
vidual letters to each otner m a word, it should be remarked :
that the letters, ^ , y^, a*,^ ^,a. , a,SQ,l,m,a,n, and
& , in the middle of a word, may be joined to letters on both
sides of them, while (,,,01,0,1.,^,;, and A , can only
be joined to letters preceding them ; but if one of these let-
ters ('l,;,Cl,Q,]., ^,;,A) precede the letters ? , J , i ;
or 2 J no connecting line is inserted between them. So also,
> , ) , and Z, at the beginning of a word, are not joined with
the following consonant. The final letters^ ^,^,.,^,
take or reject the connecting lines, m accordance with the
laws of uniting letters by lines.
When I at the beginning of a v;ord is followed by \ the
letters are written -^ ; but when inverted they are written
U , consequently, when two words, the first of which ends
with ^ , and the second begins with f , they are united by
means of the twisted figure XJ ; if another 1 still occur in
p-r,
connection with ii, the latter is placed after f, e. g. jj],
A. 29. 18. 7. Instead of " the gutturals ", add: " ] and L".
A. 29. 24. 5. After " 01 ", add : ", being not strongly guttu-
ral,".
A. 29. 27. 11. Insteadof the sentence bep-inning: "from 500-
ADDITONS AND CORRECTIONS. 375
900 ", add : " For 500-900, which reach beyond the num-
bers designated by single consonants, tens, from 50-90, were
used, and, like hundreds, were designated by points placed
over the letters, o. g jb 600, 2) 800 ".
A. 29. 30. 2.- After the word " units ", add : " ( which mark,
in hundreds, tens and units of compound numbers, falls away
again, e. g. 0112)1, 1855)".
A. 31. 4. 1. Before " ( For ", add : " Sometimes Q was origi-
nally retained by Ephrem, e. g. 'ioo 0pp. Syr. I. 34. 1. 2.,
VqO III. 590. F. 1. 5 ".
A. 31. 5. 5. Instead of " three ," put : "four".
A. 31. 9. 7. Instead of " In foreign words it quiesces in Q",
add : " In foreign words Q quiesces in ".
A. 32. 3. 2. Before " seems ", add : "( corresponding with the
Hebrew mappik)".
A. 32. 18. 2. After 1773", add: "and //. Ewald Ueber
das Syrische Punktations system nach Syrischen HandschHft-
en, in a Treatise on Oriental and Biblical Literature, Bd.
Gottingen 1832. pp. 53129".
A.. 32. 29. 3. Add: " 12. 3.", after " 8 ".
A. 33. 2. 6. Instead of the remainder of the note in Transla-
tion, add : " Yet it cannot be denied that, in many cases there
is a real resemblance between them. In respect to the use of
both points (Kushoi and Rukol), it is universally admitted,
that the letters named (aspirates), wlten in the middle of a
word, were originally dependent, for their aspiration, upon
the vowels immediately preceding, which emit the softest
possible breathings ( = -7- vocal ) flowing over, as it were,
to the aspirates. The consonant of a closed syllable immedi-
ately preceding, forms the opposite relation, according to
which the hardening comes in through Kushoi. Hence
this mark (Kushoi) more frequently occurs in the middle of a
word as the initial and Jinal letters sufficiently make known,
in respect to this law of the language. The first (initial let-
ters), in continued discourse, are dependent upon the prece-
ding words ending in a vowel or consonant. In the last
jlQ ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
final letters) even, the vowel or consonant makes its influence
felt. Hence these points occur in accordance with the fol-
lowing rules :
A. Rukok occurs, a) at the beginning of a word, v/hen
a vowelless consonant, belonging to the syllable, precedes the
aspirates, e. g. cA^aj, .^Ao ; b) in the middle of a word
after a preceding closed syllable with a long vowel, e. g.
]A. \^ ^ Idqaxx*; or, when (the relations being the same as
before), the following syllable begins with a vowelless conso-
nant, (vocal sheva), and no aspirate follows, e. g. IAj^Q^IsZ.
Nor is the same relation of syllables lost when a helping
vowel is received in the middle of a \vord, as in IAD'^L for
"jAo;!. When there is an open syllable, with 1 quiescing in
or , e. g. ^QOp , r^fj. Rukok occurs; c) in the
final consonant of a closed syllable with a short vowel pre-
ceding, e. g.. ^^-^21 , ISdOaa ; d) under D in the suffix
of the 2nd. person plural after a preceding closed syllable, e. g.
"A y
QOISd , ^A.-k21 ; and finally, e) in the middle of a word
after a consonant supposed to be doubled , e. g. lA^So (from
^SiSD ) ; VASqI* (from i^lSG>*).
* The author here seems to regard the termination | of these exam-
ples, as formiug a syllable of itself without the addition of A and O- This
view is against that of Gesenius in respect to Hebrew (vid. his Hebrew
Gram. Ed. by Rodiger, 15th Edition, Leip. 1848. 26.1), where he affirms
that, with one exception, every syllable begins with a consonant. A. T.
Hoffmann, in his elaborate Syriac Grammar ( Halaj. 1827. lib. 1. cap, 2. 3.
1), affirms that "in respect to the origin and division of syllables, the rules
of Hebrew apply in Syriac," with which opinion all Oriental philologists,
no doubt, will agree. Furthermore, "[Thiemann, in the first edition of his
Grammar, recognizes this principle, in his example given in 5. Anm. Ru-
hok, c. . Instead of saying : " after a closed syllable," he should have said,
" after an open syllable". This principle he has stated, with an example
six lines farther on. The instance evidently comes under Kushoi, being
stated in almost the same words aw the first instance (marked a) under
Kushoi. It must have been an oversight of the learned Professor. Tr
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 377
B. Kushoi, on the contrary, occurs, a) in the middle of a
word after a preceding closed syllable, e. g. %^oLu ; d)
after prefixes which form closed syllables by taking the helping
vowel , the initial letter of the syllable before taking the prefix
being vowelless, e. g. **x2U0 ( wm.2U); |r)A:ii^ ( h^^ ) i ^')
after dipthongs, which are considered as constituting closed
syllables, e.g. Aa.^ , \LjJ^ , U^llD, |A.*JLd^ {-^ except-
ed); also in the plural suffix of the 2d. person, e. g. tO-^^,
-n . 7
' "^^ ; d) over those consonants in Pa. and Ethpa. of regu-
lar verbs, as well as the nouns and adjectives derived there-
from, whose middle letter is supposed to be doubled, e. g.
K . 7 7. 7 7.7 '7 7 // 7 **/ 7 . ^ >
^cil , >Aji , >A^21, sA^Sd ; VLi , e. g. >*oj, .ruTil, .nnSZl;
/' . X..7
in ApJu and Ethta. of verbs Ql (in O and 2)), e. g. ^-i-3 1 (from
^), j;ila.2>| (from ..CQa); .a.2) and JQ, where ( is
changed into O, e. g. ^oZo"} , ^Do] ; or in general, where
ir II
the first radical letter falls away, as in verbs wi^ and ^, e. g.
v.^J ( i^M^. for ^^U ), ..oAj ( from *!dAa ); even in nouns,
as jiaCilD; so also, in those particles compounded with ^5iO
in which .falls away, e. g. t-iSsD, ^i-.2l!sO; finally, in deriva-
tives of verbs Ml, as p^l, even when Q has been inserted
and the aspirate follows, e. g. JoQa* (from ^a* ), L.Oj
(from *vi5), I^Ql (from ^1) ; or according to the Hebrew
p :^7 . ^
analogy, e. g. |Zi.J (=in"1^5^) ; ^) when a word closes with
two vowelless consonants, as in 2d. Sing. Pret.^ the final
letter also takes Kushoi, e. g. t^^. In foreign, (especially
378 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Greek) words, without reference to the division of the sylla-
bles, tiie following letters take it; 2) which corresponds with
0, a with TT, i) with K and D with x^ ^- g- >aP oSi^Sn=^
== UdiJKpilog] ]D'rZi(Jl ~ b tnapxog, etc. The importance of
this mark is apparent in ancient manuscripts, which have no
vowels ( cf. Lud. de Dieti^ p. 25. tf. ; Ewald^ a. a. O. and
i?cr;zs/^gi, Lexicon Syriacum. Lipsiaj. 1836. 8vo.).
Rem. 2. Id like manner, a point over ( in the middle of a word after an
open syllable, indicates that that letter has the full force of a consonant,
e- g- ^\m , ^JD. Also when the same mark is placed over Ol in (001^
Cn is not sounded. The same is true in respect to oi in all compounds with
\ ' .
1 01 , particularly when the latter has a demonstrative signification, e. g.
ZqOOI , ^\^6i , Isjoi , etc."
A. 33. 22. 7. After -'- consonants", add : " in unpointed writ-
ings".
A. 33. 24. 2. After "word", add: "In the noun masc. this
mark is especially useful for distinguishing the emphatic plu-
ral ( 45. 3) from the same form of the singular".
A. 33. 29. \2.^AitQv''praised'\ add: "(Ps. XVIII. 16}".
A. 34. 8. 7. After "^ 16. c", add : " In respect to the use of
Ribui in the 3d. pi. Fret.M isdoubtful,in many cases, whether
such use should be considered as really in accordance with
the rules of the language ( 20. 1. Rem. ; ^ 80. 3. Rem.) or an
oversight of the transcriber (cf. Bernstein Chrestom. p. 3)".
A. 34. 15. 1. After " Kushoi", add: cf. ^ 5. 2. Rem. 1. B".
(The information to which this reference relates, is found on
p, 377 Translation, second edition. Tr.).
A. 34 18. 1. Instead of the Translation, 7. to Rem. 1., add :
" When the Syrians wished to indicate that a vowel was to
be received in order to aid in pronunciation, or when such
vowel was to be avoided, as in case of Kushoi and Rukok
employed to mark the softer or harder sounds of consonants
( 5), they placed small horizontal lines over or under the con-
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 379
sonants where such vowel was to be introduced or avoided.
When there was, in Syriac, such an accumulation of vowelless
consonants, that the introduction of a vowel, selected without
reference to the etymology of the word and forming a short
euphonious syllable, became necessary, a line, called Meluigyono
(from \yjp\to reflect)^ was placed under that word, indicating the
place where the voice necessarily hesitated from the diflSculty
of pronunciation. The new vowel introduced after such con-
sonant was usually , but sometimes , e. g. (Aj^a*>
{dehh^lto^ making a kind of diaeresis. But when the voice was
to hasten over* the same consonants without the least audible
vowel sound, a line was placed over such consonants called
Marhetono (from ^(SVi to hasten)^ e. g. |Ao>l zedJcrto.''''
A. 34. 28. 6. For " only", put " immediately".
A. 34. 32. 4. After " 11", add : '' Ewald, a. a. 0".
A. 35. 2. 1. Instead of " 8.", read: "This mark is similar to
Marhetono^ and should not be confounded with Meluigyono.
It is a line placed under consonants indicating that the latter
have scarcely a perceptible sound, and, from that circum-
stance it takes its name. When placed under 1 before 01 ,
it indicates a softening of 1 into a sound very nearly repre-
, e. g. jOH elyidh. It is scarcely believed that
a regular consonant, taking this mark under it, entirely loses
its sound, consequently the mark under the middle radical
letter of the imj^erat. Ethpe. and Ethpa, i^\^L\) can
scarcely be considered as indicating an entire loss of pronun-
ciation. No confirmation of the supposition that a conso-
nant with this mark under it entirely loses its consonant
sound, is found in the occurrence of the mark under J , e. g.
]Al* , "|Ala,.SD , where it is thought to indicate an assimila-
tion, as it does in L'^ and in the imper. %43ai (from 4^').
This mark indicates an entire loss of sound only when placed
under | and 01 , such loss of sound being particularly pei-
ccptible when | precedes ^ . (cf 12. 1. B. a ).
380 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Rem. Since this mark should not be extended, as it has been by some, to
the impcrr. Mhtaphal, and Eshta., so it follows that it is to be considered
as extending only to the marking of the imperative of Ethpe. and Ethpa.,
lor, were it to extend farther, the influence of a rapid pronunciation might,
in a measure, counteract the utterance of the fullest known sound of ihe
letter under which it is placed."
A. 35. 19. 2. After "^7", add: ",the difficulty of pronunci-
ation is relieved,". Also put " and " after " antepenultimate".
(Nos. 1. and 2. are transposed in the new German Edition, and
the Rem. is placed at the end of the section. Tr.).
A. 35. 25. 11. After "final", add : " after the falHng away of
^,"
A. 35. SO. 1. Insteadofthelirstlineof 10., after "divide" iQ
line 2 of Trans., add : " The Syrians, according to ancient tes-
timony, before their manuscripts were furnished with vowels,
and when only a very simple system of accentuation, similar
to that of the Hebrew, was known and used (cf. Etmlcl, a. a.
0.), divided".
A. 37. 25. 11. Omit in Trans, from line 25. word 12., " with",
to line 27. word 4., and instead, add : *'; c ) with ^ in^ll togo,
when it (^) begins a syllable in the course of conjugation, in
which case, the vowel belonging to it, falls back upon the
middle radical".
A. 37. 31. 1. Instead of Rem. in Trans., add: "Rem. This
mark (Linea occultans) also occurs under ] in nouns, which
are derived from those mentioned under a above, as
(ZqIajsaI , (ZQAJf. It also occurs under Ol in 001 and -i01 ,
where they are pleonastic ( 55. A). It does not appear
IP
OGl when it is absolute and has the signification to
be, to become, or to cotne to pass''\
A. 38. 16. 8. After " occultans", in Trans., add : " by contrac
tion in a word".
A. 40. 21. 4. Before "is", add: ''sometimes".
A. 40. 26. 4. Instead of the last four lines of 14. add, before
"where"; * c) in nouns like ^I'^n wines, >i\i rest , >jl^vZ[
yesterday. But a is sounded only when followed by 001 ,
e. g. 001 -i^O, pronounced bekyu, and in the emphatic state
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 381
of nouns terminating in ]-. So it ought to bo considered as
well established that w4 without such a union and declension
as we have named above, may be enunciated at the end of a
word as a weak and slight consonant sound. The same is
true of cases mentioned under a) above, where Q and a oc-
//
cur at the end of verbal forms, vrhere, in verbs |j they form
the dipthongs au, ai and oi^ e. g. Q-Li - '^.i , - "a
A. 41. 31. 3. Before "c)" In Trans., add: " the vowel being
moved forward.".
A. 41. 32. 6. Omitfrom"when",line2. B.,to"In,'Ma8tlie,
and add : ".when a suffix of the Ist. sing, and 2d. and 3d. pi.,
is added ".
A. 41. 33. 5. Before "In", in Trans., add: "In other posi-
tions Q takes its usual place, e. g. \^CiOr\ ^ ^^LoQoL."
A. 42. 25. 8. Omit from fine 10. B., word 9. "This", to
line 5. B. w. 8., " Finally ", and add : " In the verb this aux-
iliary vowel under the first radical with a fleeting sound
is in Fret. Te. (3. f. and 1 sing.) Al^^ j A^4^; or,
before wk at the beginning, e. g. JdLm, t'^Ni; or at the
end of verbs ]] , e. g. wi^tZ] , J>^ ; with the exception of
the imperative Ethpe. and passive part, Pa.^ and Apk.y where
it is and, with ^, forms the dipthong aij e.g. t-i.^^Z],
*aA.^ (emphat. state f. tAi\..V)) , "
A. 46. 12. 15. After " 12. 1.", add: "In the 1 pi. ^L*, and
7 7
more frequently ^mjI occur in the Actis Mart, orientail, of
Maruthas (vid. Tom. ii. p. 327., lin. 14 ) ".
A. 4G. 30. 6. Before " On ", in Trans., add : " The Suffix 3d.
382 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
m. Sing. i-aOlQ-i., enclosed in brackets under a. in the table,
has been introduced and accepted by some Grammarians
without proper authority, and it might be omitted, as its exist-
ence is not proved, from the fact that there are numerous ex-
amples of the form ^G1Ql.i. in Ephrem (cf. Bernstein^ Chrest.
Syr. Prsef. p. xxi).
A. 47. 2. 3 Before "In" Trans, instead of 4 lines to "Only",
add : " Monosyllabic nouns, which lose their vowel, and dis-
syllabic nouns, which lose the vowel of the second syllable in
the emphatic state, like derivatives of verbs \j with ( and wk
take it again when receiving the sii^x 1 si?tg, and 2 and 3
plural. \ passes into ^a and the latter is either movable or
quiesces in (cf. % 4G). In the plur., m., a , which is
y
peculiar to the pi. suf, coalesces with the termination w^.
of the const, st. ( 45), e. g. yL^oidD (from . i '^SV)), so that
these sifffixes may be considered as added directly to the last
radical ".
A. 47. 7. 1. Omit from " In ", Trans. 7linestoEem. and add :
" The femin. noun, on the contrary, takes suffixes of the sin-
gular form, in the sing, and plur. number, in such a manner,
that, with the preceding union vowel omitted, the vowel ar-
rangement of the empliat. state sing., is received with the
falling away of ), e. g. OlA^oAiD (emphat. state (Z^oAtd) ;
the others (I sing, and 2 and ^ pi) are attached to the form
and vowel arrangement of the construct state, e. g. .jA^oAo ,
9. 7 -X 7 ^
.QdALoAo {const. St. A^oAo). The plural, with the suffix
of the sing, form only, takes essentially the form and vowel
arrangement of the const, state (ALoAtd) , where the ending
A forms a closed syllable, and thus the plur. cannot be mis-
taken for any other form, e. g. *jA^oAo, vf A\oAo , etc."
ADDITIONS AKD CORRECTIONS. 383
A. 47. 26. 9. After "it", add: " is taken substantially for amj-
things or ".
A. 47. 27. 7. -After "us", add: " (cf. Synt. ^ 54. B. 4. Eem.
A. 48. 7. 6. Instead of, "with both plural suffixes", read:
^^ plural suffixes of both genders occur with ".
A. 48. 17. If^Omit 8 lines in Tr., and read : " Rem. The wz*c.
sing, form .Gl is very frequently found in the poems of
Ephrem and always stands before the noun. It is used thus
P 7 9 J
in Ephr, I. p. 370, e. g. X^ ^01 for pOI tA^ , also in I. Sam,
xvii. 55. In Assem. B. 0. III. 75, it occurs between the noun
and adjective. On the contrary (JOl can precede or follow
> " '
the noun. Also JCT /em., for fjCTI , occurs in ^j^Ar. III. 590,
before the noun. In the sing. (IjOl fern.), it is united with
w X y -k" "
OCT m. and *^C51/. forming QJOl and t-aOlfjOl j and sometimes
^ I 0^ *pi
0C3 and *a01 precede, e. g. poi 001 ^e7^ ikisj (jOl wiOl
e2;ew ^/^w. More frequently in comparison, is the Chaldee
ftV^ (from ^^ and ^^i Nv = V^s^) used in connection
7 u V t\ y
with >L1, e. g. ^Aa"| >wlj, also ^-JiCTI y^lj swcA
(>/. III. E. 1).
2. The Relative for all genders and numbers is 3 , tr/^,
td7/i2c/i and ^/ia^, whose proper position is at the beginning of
a word (as a prefix). Immediately following a word, it raises
the interrogative idea and constitutes the interrogative pro-
noun. After ,-Sd , 5 forms either the general idea of the rela-
tive^ as y -!sO any one^ who^ who, or constitutes at the sumo
time, the demonstraMvej that J as j P-l thatfU;hichy > |r>| i/ia^
384 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
which, "i y^\\^\ (gen. c.) tJiat, which, j preceding _ Vo , ex-
7
presses the genitive of the indirect question, e. g.-Lo Jwhose^
etc. (cf. 56. Syntax)".
A. 49. 2. 7. Add: '' Ephr. I. 347. E. 7".
A. 49. 7. 3. Add : ", and partly by the simple personal suffix
with its case marking it ".
#
A. 50. 11. 3. After " Future ", add : ("indicating an action
finished and unfinished)".
A. 54. 3, 3. Omit: "and imperative".
A, 54. 5. 5. Instead of " additions", in Trans., add: "marks
of persons ".
A. 54. 6. 3. After "and", in Tr., add: " marks of gender
and number ".
A. 54. 6. 6. After " end ", add : " The imperative has the
marks of gender and number, in common with the/w^wre".
A. 54. 17. 5. Before "is", add: "and has forced itself into
use, ".
A. 54. 35. 11. After "P/eiJ." omit to "But" in last line, and
with preceding ( = i^) does not
seem to be derived from the pronoun ".
A.. 55. 13. 4. After " syllable", omit the whole sentence.
'/ //
A. 57. 2. 4. Instead of " \^ which", add: " *^^ ( 29)
and i^ ( 30), of which the latter throws ".
A. 57. 6. 1. Insteadof the-first six lines of Rem., add : " Eem.
In the inflection of the pret. Pe,, verbs Med. E. [intrans.)
retain , where, in verbs Med A., stands over the radical
syllable, e.g. A!L*j.j, ^oAi^*jw; . In the 3d. r:i. pi. (all the
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 385
prct.) the paragogic form .C^4^ is sometimes found. Hut
7 7 7 7
the forms of the 3 y/. A4), ,-^4^, ^1^^ adduced
by Buxtorf, are not confirmed by Syriac Grammarians. In
respect to ^^Q = C^^a , ^^^ ( 3. pi. m. and/.) cf.
6. 1."
A. 57. 19. 7. Before "sometimes", add : ( ^-\p and ^lp)."
A. 58. 28. 13. Before " first ", leaving out The ", add :
" On account of the falling away of the third radical letter,
.in order to aid in forming the new syllable, the,".
A. 59. 24. 9. Before "are", add: ^^ qw en io i\\Q absolute St.*
m. together with the other cases named in the Rem. of the
preceding ,"
7
A. 60. 3. 9. After "press" add: " \^ to kill many (lit
7
more), from v.^^ ^^ ^-'^'^ ^^^' (c^- Bar-Ali and Bar-Bahlul
* 7 7
in Bernsteins'' Chrest. Pref. p. xx) ; *n1 and ^OqI to kiss,
with a similar reference to single or repeated action ".
A. 61. 15. 4. Before " Aphel ", add : <' Pa. and".
A. 63. 2. 5. After " Patriarch ", add : '* ; or such letter is trans-
T, 7
posed, e g. ^t^ fcaTTjyopetv ".
A. 63. 14. 12. Before "2)", add: "(a/w^with Q , derived
from Ma^ , however, occurs in the Charkl. translation of Luke
vi. 30, and in the ArJis Mart. li. p. ] 16. 4)".
A. 67. 5. 1 1 . After " imperat ", add : " transitive ".
A. 67. 6. 5. Before "e. g.", add : '" with a strong sound of the
voice ".
* It will be recollected that participles are considered as nouns, and
have the absolute and construct state (vid. 63. E). 2r.
886 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 67. 9. 1. Instead of the first seven lines, read: "Rem.
The imperat. Fe. of '^] , like the jore^., retains , but the
imperatives of the verbs *2l^ , 5<lo] , yj"! , take their form
with an intransitive meaning, from the usual roots of verbs *.j2),
7 I
e. g. **^Ni (Matt. xi. 29). Here also belongs that formation
of the/w^. and inf. Pe. in which 1 of the original \zi verbs,
with vowels indicating a transitive signification, quiesces in
, e. g. ^QOp , ^\o|Sd , but with vowels indicating an
intransitive meaning, in , e. g. pSo^J ;Sd]1jd. To the
first (transitive verbs) belong ^. 1 , h^| , ^^1 (l]| which at
-'' 7^ 7- 7 -rt 7^ 7'^
the same time is U),^|, J^lolj'rfiDl, ^il,y1. To the
7 ft 7-n y-i* y-ft 7'n 7-n
last (intransitive) belong ^'\ , ^l] , 'rk)! , ^1 , -^^ , *f j] ,
//
(the roots of the last three being -&) verbs). Both inflec-
p i //
tions are found in \l\ (also ])."
A. 67. 22. 6. Before "The", add: "For both the forms
named above, the London Edition of the New Testament has
correctly restored the reading ^l|SaL and tO^li."
A. 68. 8. 10. Instead of the first ten words of the line, add :
" Rem. Since the letters 1 , O , a and Ql are often exchanged
with each other ; this fact not only explains the preceding
rule, but the fact that in some verbs ( is changed into %^ .
Here belong :"
A. 68. 14. 5. Instead of lines 13 and 14 to ''pret.'\ add: "It
is to be attributed to the light and pleasant pronunciation of
7 1>
the verb \'\\ , (according to 12. 1 and 15. 2) that ^ is so
often used at the beginning of a syllable, is not more fre-
quently united in the same syllable with ] , and is not
sounded, Lin. Occult, being placed under it, causing the
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 387
following vowel to fall back upon 1 . This is the case in the '*.
A. 69. 6. 11. After "vowel", add: "(3/. and 1 sing.pret.)''
A. 69. 9. 5. Instead of remainder of Kern, before " Only ",
7 7 r
read : "Only .^OIa to give (for tiDOU) makes an exception
to this vowel mark. Here, especially in ihQpret.^ a crasis of
the first two radical letters is found, in which case wa, accord-
ing to the regular formation, is vowelless, consequently, in the
3d. m., 2 m. and/, sing.^ and in all the plur. where Ol , with
Lin. Occult, occurs, the vowel of 01 falls back upon wa
(Aooiu , waAooi-* , Q:DOL*, etc). But where, in the regu-
lar inflection, the first radical has its peculiar vowel, especially
in the 3 /. and 1 sing.^ crasis, with Lin. Occult.^ does not
occur (AiDOLi and Aoou). But when the two forms last
named take suffixes, the crasis returns again, according to
36. Here also the first radical remains vowelless (the
vowel of CI being thrown back upon it), e. g. OlAoCTU , she
.7 -n
has given him (AoOLi). In the 3 plur. m. and/, Lin. Occult.
X 7
falls away again, e. g. OIQOOLa they have given them up
7
(QSCTIa). Upon the connection of this verb in the fut, and
injin. Peal, with ^^ = Itl!: cf. . 35. 2. 6. "
A. 69. 21. 10. After "^'*, add: " by dropping the first
radical ".
A. 69. 28. 7. Instead of " jll ", add : " ^10 ".
A. 70. 2. 5. After " verbs ", add : " consist in the quiescence
and changing of ] into ji and ".
A. 70. 9. 8. Before " ", add: " in order to relieve the pro-
nunciation ".
A. 70. 21. 1. Instead of the next 14 lines to " Ee.n.", add:
388 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
1. According to the analogy of the regular verb, Q, f
verdsaL, quiesces in , in the imj^erat. and fut. of Fe.j
\ ^
>0ao, ^QQJ; the prei. and irifin. of the same conjuga-
p p p // I
tion takes XLO , >onV); and in ve7-ds .jkl , with i
in like manner, is retained in the pret.^ imperat.^ and fut. Fe.
LmId , y^AO) , i>QjbCQJ , while the infin. with belongs to
verbs Ql . The preformative of the fut. takes no vowel.
Only 1 of the 1st. sing, takes , ^00*1. In the other
conjugations Q passes into ^ ( , of course, is the usual
vowel in Ethpe.^ Pa.^ and Aph. of the regular verb), and either
quiesces in , in Ethpe., Aph. and Ethtaph. (pronounced
the same as Ethpe.), e. g. y) * o2Z1 , ^-^ ^1 , i<laj221 ,
I 7
(/^e /ifls exalted himself, cf. ^Qa)] ) ; or is movable in Pa. and
JEJ^^^jja. (corresponding wnth Dag. f in Heb.), e. g. ^CLxO,
7 7 -R
^ iOZf . In the part. act. Pe., it is changed into 1 ( = y,
cf. 1. Rem. 4), e. g. ^|o (pronounced hoy-em), and which
(Q), in the course of conjugation, loses itself again in jl. , and
with , forms the dipthongoi, e. g. tV>iO (emph. st. m, or
fern, abs.) ; but, in the part, pass., it follows the regular form-
ation w^ith ^ quiescing, e. g. ^^1 . For Fa. and Ethpa. we
sometimes find the conjugations Falpel and Ethpalp., e. g.
iO^ioi {Ephr. II. 20. D. 6), ^^-ioiZf, ^lljlj (from
A. 71. 13. I. Insteadof the two lines beginning with "some",
add: "there are, however, several verbs, originally Ql , which
7 77 -n
retain Q in Fa. and Ethpa., e. g. jj Pa. JOJ Ethpa . jOjZ] .
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 3S9
The verbs ^a^ > ^^0 follow the same rule in their forma-
tion. There are two verbs nearly resembling each other
which are distinguished by their signification, #02 [to accuse) ^
7 7 1* ^
^A.oZ( (to be present)^ from ^. Some have double roots,
7 9 7 7 7
e. g. JQ^ [to blind), from JOl {to be blind), and ;jl1 (^o z^;a^-e
up), from ;2k (^o wake). It is only very seldom that the dou-
9 7
ble root has the same signification, e. g. jai and *jaOJ (^o
7 7 7 7
breathe), from which are tjaO) and .-m-aJ to permit to breathed
A. 71. 32. 5. After ^'convinced''', add: "or to permit to con-
vince themselves ( = Trel^es'hai), Ethpe, or".
A. 72. 8. 1 0. After " verbs", add: " and those in which 1
either quiesces, passes into ji ,or falls entirely away. The".
A. 72. 10. 1. Instead of the first line and second to "the",
add: " 1. In respect to the general formation of the tenses
and modes, the following should be remarked. Final (
either quiesces in a preceding vowel ( or ), or passes
into ^. The".
A. 72. 21. TO. After "P^.", add: "(except Fe. of verbs
II
B )".
A. 72. 24. 2. Instead of the sentence beginning with " The
imperatives", read : " Therefore, we have here the addition of
the imperat. Fe. to the imperat. ending of Ethpe., e. g.
7 I
^\D.M. ".
I 7 *
A. 72. 26. 9. Before " some", add : " ; Ethpa. .^i^iA* | to be
named {Acts 1. 23)".
A. 73. 2. 1. Before " The" add : " instances of false punctua-
P 7 -
tion for U-.Z] {Ethpa.y\
^ 26
390 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 73. 3. 1. After "and", omit next word, and add: "an
apocopate form f OU ".
A. 73. 10. 1. Instead of first line "to the pret", add: "A. In
which cases, t^ , arising out of | , may be either movable^ or
quiescent, as can be readily perceived by a comparison of
these with the regular verb \ a) %jl is movable in verbal for-
mations where, in the regular verb, the third radical letter be-
gins a syllable ; b) it quiesces, on the contrary, where the
tbird radical closes the syllable. Consequently belong here
under a\ (Also in lines 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, from top in Trans,
omit "in)".
A. 73. 16. 10. Before"; and", add: " (also the eraphAovm
of the masc.^'').
A. 73. 21. 7. After "cases," add: "(also in Fe. of verbs
II
^)".
A. 73. 23. 1. Instead of " B. ] falls away in", add: * B. ]
falls entirely away without compensation, before the forma-
tive additions Q and ^ , or those which begin with Q and ^
as tQ and ^ . Accordingly belong here". Omit " in," in
lines 24, 25, 27, 29, words 10, 7, 10, 11 ( countmg from the
left), in p. 73, and lines 1, 2, 4, T., words 10, 12, 3, in p. 74 in
Trans.
A. 74. 5. 7. Before " e. g." add: "(more nearly approach-
ing to the sound of 1)".
A. 74. 7. 2. After " appears" add: " (cf. the Heb. nii<!D>
ninjn^jjn)".
A. 74. 23. 1. Instead of the first two lines and a half, to
" sometimes ", read : " When ^ and jl movable occur to-
gether, as in the verb V^a* , for the sake of euphony, jl, falls
away, if these letters are separated from each other and not
in the same syllable. This is the case when the verb takes a
preformative and the first radical is vowelless, e. g. injin. Fe.
IjISo, forU-**^"'*.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 391
A. 75. 10. 5. After "verbs", add: "consist in tlie falling
away of the first radical letter and".
A. 75. 12. 1. After "^j9^.", add: '' and Ethtaph.".
A. 75. 13. 1. Before " The", instead of the sentence extend-
ing to the Rem., add: "A/^^^. and imperat. with occur even
7 - 7
in transitive verbs^ e. g. OQQJ , ^CD , in respect to which
the former is only distinguished externally from the pret, by
being placed over the preformative. Two forms (jAj and
ioZu) with 5Aj, are in use and afut. with , e. g. \>i^
{Ephr. 11. 228. E. 1.), forming the verbs j^ , ^2LJ, ^Aj ,
(cf. *SOU 35. 2. b)".
A. 75. 19. 10. After "descended", add: "In respect to re-
It 7 P
tainingthe characteristic 1 in Aph., e. g. \zi\y from ^OJ, com-
pare 23. 1. Rem.".
A. 75. 25. 7. Instead of the line to "away" read: "A
contraction of the last two radicals, takes place, by which
the vowel of the stem syllable falls back upon the first radi-
cal".
A. 76. 4. 5. Instead of 12 words from "takes", to "away",
read : ",in its approach to a regular formation, requires a di-
vision of its monosyllabic stem and inserts 1 between the two
radicals".
A. 76. 16. 1. Instead of the seven following lines, add:
" 2. l^he part, pass. Pe.,retaining the middle radical, is inflected
regularly in a fuller form on account of the last two radicals
bemg separated by the insertion of the characteristic a, be-
tween them, e. g. %m.fcID> . All of the modes and tenses of Pa
and Ethpa., (whose middle radical, it has been thought, should
be doubled) are also regularly inflected, e. g. ^CQXJ , QCDjL| .
392 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Hence we fiod also the forms Palpel and Ethpalp.^ c.
g. -y\ki J , "WKV' ' Ei^^P^' seldom conforms to the first
formation, e.g. mCD>Z] {Heb. IX. 13) ; ^XmZ] {Barhebr. p.
508) ; >mimaZ| from ^COa ( 7l55ewj. i?i6/. Or., 11. pp. 13G.
139)".
A. 77. 17. 10. After "formed", add: "according to some".
A. 77. 18. 1. Before " zV/tp^ra^.," add : " (properly by the eli-
sion of ^)".
A. 77. 20. 12. After *'^ai", add: " part. act. ^Gll ,2yass.
A. 77. 21. 8. Before "c)", add: "The infin. Pe. ^cki
mentioned by Ainira^ p. 362, is diflBcult to explain".
A. 77. 28. 6. After "46", add: "(for looif Matt, XVII.
OOl] ".
A. 78. 1. 1. After ^^ passive'\ instead of the rest of line 1, line
2, and line 3 to " while", read : " ] being retained throughout
7
all the modes and tenses, quiesces in , as in verbs 3 Gatt.
(vid. ^ 13. 1. Rem. ), while its vowel".
A. 98. 23. 12. After " Pa.", add: "and Ajyh., retain".
7 . 7
A. 100. 26. 2 Before " (compare," add: "e. ^. >/rv^ o^\
infin. Aph. from ^'jl , Ephr. 1. p. 8. E. 3.".
A. 106. 5. 1. After "it", add: "(in both cases corrected
m the London ed., thus, OU^mJ and CTLiL2iD>*| )".
A. 106. 21. 6. Before "In", add: "in consequence of which
Jk becomes movable".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 393
A. 110. 15. 2. Instead of "loou," read; "loiJ ".
A. 122. 5. 9. For " ^JOl^," read: "^aL ".
A. 123. 20. 10. After "44", add: "Rem. A special versa-
tility of the language is apparent particularly in transferring
Greek composites to itself. This versatility is generally
quite evident from an analysis of composites in respect to
their elements and relation to the genitive (cf. Synt. g 81.
Appendix). The following express the concrete idea :
P-X I 7 7 7
li*xOa* ^jZ opOoSo^og- ; loilL L^ ^eoroiwg ; (cf. 2 Tim.
III. 2, 3; Acts YII. 51). Coticrete co7)iposites, marking the
\^ '
idea of companionship ( = gvv ), are expressed by |;nt
m. (companion)^ \L\d^f., less frequently by pa| brother ^
e. g. |LOn lg> (x| aviK^vyddeg. The Syrians express univer-
X *, I 7
sa/zVy ( = Trai^ro ) by ^^ placed after it, e. g. ^^JD r>-^l ^^^-
roKpdrisip \ ^ibD 1 ^So iravrodvvaiioq \ multiplicity {= iroXv)
is expressed by w*^ , e. g. toQ.^ **ytffl TToXvfia/cap ;
P 7.. 17 7.. 7 I 7
UliDJ -k-yjhfiO iToXvTLiiog {Johu XIL 3) ; PiJ] i]j^wflD (?/)
TTOAviTOiKLXog. In reference to compounding something of a
general nature, cf. Acts X. 34; XXIII. 23; 1 Cor.Yl. 9.
The same is true when abstract ideas are expressed, e. g.
yia ; jcoaSOJ ^jZ SevrepovofiLov (cf. ilfa^/. XIX. 8 ; Eph.
IV. 2; Co/. 1. 11; III. 12). Of this kind are compounds
with i^fu preceding, e. g. ]; i.'?^Of)| Lo^J^^Zi ruiiocpaLpLov \ with
7 J^-^ ppi 7 -n
litaog preceding, e, g. ]Sdq.*j OlnAs) ; or |V>V?i Al^So
fiearj^fipta {cf. Mark XIII. 35 ; i^ei;. XIX. 17). The idea
7 7 7 7
of climate is expressed by vMJrSo wa^^. , and transposed, by
7 7 7 7 * ^
*jk.O^. wi-wJ^Sd northeast. Negative nouns are indicated by
)9-l ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
p . I f
Jj preceding, e. g. |Al,- jJ ignorance \ (Zo^^Oll P careless-
ness ; IZom^^ U disorder {ara^ia) (cf. ikZa^^. XIII. 58 ;
XVII. 20) ; an object entirely negative and its nature for-
7
eign, is expressed by |j ? , e. g. ^Ql ]] > ovac e^j^o^ (= Dj?
jjjfi) nothing less than this ; by a negative circumlocution^ e. g.
Zoi 1 \ 1^ tV)t'j w?a7z;^ of affection {daropyta). The same is
true in respect to adjectives and adverbs, cf. Agrell Supplem.
p. 78
A. 124. 7. 3. After 'Manguage", add : "like the other Semit-
ic dialects".
A. 128. 15. 11. After "stejt?", add:" U^^ve^wi^ {Ephr.
1. 8. D. 2) , ViLoy a /ie/-rf of horses (Ephr, 1. 25. X). 5), Uoi'j*
a/oo6^ (JS:;3Ar. 1. 121. E. 5)."
A. 130. 21. 1. After "should", add: " (as in the London ed.
of the New Testament) "
A. 131. 2. 5. After "etc.", add: " although the form ti'l is
also found, and, according to Bar AH, the si?2^. MO]^^ lies at
'^ p..
the foundation of ]jOV*j.".
A. 131. 9. 7. After "food", add: " but Q in the m;?^^^. ^/.
falls away again, e. g. (AAOPiD.".
A. 136. 6. 11. Erase "V", and, in line 8,3d word (after
"11"), add: "and V".
A. 136. 11. 5. Instead of the next eight lines to "movable",
add : " while the other suffixes with their union vowels pre-
ceding ( >^-., ...k..^^ etc., ) are generally attached to the
form of the ewphat. state, e. g. y V)^\ , OljOlCD, etc., which
circumstance is explained by the fact that it relieves the
pronunciation made difficult by an accumulation of vowelless
consonants. The same rule holds also in monosvllabic nouns,
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 395
which, in the emphatic state^ lose or (of the ahs, state) ^
e. g. >Qa , emph. (Sos , with svff. iV?p , ykl* (^j^IIi ,
7 II t^
^\d from ;ii) etc. Nouns derived from verbs U with | ,
e?7z;?A. 5i^e ^i. [decl. V., e, g. li^, emph. ]iS^ ), allow wi in
the iSw^. ( 1 sing. 2. and 3. ^/.) to quiesce in , e. g. - *^^^ ,
^QDaX^ , w^hile in the other suff.^ a is movabley\
A. 140. 7. 9. After " syllable," add : "(in the emphat. sing.
and in all the plur.y\
A. 143. 12. 6. After "2)", add: "and this law of the lan-
guage is applicable to a\] feminines^\
A. 150. 5. 1. Instead of " denominative adjectives", read:
" adjectives derived from noims,''\
A. 150. 22. 1. After "Rem.", add: "For 1A , the form
1 As"! occurs with prosthetic f when preceded by the copulative
O ( lAalo ), or by j for marking the ordinal number ((A|5
the sixthy\
A. 150. 28. 7 Instead of the next 14 words, including "fern-
7 7
inine", read : " ( or ^Z^k) dual from IZ^D ) 200 ; the other
hundreds were formed by a unit preceding, in the/ewj., united
with a word having I^Sd in the sing. (\\^t^L) , or by a
unit separated from a word in the plur. having ||Sd f'ZolSo
aIZ 300, etc.".
A. 151. 4, 9. After "word", add: " ( each having a double
gender)".
A. 152. 25. 1. Instead of 8 words, from " so" to " here," add :
" truly, yes, so, U not, oL (from OCJl jJ) not, \a\ here, there
(^h\ farther, there, yonder), \d here, there, at that place, p
where, only there where, ^LdZ at that place, there.
393 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Rem. The prepositions ^ and Vn united, indicate motion to or from a
place, e. g. ],:i^ there, \^^from that place, ^Ul^ farther thisivay, ^01^
Vn from that place, thence, l\ only there whither, VnA\ thither, to that
place, Vr> /- SD from that place, thence, ]ol forms many corapounda, e. g.
1 P 7 9 *kC> 7
^;^C71 (tote) then (referring to time), at that (time), OCH , ^lOCT!
so, of this kind, ^JOI (from loi and |o with the changing of the former
into jOI ) fi-^re, there (referring to place), therein, \JjCl^ there, pjOl
^^r\ from that (time), to that (time), ^sDZjOI ^/i very same, \mC\ (from
loi and "{^^ hour) now, \mO\ ^^ frotn this time" .
A. 152. 27. 6. After "M ," add: (AI]!), ^J ".
X f X
A. 153. I. 8. After "again", add: " ZoiZulZ ^/^e third
A. 153. 2. 7. After " to-day ", add : " Kem. All Gentile
TZOMws also take the termination Aj"| with C^ preceding, e. g.
3. The manner in which the want of adverbial forms are
supplied and expressed in the Syriac language, by nouns, ad-
jectives^ pronouns and other parts of speech is liberal and
various. Here are to be considered : a) adverbial forms ex-
pressed by substafitives ] a) merely by the abs. stat. sing, with-
out a preceding preposition, e. g. t^^O (want) not, Gl^3
^\o entirely : by the emph. stat., e. g. {l^l always ( all time)
. P I *.
(;.iQJ long, |;^1 ontJds side ; by the^j/wr. ahs., e. g. ^CD*,*Qi
^ r p
manifold; by the constr. stat., e. g. ^-B'^r*^ around ; by the
*. p p -x
/ew. a55(?/. sing, 0.11^ f^ freely, Jlmj^ ^ver?/ ti?ne ; by the emph.
p y
Stat, fern. e. g. |Al^l always (all time) ; by the constr. stut.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 307
fern. Aooj instead of ; by the emph. plur.fem. (Al^l some
time^ inuch time. Also more frequently by > following, e. g.
J (Zqq>;^ almost^ nearly. Also we find used as adverbs \
[3) nouns with a preposition preceding (especially ID) in the
X 7 7
abs. stat.^ e. g. >tO,.Q somewhere^ ^^V^ formerly^ once^
\\^ ^ . . ' ^
^^^uLd immediately y swiftly / in the emph. stat. e. g. (jj-AO
^ .i' 7 ^ " " P >.
truly ^ (jQir:) unjustly y (Ij;^ ,]aCi.^^ , ju^Q^^ privately ^
(^^fm quietly y in the /?/z^r. Pr^O sometimes \ aho fejninines
X X 7 Ow X 7
in the absol. st., OSX^Glfd speedily , OJaOIVO cautiously ; in
P -X X 7
the emph. st.^ (ZoSi 1^ s///y/ with > preceding e. g.
|Alj sooHj PiDQA ^\Dj rfazYy ; with ^ preceding and j fol-
P *. -X P 7
lowing, e. g. > tljo|J against, 5 *O0,^ somewhere, > I^^^a^
finally, J |n>jO^/ar (from). Also with ^So preceding, e. g.
iN _Sd immediately, \^0j _So whence; with vA, e. g.
JQI.. ^^ ?eea/" ^0, ^Q2) ^^ ?^ear z^, c/ose by ; with yu] , e. g.
]CQ2}Q^ ^a] straight as ; with a preposition preceding and
n P -X 1> 7
following, e. g. IsD |idjQQ^ near to something, _Sd Q^ik^
within something ; with the preceding preposition doubled, e.
g. Qy^ SiO within {laoi^ev), \Cl^ ^iDivithout (e^cj^ev). The
same relations are also found ; b) in adjectives, numerals and
P I 7 P X 7
pronouns, Q.g. t^^^j *--vv^ (also ^^4?) t'e?-j', ;jiAa more, more
so, >Cli^, 9a^^0 only, pw^j, (r**^| at once, f(i..l0 and
I,..** ^Sd immediately, pDO 7ioi^ much ? ].lV)JS and Ql2sD z^7z?/ .?
jlSQlD lioiv, 5 |Sd yLA\just as, J OOl yi^l as tlumgh,even as
f/', J w01 >4.*( so as, etc. Finally adverbial forms are
898 ADDITIONS AND COPJIECTIONS.
expressed ; c) by verbal forms^ e. g. infin. f30iL again^ or by the
partic. e. g. ^^>jwk^ , ^m.So ^So almost. Cf. Agrell Suppl.
p. 259 flf. and Append, p. 52. Upon the manner of expressing
adverbs by verbs^ cf. Syntax 82. 1 ".
A. 153. 16. 6. After " ek?J ", add: ]4^| eZra, y.4 Ta;^^;
A. 153. 27. 9. After ''ID", instead of the next 7 words to
" which ", add : "(in which is contained the idea of being, in-
cluding, or being in something, or mediation through some-
thing, the allot.) ; j (properly the relative., indicating the
drawing out of something, the hanging from something, the
genit.) ; ^ (indicating direction towards something, relation
to something; therefore dat. and accus.). These preposi-
tions ".
A. 154. 10. 3. Before "the", instead of the next five lines to
" among ", add : " the preposition ^ preceding, draws O to
itself in the simple forms \>^5Q^ and ^r^QJ^ and retains
the same (O) before the suffix in nouns^ taking the suffix 1
sing. 2 and 3 pi. m. and/, without a union vowel (cf. ^15.
2. B. c. and fol. table) ; but before the other suff. w^ith the
union vowel, this peculiarity does not appear, e. g.
jlItioqI^, OT^nn\, etc.".
A. 154. 15. 9. After "with", add: "(containing the idea of
a common union with or accompaniment to something, from
:>aSDi)".
A. 154. 15. 11. After "by", read: "(containing the idea of
adding to something, an immediate consequence)".
A. 154. 16. 2 After "to", add: "(containing the idea of
adding to something by approximation, from *jiQ^)".
A. 154. 19. 10. After "for", add: "(containing the idea of
changing or changing with something)".
A. 154. 20. 11. After "under", instead of next three lines,
add: "( the findingunder something, from AwJ) ; with ^ (in
which is contained the idea of going down under), undei ;
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTION'S. 399
^!^ (the being separated from something, the removing, from
P 7 9
Ll!iD)fro?n; jAq (standing fast in the order of place and
time) after; b) substantives with prefixes^ e. g. VV^<^r>x
(movement in an opposite direction) against; ^^^Q^ (direc-
tion forv^^ard) hefcyre ; 5 AfiQI!) after ;".
A. 154. 27. 6. After " over ", instead of the next 4 words to
"against", add: "(relating to motion upward; hence ^^.^ ,
direction from below {sursuin)\ ^^.1^ ^Sd direction to a place
, pft (the adding to and
agreement with something) according to, to, with, ".
A. 156. 9. 7. After "be it be it", add: "(also ,lo
^j tl = elre Se elre) ,11 /|o wJwe not, or ]j ^J 1(0
= el 61 fiTj ; ^1 if too, if too indeed, although, 01 (=g(;i ti^)
if not, after ^| nevertheless, J |J 1 with ihQ future following,
^ Ul with the infin. following, except that, ."I jJ] or ]j Q-^
x 7 r p P -n ^
if not ; >Qm.^O Q-^ 2)1 U "| wo^ ow/y but also ;".
A. 156. 9. 14. After "lest", add: "with i\\e fut. following
lest^ before a noun, without ;".
p
A. 156. 11. 7. After '-until", read: I^^O before, ere, or
after particles, e. g. ? '^ I , 5, even as, as if, j p.^^ ( so as
p p 7 7
(Ka'hdg), that (iva), Uj p..2Lfe] ^/^ai tzo?, etc.;".
A. 156. 14. 4. After "/^eV", add: "of which the last two in
the Charklensian version of the New Testament, correspond
with the Greek [lev de".
A. 156. 14. 4. Add a note: "Rem. The frequent use of
both the last named particles ^JLd and ^ j for uniting the two
parts of a sentence without expressing a direct antithesis, i& a
400 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
peculiarity of the so-called Charklensian version of the N. T.,
which literally follows the Greek text, but very seldom em-
ploys the classic Greek. The particles Sd and uj named
above, evidently precede parts of sentences or simply serve
as marks (cf. Synt. 85, and my Treatise de versionum N. T.
Syriacarum critico usu. Berolini 1850. 4. p. 12 ff.".
A. 156. 15. 1. Instead of the next four lines, read : " 3. Inter-
jectionSjfor the most part, areonomatopoetic {dvoiiaTonoiTjTucd)^
e.g. O I (with ^ following), Oiol , ^o] , .o] O f ah/ (with
" or ^Sd following) , ^0 , -lO] , "jiaO (= Tjij^ , ^-jf^) with
^ or ^^ following, alas/ (also abbreviated %.a.^.*0 woe to
me/) ]ai , loiO (= j-;5p| , Idov) lo / wkOU ai / ha!
(= stop). They are borrowed from other parts of speech,
X '^ 7
e.g. %)0As1, .jiqL (= js^:]3, :]i) 0/ if it were / ( loould
X P II
that it ivere /) Ql^O (also ^ and p = jj^^ quceso) pray /
\l, plur. QL {imperat. from \L\) well/ ^Q^ plur, QSDQO
up/ .0^ he it far off/ ^jlOQ^ hail/ (with plural suffixes
and ^ following before the noun). Cf. Synt. 86.
"Rem. In respect to jcn and JOIO in the Charklensian version, corres-
ponding with Idov and naX l6ov in Greek, the same rule holds as in res.
pect to aev and Se named above. But this peculiarity does not very
often appear in the Peshito,"
A. 157. 12. 11. After "lY. 5", add: '' Assem. III. P. II.
348 ;".
A. 157. 16. 11. After " Kirsh.", add: " Chrest."
A. 157. 18. 4. After "accusative", add: '' Ephr. 1. 123.
ipi PO I -n 7 -X y 7 7
D. 3. Lj]LJi^L iOjl \j,'^l] lc3i!L? Uci^?o l^^^?
J^ *-01 cn^ ^I^dAcqLd this, that Adam was created in,
the image of God, we know, from a threefold, reason ".
A. 158. 1. 1. Instead of the next eight words, read: " Eem,
Separate personal pronouns are also found similarly situated
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 401
without beiDg emphatic, e. g. Ephr. 11. 209. D. 7. ]>01 Zooi
P OlZuUD p(> \y.iO is not this Babel which I have
built ? I. 312. A. 1. They are emphatic when following and
oftener before ihQ verb^ e. g. Barh. 399. 15; especially when
*i\ is placed between ".
A. 158. 2. 9. Before " Upon " add: ''Ephr. I. 308. E. 3.
ySli:^ \l\ *al ]j| ^ll I also vnll go with thee ".
A. 158. 5. 12. After "38" read: " e. g. ^y^r. II. 220. D.
2. 3. (Aj^Sd *a01 1;^;* ^Ae tvord is true ".
A. 158. 9. 6. After "64", read: ''Ephr. I. 392. C. 3. *a01
(.kJi.1 ^) uiOl ^^ that is manifesV\
A. 158. 19. 2. Before "or", add: ''ActsN.^I. ^a* IjOlO)
7 .-h ? I X
^Lm t<?e are witnesses ; Barh. 26. 2. (JOl *^ai *a010
P 7 7
]An<^V) and this is the translation. Also the pronoun oc
X 7 X ^ *^
curs with A^] e.g. Ephr. II. 153. A. 2. *a01oZu| 001 001.
this is it ; or it is separate, e. g. I. 392. C. I. 483. E. 2
*. 7 T> 7 . 7 P
oAjI OISQI jOAjIj |S2D 50 /o7?^ way you be with me; Acta
Mart, orientt. II. 351. 20. 21. "
A. 158. 21. 10. After "15", add: '' Eem. The substantive
X
verb is often expressed by OOl , after a personal pronoun, e. g.
ilfa. XXVI. 25. ^jJO'y 001 ]j1 ]!^ Sir, is it I? Also
*s 7 7 * P
in compounds, as QlLo z^^/io is ? Ql!sO t^Aa^ w ? Q^^ he is
good; Q^ji'rCi he is blessed ; Luke X. 41 ; 1 Cor. IV. 11 ; X.
22; Rom.Ylll. 37".
A. 159. 2. 14. After "133.1", add: "^c^^s III 14; Ephr.
I. 85. F. 6. 7."
A. 159. 4. 14. After "are'*, add: "4. The neuter pronoun
(cf Agrell App. II. p. 23) is expressed ; a) by the fe?nininej it'
402 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
ihe pronoun take both genders^ e. g. jBar^. 264, 9. Zooi ^(j
" - p p * -ft
-cn that wUich has happened J- 569,9. \kOU\ fjOl J zf/^/ws
happen; Assem. I. 372. *j.oAdZ| ^OlJkT) ,-jAoi aH this
is written; b) by the masc. when t\\Q pronoun takes oniy one
gender^ e. g. ^Issewz. I. 375. vm^AaJ) ^Ld z^,'//.i6^ has been
found; Barh. 439, 14. .Q^ ]00U U^ tf^J>^ has hap.
pened to you ; the neuter pronoun is seldom expressed by the
masc. whea it takes both genders^ e. g. Xw^e VII. 7 ; VIII.
18; XIX. 26; Matt. XIII. 22.
B. Suffixes,
11\\Q pronominal suffixes of the verb mark the accusative^ sel-
dom the personal dative of other languages, e. g. Assem. III.
7 7 P
P.I. 179. >Tr. it happened to me. Also (001 maiksthe ac-
cusativej e. g. tIc/s VII. 40. *.0Li001 plD M.^^^ which
hapi^ened to him^ what became of him ; XXVIII. 5. 6. Some-
times also the arcus, is marked by a preposition, e. g. ikfe^f.
XXVI. 39. wiJf^U (rrapeASerw ot' tjaoi; ) ; it is also some-
times found in connection with ^ID , e. g. Barh. 219.
7
Rem. But the verb JDOIa ^^ 9^^^> ^^^^ ^^^ belong here, as in this sig-
nification it is only united with a personal dative. If, therefore, we find
7 ^ A "
. >i A om. in Jwd I. 15, it does not mean as much as > .\ A^OLb,
thou hast given to me; but the suffix, according to the original meaning, to
P 7
set, to place, to misplace, is the personal object in the accusative ! , iA*"^m^
should be rendered thou hast placed or misplaced me. The LXX_ have
rightly translated endedoaal fie thou hast given me {of the house) i. e. a
dourry. Therefore the auxiliary signification to reward, to present with, is
here, to lead by the hand. This relation is not found in the Old Testament,
e. g. Isa. XXVIl. 4, compared with Uphr. II. 65. E. and Zach. VII. 5,
compared with Uph\ II. 296. B."
A. 159. 14. 8. After ^'proper", add: "when they stand in
place of the adjective ",
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 403
A. 159. 16. 4. After "ornament *', add: "^joAr. 11. 22 I.B.I.
4^ P I 7
f jQO> IAa'^ ^ over thy holy city; 227. C. 4, 5 ; 11. 339.
(J. \b,7', I. 130. E. 7;.
A. 159. 30. 9. After "him", add: '' Ephr. I. 349. C. 4 ;".
A. 159. 32. 6. After " 14", add: " 42G. 8. a\^\i the r eport
by him ".
A. 160. 9. 6. Instead of' and", add: '' Ephr.l. 340. B. 8.
pi 9 7 7
>iL^) y.^ ^1 OjJQL JIOOl so also they makeit {directly)
With thee; I. 131. D. 7. ^-iui j ^^LCL^J P^^l even as vnth us,
"When an aJjeciive is united with a noun ihQ possessive follows
the latter. If the possessive stand before the noun, it takes
the place of the substantive verb, e. g. Ephr. II. 220. C. 2.
|Zq21 k^^Lo y.-^? thine^ O, Sir, is the victory. So with J
following, the possessive pronoun signifies the same^ e. g.
|.^\V)> ai^) the sar/ie kings; Atsem. I. 28. lAl^pLO)
\^ ^* * . ~ ' '
Gl^) the same city ; or it is used as a relative^ e. g. Barh.
07 ' t" ^
429, 2. GISDjOJ Cll^) whose name. With a preposition pre-
ceding it means se/^, e. g. OlA^r^ in themselves ; Ephr. II.
7 X 7
204. F. 7. ^^> ^ ourselves. With a jorcpoizYzm preceding
and a 5^^^a; added, it stands in place of the substantive pro-
nouns, mine, thine, etc., e.g. John's.. 14. *i\i> ^D from
n I 7 I 1
mine; I. 11. OlAjr^ to his ; Assem. I. 375. ^^> ^^ from
ours. The sense is similar when preceded by a pronoun sep-
mife, e.g. B ith. 254. 10. ^^> ^^01 ^^D from thine;
526, 11 ; 425, 14. 5; and fully absolute as in Luke XV. 31.
001 \^J^) >A.^j? ^,V)\oo a'ndwliat is inine, that is thine ^
John XVII. 9, 10. The repetition of the suffix occurs ".
A. 161. 12. 1. After "Rem.", read: *' Here belong also
^ -X -
abbreviated forms, e. g. O^N for 001 >^ ; Assem. III. P. I.
*
293. TrSo aa^ to thee, Lord'\
404 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 161. 14. 7. After *' city ", instead of " XXII. 19, und ',
read : " *-iCl does not often appear in such passages as
Assem. III. P. I. 363. loilLj ^Gl ]L^acl3tS, to the praise
of God, The same is true also in respect to ".
A. 161. 26. 8. After " 14", add: ''Bark. 452, 14. OlJSOiI,
CI ^2U he gave (him) his wine himself ; Ephr. II. 217. D. I.
Also, according to some, the suffix also stands between words,
e. g. EjJhr. I. 84. B. 7 ^IDOnSiN *a01 c)(o OlZ^ she also
asked it (him) from Jacob. \^ also stands after the verb be-
fore a mere personal suffix^ e. g. .Sar/z. 324, 3. Olbi waiOr^]
they took him prisoner ; even when it follows the 52{^, mark-
ing the nearer noun, so that there is a double pleonasm, e. g.
^^ir. I. 314. C. I. ^0\C1^ OIJ^ ^010)^1 J ivhich had sus-
tained' (h\m, h\m)Barak; III. 567. D. 7. 8."
A. 161. 27. 7. x\fter " pleonastically ", add: "as personal
dative ".
A. 161. 28. 5. After " &c.", add : "which pecuharityismore
frequent in Syriac than in Hebrew. The following belong
here ".
A. 162. 5. 13. Before "sometimes", instead of the rest of
the Eem., read : " sometimes this peculiarity of speech is found
in connection wlthjl^^^ wander, e. g. Ephr. I. 1. C. I; |ls
to be quiet ; Ephr. III. 584. F. 4 oA.:i*| to find, e. g. Ephr.
I. 184. D. 3; ILdj to be similar, e. g. Ephr. II. 339. B. 7;
i^ii ^0 make, e. g. Barh. 217. 10; |4* ^^ be foolish, e. g.
Kom. I. 22; even with (OOI, e. g. John I. 15; Ephr. I. 8.
E. 1. Ol^ fOOl (aSD9 ^ as it was evening ; often in con-
nection with many verbs, in which the idea of a kind of draw-
ing back seems to lie, e. g. ;*Scir) to believe ; John XI. 31 ;
7 I
7?Ar. I. 82. A. 3 ; 266. A. 3 ; Vi^ to know, to comprehend^
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 405
e. g. Ephr. I. -265. C. 5 ; 84. B. 6 : U^D ^o venture, o. g. I.
7
348. F. 1. ^ry\io happen to ones self; Ephr.l. 125. C. 3-
^llil ^1^ tOCTl-l ^aJi,_.j wJdch is accustomed to happen
to one from time to time. The same is true m passives, e. g.
covered; Ephr. II. 20G. E. 3. Ol^ r^^) he was born; II.
227. D. 4. 5. .OOl^j ]L.>* OlLd Ol^ J^AAaJ your whole
armytvillbe surrendered; Ephr. I. 21. B. 6., etc.*
A. 162. 18. 8. After " honor it ", add : "; Arts V. G ; VI. 12 ;
especially when the participle is separated from the first
{verb); e. g, Ei^hr. I. 81. D. 2; III. 591. A. 7, namely, when
simultaneous actions are associated. Sometimes alsu the
sujjix tOj] is attached to the first verb, e. g. Ephr. II. 152.
P. 5. ^0;akJO .QJ*| yIiSa3 /^e m overwhelmed and {they)
dead:\
A. 162. 22. 13. After B", add: ";IL153. A.4. '. .A^\
.OOlZoZ;^ zAe {your) heir of the children of God ; even when
this genitive is a pronoun, e. g. Ephr. I. 83. B. 4. 5. fjOlj
p ^ 1 - 7
m^nh^Kn SoXa to perform matrimony {whh) her. The ple-
onastic sz^a: is attached to two nouns, taking the gender of
the first, especially if the noun is masc, e. g. jE^jt^^r. I. 6. F. 3.
P77 77^ I 7
ll^ljO t.ki^^> tOOlAjiJ^ \y.l concerning the creation of the
heavens and the earth ".
A. 162. 24. 7. After "Rem. 1.)", omit the next word
"(and)", adding : ", e. g. Ephr. II. 217. D. 6, 7. "{pjj oil* j
-n 7 J 7
OiAJ'P ^Z';Z the two horns of the ram (but the suffix to the
preceding noun may fall away, e. g. JE^o^r. 11. 221. B. 5;
233. C. 5) ; also here belongs the repetition of the suffi^^
27
40G ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 162. 28. 3. After " people ", add : indeed both ^ and
^^j after the noun^ sometimes take suff.^ e. g. Ephr. I. 318.
B. 7. ^\>*J 01^3 tOOlX^) vSQI all the people feared her '^ ".
A. 162. SO. 6. After "4", add: "; ^ absolute united with
a svff.^ indicates the whole^ e. g. > i\^ I wholly ; ,^\o 2^"fi
wholly. In the third person, the demonstrative pronoun often
precedes ^^^, e. g. Ol^ poi this (he) wholly ; OL^ IjOl
r/iis (she) wholly ; less frequently is a pronoun placed alter
^ , e. g. Barh. 568, 10. 11*^ ]jCJl OlliD ^/iis w;/io/c ^mc.
As a collective ^*^ is united with a sing, and plur. svff. Be-
fore numerals it forms a distributive^ e. g. Barh. 440, 7. ];Q1
^ mc/i ten; l|kD ^ eachhundred ; 516, 2. .^-lAA A ^
eac/i sia;i/i year^ all the six years ".
A. 163. 5. 5. After " sin ", add : " Ephr. 11. 227. B. 1 ; -iD ,
e. g. Acts XXIII. 6 ; Ephr. I. 7. D. 8 ; 117. C. 3. 4 ;"
A. 163. 6. 11. After "tyrant", add: ''Ephr, II. 217. C. 8;
I. 6. F. 6. |l.kD> oai> >>S concerning her being \ ".
A. 163. 7. 7. After " 19 ", add : ''Ephr. II. 217. A. 4. From
this connection of the suff. and prep, we understand clearly
the substantive character of the prepositions. "We also find
this usage still oftener employed in connection with a nou7i
P *. 7
preceded by a pronoun^ e. g. Assem. I. 40. 21. jZoa >
p p ^
^ai> Gl^^nn\ against this monster. Also ; ".
A. 163. 11. 1. After "feast", add: " i^/^Ar. II. 217. D. 3. 4.
This repetition is particularly apparent in the use of ^Sd and
^i^. Its foundation lies in the noun with a demonstrative pro-
noun preceding, e. g. Acts VIII. 35. IX. 21 ; Ephr. 1. 308. D.6.
P . * " 7 P P ti 1>
()00U) \^CiM poi ^^ OUSd owjJ of this root of Judah ; c)
also some words often stand between this pleonastic sufj\
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 407
and the following noun qv pronoun with the same preposition^
e. g. Ephu II. 232. C. 7. ll^iliJ tUSD -^-^1 OlL .liaLo
^/ie/e ^^e angel commanded (him) the prophet (cf. Agrell. Suppl,
p. 206); Ma^^. XXVII. 4. ^ |Ld ^ rl 7rp5? ^/zac; /oA
XXI. 22; Assem.l. 405. ^ aO *a.1 wo to me! III. 1. 118.
^^ *si\ ^j _j^ AjiI to we also had ; Barh. 597. 4. After
an oblique case of a noun ov pronoun separate^ the 52{^. of 3d.
person, either pleonastic or for the sake of perspicuity, some-
times follows, e. g. Barh. 78, 11; Assem. II. 372. 11. Ol^
loCTl )jGlL 1u had; sometimes the suff. of 1st. and 2d. per-
son appears, e. g. Barh. 542, 11. 12. jk^ %iT lOgf he
permitted me to drink to myself. So also after the
Accus. of the j9ro?2. separate, e. g. -4ss. III. P. 1. 96. CTI-^feo
IjoiI if/m (him) he killed; Barh. 342. 11. OITMOJ IZAj]
^Ae ivife he took (her) ; ".
A. 16. 22. 2. After " these ", add : " Ephr. I. 39. E ;"
A. 164. 4. 5. After "signification", add: "when occurring
after them ".
A. 164. 14. 3. After "8", add: " >Z( paOi ]^imJ U^f?
tJie wind blows where it ivill; > (LdQjlO ivhen ; Ephr. I. 86.
f ^ 7 7 V \Q 7
A. 1. N^ 'r'^? |Vnr>>*^ when he sent thee (is sent). Some-
times J stands before the interrogative adverb, e. g. ^^p^r. L
83. A. 3. OUaJLO y.;2Z| |V^O> fOOl IVm hQ saw how his
possessions had been prospered ".
A. 164. 18. 11. After "14", add: "1.39,2.3. .OOUOlSci
_1dAo U> 2677iOse name we have not written; Barh. 141.
15;".
A. 164. 20. 8. After "31", add: '\ Barh. mi. i. Oil 1 001
Ljk\ Oli^ *2i(j that which also had \ \
408 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 164. 24. 1. After "sent", add: '' Barh. 23. 4. 161, 9.
Qj] tr^l lOfOSj ivhom we have taken prisoner in war-^\
A. 164. 26. 14. After " God, etc.", add : " ; or simply as in
Barh. 54, 7. OlOj in which; also with one or more words
between them, e. g. ^55. 11. 260. 17. ]] jZu^ ^*^ fOlj ^OlO
a) 2;z td;^ic^ wo Iwuse is left standing ".
A. 164. 27. 1. After "Rem.'*, add: "The preposition may
be omitted where the sense is easily understood from the con-
17 7 ^ v
nection, e. g. Barh. 165, 5. v. E. AaOOlj flO] Oli^OO during
O "i"^" " 7-07
the whole time in which I teas ; 94. y^Sf)]) |A>V>^r> (Alao
during the first year in which I was Idyig. The bare relative^
especially when in the neuter gender^ without a sujf, follow-
ing, marks the accusative^ e. g. ^d^'i ^\o all which he had
7nade ; or the relative precedes the mark of the case, e. g.
r> 7 7 p-np77
Barh. 43. 12. 01iri]^j to which time; 137, 5. looi Vkl^^)
which belonged to the Arabians. At the same time it (the rela-
tive) includes, together with itself, the demonstrative^ and so
* 7 7
may stand after the jr^7?osi^io;2, e. g. Barh. 361. 14. 01^01^^ to
10 7
those who were with him ; 91,5. >Vr) rt \ iq those who stood
*> p 7
bij ; Assem. III. P. I. 238. *)! 13 > ^^ up>on that which is
not becoming ; hence in general as follows : > ^^ therefore^
X -h 7
because; J ^\4^ because; j jAo afterwards \
A. 165. 1. 2. After "strong", read: "^5sm. III. P. I 92.
p I 7
PI ,.A.Q2)j whom I have commanded. "
A. 165. 7. 3. After "Arabians", add: " Barh. 518, 5. ^1
^;Ld(> / o/" whom they say ; 533. 14. {1^^* U? -^ajoZ
^/ww, t^/wse religion is unknown ".
A. 165. 14. 9. After "170,5", add : "Also by j preceding
the above named pronouns, e. g. oai> , .aO*) either alone
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 409
or 80 that j also follows, e. g. Barh. 314. 14. (OOI OlSDlj
^ 17 1
OCTlj /^e it^/w 2d;a5 tc'ith him ; w*-^j .-lOlj the one who very
4w 7 ^ r p
\^\vas rich); farther oai> 001 m., t-iOlj "-aOI/, e. g. Barh, 465,
4. Zooi ^019 *aCn he^iolw was'^\
A. 165. 23. 1. After "Rem.", add: " The same is often ac-
complished even by the svffix^ c. g. i?rA. 303, 15; 138, 10.
17; or merely by the copula^ e. g. i^ar/i. 559, 9; Luke III.
16. Ol'rColo rjvedrjae {q,1 AgrclL p. 219)".
A. 165. 25. 5. After "sat", add : 5 ^ 001 Ephr. I. 82.
E. 3; and tjOl olooi Ephr. I. 119. B. 4.".
A. 166. 6. 6. After "signification", add: "After a preced-
ing noun in the construct statc^ it indicates the genitive^ e. g.
Barh. 504. ilOl ^aSoqIh^ in those days; 596, 14; 388, 2.
eOJOl Zoai...i2> ^/m /o%. "Without a preceding noun it
indicates the genitive by j preceding it, e. g. /oArt iX. 28.
OOI J OlrASQ^^Z disciple of this ; JJOIJ , e. g. i?a?7^. 256. 8.
]>01> ^ e. g. 102, 3. {dat. and accw5. by ^ )".
A. 166. 7. 6. After "47" add : ";Ma^^. Y. 17 ; Ephr,
I. 1. D. 3. |Zn^V>NV) fjOl .aOI even ^/^zs doctrine ; it (the
demonstrative pronoun) also corresponds with the Latin /ticce,
X -n P P
e. g. ylc^s I. 11. ^QA* poi ^/m 7e5z^5; Ephr. I. 312. D. 5.
7 y: t>
oiil rr) |J01 this Sinai \ JohtiXlX. 19. In Ephrem it often
7
Stands evidently for QJOl , that is (hoc est), e. g. B. I. 312.
P -> 'X 7 9
D. 2. 5. Ql] f'jQ^ *a| QJOl i. e. also the mountains shook.
Rem. 2. The neuter is usually expressed by the fem. form though some-
times by the masc., e. g. J/a^f. YI. 25 ; XIII. 13. (jOl ^^4^ ^*^
rovTO. "
A. 166. 14. 12. After "thou", add: ''-.Ephr.ll. 10 A. 1 ;
I. 128. B. 2. 4;"
410 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 166. 15. 4. After "*^," add: *', after the nou7i in tliu
emphat. state,"
A. 166. 16. 6. After "hand", add: "e.g. Ephr. II. 10.
A. 1 ;"
A. 166. 19. 10.~After "prepositions", add: ''Ephr. I. 128.
13. 4. ^iiOj |JiD fjS^ by whose words i? .QlD and Jl^ are used
in respect to things, e. g. Ephr. I. 389. A. 8. tOloL ichy ?
C. 2. .Qk) \y^ wherefore ? Acts V. 24. (301 w^OI ]iSd w/m^
is this V
A. 166. 22.1. After "Rem.", add : " Thezw^m-<?5'aiz;e is also
7 7 7 7 7
found in the following formation: p| ^!iO (apa), ^.i^ ^k),
Qlk) , J 0C71 ^ ( who is he that ) ; \1^\ , ..j^ ]l^| m., j,.a| ,
*a^ |,..a| /. (taho ifideed^), Ql^j , > %^^ P-| (t^-^o zAere zw-
7 7 p y ? 1* 7
deed?) J j Ola] , e. g. ^jo/zr. III. 593. D. jcCLiVraL Olki..iZ5
P *. 7 P 7 ^
ISdqS n^MJD t*1 whose lips can adequately describe Paradise ?
In indirect questions (laf and |pA| are found with v follow-
P 7 P 7 7 *
ing or preceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 6. E. 2. (SdQ-i (1.^(2) OlO
P 7*77 PO '* 7
on which days; I. 24. D. 6. Wj 1q*jJ> ^j]]o IZqo-m
Aa^ locn Aji( |1jj ^7/ u'hich he showed what peace existed
between the animals and Adam; also without j , e. g. ilia^^.
XXIV. 42. .QO'rk) 12] lAlS 1p|o at lohat hour your Lwd
X 7 _ . P ' _ ,
doth come; and QlSo with (OCTI implied, e. g. Jb/m XVIII.
38. \y^ QlLo ^^;/^a^J w ?n^^? VII. 20. Moreover flk) ,
relating to person is found, e. g. Bojrh. 223, 2. Aj| jlSC)
I -n P P P ~
tvho art thou? 399. 15. i>Qurmk5 looi ]iSd> 7^^ t^'/io ^t'as
from the beginning. In respect to the relative meaning of the
interrogative pronoun arising from j following, of. 56. 1 ".
ADDITIONS AND COllRECTIONS. 411
A. 166. 31. 2. Instead of "in", read: "by the suff. of;"
after " person ", add : " and ".
A. 167. 1. 3. After "e. g. ", instead of the next 21 words,
10 "by prepositions", add :" .001^ to one's self ( si&i) -^
Barh, 77, 5. {.H^Sd tOOlJ^ 0V)iO| theT/ chose to themse/ves
a king. The separate pronoun of the 3d. person usually pre-
cedes the accusative^ e. g. Barh. 54, 15. ^^^^O 01^ 001 he
killed himself (selbst)."
A. 167. 4. 5. After "themselves", add: '' Ephr. I. 349. C.
6;"
A. 167. 11. 3.~After "myself", add: " i^;?^/. I. 237. D. 2 ;
11. 208. F. 5. 6;"
A. 167. 15. 3. After "9", add: ''{Ag7ell. Sujipl 210 ) i
\2iOfXSi (TTpoacjTTov) Assem. 1. AS5 ;''\
A. 167. 15. 8. iVfter "6'*, add: '* sometimes ]L exhtence,
X 7
e. g. Assent. III. P. I. 77. tOaiZu >,iV^'^ who even love
themselves; also without a suffix, e. g. Assem. III. P. 1. 98.
(A* LQ^^a even contempt. PsOQlO signifies real sub-
P 7 ) > 7
Stance, the thing itself, e. g. Ephr. I. 6. jl)|> OISdQIOO
7 7 -n *v
].Vn^- oiSsDQiO Jf/se rea/ Jieaven and the real earth ( even
both)''.
A. 168. 7. 13. Instead of the next three lines, add : "VII.
24; > _k) (ocrn? dV), e, g. ilfa^?. X. 33; Mark VII. 16;
i?arA. 195, 3; 198, 12; ? ^ \^, e. g. Assem,. I. 235; j
(? 7 P 7 P 7 v
W 7?i, > Ir^l/., e. g. i?arA. 113,7; 598, 14; j ^l^] ^,
e. g. I /oA?^ III. 3. The neuter is expressed by > ^D ,
J ^ , e. g. /o^/a XV. 16 ; J Ud ^ , e. g. ^cis III. 22 ; IV.
23; J :>OrSD (ortav), e.g. Jia^^. X. 27 ; > Vo^^^ ^\D
{boa av), e. g. John XVI. 23; Birh, 107, 13; j U^^ ^,
e. g. Barh. 600 {ult.)] J ]jl .^, e. g. Assem. II. 172".
412 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 168. 15. 9. After " 18; by\ add: "even united with a
fem.^ e. g. Barh. 129. *iiJf |ZAj] a certain woman \ aj|
7 PPP7P7P
i-js* , e. g. Asseni. I. 32. {^1^(2 %m.l\ ^^ 2q-^ to some oivner
of a bath\ b) by _lD r-*^ , e.g. i?ar/i. 127. 8. ^" r^0
X 7
,^>V>Qa on a certain day /".
7 7
A. 168. 17. 10. After "5", add: ''Barh. 167. 15. ^^010^]
^!iD 5Wje owe o/" his brothers ; d) by ^^ having reference
to something including both gender and number, e. g. Barh.
241. 16. 5>0jLd UdI a certozw jt7eo/?/e; iz^/je XL 36. :>Ojk)
p p p pip
I Alio a certain part ; e) by ^-^^ w^., f^>l\^ /. (by con-
cealing the name = 6, ^ 6uva)\ Barh. 187, 12; 219;"
A. 168. 19. 4. After "27", add : "; also by \ziO^^ relat-
ing to persons, e. g. Assem. I. 11, 22. Sometimes this idea is
contained in the 7ioun itself, e. g. ^O^d to a certain place ;
7 ' -i" ^
Barh. 250, 16. jl^l a certain longtime; (Aj^l once^\
A. 168. 21. 6. After "15;", add: "also doubled, e.g. 1.
Cw. XI. 1 8 ; 5) elliptically ; also ".
7 Q
A. 168. 28. 12. After "good", add: " Also by ^^ ]] or U
7 iK P ^
rA* , e. g. Barh. 284, 8 ; 613, 1 ; ^ U or ]] ^ , e. g.
* P -X P
^ar^. 347, 2. 3; finally by *aj] ^ P ".
X
A. 169. 12. 10. After " 11", add: " also without M, e.g.
7 p .. I p
J5a?7i. 359. ,iCnnV)'i ^^>.bi| certain of his friends \^\
A. 169. 17. 7. After "20", add: " Eelating to things
n-n '^'^^p
^^ isfound^ e.g. iw^elX. 17. 5>0,iD J.*^ some crumbs;
or dovhled, e. g. ^kiJs XXV. 19 (rti^a); ^Sd X>pS!0, e. g.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 413
Bar/i. 347, U. 01 A^. ^ ^^ some of her fingers^
With the same signification ^J^l (an indeclinable collective
7 " 9 7
noun) occurs, e. g. Barh. 217. \mJI ^^1 some several years;
P 7 V
204, 1. lAlilil ^1^1 sometimes; and ^i:^, e.g. ^ar^. 385.
P "7 p
1 4. f Aa2U ^^2) some men ".
A. 169. 27. 3. After " 18 ", add : " or by f^ .OOUlD ,
e. g. Ephr. II. 36. D. 4 ". ^
A. 170. 2. 5. After "32 ", add : "Also -^C31 -i^Ol
occur, e. g. Ephr. II. 232. B. 3. 4."
A. 170. 5. 2. After "5", add: ''Ephr. I. 315. C. 2;".
A. 170. 7. 10. After "other", add: "with h^ or *mj| pre-
' P 7 t, P P P 7
ceding, e. g. Ephr. II. 217. A. 7. 8. Ol2-rn>* ^ \^\ ]^0
and the one (horn) was higher* than the other ;".
A. 170. 9. 3. After "another", add: Barh. 570. 4;"
A. 170. 10. 4. After "10", add : ''Ephr. I. 227. E. 5;"
. A. 170. 12. 5. After" 24," add: "Ephr. I. 40. A. 6;".
A. 170. 12. 10. After "37", add: "Ephr. 11. 316. A. 8.
^- 7 ^ "7 f> -i" ^
{aorOj^ (2)Q^ ^Id from. 07ie end to the other ; with |;Lm
added, e. g. Ephr. II. 339. B. 4. ^k> GFI'^fHix^ lAiON
7 I
|Aj^/row ow^ house to another] or with ^>*| added, e. g.
B. 5. (la^l (;!iOQl^ |;SDai ^V) from one dwelling to
another'\
A. 170. 15. 8. After " burden", add : " ^OOUSO is even found
doubled, e, g. Acts XVII. 32; XIV. 4; even as an accusa-
tive^ e. g. Mark XII. 5 ; and oailV)\ with the mark of the
case, e. g.Barh. 114. 14; 145. 4. 5. v. E.".
414 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 170. 16. 1. Instead of the next 4 lines, add, ( after
" llem.") : " One another^ corresponding with the Greek ri/l/l/}-
Aoi, is represented by (r^ reciprocal, in such a manner that
a preposition, corresponding with the same, precedes, or is join-
ed with it, the latter being seldom without the preposilio?i,
c. g. Ba7-h. 260. 1. 2. f>7A* Ql\d] they consumed one another ;
7
by ^ , e. g. Acts XXI. 6 ; by ^1 , e. g. James TV. 11;
7 7
by i>Ql , e. g. Luke IV. 36 (we also find |.x doubled, e. g.
/o7i?2 XIII. 14); sometimes by the preposition merely with
a suffix, e. g. i^owz. I. 24. .0010 among each other ".
A. 170. 21. 10. After " e. g ", add: '' Ephr. I. 308. B.
3;".
A. 170. 23. 5. After " same ", add : Ephr. II. 350. 0. 3. 4 ;
with a preposition preceding, e. g. Ass. I. 117. |Alm!D OlO
7 P
1^ OlO m i^Ae sawze 2/ear ;".
p ?
A. 170. 25. 5. After " ;?ro72ow7i", read :" 001 and |j01 m.,
- p
^Ol and IjOl /. ".
A. 170. 26. 1. After * Rem.", add : " e. g. Barh. 508. 14 ;''.
A. 171. 1. 7. After " blood ", add: ^^ without the prepositio7i
before the noun being doubled, e. g. Barh. 159. 11; ".
A. 171. 2. 12. After "year" add: "^y^r. II. 453. C. 6.
{.aO^D> .OClXiJ their specialinquirer \'\
A. 171. 4. 8. After "43", add: "; by }l1, e. g. ^1 ive
ourselves; \ind do. (will), e. g. 76'/^?^ V. 30. ZojD. ^iD
7
w>.aa3 by me myself ; VII. 28, etc.".
X -x
A, 171. 6. 11. After "2.", add: "; and Q^OOl, e. g. Acts
II. 33".
A. 171. 7. 10. After "fern.", add: " (=- r^r ), generally plac-
ed after the noun ".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 415
A. 171. 22. 11. After *' 18 ", add : ; of what sort (gualis),
is only expressed by ZoLo^ after the image = like as ;e. g.
Ephr. I. 393. C. 1. U^4 20^5^0 like goats. "
A. 172. 20. 14. After '' receive"*, add: "68, 4; ".
A. 173. 19. 10. After "angry", add: " (?) the pret. ]ooi
often stands for the present^ e. g. JbA^z XL 4. jOOl '=kort ;
MaW. II. 6. AaOOI = et; 1 Cor. VI. 19. .oZuooi =eare ."'
A. 173. 25. 2. After "20", add: "otherwise very seldom,
e. g. ^ar/i. 413. 1. 3. When one commits murder, e. g.
-^ 7
Ol Aa^O / s^a// ^i?/ some one ; ".
A. 174. 10. 1. After "sometimes", omit thirteen words to
"Eem.", and instead of them, read : " , though seldom, the
pret. denotes merely the optative ^ e. g. Assent. I. 38. yll he
may hear thee\ often with the optative particles ^aoA*] and
^Q^ would that {utinam)^ or, *aO q!^ e. g. iwXre XIX.
42. waAlf^ WL.D Q_^ O, if thou hadst yet known ; ".
A. 174. 14. 3. After "under c", add: " *OOU _So (prop-
erly *i:iOU ^So ) O that, transferred from the Hebrew, njrii
1^ ; also C1m Unvoice thee (God), belong here (cf Hahn
C'hrest. 100, 3. 7).".
A. 177. 4. 8. After "say", add: " The auxiliary word can
is more frequently written in connection with the part, of
P 7Iifp7t>7
I^Ld, e. g. Ephr. 1. 133. . 5. jZIj AaUj-pwIj U^2^
"PP 0? P-X 7
;u-M, U lA-iOl-i^ fZaliD,^ in no other icay can we be benefitted
by the divine image ".
A. 177. 7. 3. After " 2," add : " ; B. The optative (cf. Agrell.
p. 31), e. g. Barh. 183, 4. v. E. \J\l may he live ) the king) .
290, 4. V. E; Assem. I. 168, 15. v. E. looiZ be it so ; III. P.
416 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
II. 465, 8. >f^*r^^ ^^i (God) be Uessed. With > preceding, e. g.
Assem. II. 118. 5. 8. IcOmJ loillLj that God may be
gracious ".
A. 177. 10. 4. After "not", add: " Less frequently we find
P- 7 -P V T, 7
ISolj for V J e. g. Assem. II. 259, 24. fr^c^ Z ]<^V '> believe
?wty
A. 177. 11. 12. After "11", add: "; and negative, e.g.
7 T> p -X
i?ar^. 366, 5. v. E. %^01jZ IJo *OQD ^o owi but
haste not.''''
A. 177. 21. 5. After "XV. 4.", add: "; Ephr. I. 124. D.
3".
A. 177. 25. 4. After " B.", add : " , and the>^. is found cor-
responding with the genitive of the Latin gerund, with j pre-
ceding, after a preceding noun^ so that by this means, the
idea of the fut. is more accurately expressed, e. g. Assem.
I. 40. He takes pleasure |VjJ) to see ; or 33, 1 7, in the 2d. per-
son (OOlZj to remain {that tJiou shouldst remain) Barh. 367.
7 1 7
7. 8; 245, 13. ^^r^^? U^l the time to bring forth. Very
seldom without ? , e. g. Assem. IL 308, 19. 20. Cf. Agrell.
SuppL p. 38 ".
A. 177.26. 3. After "finally", instead of "the"' add: "a
periphrastic ".
A. 177. 30. 9. After " 35 ", add : " Ephr. I. 19. F. 7 ; '\
A. 178. 1. 12. After "36", add: "; Barh. 435, 11. iS) by
^77
the fut. following with ? , e. g. Assem. I. 481, 22. (rAJj (JOID
I 7
^Alj the priest shall begin ; 37. 17; Ji^Ar. L 197. D. ; 312
A. 4; in the plur., e. g. /o/^tz VI. 15. Also y is sometimes
wanting, e. g. ii:y^r. II. 152. F. 4-6. plk) ^aAlj -OO-f^JO
.QJ I )^aSiJ that the king should strike and destroy them ".
A. 178. '2. 8. After " expressed ", add: "in both cases".
A. 178. 4. 7. After "receive", add: " ; Ephr.l, 82. D. 3-5
psi 7 ^x x7v^a.X
OlL lOZilJ 0001 ^^r-a-Ai ^a^nV^\ ^i^J 1l^)Q-C5? -oi
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 417
her, to whom the gifts (presents) of all the people should come ;
131, D. 3; Z>) by i\\Q fut. of looi with the part, following,
Q.g.ActsY. 15. ]Z) looiJ) uALd] ivhen he came {should
come); XVII. 26.".
A. 178. 5. 1, After "Rem.", add: " Sometimes the idea in-
eluded in the Greek 6eI is expressed by r^ j g- ^^^'^ ^^
VIII. 31 ; XIII. 7. 10 ; Luke IX. 12 ; XVII. 25".
A. 178. 13. 2. After forth ", add : "The>#. with j ^ pre-
ceding, corresponds with, the Latin gerund in do, e. g. Assem.
II. 408, 3. 4. He permitted to bring it ( the ark) forth, is ex-
-n 7
pressed by Oioajj ^iD ; III. P. 1. 120. 6. he was weary of
lying, by jQaoJj ^iD ; with OCT! or *aCl inserted between,
e. g. III. P. 1. 484, 22. ^DO'r^j ^6\ ^ by fleeing. The fui.
also is found in cases, where, in Latin, the superlative is necessa.
ry after verbs of motion, e. g. Assem. I. 32, 6. ^QUj in going
towards : without ? , e. g. ^55ew. I. 380, 24. v. E., Zok)! ^l]
7 7 " I
I taillgo to die', Barh. 373, 8; h^ l^V^? /o?* that reason he
comes to help ; sometimes with the copula O , e. g. -4c^s XV.
36 {AgrelL pp. 39. 40)".
A. 178. 24. 10. After "go", add: " This union oi the fut.
with the paragogic imperative of the Hebrew, sometimes cor-
responds with the imp. 'ni , parag. XX2b 5 ^^ ^"^ Ephr. I. 320,
I" T,
E, 5. ,^i.>>S ^A.'^NV)] wAj| %^L let him be king over US', 321,
P I 7 I
0. 6. 7. \m^\ ^ wiOOl 12 ^'e//, ^e oz^r master', II. 316, A. 2.
1 " 7 i>
]l >SV>\ -yiaQjs*! \L well, I ivill show tliee the spring ".
A. 179. 2. 6.. After ''infinitive'', add: Ejohr. III. 566, B. 6.
7;^
A. 179. 16. 6. After "5. .", add: "Also the /^^. of (OCTl with
the part, following, expresses the imperative, e. g. Assem. III.
418 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
If*.* 9
P. 1.347. 2. ^V*^ ,OQCU let them hasten-, 53. 17. \il
focru he may relate ".
A. 180. 1. 4 After ''9 ", add: '' Ephr. II. 203. C. 6; 231.
F. 2. 3; I. 389. A. 5; Barh. 409, 14. 15; 517, 5. v. E ;".
A. 180. 5. 5. After " 6 ", add : " also before the infin., e. g.
Acta Mart. III. 293, 9/. looi >SilQSD oSS^V) ]] he, by no
means, spake] Ephr. I. 40. C. 8; III. 369, D. 1; Acta Mart.
II. 347 ; 348, 1 ;".
A. 180. 7. 3. After "7", add: "; even in the comparative
degree, e. g. Acta Mart. 11. 347, 23. 24. (OOl ^ml ^aSV)
* p *v
GU^o] his wickedness becomes continually more aggra-
vated.""
A. ISO. 14. 11. After "seen", add: "; even, so much
(adeo), e. g. Acta Mart. II. 337, 5. 6. "^j] ]L^lD J ASqSd
so much, if I die; even with words standing between at the
end of a proposition ; yes, indeed, e. g. Acta Mart. 360, 8. 9.
v. E. Q. Asik) ^ilg AXZ ^u^Oli^ ^] ^h^S^^SLlj he may
yet indeed divide these three years. But often this emphasisis
07 7 '^
scarcely perceptible, e. g. ^ar/i. 226. OlAlOl ^^V^ I have
purchased it (legally ?y\
A. 180. 16. 3. After "45" add: Ephr. I. 9. F. 7. 10. A.
3;".
A. 180. 18. 14. After "die," add: "sometimes the expres-
p p
sion J (OOl |J by no means, on no account, stands before the
infinitive, e. g. Ephr. I. 40. C. 2 ".
A 180. 22. 6. After " is ", omit ' which is ", and add : " ; also
i Sam. XXII. 16 {cf. Ephr. I. 377, E) which are ".
A. 181. 9. 8. After "weep", add: ''Barh. 19. 20; Ephr.
II. 204, C. 4;".
A. 181. 12. 2. After " 21 ", add : ** Acts 1. 1 ; 11. 4. v. 42;".
A. 181. 14. 3. After " 16,', add : " Ephr. I. 85. B. 4. 5;".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 4 1
A. IS I. 25. 6. After " teach ", add : '^ Ephr. I. S92, B. 2;".
A. 181. 27. 4. After "enter", add : "Sometimes, for the
sake of perspicuity, %a01 is inserted between, e. g. Asscja.
II. 438, 19. *D*,Sq1j ^(S\ ^ by spitting ;".
A. 181. 29. 4. After " me ", add: " ; or it indicates compari-
7
son in connection with > f .] , e. g. Ephr. III. 568, F. 8.
i- rfiV)\ > yjfc f even as they are accustomed to worship them
(the trees). United with the suff,^ it makes the verh^ e. g.
Ephr. I. 194, D. 2. 3. aiS^ovi\ llo Ae som^/^^ tokillhirri\
substantively, e. g. I. 312, B. 1. ;.i^ ^j v^ r^^Vno ^
/% way from Seir. Besides, it marks the \u2i\An gerund with
ad, e. g. J5ar/i. 466. \\V>Vi\ for hearing-^ 272, 2. v. E.,
and the supine in u, e. g. -^ssern. III. P. 1. 115, 6.
*^ t> 7 "^ t 7 7
o;^jZ\rr>V)\ t lOrnS unpleasant to hear''\
A. 182. 22. 6. After "him", add: ''Ephr. I. 392,0.2;".
A. 182. 24. 5. After"Byssus", add: '' Ephr, III. 578. C.
2; Barh. 88. 13;".
A. 183. 4. 10. After "214, 1. ",add : JS^o/^r. I. 283, B. 5. 6;
II. 232, B. 7; I. 314, C. 8; 217, A. 8. 9;".
A, 183. 7. 7. After " oath ", add: Ephr. III. 565. E. 8. F.
1 ; Assem. I. 261, 2 ; Barh. 73. 1 ; ".
A. 183. 15. 1. After "Lord", add: "This projioun ia
doubled when two or move participles are united, e. g. Acts
II. 23. tOAj] ^AlSflgQ tOAj*! ^\^ ye see and ye hear-^ yet
the second pronominal mark may be wanting, e.g. Acisl. 11.
P 7 ' 7 xp 9v 7 xppp
]<^>^ ^ ;i>*0 tO Aj] ^jlSQa^ |jiD i^'/^y 5towc? ye and gaze
towards heave?i ? ".
A. 183. 23. 3. After"( 65)", add: ''Barh. 120, 5. loCTl
Uco he hates ( 65) ; JE:/?^r. I. 39, E. 7. |l>]o ^Is ^JjCO
\l^ \LJ V\ > '^ rn 1 0010 awtZ ^oe/ ^e?^/^e<i the flocks, but Cain
420 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
cultivated the land \ Acts XX. 11; Barh. 275, 5; very sel-
7
domdoes fD stand before the particijjle, e. g. Barh. 280, 15.
17 7 7 P
16. ^i*^;nV) p 0001 they fought- or J with looi follow-
ing, e. g. j5ar^. 126, 8. (OOl ^ja>9 /^e /ovetZ ; or with fOOl
~ I p 7
preceding, e. g. Bzrh. 562, 14. ^^il^?; 0001 they direct] ".
A. 183. 25. 10. After "2", add: " ^cis II. 7. 12. 30;".
A. 184. 5. 1. After "Eem.", add: " Less often for the for-
mation of the imperfect, (ooi , united with Aji] or fOOl Aaf
and %M2i {to remain), contributes, in connection with > or p
7 P I "
following before the participle, e. g. Barh. 597, ;2lO A-i| /le
told a falsehood ; 468, 5. |;J looi ^aOIoAaI /^e ^oo/i; up a
7 7 7 p p
W; 581, rve**^ r^ ^ he limped {conti?iued hobbling) *\
A. 185. 25. 9. After "19", add: "Rem. The;?r^., in con-
nection with (001 (which then precedes the ^ar^.), forms a
periphrastic imjjerative, nearly resembling the subjunctive,
7 p . 7
e. g. Asseni. I. 455, ^^ AuOOl knoiv (scias) ; III. P. 1. 600,
10^7 k7ip
18. V. E. ^-a^r^ .oZuoOl know ye\ 358, 10. .oZuooi ^'rOl
m. P
doye\ even without |001 , but with the personal prorvoun
7 1
added, e. g. Assem. I. 40, 8. Ajf ;al... ^e dumb; 351, 22. v.
V-np 7-^p ^''^
E. Aj| !D0U ^'^z've; 378, 10. Ajf looiO \0^ remain
and be (Agrell. Sujipl. p. 25). B. T1\\q optative, e.g. Assem.
7 77^ 77 7
III. P. 1. 572, 6. 7; 568, 10. lail]o ^a:LALDO :>CL.^ASd
^ P P -x
may he be fortijied and strengthened by God; 597, lO. fjjOlOl
l4i> may Ids memory be destroyed [Agrell. Suppl. p. 32 )".
A, 186. 8. 12. After "47", add: " III. 2. ^L^ OOCn
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 421
t:^!'^^? ^N>f Ol!^ ,^1 V)imo they who were accustomed to
bring and lay him down ; ".
A. 186. 13. 6.~ After " HavAov ", add : " It should, however,
X 7
be remarked, that -'r, in the above named connection, is,
for the most part, pleonastic, and that besides, the fmite verb,
at the same time, contains the same idea within itself (cf. the
JjSitin jubere, ccBpisse, and the Greek apxecr^aty.
A. 186. 23. 1. After "Eem.", add: " Before such a parti-
7
ciple, yO or J is only seldom wanting; indeed, adjectives, with
a participial meaning, are united with ^ or > , e. g. wi-m ,
7 7 ' -i " ' '
Acts XX. 12. .ft.A* ,.0 i^CJvra] IX. 41. f^^> ,.0 ^Cjoav \
Apoc. XIX. 20. ^LLl p ^wvTff ".
A. 186. 30. 6. After " I3'", add : "The part, when not used
as a noun, takes no svffix, but always permits the mark of the
case to follow with the objective suf., e. g. Matt. X. 40 ; V.
44; Luke X. 26; XXII. 43; John Vl. 6; VIII. 6, 7; Burh.
520,9- 125, 13".
A. 187. 12. 8. After "bed", add: '' Ephr. 1. 82. A. 7. 8.
AuOOl y-lD? //iarc 5/6y9^; B. 2. ZUOOI ^TIIa.I^ //oy; 11.
339, A. 5 ; III. 566, A. 3 ".
A. 187. 14. 4. After ^^9idus^\ add: "and culjectives in
^iVw, ".
A. 187. 14. 11. After ''timendus'\ add: " ^ssewx. III. P. 2.
118, IhkvCO adorandus\ III. P. 1. 536, 20; iJar/i. 609, 10.
7 7
froNrsV) laitdabili<^\ Assem. II. 40. |'=^\Vo docibilis\ ".
A. 187. 26. 1. Before '' by\ add: "a vcr5 united with a
part, may either follow in the ivfin. with ^ , e. g. JbAn III.
30. ^.nV^S wi^O 'i^;!^!^ l)o OCT Oot!^ he must increase
but Iriiust decrease \ Barh. 6, 5. v. E ; 205, 8 ; or in the fut.
with J preceding, e. g. J5ar/i. 476, 9. ]^Aj> |J0 h^ must be
422 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
called \ Luke XII. 12; XXII. 37; and impersonalhj^ e. g.
Assem. I. 70, 17. ^^^Q^ tJDjl one must knoiv^ ".
A. 188. 2. 10. After "4", add: *' ; with the ^^^ following,
e.g. Assem. III. P. 11.220. jk^lZZj \oj] one must say \
Barh. 410, 12. "HiD it is fit '\
A. 188. 12. 2. After '' participle "", add: "united with the
personal j)ronoun ".
A. 190. 4. 1. Before " LV.", add : "*QOlJ' ^ ".
A. 190. 5. 2. After " following", add : "e.g. Num. XIV.
2. *2)oA] .Zu^ Othatioe had died'\
A. 190. 13. 1. After "when", add: "in connection with a
noun^\
A. 190. 16. 5. xVfter "3", ..add : '' Eplir.W. 1. A. 5. 6; 12.
C. 3. 4. Also, instead of "it", in same line, add: '*the ex-
7 7
pression j ,^il ^So".
A. 190. 17. 10. After "brother", add: "Also *QC31 (from
^OlI) is found in Ephr. III. 593. B. 6 f .".
A. 191. 2. 5. After "you", add: " i?ar^. 447, 4 ; Ephr. 1.
40. D. 7;".
A. 191. 3. 4. After "him", add: " Apoc. XYIII. 7;".
A. 191. 7. 4. After "generation", add: '' Barh. 115, 5;
Ephr.l. 124. C. 3;".
A. 191. 9. 13. After " us ", add : ''Assem. 1. 431;".
A. 19!. 25. 13. After "him", add: "26.9; 167, 13; 251;
Assem. 1. 28. 8. v. E;".
A. 192. 25. 5. After "9 ", add : "; Ephr.ll. 20. C. I; 118,F.
5; 125, E. 4; Ephr. I. 9. E. 5".
A. 103. 16. 13. After "37," add: '' Assein, 1.38 (not II) ;
v 7
174, 4. V. E. Hence OOl is often put for Ajf , cf. Tychsen
Elem. Syr. 48, 4. v. E. Aioa) OOl thou ivho hast given -^ 49,
. I 7 4v
3. A.ftJD 001 tliou who hast united :^\
ADDITIONS AND CORIIECTIONS. 42b
A. 193. 22. 9. After *' hirn ", add: "Here also belong in-
stances in which writers designate themselves by chang-
ing the phraseology back again from the 1 plur. to the
1 sing.^ e. g. Barh. 513. 4. v. E. '*.
A. 194. 3. 12. After "11", add : J^j^Ar. II. 316. A. l.'\
A. 194. 5. 10. After " 20 " add : " Acts V. 40 ; Ephr. I. 28 1,
B. 1 ; 293, A. 4; II. 207, B. 3; 232, C. 7; 484, C. 4. 5.".
A. 194. 14. 9. After "8", add: ''Assem. II. 400, 2; Barh.
74, 2. 3; 265,5;".
A. 194. 15. 2. After " 2 ", add : '' or part, pass., e. q. Acta
Mart. II. 364, 1. l2jQ>j U^CdI looi *^>*^V^ who was clad
ivith a white stola ; ".
A. 194. 17. 6. After "29", add: "(also with ^ ActsY.
3);".
A. 194. 20. 12. After "10", add: " ^pjZf to be estrang-
ed, e. g. Ephr. I. 1. C. 5,*'.
A. 194. 25. 13. After "33," add: " Eem. The prepositions
LCl^ and fU are found in connection with the last two cases
( y and d), and especially in connection with personsJ'\
A. 195. 3. 6. After " A.", add : ''Barh. 288, 12 ; Assem. I. 303,
12; ^c-^s II. 30; 4. 1. USd ^So to speak] also the Pass.
e. g. Ephr. II. 229, B. 3. ^Ci^AkSD ria>*Z| to think to re-
fiect ; ".
A. 195. 7. 5. After "14", add: "; II Sam. IV. 5; Ephr.
I. 81. B. 1.2; Barh. 555, 13.".
A. 195. 11. 11. After " 6 ", add : " ^'/^Ar. I. 131. E. 5; III.
5(0. F. 4; 570, B. 1. 2; Assem. I. 239, 3-5; Barh. 327, 10
(cf. 54, B. 1 ).".
A. 195. 12. 7. After " accusative ^\ add: " of the person and
thing. ".
A. 195. 19. 3. After " 10", add: " Fa. and Aph. fn-ra ^Si^^,
e.g. Ephr. III. 570. C. 3. |aj^Q ^^OlOxSiAiJ he zmshed to
c/othe him with glory, I. 20. A. 5; SL^ I. 127, E. 6; *,^jX2l
III. 569, A. 2. 3 ; ."
-^^.-^
424 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 105. 25. 7. After *^32", add: '' Ephr. I. 389, D. 3; II.
316. F. 2; 20. D. 4. Here belong also ^:iD, e. g.
7 7
Assem. I. 75. 7. 8 ; ^>ol, e. g. II. 372, 5. 6. v. E.".
A. 195. 26. 9. After ''signification", add: "in respect to
persons and things.".
A. 196. 12. 13. After " E.", add : "; Ephr. II. 20. D. 2.".
A. 196. 16. 7. After " III. l.",add: "; Ephr. 11. 20. D. 3.".
A. 196. 26. 11. After "43 ", add: "^c^s III. 4. 5;".
A. 197. 1. 1. After "16", add: " *Q ^ij to blush on ac-
count of something] Ephr. III. 571, B. 5. 6 ; ".
A. 197. 4. 1. After " 13", add: " *Q ^\\ to punish; Ephr.
I. 40. C. 6; ".
A/ 197. 14. 2. After " one ", add : " Ephr. I. 312. A ; ".
A. 197. 24. 4. After " 23", add : "; Ephr. I. 228, A. 2.".
A. 198. 1. 12. After " 19 ", add : ''-.Ephr. I. 85, 2. 3 ;".
A. 198. 7. 9. After "him", add : "; Ephr. I. 117, E. 3 ; II.
339, B. 7; II. 209, A. I ; I. 84. D. 3.".
A. 198. 9. 11. After "e. g.", add: '' \Ephr, I. 330, B. 8 ; L
40, B. 2 ; ".
A. 198. 15. 4. After " sons ", add: "; and looi V , Barh.
562. 10. P OlL '\0CIU he will not have. Also OlL Aj] may-
signify he has written is an author^ e. g. Barh, 19. Aa]
IidAo Craii he has written a hook] or, it is permitted to him^
e.g. Assem. III. 1. 151, 5. 21^]SQ^ ^j^ bS\ it is permitted
7
to us to learn ; with ^>Q^ = to belong to one^ e. g. Barh. 442
12. ISdJ^O Ul\n\ A^lj all which belongs to him {Agrell.Y\
A. IDS. 19. 8. After '' 9 ", add: ''Ephr. 11. 209, A. 1;".
A. 199. 1. 5. After "evil", add; Ephr. I. 83. D. 7; 24.
A. 8; ".
A. 199. 4. 11. After " 18" add: ''Passives, e.g. Ephr. II.
201, F. 3; I. 125, D. 1;".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 425
A. 199 22. 7. After*- him", add :'' Ephr. I. 318, C. 5;".
A. 200. 1. 13. After" 13", add: '' Ephr. I. 6. D. 6 F. 3;".
A. 200. 5. 6. After "thee", add: '' Ephr. I. 117, B. 4;".
A. 200. 6. 2. After "signification", add: '' Ephr. I. 123,
F. 4;".
A. 200. 12. 3. After " 6 ", add : " also, finally ;/) verbs of mo-
tion after or against^ e. g. |Z| , ^ri\TO , ZUj^J , .naj etc.
So also ^.1 ^CLO to stand up against any one^ e. g. Acts IV .
r I 7 r Q
I ; \y^ 5>a>) to lift up against, e. g. ^c^5 IV. 3 ; ^ ]*j^
^0 wa/;e aw assault against^ e. g. Barh. 305, 4. v. E ; 41 1, 2 ;
417, (cf. 5. Agrell. p. 63.)".
A. 200. 28. 1. Before ";I Tim:\ add :" and >Aa ^,
e. g. ".
A. 200. 28. 8. After "22", add: "j Ephr. 1. 30?, F. 1 ;
418, B. 2.".
A. 201. 19. 9. After " following ", add: " and so that, after
7
the first ( fOa ), the jut.^ with j preceding, follows, e. g.
Ephr, I. 118, F. 3. 4. *|ooiJj ,ri2) he permitted to pro-
ceed] or with the copulapreoeding the finite verb, e. g. Ephr, II.
(K 7 7
212, A. 7. 8. wiCnOnn^O f02i he permitted him to
dress -J even without the copula preceding, e. g. ".
A. 201. 21. 11. After "itself", add: " Assem. I. 84, 11 . 12.
*> *- p '' ..
.Qj| |p ji^a lie permitted them to throw ; with ^ before the
V " ' \ '
infin. e. g. J:55em. III. P. 1. 598, 7. 8. j^lSOl 0^03 they
permit to make. If the finite verb follow in the 3d. p/wr., it
may be considered by some as impersonal, e. g. Assem. I. 372,
9. aiQui^j|0 Lf02i I commanded that he should bow doun.
' 7 7
The same holds good in respect to >r , e.g. ".
A. 201. 22. 5. After "14", add: "; 213. 12. OiAI^do
jfB he permitted to put him to death] 173,4. Ol,^\ j,a
426 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
Jte yermiited to seize him ; Matt. II. 16. v*4^ >r* ^^^ 'permit-
ted to ldll\ consequently it should be remarked that the idea
of co7nmanding even is often included. Often also a noun^
9
instead of ayZ;2zY^ ve'r*^, is found with pO5, e. g. Barh. 165,
I 0. ,.Q2) jsQ^i^ Ol^ he pe^'mitted him to dress [ordered Itirn
a dress) '^ and sometimes jSd") also takes the same significa-
X 7 p 7 7
tion, e. g. E2)hr. II. 212. A. 7. 8. a01QjA^1o jolSD -pk)!
i/ie king permitted to carry him in. "
A. 202. 2. 7. After " 11." add: '' Ephr, II. 220, B. 4; 221.
A. 6. ^ is also found before the finite verb, e. g. Ephr. III.
567. B. 8, C. 1. ^^.ZkoAk) .ooiAi>an\ 0^00]^-^ o/^/iose
who had lost their clothes were they sought " .
A. 202. 10. 3. After "28", add: " ^c^5 III. 13; Ephr. III.
571. B. 1; I. 2. B. 1.".
A. 202. 14. 5. After "prayers", add : '' Neh. I. 8. Here also
belong " .
I 7 *
A. 202. 15. 8. After " 15", add: '^j^joAsl to pro??iise, e. g.
II. Fet. II. 19;".
X 7 -n
A. 202. 18. 5. After "3, 5", add: " ^OsiZI todrinh\ e. g.
Barh. 322, 14; 333, 6. v. E ; ".
A. 202. 26. 7. After " etc.", add : " ; M^liZ] to bestir one's self,
7 7 -n 777
e. g. Barh. 213 ; r^j2] to unite one's self, 269, 5. v. E ; ^^2^2]
to mutually accuse themselves, e. g. Assem. III. P. II. 457, 7.".
A. 203. 4. 2. After " etc.", add : " The same is true in respect
7 i y "^
to ^1] [to be removed) , e. g. Barh. 312, 8; fC^\ i^tobeldlled)\
r>2l, 13; *lIiD {to be brought forth) , Assem. II. 183, 16. v.
E; >^^^ {to be forsaken), Barh. 271, 13.".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 427
A. 204. 3. 3. After " 9 ", add: " by JoLm] , e. g. Acts V. 9.
Qo-CniSoL .0Aa0A*]> ^dD rl uTL (Tvve(pcjV7J}:7j vixlv
TTElpdoat ; ". ^
A. 204. 19. 6. At end of liein. add : '; or when synonymous
verbs are united together, e. g. Asseyn. I. 32, 1. \^\D0 "{l] he
came (ivent) and arrived \ Barh. 570, 11. 476; 371, 12.".
A. 205. 4. 7. After "etc.'^ add: "jmore frequently, like the
noun, it is considered as absolute without a svfflx preceding,
7 I
c. g. Matt. XXII. 25. 0001 Aa] they were \ Barh. 287, 1.
.. 7 X f
^0C\ Au| they were\ seldom does looi precede, e. g. Barh.
7 10 p
94, 7. ..jkCloA-i] (OOl he iuas\ sometimes ]oai is wanting for
V
marking past time, e g. Assem. I. 34, 8. v. E. ^aZu] ^ as I
7 I 7 t\ i\ 0-7
luas', Matt. II. 9. waCToAj*]) ]ju\ ^ ^^ ]A^ over the
place ivhere the child was. Also the expression ]ooi La\ is
used in the absolute without taking the gender and number
^0^0
of the following noun, e. g. looi A^f fZo-i^-^a it icas a
combat-^ Barh. 2SS, 4. ]-^Sd1 ^ySQl ]oGl La] there laej-e
20 Emirs', 415, 3; 221, 10; MarkXV. 25; II John verse 12;
but the resfular union is the most common, e. g. John IX.
16; I. 39;^XIX. 14 i Luke XXIII. 44. {Agrell. p. 6)."
I
A. 205. 5. 1. After ' Eem.", add : " La] and ]ooi with ^ before
the infin. following, mark the Latin gerund, e. g. Matt.
XXVI. 35 ; Acts XXVIL 2; Zu| has also the fut. following,
e. g,^c^5XXVIL26.".
A. 205. 11. 3. After "27 ", add : "So also ]6oi is pleonastic
after U in a mere negation or negative question ( nonne ? ) ,
428 ADDITIONS AND CORIIKCTIONS.
e. g. Ephr. 1.2i,I>. 8. V ]nm\0 U^( a'r^^| UM
.07
GlSd> 1 001 the trees and plants were not created at the same
time with the earth ; 24, D. 1 ; 26, B. 3. F. 2f.".
A. 205. 16. 1. After "17", add: "The apocopate M ]oiJ
sometimes takes the signification of the subjunctive^ and the
aorist if^n-j = Kal eytvero is translated by > fOOl, or, instead
t-
7 T> 7
of J we sometimes find O, e. g. Luke I. 59, oZjO JOOIO
tltere they came ; also by omitting j or O, e. g. Mark I. 9.
12] "looiO there he came\ Luke I. 22; V. 17. Often how
ever, [001 remains untranslated, e. g. ilfa^^. IX. 10; Jfar^
IV. 4; Lukel. 23; 11. 46.".
A. 205. 26. 1. After "Eem.", add: "Besides jk)|, the ^er^5
P 17 1\ Q 7
U^, ^a^a, ^], ]l), ];0, .TiAs) also belong here."
A. 206. 4. 11. After "97, 1", add: " ; Ephr, I. 85, C.
5. 6.".
A. 207. 17. 7. After " 44 ", add : " ; Ephr, I. 267, C. 3 ; III.
PPX'^*. PO*w
589, D. 1. ISQQDOriij {j^O, lovely breezes; ActsYl. 11. ]2ijQ..j
U-lD blasphemous words ; or without J with the construct state
preceding, e. g. Ephr. II. 208. C. 4. 5. (*JQI5 wj]Sd xy^^
o;i account of the holy vessels ; F. 3.".
A. 208. 1. 3. After "box", add: ''Ephr. I. 283, A. 7; 295,
F. 5 ; ".
A. 208. 3. 1. After "pillar", add: "; Ephr. 1. 122; A. 3;
7 7 P
without 3 , e. g. Ephr. IT. 208, F. 3. Ijuj.JO ]i]\2i jco] aw
troTi and brazen chain \ II. 227, C. 4. 5;".
A. 208. 13. 5. After "household", add: '' Assem. I. 386;".
A. 208. 14. 1. Before "some", add: "; e. g. Assem. I. 397;
405, 17; Barh, 278,5. 6.".
A. 208. 17. 7. After "13", add: " The relation of Tzwrwi^-r and
time is marked by the noun used as an adjective, e. g. i?arA.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 429
* , r ^0 r
134, 1. CJly^^o "U*.'^ IJ months- Acta Mart, II. 348, 12.
t> ' 7 7
]ASDaj ]tl a full year {lit. of days):'
A. 208. 26. 9. After 167, 1 ", add : " Ephr. I. 310, F. 5;
320, D. 5 ; ".
A. 208. 28. 2. After "91, 2 ", add : " Ephr. I. 420, E. 8; ".
A. 209. 1. 2.--After ''freeman ", add: " Ephr. I. 84, B. 3 ; ".
A. 209. 2. 6. After " heretic ", add : " On the contrary, Ephr.
II. 227, F. 3 ; ".
A. 209. 3. a-^After "20", add: "; Asse)}t. III. P. I. 449, 14;
408, 12. 13.".
A. 209. 7. 7. After '^ 14 ", add : " Ephr. I 1. D. 1 ; ".
A. 209. 11. 13.~After "32", add: "; Barh. 448, 9. OISdoI
7 17
Jili en the same day\ 180, 8. .A^)) \^ again^ anew\ 289,
10. It ( ;q ) also corresponds with the the Latin natus^ in
designating age, e, g. Fhil. III. 5 ; Luke II, 42."
A. 209. 14. 11. After "free", add: "; Loi bpa vnfe\
(V>iO L\^ holy virgin ( nonne ) == nata^ in giving the
age; ".
A. 209. 26. 2. Before " Luke , add " and f^ ; ".
A. 209. 27. 2. After "0", add: ''Matt. X. 25; XIII. 17,
52; Barh. 180,3; 441,3;".
A. 210. 3. 7. After "XIX. 2", add: "; Barh. 516, 7; ".
A. 210. 7. 4. After "16", add: ''Ephr. I. 308, D. 3; II.
20. F. 2 ; ".
A. 210. 8. 4. Before "sometimes", add :"( more frequently
^ I
by laauS) ."
A. 210. 18. 5. After " Persia ", add : " ; Acta Mart. II. 343,
11. 12, V. E. With 5 preceding, it {LJ^) forms; pat,-
7 7 "
rynyniics, e. g. Asse^n. III. P. I. 426, 19. ilcolflD A^Oj a
7 7 -^
Saeanide; Barh. 580, 1. ^riil Z\a.S> Ahbasides:'
430 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 210. 23. 3. After "hydraulics", *' add : *' Here are also
found compounds with f,^ and Tr^y in the p/ur., e. g.
Assem. III. P. II. 693, 14. v. E. IZ^lj OUylu the congre-
gallon of a church ; Barh. 235, 4. OlAa.O ^.i^J^ his family ;
^%P 7 7 7 7 *
106, 4. ll..>* -V^\ soldiers\ \d\b with the mark of the
case preceding = the remainder. ''''
A. 211. 24. 9. After " etc.", add : "Rem. Ahtro,cts formed from
concretes take the ending ]Zq, e.g. ]2qaj) (from *aj|)
humanity \ ]2q A.\a embassy (from]N iNt)); ]Zqa1D0CTIj
if^e Roman power or a person ivho is a Roman (Rofnerthum,
lit, Romandorit, ) etc. In addition to these, there is sometimes
added, a concrete explanatory term, e. g. Assem. II. 177.
P P -X 17 P -X > -X
JaSdoj fc\AOo| (Zo>V)Om> Romandom^ \. e. a Roman.
More frequently abstracts are used in ^i^/es, e. g. J.sse?/z. III.
P -X 7
P. I. 372, 15. y.ZQ.a-ikA thy royal majesty; 598, 2.
*. -X 7 7
QsZqa^.\V)\ ?/ow7- highness-^ 303, 17. v. E. etc. A change
or exchange of gender does not occur, when the container
(vessel) stands for the contained or the place for those who
7 -n 9
live in it, e. g. Assem. I. 160, 8. A^O ]l)] ^/ze inhabitants
of the land went in \ Barh. 510, 7. 82, 8. Sometimes the
sing, and plur. are found near each other, e. g. j5ar^. 588,
*. *. I7P7 1 P**
7. .001-^ ^"5uJDj]j 1>Z] .n\m ]ircl>L all the inhabitants
of Arbela went up into the fortress^ ( cf. Agrell. p. 165 ) ."
A. 212. 2. 2. After "new", add: "Rem. The w^w^^r is
also, sometimes designated by the mascidine^ e. g. II Cor. V.
P 17
10. ^^dyaSov; Ga/. IV. 18. ;aJ2l* KaAoi ; 717a. XXVII.
23. ^AjlO KaKov ; hence it is difficult always to decide which
gender is really used, still it can be definitely determined, in
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 431
most cases whether the feminine is employed for the neuter,
although there is no fixed law perceptible in respect to it, as
it ( the neuter ) seems to arise from impersonal expressions,
* X f
e. g. Acts VI. 2 ; on the contrary, see Mark VII. 2T. |;^^
U", etc.".
A. 212. 9. 11. After *'12", add: "Here belongalso?7ia7-/j5q/
P 7 7
time as divisions of tim^, e. g. Mark I. 32. |aSqs . > ^\Kj^^
by the setting of the sun ; Ps. L. 1 ; Barh. 466, 2. So also
or JO 7
we find in Matt. XIII. 48. ISo* wi,*^m\ cttI t5v a/ymAov ,
or IASdqLd an oath', Barh, 454."
A. 213. 8. 1. After " Canaanite ", add: "; Ephr. II. 203, C.
8. D. 1; I. 310, B. 1. 2.".
A. 213. 10. 2. After ''noun'\ add: ''Barh. 535 6; ^cis
VII. 30; Gal. IV. 24; Barh. 602, 11 ; .
A. 213. 12. 5. After "genitive", add: "with j.".
A. 213. 13. 5. After " barley ", add : " ; ^ar^. 304, 2. I^Jj
yA* II jar) a 5w5/ie/ 0/ id;/tmi{ ; 522, 13 ; 524, 4 ; 299, 4. v. E.
Also between the principal noun and the one in apposition,
B. suffix is sometimes found attached to the former, e. g. Barh-
n I -K-x *. 7 7
225, 10. ]vl^>0 llol .0ailll4^ wY7^ ^^ez> /oo^/s of drachms
and denarii ; or several words occur between, e. g. Barh. 89,
4. 5. "looij ^ASaK0 llSofev* Vf^*^ 650 ;30wwc?5 o/" gold.
But whether synonyms with the copula O , could be properly
considered as an instance of apposition, may be doubted,
and more especially when w^e refer to the whole subject of
the union of nouns of a similar meaning, e. g. Barh. 118, 13.
, 7 i\*y
]ZaaiQSDO U? gifls and donations] 298, 3; 521, 15.
589 ; 322, 2 { AgrelL pp. 156, 157 ) .". .
A. 213. 19. 6. After " 19 ", add: " ] Ephr. I. 18. A. 6; 24.
E. 1 ; ."
A. 213. 28. 4. After "contents", add: '' Heb. IX. 10; Ephr.
I. 282. D. 1. 2; II. 464, E. 1 ; Acta Mart. II. 346, 8; ".
432 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 214. 1. 4. After "v. E.", add: '' Ephr. I. 125. D. 7. 8 ; ".
A. 214. 7. 11. After "9", add: "In the New Testament, and
wherever the two forms appear alike together, they are used
promiscuously without any perceptible distinction from each
other, e. g. Luke 11. 13. .ji.1* ^Sd and XIII. 7. llli ^
suddenly. Dififerent Syriac writers recognize this peculiarity,
e. g. Bark. 20, 4. ^^.is ^-i^^j) & 19, 7. 8. ^10>f]Il3 40
years; cf. 544, 13. with 334; 596, 7. with b77, 15.".
A. 214. 15. 7. After "001", instead of "is", add: " ^z.,
^aOI /., pi. tOJOl w., ^.*.J01/., corresponding with the Greek
article 6, i] , ^/. ot , a2, are".
A. 214. 17. 2. After "It stands", add: " They stand ;" also
line 18. W. 11. instead of " follows ", read : " follow.".
A. 214. 18. 9. After " IG ", add: " Mark V. 33. IZAj] ^3
p p .. I
^Ol but the wife {^rj 6e yvvrj ) ; Matt. XXV. 4. 1 ASll*.::^^
^J ^aJCn but (they) the wise {young ivomen) ( = at (Je
(ppovLiioL ) ; V. 8, 9, 11;".
A. 214. 20. 2. After "whole", add: " (^tyeVerovy^ 6
dv'^pcjnog ). In the first case even the oblique cases are prece-
ded by these pronouns, restoring the marks of cases, e. g. Ltike
7 7
XVI. 21. OOIJ = rov] Matt. XII. 13. 001^= rai; Rev.
XVII. 1. aOlJ =r7]g, etc. But this peculiarity of speech is
found not merely in the translation of passages in the New
P I 7 7
Testament, but often also in Assem. e. g. I. 30, 2. ^a.^^^ 001
> p . ^ p
the saint; and in Barh. 487. ]lQ'^0> .QJOl the design, etc.".
A. 215. 9. 12. After " 16", add : " Ephr. I. 314, C. 2; II.
207, B. 6;"
A. 215. 13. 6. After "faith", ad(i: "; Actsl. 15; VI. 12;
Ephr. I. 314, 7; 439. B. 6. 7. D. 1."
A. 215. 17. 8. After "50", add: "; Ephr. 1. IB. 4; 121,
F. 7; 128, 0. 3; II. 40. D. 5; 153, D. 8; III. 570, F. 8.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 433
A. 215. 20. 11. After "palace", add: "; Eijhr. 11. 318, C,
4.".
A. 215. 22. 5. After " B ", add : " ( e. g. Ephr. I. 392, 4. 5
II. 330, A. 3. 4; B. 8. 9 ; III. 567, B. 3) ."
A. 215. 26. 7. After "oath", add: ''Ephr. III. 750, E. 6
1. 18, A. 3; 119, A. 5;".
A. 216. 14. 4. After "earth", add: " When two such ^ei
lives follow each other, the pleonastic suffix is attached to the
former and not to the latter, e. g. Acts IV. 8. liQl>
M01QJQ2^t 0^^<> \Lk;CLt Z\aO> (a^aoo ye rulers of tlie
people and elders of the house of Israel^ hear! ".
A. 216. 21. 6. After "Jerusalem", add: ''Ephr. I. 292. E.
2. 3 ; ".
A. 216. 25. 4. After "2", add : "; Ephr. II. 220, F. 7."
A. 216. 27. 9. After "21", add: "; more frequently with the
preposition preceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 85, C. 2. jAl tQ^f ) ^iD
of the riches of our father is he rich.^^
A. 216. 30. 2. After ^'' prophet ", add : " with the pron. pre-
9 7 -n P
ceding, e. g. Ephr. I. 25, B. 4. -C71 loilS^j ]>C71 that is the
Op-n OP 7 7
itor/^ o/" Go^; III. 579, C. 4. 5. U-*^ t? |j01 IiaDj OOl
^/izs ( a work ) o/" nature, that of design. ".
A. 217. 5. 5. After "j", add: " for designating the author,
as in Ps. 4 and flf., or when a drawing audi something fixed SiVQ
thereby expressed.".
A. 217. 6. 11. After "Lord", add: " ^c^s II. S4 ; Ephr. I.
319, B. 6. 7. etc;".
I 7
A. 217. 9. 7. After "Franks", add: " 1 Kings X. 18. ^^JZio]
Ti P 7 0- '
^ looij gold of Ophir; Ephr. I. 119, E. 2-5. *|ZQ^la|
X 7 -n
OOla'jZ ^iD'i the peculiarities of both { the water and fire ) ,
by which it appears that > before -So is not to be over-
looked; ".
A. 217. 12. 1. After " Turks", add : "; jG^V^r. I. 312, E. 2.
p-n-np.. * * 7 17
IIJioAa VAa!i2) ^Sd *0>a ^'f^\ ^^ ^"^^^^^ ^^^ Philistines;
434 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
I. 131, K. 7. We also find *Q with > preceding for mark-
ing the idea of place, e. g. ]qqO VpOrSoO) iAoms of the
(^ which are in the) desert. ''\
A. 217. 17. 7. After ''him", add: "; Ephr. III. 562, C. 6;
I. 121, A. I.".
A. 217. 25. 4. After "20", add: "More frequently is the
^ewmz;^ expressed by of from (de) (instead of which, we
^ " 7 r p 7
also find ^i^^^ and ^), e. g. Barh. 230. ]nS^y ]ci'^
the history of the hound -^ 589, 5. v. E; 120, 3. 4; by since,
after, from there to, e. g. Assem. I. 236, 6. v. E (Agrell. pp.
129,130).".
A. 217. 29. 8. After "Egypt", add: ''Ephr. I. 349. B. 5;".
A. 218, 5. 5. After "love", add: ''; or the genitive may he
-* 7 *.
used in the ablative, e. g. Barh. 285, 2. (1 ilV) wt'^Q^l sma/^
in number-, 268, 15; 229, 13.".
A. 218. 6. 1. After "Rem. ", add: " As ablative, it is also
often used to denote a definite time, e. g. Barh. 314, 10. \\iQ^
^\oj on each day.'\
A. 218. 9. 10. After " 12", add: "; Ephr. I. 318, D. 9.
10.".
A. 218. 22. 5. After " together ", add :", where usually the
personal object of the accusative follows the dative.''\
A. 218. 23. 9. After "32", add: "; yet sometimes the posi-
tion of the accusative is reversed, e. g. Ephr. I. 84, E. 2.
7 , y 7 f^ -ts
w>.\Sd^ wiASof Aaoirfj ^Aa/ i 7i(2?;e ^i>en my servant to my
spouse; but if \X\e accusative is the object, it usually stands
after the dative, e. ^.Acts III. 3. .O^Ajj ]Ao>] Cl^ ^/^ai
^Aey ^^^^ ^^ ^^^'^ alms. ".
A. 218. 24. 1. After "Eem.", add: "Also the dative more
frequently stands for the genitive in nouns indicating rcore
P *. 7 7
nearly fixed time, Assem. I. 2. ]ZqqLSq^ ]AiaO m ^^r
?/car of the reign; Barh. 13, 10. , where the genitive with j
merely precedes ; Barh. 13,9. So in respect to the names
of the months, 2 is placed before the day of the month.".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 435
A. 218. 26. 10. Before "usually", add: '': e. g. Ephr. J.
318. E. 4.".
A. 219. 7. 2. After " ; a ) ", add : " , in respect to fized
places, a) adode at a place (where ?), e. g. Acts V. 2^.
C1m.Q| U |;^Q0| A.*^ .QJf they found them not in the
prison; V. 25; i3).". ^
A. 219. 18. 11. After "deep", add: ''Acta Mart. II. 360
13. 14;".
A. 219. 25. 9. After "20", add: " In fixed measures *r5 is
frequently used, e. g. Ephr. I. 122, C. 4. D. 8. Also fixed
geographical degrees are expressed by the accusative, e. g.
7 P P7
Ephr. I. 123. B. 3. ^.iJioZo 1|Sd UcuSo 180.".
A. 220. 2. 2. After "6", add: "^c^sl. 16; E2^hr. I. 19. 0.
6; d) infinitive forms, e. g. Barh. 443, 12; Ephr. I. 194, D.
1; D. 4, 39, D. 7.9. 0. 8.".
A. 221. 8. 6. After " 21 ", add : " Ephr. III. 591, D. 2; ".
A. 221. 18. 4. After "Moses", ^M: ''Ephr. III. 590. E-
5. 6; I. 131. D. 4 f.; II. 223, C. 7. 8; I. 554, D. 7. 8.".
A. 221. 16. 1. After "Lord", add: "Less often does it
occur with the marking of the cases.".
A. 221. 19. 8. .After "other", add: " ; Barh. 57, 11; 38,
6; 541, 11.".
A. 222. 9. 5. After " v. E. ", add : " Ephr. IL 227, D. 8.
7 P P 7
. . 1 1 f^; Ujl>j V*-^rO ^^ an army which was greater than
the first', E. 1; L 319, C. 5. 6. E. 5 f. ; IL 239, D. 1. 2; L
40. A. 2. Less frequently the object compared occurs with
_Ld before the subject ; ".
A. 222. 10. II. After "man", add: " ; Barh. 359, 2. 3.".
A. 222. 11. 7. After "very", add: " *^^CD much.'\
A. 222. 15. 5. After "12", add: "; i?arA. 373, 9 ; 397,7;
so without _k), e. g. Barh. 536, 7; 129, 12; particularly in
^ I 7 I 7
adverbial comparison, e. g. Matt. VI. 30. '^L^ t .i fin
ttoAaoj iiaXXov.''\ ^
A. 222.' 18. 5. After "younger", add: "also Barh. 325, 12.
13; Ephr. I. 80. B. 5; 63. B. 2;".
436 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 222. 23. 13. After "forgiven", add: "; sometimes ^
is used with j following, not entirely as a mark of the geni-
tive^ e. g. Assem. 11. 122, 6. 1q..j ^k) OIJOOJ 50j Jns be-
havior is held up as ( compared w^ith ) that of the many
even with the insertion of a pronoun following, e. g. Barh*
84, 3. .-aOlQrilj a01 _Ld \^Lk more, than that of his
father 'j but also in the signification, than that, e. g. Assem.
7 fy t\
I. 239, 3. 4. ^CQJj ^Ld more, than that he could receive ;
still this > is sometimes also pleonastic, viz. before the
prepositions *Q and ^ , e. g. Barh. 489, 3. 4. v. E ;
Matt. X. 37. wi.lj ^ JaZu more than me \ John III. 19.
JaA^ paiQl^> ^Sd more than the light ; also before particles,
h 7 7 * 17
e. g. Rom. XIII. 11. ^iSo^cn ^Dj ^^ 'f^b^* more than when
we believed,''\
A. 222. 28. 6. After "3", add: "Sometimes o} ^instead of
^Sd , stands before the object compared, with the adjective
X 7 7 X p 7
or verb preceding, e. g. Barh. 582, 13. (jLki Of %a.^ >n<^
I 7 p 7
JaAa "IZqLd cfm^/i w to me dearer than life', Matt. XIX. 24;
II. Pet. II. 21.".
A. 223. 4. 7. After "Apostles", add : ".455m. I. 261, 2. 3,
noun
]j^.> (^AV> the most excellent 7nan ( even with the
following in the singular); ".
A. 223. 6. 8. After "Judah", add: "^55ew?. I. 306, 17. 18;
even merely with *Q before the suffix, e. g. Barh. 506, 4.
tOCTLD (OOI *1DJJ loho luas the oldest among them; ^\
A. 223. 13. 13. After "evils", add: ";orby ^'i , e. g.
7 -X P 7 -X
Barh. 513, 1. ^Ad) "Joj the greatest of us; or with ^^..arD,
e. g. Assem. I. 55, 1. Am^^O ^OS ^Ae holiest of all-, ".
A. 223. 19. 2. After "king", add: " Ephr. III. 586, 0. 3;
569, F. 1 ; 570, A. 8; 11. 339, B. 6; 316, A. 8; by .adding a
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 437
Hynonymous adjective, e. g. Bark. 6, 4. ]<^'">ri ISo^j^)
].i^iD the wisest king. . Here also belong the duplication of
words by synomyms of the same root, e. g. Assem.. III. P.
7 7 7 9 1.
I. 333, 4. 5. IAojqSdo 1A:Li*^ the greatest happiness-^ or
words of a difierent root, especially of adverbial formations,
I P I f 7 7
e g. Barh. 429, 5. ZuUAoo ^^.^t^ very quick \ 481, 9;
A. 223. 21. 3. After ''3", add: " ; by ^'' or ^j fol-
17 e*7 7
lowing, e. g. Barh. 454, 3 ; by w-^ JKey. XXI. 1 1. ]/ ;r>>V>
->~^ ]Sm ihe most costly stone ; by Ito and the 7w?w?i fol-
lowing, e. g. ^Coi^QD IL^ the highest praise (literally, full
of praise ) . ".
A. 223. 26. 10. After "mountains", add: ";by (Ij = iz/ no
. means, with an adjective following, e. g. i^/zr^. 606. JQII
P> ^y wo means small, i. e. really 2;e;y great. Also belong
here a figurative manner of expression, e. g. ^Xi^iO A^ilo
PP..I7P7
or fAl^rSO) |A.2i^Sd tJie queen, i. e. the most important fer son
of the city, e. g. Assem. I. 531, 4. Sometimes we find a cir-
I 7 * I ?
cnmlocution, e. g. a-i^CO ^^ JaAj ?7zore ^/iw mvch, i. e.
1*7^17 17 *
very much, or ^^Lo *^^C0 --iv^ ^^ much and {farther )
move than muchy.
A. 224. 10. 9. After '' Burh:\ add: "20.4;".
A. 224. 16. 6. After "cities", add: "; sometimes, in the
larger numbers, the thousands precede the object numbered,
-" P 7 7 7
in the emph. St., e. g. Assem. III. P. 1. 421. [m-^ XxJZl^.
^A*( 60.000 Aorsmew; Barh. 189, 14. 15. (AmSU |*f^^
^^ 20.000 sow/5; 405, 1; 341, 11; 134, \\.'\
29
43S ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 224. 26. 5. After "11", add: ''\Ephr. II. 233. C. 7.
i-n '^7 P I.. 7
^l*Zo ^ZtiDO *SLiv ^aV^Oi 1290(?a2/5; D. 8. 9. With
a sw^a; attached, they become more closely connected with
(drawback towards) the preceding noun^ e. g. ^c^s I. 24;
.OOUjZ ^^ai o/' botk these \ Ephr. III. 570, B. 3. 4 ; 571,
A. 5. 6 ; 572, E. 5. 6 ( cf. ^ 46. 2. 6. Kem. ) ".
A. 225. 2. 11. After "11", add: "Rem. The ordinal num
bers, fir St ^ second^ etc., following each other, are expressed
either by a numeral a^ec^we connected with O, or without
the same, e. g. Barh. 240, 12-14. 16. 17 ; or so that the series
r
begins with V-^r^ and the ordinals are exchanged for the
cardinals with > preceding, e. g. Barh. 5, 3-5 ; or so that for
7 P OX 1
fi^rst, pA* m., Ir>*/.; and for second^ Wt*A ^2-, |A;-js*| /., are
P X 7
used, e. g. 481, 15; or finally, so that Pr**| after ^m is used
in all the following ordinals, e. g. Barh. 444, 14-16.".
A. 225. 19. 5. After "third", add: ''Ephr. I. 236, D. 1. 2.
J27, A. 2; E. I. F. 3;".
225. 21. 2. After "86, 11", add: "; Ephr 11. 221. Rem.
7. V. E.".
Ai 225. 22. 1. After " Rem.", add : " In designating years
7 7 OP
days and hours^ the nouns \L\A |LdQa , |Al stand before,
the cardinals in the emphatic st. with j following ; or with-
out J in the constr. St., with *0 preceding, e. g. |aSQ>j
^QjJO; or in the accusalive without *a, e. g. Birh. 515,
7 -X
11. |fiSD>A ^Qj in the fifth day. Nor do the ordinals
always take the formative letter > after the emphat. St., e. g.,
n -n 7 7 7
Bark. 35, 13. |YCQ,lftSnj jAlATD z?2^/ie \bthyear\ but always
7
before numbers expressed by letters, e. g. 454, 1. IjZ ]AlaO
in the Q07 fh year; 138, 11. 12. CTUJd) AjaO mif/ielll5/A
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 439
year\ sometimes without any letter to mark the year, e. g.
Bark. 311, 4. V. E. ^OOl OlSiDZ| -Aoi tldi occurred in
the year \Ub:\
A. 226. 3. 7. -After " 30 ", add : '' Ephr. II. 223. C. 2; ".
A. 226. 6. 12. After ''week", add: " Here wo find J>OcLa
with the numeral added and |*^^*^ following, e. g. Barh-
7 f ^
566, 7. 8. 12. ]nm!D p>* VOa>.Q on the first dai/ of the week;
7 9 Q *-
583, 8 ; without l^lmiD , e. g. 518, 3. "|AiZ ^a>^ on the
*<.
third day [of the week) \ with ^Ql^ omitted.".
A. 226.^ 8. 8. After "12, v. E.", add : " ; Ephr. I. 236. D.
2. The days of the week are more nearly fixed by the days
of the month, thus the day of the week is more nearly marked
X
by ^Qli.O , and Q is omitted before the number of the
X *s 9
day_of the month, e. g. Barh. 50, 9. ^a^-O ^.^wl #01.00
9 or 9 7
|A ]jQa.lD PkO^I on the fourth day of the week ( Wednes-
day) the Qth of Sanitary \ 566, 10. 11; or the day of the
month stands before the day of the week without ^GLi and
is thus more precisely marked, e. g. Asse^n. I. 426, 14. 15. OlO
9 9 7 ox r Ti 9 7 7 -X
lAlAo ^rQjiJ ^ja'HLQ ]oaO H^ ^Qa on the 3d of
April on the first day of the iueek\ or |*^^*^ is wanting, e. g
0" 9 9 9 7 %.
Barh. 562, 5. v. E. \jr^ ^::^\^ "U^^^ ]flV)i ^O*^ on
the fifth day of the iveek on the eighth day of August ; some-
times also ^Gu falls away both in the day of the month
9 7 7 p
and of the week, e. g. Barh. 304, 10. 11. ilOj| 01.^^5
I i>^ 9 9 f^ 9 7 \^
^ji p) iQlOO |;IS11 I'D AS on the morning of the fourth
7
day of the week on the \Qth of December ; even without l*"^**^
^ 10 9 9 7 9 X.
ill Assem. II. 266, 20. IQ^isAo ^aA^Z |Ab^Zj UHq ou
440 ' ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
the night of the third day of the week on the 30^/i of July,
Also the day of the week and that of the month are transposed,
e. g. Barh. 548, 15. 16; 547, 3 ( cf. Agrell App. II. p.
7 fi: ) .''.
A. 226. 1 1. 7. After <^e. g.", add: " Ephr. L 9. B. 2; ".
A. 226. 17. 12. After " 8 '\ add: .>/ir. III. 575, C. 6 ; ".
A. 226. 23. 11. After "38", add: '' Ephr. I 85, D. 1;".
A. 226. 27. 6. After "24", add: '' Ephr. I. 240, A. 3;
Assein. I. 111.4;".
A. 227. 3. 7. After " time ", add : " ; or in Zu| , e. g. A*]AAZ
for the third tirn.e.^\
A- 227. 4. 1. Before "3. Fractions", add: ''Rem. The
Iff ? I. f fi ns IP I
following, ZutOpO, AaU^jZ, Lk\Lj^L first, second, etc.,
are a formative series of numeral adverbs ; also feminines of
or * 7 or
cardinals with > preceding, e. g. Ir**?, ^^'^?) A^Zj etc.;
or 1 t> t> I ' ? r y -
also lAin^l, ]A*r>*1, IA^AjlIZ, or Aa.SdP, ^, ^O, or
ip7 i\ r -^
finally AalLD^O, ^)Ao, ^-tr-^OI united by the copula^.
A- 227. 6. 9. After " VII. 2 ", add : " Barh. 256; 417, 8 ; ".
A. 227. 8. 8. After "]r^", add: ''\Ephr. I. 236 , F. I;
245, D. 7. IaSDa* ^ ^ .1- . By *.Aa and IZq-^Ls)
P -x r
(half), is I- expressed, e. g. Ephr. II. 222, D. 5. ^lon*
A. 227. 9. I. Before "79", add: ''Rem. Among the un-
determined numeral relations, are o] or, e. g. Matt. XVIII
r ti 7
20. (A^Z o| ^>Z tivo or three; without o), e. g. Barh.
h r y y
603,15. 16. ..ak^A* Moil /o?/r or/ye; 217, 15.".
A. 227. 26. 2 and 6. After " The ", add : " adjective or ",
also after "first", add: " ixs epithetic, q. ^. Matt. XIII. 17.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 441
{kiCiJ H^Mr^O many prophets \ Bark. IGO, 5. v. E. U-^
|A'1.^QD many words \ ".
A. 228. 8. 1. After " teacher ", add: "sometimes j is found
as epithetic before the adjective^ e. g. Luke XI. 25 ; or, instead
of ?, p is used, e. g. ikZar/fc. XII. 3; Luke XX. 10, 11, and
stands 'm the absolute state in connection with a preceding
Tioun in the enipkatic state. This is especially true in respect;
\ I X f
to the participk, e. g. Acts Vll. 56. ^>mA2) ,.0 [iA^Qs the
17 7 7
opened heaven ; i^arA. 83. 1 0. ;^;0) IkJQa i/^e co/t/ day ; j1c/
XXVII. 41; Barh. 286. ISoij lAoOjl to a high place ; but
when with a j!?ar^. thus marked, a second (part. ) is united,
5 falls away in connection with the latter, e. g. Luke II. 12;
p
T'lssewi. II. 303, 23. fr-^^O ]p? Xj^bSo a short and lim-
ited timey.
A. ,228. 19. 4. xifter "adjective", add: "; in the absolute
stated,
A. 229. 18. 6. After "evil", add: ''It should still be
especially remarked, that when the masculine adjective occurs
with or without (OOl in the absolute state and without j pre-
ceding, it is impersonal, e. g. I Cor. XI. 13. IZAjy ]|u is it
^ ^ p
becoming for a woman \ Acts XIX. 36. tO.'i\ Uo ye must,
X . p > p
with 001 following, e. g. ilia^^. XVIII. 8. 9. yj^ 001 *i4
^^ w ^ei^er for thee; without 001 , e. g. Matt. XV. 26.
7 -n I 7 p
*^CQSd\ ^^a ]J it is not proper to take ; less frequently is
the feminine used and generally in connection with the jtwo-
P 7 1 9 . .
noun, e. g. 1 Cor. VII. 26. |;..2is l?01? that this is good\
Acts XII. 9. ^01 Zooi \\^\l that this is true; Luke
442 ADDITIONS AND CCRRECTIONS.
XVIII. 25. a01 ]1a.^? iJi^(^^ it may be easier -^ also withoul
i\\Q pronoun, e. g. Tim.YL 7. l^Jr-^O a?td it is certain \ JBarh-
531, 8. MvSo it is possible] and even the negative phrase
(> r^ ]j appears, in consequence of which, we also find ZoGI.
But the /em. adjective stands in the emphatic st.^ when the
wei^^er as subject or object is indefinite, e.g. Ro7n. VII. 13,
13. lA^^^*^^ dya'^Ov, v. 21 ; i?a?7i. 504, 14. ]Aaa.Q ^
|Ao4 {to distinguish) the good from the bad. Also the jt?/wr.
p.. p
fern, is found in the absolute St., e. g. .T^'^. III. 8. ^^4?
IS > i\
^jlJ| ^^iiNoi = ravra kariv ra KaXd\ John I. 50; Kom.
p.. ly p pP P
VIII. 38. f rAl> l]o ^SQ^r^? ]]o = oi;re evEorura ovre
fiEXXovra ( cf. Agrell. Append. )'.
A. 230. 10. 6. After "invalids", add: "^c^s III. 9;"
A. 230. 11. 7. After "312,7", add; ''Acta Mart. II. 394,
21;".
A. 230. 23. 7. After " 23 ", add : " Also the feminine col
lective names may be united with iheplur. masc. of the ve7'b^
7 I P P ^ ^
e. g. Barh. 238, 6. 0001 ^AwJ IjQ.. ^^ the great
multitude (of your horses) ascended': 5 \0y 17. 18; 533, 13.".
A. 230. 27. 10. After "8", add: " ; also the plur. form
stands in an inverted position with i\\Q>singular verb, e. g.
..17 PPP P PP ..I?
Ephr. I. 18. A. 5. ^jlQ> IAj^V^ Zooi 13 ^.y ^^y birds
raise the?nselves (fly) inflocks.''\
A. 231. 6. 1. After " 12 ", add : '' Ephr.l. 10. C. 8;".
A. 231. 13. 1. After "opened", add: '' Ejihr. II. 20. D.
I ; even".
A. 231. 20. 12. After "porches", add: ''Ephr. I. 40. B.
ADDITIONS AND COHnECTIONS. 443
Aa 231. 25. 8. After "9", add: " relating to an object in tho
neuter gender, e. g. Barh. 186, 16. 17. \^} O0L*Z| a
denarius was given \ even the fenn. nonn with the masc. sing.,
e. g. i?ar/j. 118, 11. Olbk wiOloAalj ]ZqJ-m the tent which
belonged to him ; ".
A. 231. 28. 3. After "walls", add : '' Ephr. II. 2. B. 6. 7;
I. 122. F. 4 ; ".
A. 232. 8. g. After " writing ", omit the period and add :
" (no one, of course, will make the transcriber responsible )".
A. 232. 14. 6. After "r*^, add: " hL ^ ;\ *
A. 232. 16. 5. After " country \, add: '' Ephr. Ill, 571,
A. 8 ; ".
A. 232. 24. 8. After " Egypt ", add : " Ephr. II. 464.
C. 3;".
A. 233. 6. 2. After " 10 ", add : " ; and vice versa, e. g.
Barh. 288, 7. ]Aaa.O ^\Sil\ IAajlQ a^j. it was custom-
ary to return evil for evil.^\
A. 233. 10. 9. After "mankind", add: " ^c^5 II. 41;",
A. 233. 17. 7. After " 16", add: " ; Ephr. I. 194, B. 1.".
A. 234. 21. 3. After " eyes ", add : " ; Ephr. II. 232,
D. 2.".
A. 234. 24. 8. After "eggs", add: " ( cf. Ephr. I. 18,
A. 5).".
*A. 235. 13. 4. After " granted", add: "; perhaps however,
|1S2aJ should not here be rendered, Jie would grant ox fulfil,
which mode of reading is found in the parallel passage in
Assem. III. P. 11. 126, 11. 12.".
A. 235. 22. 6. After "A", add: "40, A. 6; 318, F. 3;".
A. 236. 1. 2. After "230. D ", add: ''Acta Mart. 11. 349,
T^ 1^ .
25. OlAxkO oik:] 0C71 lAAjQSQL!iD ^Q he was baptized,
he and his mother and his sister ; ".
A. 236. 2. 8. After 'invited", add: ''Ephr. II. 223, B. 8,
C. 1 ; ".
A. 236. 8. 5. After "4", add: " Ei^hr. I. 311, D. 4 ; ".
444 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
A. 236. 25. 3. After " sorrow ", add : " Eiohr. III. 593, B.
6f.;".
A. 236. 28. 11. After "nature", add: "When several sub.
7
jects are in the 2d. person with Aj] preceding, the second
plur. follows, e. g. Ephr. 11. 211, D. 6. 7. .oAaZu] I'p^^ij^
^jlMIO Aj| thou and thy wife have {ye have) drunk laine.
Yet one of the subjects, (the most important one ) is found
in the preceding pronoun of the first person, the verb follow-
ing the same rule (of. Michaelis Chrest. 28, 7. 9)".
A. 237. 7. 9. After "hair", add: ''Actsl. 12;".
A. 237. 11. 5. After "22", add: "; Ephr. 11. 318, E. 3;
327, A. 8; I. 119, E. 7; 126, E. 1; 131, C. 7; 40, D. 6.".
A. 237. 17. 9. After " preached ", add : " An ellipsis is found
in Syriac like that found in Hebrew in Jp^ , e. g. Ephr. I.
P 7 9 7 7
320, C. 2. 3. looijj ]|iQl,OaO and 17 00 gold coins ; D. 8.
P * I 7 -n
laCQSj ^>\n^ 70 silver shekels. So the noun -i<e-^2) is
ti r
wanting, e. g. Barh. 2G, 4. v. E. ^^A!^ in two parts ;
I -n 7
fully expressed, e. g. 541, 10. ^-kL^La ^a)Aj^; 21. 8. Upon
yjOi, cf. 78. B. Rem.".
7
A- 237. 23. 3. After "XXX. 1., add: " >ain an army
P 7
( 11 i t ) to collect together-^ Barh. 107, 5. 6.; so also
* 7
^01)1; 142, 5;".
A, 237. 24. 3. After" 12," add: "; Ephr. I. 169, C. 5.".
A. 237. 24. 8. After "39, 11. ", add: ''Ephr. I. 89, E. 1.
2.4;".
T, 7
A. 237. 25. 14. After "19.", add: " :>al to die, literally,
7
to finish ( \l^ ), e. g. Barh. 252, 7;".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. ' 445
A. 238. 17. 5. After "sword", add: ";/?/ir. II. 100, B; I.
319, E. 8; 12, A. 7.".
A. 240. 11. 6 After "out", add: '' Ephr. 222, A. 1;".
A. 240. 12. 6. After "again ", add : " Ejohr. 1. 295, F. 5. 6;*\
A. 240. 14. 4. After "again ", add: '' Ephr. II. 125, B. 6;".
A. 240. 15. 5. After " again ", add : '' Ephr. I 39, E. 6 ;".
A. 240. 17. 10. After "earth", add: '' Ephr. I. 281, D. 6. 7.
Also, Jl2) to turn one's self, is found with a similar signifi-
cation, e. g. Ephr. II. 98, E. 2. .Qj] *t| ]i2) .001^
001 he brought them again into activity ; ".
A. 241. 2. 8. After evil", add : ''Ephr. III. 592, A. 3. 4;".
A. 241. 7. 10. After "III. 8.", add: "; Ephr. II. 100,
A. 4 (with the copula) , e. g. Ephr. I. 82, C. 5. s^a"! ]oot
wftOU ;)0 ^r^J as he had named him before] II. 212, 0. 2. 3;
I. 439, C. 7.8 ; II. 203, B. 5 ; 220, 0. 6 ; also the passive, e. g.
7 7
Ephr. I. 195, D. 2. y)ai;oll 2;i>o]Z)o ASDjoZJj ]A1sd
^/ie word which had before been spoken to Abraham ; II. 221,,
(Rem. 2.) ; e) ^<J\\ to fiow, ^QOlfCD to Jiasten, for quick,
/i^s^y, e. g. jE:/?/ir. III. 569, E. 4. 5. OUk) ^1 ^.^OlJ he
7 7 i> 7
hastened therefrom; Barh. 73, 7. oa;flD|0 r:iOl;CD he cried
out quickly ( exclaimed ) ; also \^\e passive, e. g. -Ejo/^r. I. 24,
7 7 7 7 -R
r. 3. 5;i^0 i^(3\\Lci:i\ he fell quickly from {hastened). Fi-
7
nally ; /) -^'=^"" to suffice, for svfjiciently, is used, e. g. J^pZ'-r.
X 7K-7 X7 7
II. 464, F. 5. .0C7l.i.S;DQlo\ Oi^S QOaO) ]] ?Acy r/eV^
wo^ ez;e?i sufficiently protect themselves ; *0;rD ?o approach, for
7 7 1> 7 7
^ea% a//?2os^ e. g. i?ar/j. 551, 11. .JjAsZj L^^Q he was
446 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
almost confirmed Ephr. I, 169, C. 1.; .|o| to deal basely^
^ -x Ty ?
for base, e. g. Ephr. II. 128, F. 2. .O^^lZj .oA^io] ^e
/iaz^e dealt basely, etc.". '
A. 241. 22. 2. After v. E.", add: ''Ephr. II. 232, A. 1 ;".
A. 242. 2. 6. After " partly etc.". add: "; and Ollo Ijcn
m.j Cl^ (?^/ ^^^y (tf- Ag'rell. Suppl. p. 162), e. g. J^arA.
165, 1. 10. [001 ^1 >> 01^ pCT /it; t7s very much beloved
7 7 -n ,
587, 9 ; -. so very, e. g. ^arA. 232, 6. jAjA] OlLs ]j01 /^e
distinguislied himself so very muclr^ with the jo/wr. following,
7 7 * * #k P P
e. g. jBarA. 122, 13. 0^]Z| 01^ ]jai ^/z^y t^ere pressed
very much; with j following = so i^er?/, ^Aa^, e. g. Barh.
7 .1*'I7 *. pp
411,3. J 0001 ^fo..!^ 01^ I J 01 they were so much, that;
- ^ p p
with the fern., e. g. i?arA. 492, 8. OliikO ]j01 Amj;a 'n^a
they becaine so distinguished. Also the adverb is expressed
by the /em. Ol^ pOl a// this ".
A. 242. 7. 4. After '"degrees", add: "424,11; 571,8.9;
Evhr. I. 379, C. 5 ; ".
A. 242. 9. 2. After "there", add: "; Barh. 574; Assem. III.
P. I. 130, 9 ; c) the Latin adverbial ending atim is expressed
*p ^ ^ p
by the nonn, e. g. Barh. 424, 10. JiSCLm flSQ^j handfid ;
410,5; 334, 11 , etc.".
A. 242. 19. 7. After " this", add: " Ephr. II 9, C. 2; ".
A. 242. 24. 2. After " wish ", add : " Ephr. I. 169, C. 6/. ; II.
5, A. 4/".
A, 243. 7. 4. After "35 ", add : " ; something doubtful con-
firmed by an affirmation, is expressed by ..a-D |iSdj^ , e. g.
Ephr. I. 370, (Jacob of Edessa ) ^^ P rOr^ ^l* ^^^
OP ...
llSO-^ did not Saul somehow know David ? Ephr, III. 593,
D. 1.".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 447
A. 243. 8. 1. Instead of the Rem. ( lines 8 and 9 from top),
add: "Rem. Also .] is employed in the direct questioHy
e. g. Ephr. II. 5. A. 6. tS\ ^^-^ A thou knowest. So also
]y\ ( apa), e. g. Barh. 131, 12. J ]j1 , e.g. Ephr, I. 436,
( note from Jacob of Edessa, 1. 2 ) ; |iSd for ]Sq^ , e. g.
Barh.U^, 10. etc.".
X
A. 243. 22. 15. After "yes ", add : " Yet we also find ^1 in
connection with the affirmative with the repetition mostly of
the thing, e. g. Acts V. 8 ; or without a repetition ( lit. en-
tirely simple), e. g. Matt. XXI. 16;".
A. 243. 26. 13 After "father", add: "or simply ]]> , e.g.
Barh. 370, 13.".
A. 244. 3. 1. After "veri", add: " A double negation,
as in Greek, makes the negation more emphatic, e. g. Barh.
7 7 9
491,9; icn] ]] auj ]] he lias (positively) injured no one \
93, 9 ; 606, 2. The same is true in respect to oL V or ]]
7 9 7 9 7
qL , ]]> , ]V^S> and ]iQ^?) , after verbs signifying to fear,
9 9
correspond with the Latin ne, e. g. Barh. III. JJj (OOl
^{u*j he feared that ; ^jo/ar. I. 80, D. 6 ; also y5>> = w^ ,
that not ; ^ssew. I. 455, 1.".
A. 244. 9. 6. After "imperishable", add: "; Ephr.l. 310,
C. 1. 2; II. 212, D. 8; I. 128, D. 1.".
9 9
A. 244. 14. 3. After " IX. 3.", add : "; in 1k)l "^ on no
9
possible account , %i\ , preceding the latter ]] , strengthens
the negation, e. g. ^iVjr. III. 569, B. 3. 4.".
A. 244. 21. 12. After "19," add: " A^ ^ out from be-
^.. I i\ -^ 9 7
tween something', Acts III. 5. IAaId Zu^ ^ loilL
448 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
XIjuD] Cl^j whom God has raised from the dead ; 2a^
^ from 0716 here; also ^\ ^ , e. g. Ephr. I. 392, B.
4. 5. "^ol* ZqI -Id Ul /^^ came herefrom Saul: I. 84,
A. 8. etc.;". ^^
A. 244. 26. 12. After " walls", add : ''Ephr. I. 81, E. 5. 6;".
A. 244. 28. 1. After "excellence," add: "also by their
( \)Jl1o _Sd ) collocation, e. g. Ephr. I. 6. D. 8. NSaAO
|S>0>| ^sD out over the firmament \^\
A. 245. 2. 2. After "him", add: ''Ephr. II. 318, C. 5.".
A. 245. 8. 3. After " 13 ", add : " Ephr. I. 292, C. 3/. ; III.
595, C. 3. 4 ; also with the copula, e. g. Darh. 270. yJ^O
jA Aa.2 between me and thee ; Aj^ is seldom repeated
with the copula standing between, or with ^ preceding, e. g.
Ephr. I. 13, B. 6. 7.".
A. 245. 10. 3. After "David ", add : " or with the copula
7 7 7 *> 7
united, e. g. Ephr. II. 204, F. 6. lio^O ;>all ^ :>a\s\
from eternity to eternity and until \ I. 237,0. 5/.: 361,
A. 6. 7;".
A. 245. 17. 4. After "66. 6", add: "; Ephr. I. 25, D. 4/."
A. 245. 21. 2. After " 17", add: "Ephr. I. 122, F. 1; 318,
F. 3. 4.".
A. 245. 23. 12. After " 193, 19; ", add : "Ephr. I. 310, D. 8;
also it (ili) serves to designate realization (*0 essentice),
7 ^ 7 7 pix
e. g. Ephr. II. 324, E. 6. ^0^00^ Ojum .^OlOlV;^ ]ju1Lo
y.QJLM Enoch and Elijah lived before their time ( as types) j
or *0 stands before an asseveration, e. g. Barh. 183, 10.
7
|Ol \sD by God ! \ but sometimes it is wanting before an as-
severation ; ".
A. 245. 25. 6. After " to ", add : " until to, about, e. g.
7 7
Ephr. I, 122, D. 8. l]iDA\A\ ^0^^ about 300 {miles)-, or
with liiool = near to, added, e. g. Ephr. I. 122, C. 8.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 440
.! P 7 7 9 7 7 *.
ILld UalL laSnS \^^ llDjanl nearly 6000 miles.
9 9
Also here may be reckoned (as opposite relations) t^ >fAc
-ik what to me and thee ( what have I to do with thee )
Mark VII. 5 j John II. 4 ; Luke IV. 22; ilfai^. XXVII. 19."!
A. 245. 28. 1. After *' 14", add: "and ^Xii sometimes stands
0"7 7
for 0, e. g. jE:7?/ir. I. 13, A. 1. JjlSd ^11 i/i iAe water, or
it = against, e. g. ^^ir. I. 389, B. 5;".
A. 246. 1. 3. After "29", add: "^c^sll. 34. >i1iV).' ^
to my right ( hand ) ; it is synonymous with iD ( =- ])er )
^y viV^wf! q/; e. g. ^;?^r. I. 126, B. 4. aiZoSOxiaM _Ldo
OIJOIQJJ poll ^So by virtue of the splendor of his light and
warmth ; ".
A. 246. 4. 9. After "feet", add: "; it is also used in the
9
formation of the adjective, e. g. Acta Mart, II. 394, 17; |l > 11
]J>0 ]^)o ]]j 'painless and unharmed. It can take no svjf.,
and instead, the separate jorowoww follows, e. g. John XV.
A. 246. 18. 5. After " 4 ", add : " ; or they are not united by
r
and, e. g. ^j^/ir. III. 569, B. 6 ; and even after p and other
antecedent joar^zc/es; e. g. Matt. I. 20, 24; VI. 5, 7 ; XXIV.
22 ; Mark XIV. 72. etc. "
A. 246. 21. 5. After " 19," add: ''Acta. Mart. II. 273,23.
7 P -x '^ P 7
24. -<^^^ ]r^r>B<^ Ol^ ^ClO ^ll lie turned, went, and ar-
rived at the market ; ".
A. 246. 22. 2. After "XV. 6.", add: "in the imperative^
T P * 7
e. g. Acta Mart. II. 293, 3. v. E. ^^*\^ U f ^01
VOOD aWse, im/yt and go upon thy feet. ".
A. 246. 28. 6. After "5, 6,", add: '' Ephr. I. 119, A. 7. 8.
450 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
O before the pret. and fut.^ is often translated by that^ in
order that, e. g. Barh. 321, 3 ; 395, 7; 384, 6. 7.".
A. 247. 2. 15. After "v. E. ", add: " Ephr. I. 184, E.
4-6. V. E ( also ^lo S)] ); ".
A. 247. 3. 10. After " 4, 5.", add : " Ephr. III. 569, F. 6. 7;".
A. 247. 4. 6. After " 13, ", add : " ( also .]o .j ; .*) o?
^1 ; o] \j^a\ ^] ; o] ooul ), ".
A. 247. 5. 13. After "24, ", add: " Ephr, I. 271, A. 1. 2";
7 P 7
A. 247. 6. 7. After "E.", add: "]loani j fco ^1 , e. g.
P 7 7
-4c^s I. 1 1 ; J too] U^Ol, Ephr, II. 210, C. 68;
7 9 7 7 7
^(Jl^y^), Ephr. I. 7, C. 8/ ; ^lo - j U^] , 1.8,
7 p
E. 4 f. Also with the falling away of ]l001 , e. g. Ephr,
II. 3. E. 3 4; 451, B. 4/.;".
T>
A. 247. 7. 6. After " 12. 13,", add: " ; and Bl *)] , e. g.
Ephr. 1, 21, C. 6/. ; ^] ]] | >OuSn U ^oi o;?/?/ but
P ^ 7 "
also-, Ephr. 11, 153, E. 1.2; *a1j jQaAtd q1 , I. 24
9
F. 4/ ; ]] *2)] ]] wei^/ier nor, e. g. ^/^/^r. I. 1 17, A
3 /. ; 127, C. 6 ; t|o .1 t6'7je^^er or, e. g. II Cor, XII. 2
also o] ] , e.g. Barh. 597 ; or o] 1>] ."Ij , e.g. i?a/-^. 441
0777 77 7 7
V of I J I ivhether or not ; ^^V^O ^^1^ soon soot
7
"U^O "tiL hither thither , e. g. Barh. 363, 5. v. E,
7 7 7 7 7 1*
also ^Ollo tjl!i or ^OlLo ^Gli^ ; finally, ]^V>0
* 7
f*^^ //-o/?* here fro})i there, e. g. Barh. 574 ; ^Gl^
> *
^O lajon ^, e. g. i^ey. XXII. 2. etc. ".
A. 247. 21. 8. After " 13 ", add : " Ephr. I. 294, E. 8;".
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 451
A. 247. 29. 8. After " 844", add : " and o>i;/u with el and
elfiTj following.".
A. 248. 12, 13. After " 13, ", add : " j ^01 ^ because, e. g.
i:phr. II. 217, B. 4; j ^Ol ^i^iD because of, e.g. B. 1;
9 7
y *j01 ^OL at the same tinie tluxt^ that, e. g. Ephr, I. 9, F. 6 ;
7
? r-S thereby, that, (frequently in Ephr.), Ephr, 1.85,
D.'3;'\
A. 248. 19. 2. After " 20, % add: " y) j stands after the
mark of case ( = "itJ^ with the j9re/?os27ion preceding ), e. g.
t> 9 7 7
Assem, I. 83, 14. v. E. VJaUr^ according to the {chronology)
of the Greeks ; III. P. I. 527^ 6., etc. ; ".
A. 248. 22. 2. After 221, 2.", add : " Ephr. I. 84, F. 6. 7;
446, D. 8. 9 ; also after |ao to be worthy, e. g. III. 579,
P. 2;".
A. 248. 22. 13. After "7. 8, ", add: ''Ephr. 1. 84, C. 5. 6 ;
11.227. A. 1\ I. 123, C. 3/.;".
A, 248. 26. 5. After " nevertheless ", add : " E-phr. I. 75,
F. 5. ".
A. 249. 8. 13. After " me", add: ''Ephr. II. 20, F. 7.".
A. 249. 17. 12. After **3, 4.", add: "Ephr. II. 481, D.
3. 4. ".
A. 249. 19. 4. After "436.", add: "The following are f?2^^-
P 7
jections formed from verbs ; \L pi. oZ well now ! Barh, 88,
4. ^ao pi. qSdoo up I 599, 1 ; and ]j represents the Heb.
jj^5 (== qiicBso), I Kings XXII. 12.".
A. 249. 31. 4. After "30", add: "Ephr. II. 235, A. 8.".
A. 250. 4. 7. After "27", add: " ^c^s II. 7.".
A. 250. 18. 5. After "4-11.", add: "Ephr. 2. 233, D. 7;
III. 563, E. 4;".
A. 250. 21. 33.- After "17, 19.", add : "Also t\\Qsing. QQ^
P 7 7 ^ >
is found in Ephr. III. 584, D. 4. liZ] OOlj OlTiQ^ the hap-
py place. ".
452 ADDITIONS AND COKIIECTIONS.
A. 250. 24. 1. Instead of "Appendix ", add : " 87.".
A. 251. 5. 1. After "ye.", add: "In a longer period the
finite verb is found at the end of such period, e. g. Ephr. II.
y 9 7
210, D. 5 E. ^. ,ril 1v^m\ afea&t he arranged ; II-
123, A. 1 4; L 446, E. 3. 4; or it is separated from it8
auxiliary verb by several words, e. g. Ephr. II. 21 1, C. 8
7 -i> 7 ^
D. 2. t;nV)N >'}l>2 Xl^ 1 1 if thou art now on the stand
to read\ or the auxiliary follows the^m*^^ verb, e. g. Zi/V^/-.
11. 212, C. 5. 6. ]oai 1^. 13 l^AjjO Ae would not 2^cr-
mit himself to be persuaded ; even so the infinitive with ^
before the verb upon which it is dependent, e. g. Ephr. 1. 83,
p P7 1>I 7P"> ft7*7
D. 3. 4. 2oci V^ACD oi^j ^oinSs ]oaiV^\ ^lyl ^i^fii?
U] iw^, because, to be the husband of two wives loas hateful to
him-, 84, A. 7. 9; I. 2, A. 7.".
A. 251. 9. 2. After " men", add: "they stand between the
relation of genitive and another noun ;".
Ai 251. 9. 11. After " noun^\ add: "of which it should be
remarked that the subject sometimes stands after the verb
v IS
and object, e. g. Acts V. 26. "ISOI .Oj] ^S\^ V^} 'HKy
7X0 NX ^
00CJ1 -.jL^bM) then they feared lest the people should stone
them ; the object stands before the verb, e. g. Acts V. 28.
7 7
.Q2k^2 U ^j]]) that ye should not teach \ Ephr, III. 565,
A. 5. 6 ; the object stands between the auxiliary ^xi^ finite
verb."".
A. 251. 11. 11. After "heaven", add: ''Ads III. 21; V.
ts 9 7 9
41 ; Ephr. II. 232. D. 1. 2. ^onmi? llQl looi ^^Al ^Olj
^Aa^ ^/ze people should endure this ;
c?) The aoJ/'ec^zVe stands before its noun separated by another
7ioun placed betweeUi whose signification is connected wiLli
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 453
9 7 * r
the first noun, e. g. Ephr, II. 227, E. 7. 8. 00>rlQnl^)
1\ I .. 7 7 7 '7
1 1 4 .1 CIO ,>Q1o\i n jt^-^0 and many of Alexander's generals \
or it is separated from its noun by the auxiliary verb, e. g.
/?/ir. I. 309, R 5. 6. '\l\^ )o01 Uru o] ]oai VSOau
7
o|> ^^a^ /^e was either Joshua or another prophet,''\
A. 251. 12. 6. After " particles", add : " concerning which it
should be remarked that the adverb more frequently precedes
the verb. ".
A. 251. 13. 10. After "city", add: " or; e) it is found at
the end of the sentence, e. g. Ephr. I. 126 ; /) in poetry also,
the verb stands between the noun in the genitive and another
7
noun connected, e. g. Ephr. III. 564, B. 3. 4. yji]o
9 7 7 * 9 9 *^ f 7
|Qa>;a) iHl > |Zni\i> OOl as he who held under (cher-
ished) the loveliness of Paradise^ C. 8. 9; 576, F. 8. 9. The
poetical arrangement of words also belongs here, e. g. Ephr^
17 4k 7*. 9 99 7
III. 572, F. 2.3. *Ajao"| JDQ4 ^01072)Qa^ Ik)] ]a^?
a/so o the other hand the external beauty of Paradise cannot
be described. ". ^
88.
General View of Syriac Metre.
1. Since Syriac literature is rich in ecclesiastical poetry, com-
posed in a fixed measure and rhythm, I did not dare to omit
here a general survey of the external form of the same, and
finally, therefore, decided that a brief and clear view of Syriac
metrical forms and laws should be presented. The origin of
this poetry is found in the most ancient Syrian church, at the
time when history mentions the Gnostic Bardesanes, living in
the second half of the second century of the Christian Era
{cf. Aug. Hahn : Bardesanes gnosticus Syrorum primus hymn-
ologus. LipsicB^ 1819), who endeavored to put his Gnostic writ-
ings into poetry, by which, according to the testimony of
Ephrem Syrus (born 307, died 378), he drew the minds of
30
454 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
youth to himself and won them to his views. He was accus-
tomed to have David before him as a model poet, and even to
t> f 7 t p I
write out each one of the 150 Psalms ( iO),lo (Z'^aIoI). Thus he
stood forth as the first hymnologist of the Syrian church. His
poetic talent was transmitted to his son Harmonius, who, in
respect to his writings, walked in the footsteps of his father.
His poems, with the exception of a small fragment of the first,
are lost, and only the ecclesiastical form remains. Then
Ephrem, who decidedly, in every possible manner, opposed the
the long continued Gnostic errors of his time, established a sim-
ilar musical school (to those of Bardesanes and his son) for
young persons of both sexes, and performed so elegantly, while
he retained both the external forms of poetry, that a thankful
age called him the " cithcra of the Holy Ghost." After his
time, history records the names of many distinguished Syrian
poets, though Ephrem still remains the chief authority for
the study of Syriac metre, as almost half of his extensive writ-
ings belong to the department of poetry.
2. The terms applied to the dififerent departments of Syriac
poetry, as far as they are known to us, comprehend various
kinds in respect to form and contents. The more general term
( I'^PiD ) makes it a condition that there should be equality in
verses according to the number of syllables and rhythm, but not
a division into strophes, "which also seems to be indicated by the
more extensive term I A*jbSQlJD> f'^pD, i. e. a discourse on
rhythmical oneasure ( lit. discourses on measures ). On the
contrary, the peculiarity of that kind, which is divided into
strophes, is indicated by |*)^, in respect to which, refer-
ence is made by Ephrem, to the substance, at least, of the rad-
ical idea, and, what he calls poetry, forms, in his estimation, the
basis of philosophical inquiry and investigation, or the basis of
the fundamental laws of refutation and dogmatical unity. Melo-
dy and its laws are generally indisated by UD, which includes
metrical form, extending so far back as to comprehend our
( German ) ecclesiastical intonations and antiphonies answering
to each other only at short intervals. That which is included
under IZuJOtl is, at the same time, comprehended under |J^.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 455
The former term included such a change of song that each
Btrophe, or its closing part, was so marked as to indicate
that it might be repeated in the chorus, by which, indi-
vidual strophes might bo added as a suitable doxoj.
ogy. The psalmodic form and its fundamental idea
were probably indicated by lZy,*V)l , 1jnV>|Vr> and ^r>-*t cor-
responding with the Hebrew terms 'ii'^^r/^ and -ji^ , and in
each case borrowed from them. Also from the import and sig-
P 9 , -A
nification of ]A n Z, it was, uo doubt, mostly used in praise
of martyrs and saints, But what kind of song was understood
by |A \nro (meaning literally, degrees, scales), is doubtful,
though one would suppose, from the signification of the term
indicating it, that this particular species of hymns, with their
accompanying tunes, was arranged in an advancing, ascending
rhythm. Probably this term was merely transferred from the
Hebrew tlib3>?2M as the ground form.
'= r "
3. Rhythmical measure, formed in respect to the quantity
of syllables, is not known in Syriac poetry. Only according to
the number of syllables is metrical succession measured and
limited, and thereby the place of the accent is made known, there-
fore, strophes themselves also move on in even, rhythmical order,
and are only occasionally interrupted by the change of longer
verses {dlicG)/\,a). Thereby a mixed mode was established,
which was also used by Ephrem. Lines of verses generally
contain j^Xz/'e and seven syllables. Bardesanes wrote especially
in the former, and his son, Harmonius,in the latter. In respect
to the former, Ephrem bears witness in the subscription of his
n^^M? 7 k -KPT
poem againstHiiretiker (Uo^ ^5y.Ci)Ql WjA^) T. III. p. 128,
19 y y ? p 9 y T yi
in the words ^jJIJjLd ymsAna okAa ,^r^} ^GlO;.u*>
* ..p y
]1 r> ^^ i. e closed are the 1 7 hymns in the measure of Barde-
mnes. He (Ephrem) therefore called the measure of five sylla-
bles that of Bardesanes, although the Syrians, rightly believ-
ing, rejected the appellation and called it the Balaic measure.
456 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
9 9
after Balaus (\n), a pupil of Ephrem. But as Ephrem
himself preferred to use that kind of verse whose lines had seven
syllables, it might properly be called Ephremic. He also some-
times wrote in a measure of four syllables. Harmonius also
is said to have composed poetry of the same kind, also Jacob
von Sarug, towards the end of the fifth century, and in the
Actis Martyrum^ Tom. II. p. 230 344, we find a more exten-
sive commendatory poem of the same kind from Symeon Styli-
ta. We have only a fragment of poetry, whose measure is six
syllables, from Bardesanes, preserved by Ephrem. The length
of strophes which are employed with considerable uniformity,
seems to have been subjected to no fixed laws, but was left to
the poet, and perhaps made dependent upon the contents and
scope of the thought. Hence we find measures called strophes,
which contain from four to thirteen lines. Cf. Hahn et Sieffert:
Chrestomathia Syriaca sive S, Ephrcemi carmina selecta^ Lip-
sice, 1821. 8.
The original basis of Syriac metre is found in certain gram-
matical rules relating to euphony, indicated by the marks Mar-
hetono and Mehagyono ( 7) ; crasis by Linea Occultans ( 8 );
and the adding or dropping of preceding vowels ( 15) . These
euphonic fundamental laws are only valuable, to any great ex-
tent, in metrical song. Before all other considerations we
should take notice that the accumulation of vowelless conso-
nants does not disturb the euphony, and to aid in preventing
such a disturbance, vowelless initial letters of a word are added
in r>ronunciation to the last syllable of the preceding word when
such word ends with a vowel, by which the ornament of the
word is not destroyed, but the euphony is improved. This
arrangement is observed not only in one and the same verse,
but also when the same relation exists in two verses ( the final
syllable of the first and the initial syllable of the one succeed-
ing, immediately following each other).
The following lines are thus pronounced :
^i^ ^^S2AZ^ \C^ Musche' m thalmedh huV I
. h V) wOlOV'^mN sephrau'sh maydne.
'UfCiL'i V=i> Rdbho' dh ebhroye
. OlialoA >>. l , Vn \Z thdlmdan' I yulphdneh.
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 457
Bnt when this diflSculty of pronunciation by concatenation
cannot be otherwise overcome, either all of the unnecessary
vowels fall away by dropping the supernumerary syllables, or,
on account of a want of completeness in respect to the neces-
sary number of syllables, the metre is perfected by the addition
of vowels for the formation of new syllables, as in case of
y A
Mehagyono ( ]A!^> for *|AL-mj). Therefore, in metrical
song, both of the peculiarities called, in grammatical language,
SyncKresis and Diceresis are valuable.
1. The first occurs, when, by the aid of an auxiliary vowel,
the initial letters of a word form a new syllable, particularly ; a) \
(with or ) in the pronouns #03^ ^ ^^| , \i\ , which, in con-
nection with the part.j are generally pronounced in one syllable,
e.g. tQJ| ^OUIdZ pronounced ih^ m'ih'i-nun-^ verbs ]] , e. g- ;^|
(J J pronounced d^lo-mar-^ so Ulso in the pan. P. of U verbs,
e. g. IJjlLdIj pronounced d" miro. This is also the case with
the prosthetic \ taking , e.g. - \^/] V^^i pronounced
7f bhath-mol, and, in words translated from the Greek, which,
with 2 initial, soften the pronunciation, from the fact that 1 with
precedes, e. g. ]V)i nm] = Gxrjua pronounced sk'imo,
P 7
There are also examples in which ] is a radical letter as VmJ ,
P 7 p
6. g. V] looi pronounced Jf vo-hho. So also; b) \n words of
three syllables, the vowel standing over the first radical letter
is dropped, when the middle syllable is pronounced with a long
immutable vowel ( Q , a. , and a. ). In this case, the form of
the word continues to be easily recognized, and the vowel,
p . r
which is dropped, is readily perceived, e.g. |Zqo> read r^bhutho;
P I 7 7
t^' *>' pxono\ineedhlfk\mo\ \\y\^ pronounced ^^/i^/o/^/^o,
458 ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS.
etc. The same is also true with vowels over auxiliary conso-
nants which did not originally belong to the radical word, e. g.
Uonnm pronounced 5** /cubhlo ; |A-iA>Z pronounced th^ ritko.
Finally, there is also a similar rejection of those vowels, which
the preforraatives or prefixes of the verb, generally take, e. g.
y> 7 p r -K r *>. r
]pj \*r^^3 i^Yonounced shabhro^n-lrez; >0^> OlV) pronounced
I r p 7
manu'dh-nHsur ; .^LiAdj ]ljk\ lironounced aino^ d/i-kUhibh.
2. In the middle of a word vowels are omitted in pronuncia-
7 7 f
tion as follows : In the verb, in Ethpa,, e. g. *.fc-^j2)Z| pro-
nounced eth'pHag\ in the noun especially, of the middle sylla-
P 7 X p ^ P 7
ble, e. g. (AklxXSD pronounced si??i*i/io; fZo 01-^ pronounced
ai^ hutho.
3. Vowels, at the end of a syllable, fall away; a ) in the verb,
when the grammatical form, notwithstanding the falling away,
remains suflSciently recognizable in pronunciation, as in Pa. ,
T T
e. g. 2l:^ read al" ph ; especially in the part. act. Pe., e. g.
7 7 P
Aj] ^^flO pronounced soc/^V-a^/i ; and in the -part. pass. Pe.,
9 7 P 7
e. g. Ir^^*^ pronounced /easy'; \.kSih pronounced raphy';
p X
|Aa\.t read g"" I'iih ] b) in the noun, of the emohat. state,
P 7 P I
0, g. Vn^P read phagr^ ; ]m*n read bish'' .
There is no common law for the occurrence of sijnoRresis.
It only appears when the number of syllables in the metre is
too great and the connecting word admits of contraction.
So secondly in dimresis, by which an inadequate number of
syllables may be compensated when there are vowelless conso-
nants which make possible an increase in the number of sylla-
ADDITIONS AND CORRECTIONS. 459
bles, Mehagyono properly comes Id, especially when synonymous
forms appear with the vowels added, e. g. ]li\ and ]fci'\ ,
or when the nature of consonants allows such a vowel e. g. ^
in .001 iSs , in which case it may be read t001>\s . It is
otherwise usually with the auxiliary vowel ( sheva mobile) ;
and not only in the middle, but also at the beginning of a word,
e. g. nn^ read sh^bhak\ \^Oi:nm read sh'muil.
The rhythmical termination of verses ( bfioioTeXevra ) imme-
diately following each other, is more dependent npon the for-
mation of the words and thoughts, than upon a special peculi-
arity of Syriac poetry. "
V
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.
JUN !? 1S43
^S'^JAN 4 19S6 5.
:Z
E
APn G 1 944
iiJG15'RR-5PM
iKfnrnrcf
.' tCi, /
h^^->i-^
1 -n
J '; ,
^^
MS^ii
RECEIVED
LOAN DEPT
woai
496SJtT
RECEIVED
SEP 2 -'66 -3 PM
LOAN P CP T.
MAY 8196763
IN STACKS
2 j b/ "4 PW
R
m
MAY^B 1961
LD 21-100r/i-7,'33
.jf.i'u^BB
:504O
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY